JP2022040282A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve a degree of freedom in designing a game machine.

SOLUTION: A prescribed reference value is set in advance as a value within a prescribed range, and conversion processing is performed to convert the reference value thus set to a discriminated value within a specific range larger than the prescribed range. Whether the discriminated value converted by the conversion processing is a specific discriminated value is discriminated, and on the basis of being discriminated as the specific discriminated value, a privilege game advantageous to a player is performed. Further, whether the reference value is a specific reference value is discriminated, and if a result of the discrimination is discriminated as not to be the specific reference value, the conversion processing is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the discrimination is discriminated as the specific reference value, special processing different from the discrimination by discrimination means is performed on the basis of the specific reference value.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Then, in order to complicate the lottery probability, there is a gaming machine in which the capacity of the value used for the winning / losing lottery is increased.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-94331

In such a gaming machine, various games can be executed by complicating the lottery probability of the winning / failing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, in order to set the value used for the lottery. Since the data capacity increases, there is a problem that the data capacity of the gaming machine is squeezed and the data capacity used for other purposes is limited. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to improve the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine by reducing the data capacity of the values used for the lottery while enabling various games to be executed.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range. , It is advantageous to the player when the discriminant means for discriminating whether the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is a specific discriminant value and when the discriminating means determines that the discriminant value is the specific discriminant value. It has a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege, and when it is determined that the reference value is a specific reference value, a special process different from the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the specific reference value. It has a special processing execution means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the discrimination means executes the discrimination until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is executed by the special processing execution means. It is established when it is done.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 has a first state in which the discrimination value is easily determined to be a specific discrimination value by the discrimination means in the gaming machine according to claim 2, and the discrimination value is higher than the first state. Has a state setting means capable of setting a second state in which it is difficult to determine that is a specific determination value, and the special process executing means is a case where the first state is set by the state setting means. It is more difficult to execute the special process than when the second state is set.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the reference value setting means sets a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value. The conversion means has the first conversion process of converting the first information indicated by the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits into the first conversion information corresponding to the first information, and the predetermined conversion process. The second conversion process for converting the second information indicated by the number of bits other than the specific number of bits into the second conversion information corresponding to the second information, the first conversion information, and the above. The third conversion process of calculating the discriminant value based on the first conversion information is executed, and the discriminant value converted by the conversion means has a number of bits larger than the predetermined number of bits. It is shown.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range, and the conversion means thereof. It is possible to grant a discriminant means for discriminating whether the converted discriminant value is a specific discriminant value and a privilege advantageous to the player when the discriminant means determines that the discriminant value is the specific discriminant value. A special processing execution means that has a privilege granting means and, when the reference value is determined to be a specific reference value, executes a special process different from the determination by the determination means based on the specific reference value. It has.

Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination means executes the determination until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special processing execution means is executed.

Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first state in which the discriminant value is easily discriminated as a specific discriminant value by the discriminating means, and a second state in which the discriminant value is more difficult to discriminate as a specific discriminant value than the first state. The special process executing means has the state setting means capable of setting the above, and the special processing executing means is said to be special when the first state is set by the state setting means than when the second state is set. It is difficult to execute the process.

Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the reference value setting means sets a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value, and the conversion means is indicated by a specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits. The first conversion process for converting the first information into the first conversion information corresponding to the first information, and the second information indicated by the number of bits other than the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits are obtained. The second conversion process of converting to the second conversion information corresponding to the second information, and the third conversion process of calculating the discrimination value based on the first conversion information and the first conversion information are executed. The discriminant value converted by the conversion means is represented by a number of bits larger than the predetermined number of bits.

Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which schematically shows the flow of the ball to the 2nd entrance. It is an exploded perspective view of the V winning apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb of the V winning device, (b) is a front sectional view of the V winning device as viewed from the front, and (c) is a top view of the V winning device. (A) is a rear view showing the ball flow of the special discharge flow path in the V winning device, and (b) is a rear view showing the ball flow of the normal discharge flow path in the V winning device. (A) is a schematic view of a state in which the opening / closing door of the V winning device is closed, and (b) is a plan view of the state in which the V winning opening of the V winning device is open. It is a schematic diagram seen. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the right-handed game is performed in the normal state in the first embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot in the normal state in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content in the probabilistic state in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content in the case of performing the right-handed game during the probabilistic change in the first embodiment. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state in the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latency table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the notification lottery process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the jackpot in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the jackpot end screen 1 in the second embodiment. .. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the jackpot end screen 2 in the second embodiment, and (b) is the display content of the full power mode (in latency) display screen 1 in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the full power mode (during latent) display screen 2 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a revival mode (during time saving) display screen in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of 1. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the resurrection display screen in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the resurrection failure display screen in the second embodiment. Is. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the small hit random number 2 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection 2 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for normal use schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for latent accuracy schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving giving table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the reserved ball number processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bit configuration of the pre-conversion data, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the multiplier part conversion data, and (c) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mantissa conversion data. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a 2-byte conversion example of 1-byte data, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a random number 3 table per first. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the conversion lottery determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view lower right region of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 to 7 are schematic views schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the vehicle to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. It is configured by assembling a ball opening 63, a first ball opening 64, a second ball opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b depend on whether the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (winning) or the second entry opening 640 (winning). It is configured to be used properly. Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the first entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the second entry opening 640. In the case of (winning), the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate. That is, the first symbol display device 37a is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, and is the first symbol display. The device 37b is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (probability change state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is, depending on the lighting state, or the first symbol fluctuates. Whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol corresponds to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player or is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the symbol is off is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various gaming states are notified by a combination of emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is performed when a ball is entered (winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game that is in a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the ball is opened to the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650, and the ball is placed in each winning opening. By winning a prize, a game in which many prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time is executed. During this jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and then the opening period (for example, 1 second) of the opening period (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, or the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65) is executed. , A period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), a round game period in which an open state is set, and after the end of one round game period, the following A predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the round game is started, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The ending period in which is set and the jackpot game period consisting of are set.

In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, so that the ball is set at the timing when each winning opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in any direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but as the type of jackpot to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is completed, the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 11 rounds. A 10R normal jackpot is prepared in which a low probability state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot ends in (effectively 10 rounds).

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result is not the above-mentioned jackpot, the privilege given to the player is less than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Benefits to make) Small hits are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is not only indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type are shown.

In the present embodiment, any one of "normal state", "latent probability state", and "probability change state" is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 14). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/160), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (231/233) (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: called low probability state), and in the latent state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to low probability (231/233). In the game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the normal symbol hits. It is a gaming state in which the probability is set to a high probability (232/233) (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state and a normal symbol: a high probability state).

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set when the jackpot is won is set. It is configured so that the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the game. As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol, the player can be made to play the game while being aware of the set game state.

Here, the "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot game in which the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds (a jackpot game in which the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is opened for 10 rounds), and then the game shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. It is a big hit that can be done, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit game, the probability change state is set as the game state after the big hit game, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit game. When set, the latent probability state is set as the game state after the big hit game. In addition, in the case of winning the "10R probability variation jackpot", the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends is variably set according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won, as described above.

"11R normal jackpot" means a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 11 rounds (actually 10 rounds) (variable winning device (second attacker) 65 is opened for 10 rounds, and V winning device (first attacker) 650 is 1 It is a big hit that shifts to the normal state of the special symbol after the big hit game that opens the short for the round.

Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot depends on whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (special discharge flow path) 650e2 (see FIG. 6) in the V winning device (first attacker) 650 during the jackpot game. It is configured to determine whether or not to set a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the game. Further, a switching member 650h (see FIG. 6) for switching the ball flow path through which the winning ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 or the normal discharge flow path e1 is provided in the V winning device (first attacker) 650. The switching member 650h is configured to be movable according to a predetermined rule.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the jackpot game corresponding to the "10R probability variation jackpot" is executed, the V winning device (first attacker) 650 wins a predetermined period (30 seconds have elapsed, or 10 balls are won). Since the open game (round game) is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the V winning device 650) is performed during the jackpot game. As a result, the balls that have won the V prize device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game according to the "11R normal jackpot", the jackpot game in which the opening operation of the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is more restricted than the jackpot game corresponding to the above-mentioned "10R probability variation jackpot" is executed. .. Specifically, a game (round game) in which the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds) during one big hit game is executed only once. Will be done. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a ball to win a prize in the V winning device 650 during the jackpot game, and it is possible to make it difficult (impossible) for the winning ball to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not determine whether or not to set a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game based on the lottery result of the special symbol, but instead determines whether or not to set the high probability state of the special symbol. Based on this, a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2) in the V winning device 650 and a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass during the jackpot game are selected ( When the ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, and the ball does not pass through the specific area. It is configured so that the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed.

That is, even if the "10R probability variation jackpot" is won, if the ball does not pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. become. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the player is allowed to win a ball in each attacker (first attacker 650, second attacker 65) to obtain a prize ball, and a ball is placed in a specific area. It is possible to play a game in which a special symbol is acquired by passing it through, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot in which the jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area is executed is defined as "probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot in which the jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific region is executed is defined as "normal jackpot". I will explain.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general entry openings 63a, in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, are arranged. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is set to the first symbol display device 37a, 37b while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. A second symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for displaying variable symbols of three symbols and a second trigger triggered by the passage of a ball through a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the symbols in a variable manner is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in the operating state (open state) for a period of time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter in the high probability state (probability change state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. To. Then, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a shorter time than in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the ball passing through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67 is the electric accessory 640a. Since the hitting operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed by the time it reaches, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. In addition, although the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to be high, the normal symbol hit game ends by the time the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball is configured to be more difficult to enter the second entry port 640 than in the low probability state of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, the passage information (passage information of the second symbol) acquired based on the reserved storage number of the second symbol, that is, the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67. Each counter value used for the lottery) is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the number stored up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), and the number of reserved pieces is small (for example, 0 pieces). In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be longer than the time required for the ball passing through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67 to reach the second entry port 640. When the number of reserved memories of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is large (for example, three), a fluctuation time is set so that the ball passing through the through gate 67 can enter the second entry port 640. It is configured as follows.

With this configuration, for example, when the operation means (frame button 22) is mistakenly operated during the normal state (during a game in which a left-handed game is performed) and the ball is fired toward the right side region. , It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entry port 640. Further, even if a malicious player plays a game in which the ball is fired to the right side region in a single shot during the normal state, it is difficult (impossible) to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an illegal game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, in order to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 is continuously right-handed until the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol reaches a predetermined number. You need to play a game. Therefore, as a process for determining that an illegal game (right-handed game during the normal state) is being performed and notifying an abnormality, the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is a predetermined number (2 or more) by the right-handed game. ), It is preferable to configure it to execute the abnormality notification when it is determined. Further, it is preferable to configure the abnormality notification to be executed when the ball enters the second entry port 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent a small amount (one shot) of balls fired due to a player's operation error from invading the right side region and executing abnormality notification.

In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the high probability state of the normal symbol), the normal symbol height is increased by using other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state during the normal figure high accuracy, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is a part of the balls launched on the game board that flows down to the right side of the game board. (Approximately 50%) is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

In the right side area of the game board 13 (lower area of the flow path unit 3660) on the right side of the front view of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can enter and the right general entry port 640. The ball mouth 63b is arranged. When a ball enters the second entry port 640, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second entry port 640, it is paid out as one prize ball. .. Further, when a ball enters the right general entrance 63b, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, only the ball wins in the second entrance 640 or the right general entrance 63b in which one prize ball is set. Therefore, the number of balls does not increase.

Further, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, but in the present embodiment, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state. 2 The variation pattern (variation time) for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of the special symbol (special figure 2). Therefore, even if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the lottery for the special figure 2 from being efficiently executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the left-handed game (to execute the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13). In addition, it is a game advantageous to the player to perform a game (a game for allowing the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are made different. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are the same number, for example. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64 may also be configured as one.

As shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured in a single blade shape, and is in a closed state (see FIG. 2) that restricts the ball from entering the second entry port 640, and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It is variably controlled to an open state (see FIG. 3) that allows the ball to enter.

The electric accessory 640a is normally located in a closed state, and is configured to prevent the ball from entering the second entry port 640. Then, based on the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) by lottery, the ball is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. It is what has been done.

Here, the configuration of the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 7. As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area formed by the game board 13, and the game area is on the left side (left side) of the variable display device unit 80. It is divided into a region) and a right side (right region), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to divide the destination of the launched ball into the left region or the right region. It is configured in. Hereinafter, the game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball to the left side area of the game area is referred to as a left-handed game, and the game in which the ball is fired to the right side area is referred to as a right-handed game.

A V winning device 650 is arranged on the upstream side of the right side region of the game board 13, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is configured to flow down on the 100% V winning device 650.

Then, the ball that has flowed down on the V winning device 650 flows downward from the left end side of the V winning device 650, 50% of the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and then flows into the flow path unit 3660, and the other 50. The distribution member 700 is provided so that% flows down the region provided on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 and enters the right general entry port 63b.

The distribution member 700 is configured so that a plurality of (4) blades that can come into contact with the ball flowing down on the game board 13 can rotate (rotate in both directions), and the balls come into contact with the blades. It is configured to rotate in one direction each time it flows down. Then, the sphere is provided in the through gate 67 direction (direction of the flow path unit 3660) or on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 according to the position where the sphere abuts on the blade and the rotational moment of the distribution member 700. It is configured to distribute in the area direction at a ratio of 1: 1.

With this configuration, the spheres can be distributed at a ratio of 1: 1 without having the regularity of distributing the spheres alternately in the two directions. The configuration of the distribution member 700 that distributes the flow direction of the sphere is not limited to this, and for example, the sphere flow path is alternately switched by contacting the flowing sphere (the flow path of the sphere is changed to one flow path). And another flow path alternately) may be used. This makes it possible to have the regularity of distributing the spheres alternately.

The ball that has flowed into the flow path unit 3660 reaches the second entry port 640 having the electric accessory 640a after flowing down the flow path unit 3660, and the ball that has not entered the second entry port 640 , It flows down while being guided toward the variable winning device 65 by a plurality of nails planted in the game board 13, finally flows into the out port 66, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from an outlet (not shown). To.

Here, the detailed configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. The V-winning device 650 is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a specific jackpot (for example). , "Big hit A" (see FIG. 18)), or when the "big hit" or "small hit" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the opening operation is performed to the open state. (The opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates to change the opening state so that the ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a).

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 is combined with the opening forming member 650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c to light LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED substrate 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650d. A flow formed by an opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 650e and a flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes from the road and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is locked to the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, and the back surface thereof. A fixing cover body 650 m fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i and a flow path solenoid 650k for covering the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws. It is composed of and.

Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5B is a front sectional view of the V winning device 650 in a front view (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 2). 5 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Lb-Lb of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 5B, the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). An inclined bottom surface is formed in the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5 (b).

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the opening / closing door 650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, and the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 650c (inside of the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 to the flow path unit 3660 side (see FIG. 2). ) Is configured to be guided. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the right-handed game during the big hit game (small hit game) and the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort for the player to change the game method. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. .. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Further, a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, but a delay member is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 so that the ball stays on the opening / closing door 650f1 for a long time. .. As a result, the probability that the opening / closing door 650f1 will be opened while the ball is present on the opening / closing door 650f1 can be increased. Therefore, even if the opening period of the V winning device 650 is set to be short, the ball can be opened. It can be made easier to win a prize.

Further, since the period required for the ball to flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is longer than the period during which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed during the jackpot game, the right-handed game is performed during the jackpot game. The ball can be reliably won in the V winning device 650.

5 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, in the magnetic sensor (sphere detection switch) 650c1 (see FIG. 4) having the detection port 650a1, the detection port 650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 650e (see FIG. 4). Is fixed to the base member 650c (see FIG. 4). The ball detection switch 650c1 is attached to the base member 650c with a slight rattling (tolerance of about 0.2 mm) within a range in which the winning ball can flow down from the V winning opening 650a. As a result, even if a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650a vigorously collides with the ball detection switch 650c1, the impact can be released, so that damage to the ball detection switch 650c1 can be suppressed.

The configuration for suppressing damage to the ball detection switch 650c1 is not limited to this, and for example, the width of the upstream flow path of the ball detection switch 650c1 is narrower than the width of the detection port 650a1 of the ball detection switch 650c1. It may be configured in. As a result, when a ball flowing down the upstream flow path of the ball detection switch 650c1 passes through the ball detection switch 650c1, the ball can be made less likely to collide with the ball detection switch 650c1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650 h is rotated into the flow path distributed from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 650 g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the ball provided in the special discharge port 650e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit game by the game ball passing through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the big hit game. .. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting a high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the switching member 650h communicates the ball passage so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 does not pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult) during the small hit game (normal discharge flow path 650e1). During the jackpot game, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 can pass through the V switch 650e3 (easy) through the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2), or the flow path that cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). It is configured to communicate with any of the normal discharge flow paths 650e1).

The switching member 650h switches the flow path so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON (see FIG. 6A). It is configured so that the flow path is switched so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to off (see FIG. 6B). Has been done. With this configuration, among the ball flow paths that are switched and formed in the V winning device 650, the ball flow path state that allows the ball to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2 that has a short communication state is electrically generated. Since it is formed by using a target drive source, the power consumption can be suppressed. Further, even if a malicious player illegally wins a ball in the V winning device 650, the ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 unless the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON, which is malicious. It is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent games.

In the present embodiment, the ball presses the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 according to the game content of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (the winning device for opening operation, the opening operation period, etc.). The jackpot game that is easy to pass and the jackpot game that is difficult to pass are configured to be feasible. Specifically, it is easy to win a prize in the V prize device 650 by differentiating the timing and period in which the game (round game) in which the V prize device 650 is opened is executed according to the jackpot game to be executed. It is configured so that the speed is variable and the timing at which the ball wins in the V winning device 650 is different.

In this way, by changing the game content of the jackpot game (operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1), the timing at which the ball wins in the V winning device 650 is changed, so that the operation content of the switching member 650h is always constant. Even if it is set to, it is possible to set a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 and a jackpot game in which it is difficult (impossible) to pass through. Therefore, a plurality of operation patterns (for different timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to be turned on) for different operation contents of the switching member 650h become unnecessary, and the control load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. ..

Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (V winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is composed of. With this configuration, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened even though the jackpot is not won due to an illegal game, and the switching member 650h is operated (destroyed) so that the ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. ) Even if the ball is detected by the ball detection switch 650c1 in the V winning device 650, it is determined that the illegal game has been executed, and then the ball is allowed to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is possible to reliably notify that the ball has flowed down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in an abnormal state.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. As a result, it can be determined from the total of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the probability change switch 650e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged. In addition, at the end timing of the jackpot game (the timing when the jackpot ending period executed after the end condition of the jackpot game (when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 is completed) is satisfied), the player enters the V winning device 650. If all the balled game balls are not ejected, it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, notify the outside of the abnormality, or stop the game so that the game does not start. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a secondary abnormality from occurring due to the progress of the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the ball winning in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (the present embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. Then, 15 prize balls are paid out for each prize, and the detected balls are used to determine whether or not the ball passes through the V switch 650e3, and the jackpot is won. It is possible to make the player pay close attention to the game content during the jackpot game to be executed later, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off (the electric drive source for operating the flow path solenoid 650k is not driven), and the switching member 650h is set to the initial position (flow path solenoid 650k) so that the normal discharge flow path 650e1 communicates with the flow path solenoid 650k. Is positioned in the off position) so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 does not pass through the V switch 650e3. Therefore, in the small hit game executed at the time of winning the small hit, V The winning device 650 can be used. Therefore, since it is not necessary to separately provide the pachinko machine 10 with a winning device dedicated to the small hit game, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and the space of the game area formed in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. It can be used effectively.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is easily executed (the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short). Therefore, the game method that is advantageous for the player is the right-handed game. The lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is configured to run frequently. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by arranging the V winning device 650 in the right side region, the player can be a player simply by continuously executing the right-handed game during the period in which the latent probability state is set. It is possible to play an advantageous game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that makes it easy to execute the lottery during the latent probability state, the V winning device 650 is always opened. The probability that the game is executed and the latent probability state is set again after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be higher than when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1). Therefore, even if the latent state is set again via the jackpot game during the latent state, the player only needs to continuously execute the right-handed game, so that the player can operate the game. It is possible to eliminate the need to operate the handle 51 in a complicated manner.

In addition, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the big hit game in which the opening operation of the V winning device 650 (the operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1) is the same as the small hit game may be executed. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether the winning game being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game. In addition, in this case, it may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the ball winning the V winning device 650 has passed through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during the jackpot game. That is, it is preferable to configure so that it is not possible to determine whether the hit game this time is a big hit game or a small hit game by identifying whether or not the ball has passed the V switch 650e3.

Further, in the big hit game in which the opening operation of the V winning device 650 (the operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1) is the same as the small hit game, even if the ball winning the V winning device 650 is configured not to pass through the V switch 650e3. good. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in which the latent state ends (shifts to another game state) after the hit game similar to the small hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of tension during the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic view of the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 in a plan view in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the V winning device 650 has an opening / closing door 650f1 from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). It is configured to flow down the left upper surface 650y2 through the upper surface of the above surface and flow out toward the flow path unit 3660.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the sphere, and the sphere is on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. It is configured so that the flow-down period is 1 second. This flow period (1 second) is the interval (closed period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the jackpot game, that is, the round game. It is configured to be longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) set in between.

With this configuration, all the balls fired in the right-handed game during the jackpot game can be awarded to the V winning device 650. Therefore, the ball launched by the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol, or enters the second entrance 640 to enter the second special. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of reserved symbols.

When the jackpot game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7A and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state (retracted state), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a schematic view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves so as to retract into the inside of the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the upper right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning can be made. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is also configured to win a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the retracted position.

That is, the opening / closing door 650f1 has a wall (a wall having a height of about 4 mm) projecting from the front end (lower side from the viewpoint of FIG. 7A) so that the ball can get over it. When the opening / closing door 650f1 changes to the retracted position, the ball staying on the opening / closing door 650f1 gets over the wall in a state of being in contact with the game board 13 and flows into the V winning opening 650a. When the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed (see FIG. 7A), the ball meandering down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is on the front side of the game board (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2). It is a regulating wall for suppressing contact with the glass unit 16 provided in the above.

Further, the V winning device 650 has a first regulating member for smoothing the ball flow regardless of the position where the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. , The second regulating member is provided, and the balls that have won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first regulating member and the second regulating member. , It is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the width of the passage for one ball. By providing the first regulating member and the second regulating member in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first regulating member, the ball winning vigorously from the opening / closing door 650f1 directly collides with the detection port 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from failing. In addition, it is possible to secure a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first regulating member and the second regulating member) for aligning the spheres before passing through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width equivalent to one sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball is clogged in the V winning device 650 and interferes with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a configuration in the vicinity of the flow path unit 3660 in the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is an enlarged schematic view of the vicinity of the flow path unit 3660. As shown in FIG. 3, the flow path unit 3660 is arranged so that all the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 among the balls that are launched by the right-handed game and flow down the right side region flow in. The inflow port 3660a of the unit 3660 is formed at a position below the through gate 67. The inflow port 3660a is formed with a width (about 20 mm) wider than the ball passing width (about 13 mm) of the through gate 67, and is configured so that the ball passing through the through gate 67 smoothly flows in. There is.

The sphere that has flowed into the flow path unit 3660 first falls on the first projecting member 3661. The upper surface of the first projecting member 3661 is provided so as to incline downward in the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and a ball dropped on the first projecting member 3661 is inclined in the downward inclining direction. It flows down and flows out toward the second projecting member 3662. The tip of the first projecting member 3661 projects to a position facing the second projecting member 3662, and the ball flowing out of the first projecting member 3661 surely falls on the second projecting member 3662.

The second projecting member 3662 is provided below the first projecting member 3661, and the upper surface of the second projecting member 3662 is provided so as to be inclined downward in the lower left direction (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The ball that has fallen on the second projecting member 3662 flows down in the downward tilting direction of the second projecting member 3662 and flows out toward the third projecting member 3663.

The third protruding member 3663 is provided so that the upper surface thereof has a downward inclination in the same direction as the first protruding member 3661 described above, and the outlet 3660b of the flow path unit 3660 is formed at the tip thereof. The ball flowing out from the second protruding member 3662 falls on the upper surface of the third protruding member 3663, flows down in the downward inclined direction of the upper surface thereof, and flows out from the outflow port 3660b to the outside of the flow path unit 3660.

The ball flowing out of the flow path unit 3660 is guided toward the second entry port 640 by a nail planted in the game board 13, and if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (see FIG. 3), the flow path. All the balls flowing out of the unit 3660 enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, if the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 2), the ball does not enter the second entry port 640 and flows down toward the lower side of the game board 13.

That is, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (see FIG. 3), the electric accessory 640a moves to a position where the flow path of the ball flowing out from the flow path unit 3660 is blocked. A plurality of nails are arranged above the second entrance 640 so that the ball flowing down the game area formed on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 does not enter the second entrance 640. It is configured in.

Next, the relationship between the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 and the fluctuation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of projecting members 3661 to 3663 are provided in the flow path unit 3660 so that the sphere meanders and flows down. The ball flow path R1 from the inflow port 3660a to the outflow port 3660b of the flow path unit 3660 is configured so that the period required for the ball to pass is 1.5 seconds, and the outflow port of the flow path unit 3660. The time until the ball flowing down from 3660b flows into the electric accessory 640a in the open state (time to reach the position where the ball enters the second entry port 640) is set to 0.1 seconds. are doing. That is, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after about 1.6 seconds.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed according to the game state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol and the reserved storage number of the normal symbol. When the normal symbol is in the high probability state (when the gaming state is the probabilistic state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.5 seconds. Then, if the player wins the game during the high probability state of the normal symbol, after the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is moved to the open state is executed for 0.8 seconds.

Therefore, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed based on passing through the through gate 67 and the winning is won, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will be at the second entrance 640. By the time it arrives, the winning game has already ended, and it is configured so that the second entrance 640 cannot be entered. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the balls flowing out from the V winning device 650 are distributed 1: 1 by the distribution member 700, so that the interval at which the balls flow into the flow path unit 3660 is about 1 second (1.2 seconds). It is configured to be an interval.

As a result, at the timing when the hit game of the normal symbol is started, that is, 0.5 seconds after the one ball passes through the through gate 67, the inside of the flow path unit 3660 is in front of the one ball. Since the other spheres (the spheres that flowed into the flow path unit 3660 about 1 second before the one sphere) have reached the position where they flowed out from the flow path unit 3660, one sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to prevent another ball from entering the second entry port 640 during the hit game executed based on the above. Therefore, even if the right-handed game is continuously performed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball does not enter the second entrance 640, so that the high probability of the normal symbol is high. During the state (probability change state), it is advantageous for the player to perform a left-handed game in which the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64.

Next, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is configured to set a different fluctuation time according to the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol (the number of reserved symbols) (see FIG. 22). , When the number of holdings of the normal figure is 0, a time (30 seconds) longer than the time (1.5 seconds) for the ball to pass through the ball flow path R1 is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the number of holdings of the normal figure is set. When is 1 or more (1 to 3), the fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is set.

With this configuration, the operation handle 51 is being executed during the left-handed game in a state in which the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state. Even if one ball is fired toward the right side region by mistake in the operation of, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entry port 640. In addition, a right-handed game was intentionally performed during the normal state, and a game was performed in which a ball was inserted into the second entrance 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). Even if one ball is fired and passed through the through gate 67 in a right-handed game, the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640 is longer than that. Since the normal symbol change is executed, it is possible to prohibit the ball from entering the second entrance 640 by the act of firing one ball in the right-handed game (single-shot).

On the other hand, the fluctuation time (1.4 seconds) of the normal symbol set when the number of reserved symbols is 1 or more is the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entry port 640. It is configured to be slightly shorter than (time for the ball to flow down the ball flow path R1 (1.5 seconds)). That is, if the lottery result of the normal symbol executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is a hit, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game. It is configured so that the variable time during which the ball can enter is set.

Specifically, when the lottery of the normal symbol is won, the winning game is executed after the fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds elapses, and after the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the electric accessory 640a is 0.7 seconds. Be released. Since the flow path of the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after 1.6 seconds, the electric accessory 640a is opened in the hit game. The ball arrives during this period, and the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640.

Further, in the present embodiment, the balls launched by the right-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67 at a ratio of 1 in 2 balls, and the interval (1.2) in which the balls pass through the through gate 67. The second) is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time (1.4 seconds) set when the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is 1 or more in the low probability state of the normal symbol.

With this configuration, during the latent state, it is possible to maintain the state in which the reserved storage number of the normal symbol is 1 or more simply by continuously executing the right-handed game, and the second special symbol is efficiently performed. Lottery can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the latent state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, can be smoothly executed, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different depending on the game state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), but the game is not limited to this, and the game of the special symbol is not limited to this. The fluctuation time may be different depending on the gaming state including the state (high probability state, low probability state). For example, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, the fluctuation time for a long time (30 seconds) is set regardless of the number of reserved normal symbols. , When the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the fluctuation time of the appropriate time (1.4 seconds) is set regardless of the number of reserved normal symbols. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 when the right-handed game is played in the normal state, and efficiently when the right-handed game is played in the latent state. A ball can be entered into the second entry port 640.

As shown in FIG. 8, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the accessory for the effect (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command to make the lamp display device 227 emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content to the frame button 22. It may be configured in.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. 10 (a) and 10 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 10A). The third symbol (decorative symbol that changes according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence L3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction. With each symbol row L1 to L3 stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols). For example, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the first embodiment, since each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, the third symbol Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). As shown in FIG. 10B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (Refer to FIG. 11A), the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating is shown, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 11B), and the special symbol lottery is performed. It is configured to show the result, but is not limited to this, for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as a fourth symbol, a display mode that deforms a figure by using a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, and a display mode. It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed by the display mode which changes a color, and stopping and displaying the display mode which shows a specific symbol or a color.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is reduced. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11A).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding that is displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the latent state and during a specific jackpot game (during a jackpot game in which the V winning device 650 is opened), and the display mode of "left-handed" is a predetermined period (for example, after the right-handed game is completed). It is configured to be displayed (for 10 seconds). Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state or the probabilistic state, the predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) ". It is configured so that the display mode of "left-handed" is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 10 (b). Below the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2), small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 are formed. The small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 are areas in which the reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm4 is the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (reserved). The special figure 1 hold information for showing the number of stored balls) is displayed, and the special figure 2 hold information for showing the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm5.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11A, but in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, the reserved winning information is stored in advance. It is configured to display a display mode in which the discriminated result (look-ahead result) can be suggested and notified to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 11A, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

With this configuration, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved storage numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 1) or the second on the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by the ball. The variable display of the special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be variablely displayed at the same time, and it is easy to draw (change) each special symbol according to the set gaming state. Is configured to be different. Then, the lottery (variation) is executed in the game state in which the third symbol, which is the target of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, is set among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured to be a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol that is easily created. With such a configuration, regardless of which game state is set, it is possible to make it easier to always execute the variable effect using the third symbol, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

FIG. 11A shows an example of the display content displayed when a right-handed game is performed in a state in which a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) is set. It is a schematic diagram. In the present embodiment, it is configured to be advantageous to the player to have the ball enter the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game during the normal state and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. When it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed in this normal state (when the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right side area of the game board 13), the small display area Dm3 is "left-handed". In addition to displaying the guidance display mode of, the comment "Please return to left-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to encourage the left-handed game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being frequently executed while the normal state is set, the variation time of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the normal state is long ( 10 minutes), and as shown in FIG. 11 (a), a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, and one reserved ball number of the second special symbol is acquired (small display area Dm5). In the state where "1" is displayed), the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol held and stored is started after the end of the currently executing special figure 2 variation, that is, the current execution. It will be 10 minutes after the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the inside.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold is discriminated in advance, and the suggestion display for suggesting that the discriminant result is a big hit is displayed in the small display area Dm5. (Corresponding to the star mark in FIG. 11 (a)). As a result, the player who has acquired the lottery right of the special symbol (the player who has entered the ball into the second entrance 640, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol) executes the game based on the lottery right acquired by himself / herself. When the lottery of the special symbol to be performed is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the big hit from being abandoned. Further, when the display mode of the small display area Dm5 is a display mode suggesting a big hit winning, it is possible to facilitate the continuous game until the lottery result of the target second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. It can improve the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, the winning information of winning a big hit in the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is executed in the normal state. Is configured to execute a suggestion display suggesting to the player when is present, but it is advisable to add the following condition as an execution condition of this suggestion display.

That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed independently (in parallel), so that the special figure 2 It is possible to execute the special figure 1 lottery a plurality of times before the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning information of winning the jackpot existing in the reserved memory of is executed.

Therefore, whether or not to execute the special figure 1 lottery by the time the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning information for winning the jackpot existing in the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed depends on the game executed by the player. Can be selectable. As a result, for example, if you want to win the big hit in the special figure 1 lottery before you win the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, you can play a game to actively execute the special figure 1 lottery, and in the special figure 2 lottery. If you do not want to win the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery before you win the jackpot, the act of not firing the ball will be performed so that the special figure 1 lottery will not be executed, which is an excessively advantageous game for the player. There was a risk of providing.

In order to solve such a problem, as a condition for executing the suggestion display, the remaining period until the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning information for winning the jackpot existing in the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed (for example,). If the special figure 2 lottery to be executed next is a big hit, a means for calculating the remaining period of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed) and a plurality of special figures stored in the reserved storage of the special figure 1. The target special figure 2 lottery is provided by providing a means for calculating the fluctuation time of the 1 lottery and determining the number of special figure 1 lottery executed during the remaining period until the target special figure 2 lottery is started. It is advisable to set as an execution condition of the suggestion display that the number of times of special drawing 1 lottery to be executed during the remaining period until the start of is fixed.

As a result, even if the suggestion effect is executed and the player is informed that the special figure 2 hold memory contains the winning information for winning the jackpot, the special figure 2 lottery for winning the jackpot is executed. Since the player cannot control the number of times of the special drawing 1 lottery up to this point, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

When a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 11A and the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the screen shown in FIG. 11B is displayed. .. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the special figure 2 jackpot is won in the normal state. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to set the third symbol to be the target of the variable effect according to the set gaming state, and the period in which the normal state is set. Inside, a variable effect based on the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special 1) is executed.

In that state, when the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, it is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 11 (b). "V" to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, giving priority to the variable effect (on the display layer provided above the display layer on which the display mode of the variable effect is displayed). The interrupt display 805 imitating "is displayed, and the comment of" interrupt V generation "for notifying the player that the jackpot of the second special symbol has been won is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Then, in the small display area Dm2, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "444" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously executing lottery of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but not to win a big hit at the same time. Specifically, if the lottery (variation) of the other special symbol is being executed at the time when one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the lottery result indicating a big hit, the other special symbol being executed is executed. It is configured to forcibly stop the lottery (variation) so that it will be out of the lottery.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11B, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode "444" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, and at the same time, the small symbol is displayed. In the display area Dm1, the fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, and the variation effect (variation display of each symbol sequence L1 to L3) indicates the deviation. It is stopped and displayed in the display mode.

In this way, as the third symbol to be the target of the variation effect, the third symbol is set to target the special symbol to which the lottery (variation) is easily executed in the set gaming state. 3 It is possible to facilitate the execution of the variation effect executed by the symbol display device 81. Then, when a big hit is won in a lottery of a special symbol whose lottery (variation) is difficult to be executed in the set game state, the interrupt display 805 is displayed instead of changing the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

According to the example shown with reference to FIG. 11B, the fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1 in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of alignment. The fluctuation effect (variation display of each symbol sequence L1 to L3) being executed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the timing, but the main display area Dm is not limited to this. The variable effect during execution may be different from the stop timing of the fourth symbol. In this case, for example, a plurality of stoptable timings are set in advance during the effect period of the variable effect being executed, and the variable effect is forcibly stopped at the stoptable timing that arrives after the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. It is good to configure it to.

By configuring in this way, for example, by setting in advance an effect mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player even if the player is forcibly stopped at a stoptable timing as an effect mode of the variable effect, the player feels a sense of discomfort. It is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation effect without giving.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol to be the target of the third symbol is configured to be set according to the game state regardless of the lottery result of each special symbol. The type of the special symbol to be the target of the third symbol may be variably set according to the lottery result of each special symbol, for example. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the results of a plurality of special symbol lottery that can be executed at the same time only by paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a variable effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit can be executed, so that one of them can be executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute the variable effect indicating that the jackpot has been won, rather than executing the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding only to the special symbol.

Further, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol may be determined, and the type of the special symbol to be the target of the third symbol may be variably set based on the determination result. In this case, for example, the type of the special symbol on the side where the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined upper limit is set as the target of the third symbol, or the difference in the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is calculated, and the calculation result is When it becomes a predetermined value (for example, 2) or more, it is preferable to set the type of the special symbol on the side with a large number of reserved balls as the target of the third symbol. This makes it possible to increase the number of times the variable effect executed as the third symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that a large number of special symbol lottery is being performed, and it is possible to enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12A, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. Will be explained. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the probability variation state is set.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, but in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the state where the normal state is set, the game state is a probable change state. Is configured to be set. Then, when the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entrance 640. There is.

Therefore, in the state where the probability change state is set, as shown in FIG. 12A, the main display area Dm is used as a mode display 810 for showing the current gaming state, and is a big hit of a special symbol than the normal state. The "ascending mode" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the gaming state has a high probability.

Then, the display mode of "left-handed" that guides the game method that is advantageous to the player during the probability change state is displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the sub-display area Ds is currently in the normal state (special symbol). The comment "Expectation is rising" is displayed to show that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability state of the normal symbol (low probability state of the normal symbol).

As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the probability change state, and the normal state is set. The right-handed game in the case where the probability variation state is set is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the right-handed game in the case of.

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability change state is set, the game guidance notification is emphasized more than the display mode (see FIG. 11A) when the right-handed game is performed in the normal state. Is configured to be executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12B, a game guidance notification displayed when a right-handed game is performed during the probability change state will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the right-handed game is performed during the probability change state. As shown in FIG. 12B, when it is detected that a right-handed game has been performed during the probability change state (when the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right area of the game board 13), a small display is displayed. The aspect of the area Dm3 becomes the emphasis aspect (double line frame line), and the display aspect of "left-handed" is displayed inside the emphasized aspect. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "left-handed, left-handed, left-handed" is displayed, which emphasizes that the proper game is a left-handed game.

In this way, by varying the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to an appropriate game method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continuously execute the disadvantageous game. It is possible to suppress that.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the probabilistic state is set when the big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, so that the probable change state is set. At that point, it is conceivable that the game method was not changed by the normal game guidance display (see FIG. 11A). In such a situation, when a right-handed game is played during the probability change state, even if the normal game guidance display shown in FIG. 11A is displayed again, the player is made to perform an appropriate game. That is difficult.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), an appropriate game is executed for the player by executing a display that emphasizes the game guide rather than the normal game guide display (see FIG. 11 (a)). It can be made easier.

On the other hand, in the state where the normal state is set, a specific jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and after the jackpot game is completed, the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low of the normal symbol). When the probability state) is set, the display content shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the latent probability state is set.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, but the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the latent probability state is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. Briefly, during the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that wins a small hit with a high probability becomes easy to be executed, and while winning the prize ball by the small hit game, the next It is configured to be in a game state aiming for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 13A, when the latent state is set, the display mode of the "full power mode" is displayed as the mode display 810 for showing the player that the current state is the latent state. Then, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm, and by opening the treasure box 812 found by the character 811, a variable effect of notifying the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Open the treasure box" are displayed as comments for indicating the game content (effect content) in the latent state (full power mode).

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the treasure box 812 is opened at the timing indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is displayed by the player according to the contents of the treasure box 812. It is configured to notify to. That is, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the variable effect is executed for the third symbol indicating the lottery status of the second special symbol. Therefore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the latent state, the variable effect does not change based on the lottery.

Then, if a hit (small hit, big hit) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents showing that a hit (small hit, big hit) was won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 13B, the timing at which the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 is the lottery result (small hit). ) Is stopped and displayed in the display mode (“341”), and the lottery result display mode 813 (display mode imitating “V”) showing “hit” as the lottery result of the second special symbol is the contents of the treasure box 812. Is displayed as.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed to congratulate the winner of the lottery result of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the player can easily obtain the lottery result of the special symbol being executed simply by grasping the effect result of the variable effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, as the contents of the treasure box 812, a second special symbol is used in addition to the lottery result display mode (display mode imitating “V”) shown in FIG. 13 (b). As a lottery result display mode that is displayed when the lottery result is out of order, a display mode that imitates "x" or "?", Or a lottery result display mode that is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. It is configured to display a display mode imitating "VV". In addition, the display mode imitating "?" Is configured to be displayed with a low probability (about 3%) even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". ing. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the lottery results of all the second special symbols only by the lottery result display mode displayed as the contents of the treasure box 812. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the game content to be executed after the effect result of the variable effect is displayed.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 14 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the first embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high normal symbol). There are three game states that can be set: probabilistic state), latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), the type of jackpot won, and the game at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured so that a predetermined gaming state is set according to the state (see FIG. 18).

First, a case where a normal state is set as a game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8) has been operated in the initial state (the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53)) is executed. ), The normal state is set as the game state.

In this normal state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if jackpot B (50% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot game is completed again. The normal state is set, the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, and when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game, the latent state (full power mode) is set after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state, regardless of the jackpot type (100% of the jackpot winning), the probability change state (rise) after the jackpot game ends. Mode) is configured to be set.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state, you will enter the full power mode with a 50% probability, loop the normal state with a 50% probability, and win the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery. Is configured so that the probability change state is set with a probability of 100%.

As described above with reference to FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 provided in the V winning device 650) during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set. For example, when the jackpot A is won in the lottery of special figure 1 or when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 2 during the normal state. When the ball passes through a specific area during the big hit game to be executed, as described above, a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol is set after the big hit game is completed, and the ball passes through the specific area. If not, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the game content during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game executed during the jackpot game is improved. Can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot than when the ball is passed through the specific area during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game for the game to be executed during the jackpot game.

Next, the flow of transition of the gaming state in the state in which the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the latent state is set, the game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed game is performed. Then, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, if jackpot C (65% of the jackpot win) is set as the type of jackpot, the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot is set again. When D (35% of the jackpot winning) is set, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the game state, when the big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, if the big hit B (50% of the big hit winning) is set as the big hit type, the big hit. When the normal state is set after the game ends and the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, the latent state (full power mode) is set again after the jackpot game ends.

That is, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a 50% probability, the normal state is set with a 50% probability, and the special figure 2 lottery is performed. If you win the jackpot in, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a probability of 65%, and the probability change state is set with a probability of 35%.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is easier to loop the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, by executing the lottery shown in FIG. Therefore, the special figure 2 is a special symbol for executing a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

Finally, the flow of transition of the gaming state when the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the probability change state is set, it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to newly execute the lottery of the special figure 2 even if the right-handed game is performed. , The lottery of Special Figure 1 is configured to be executed. Then, in the case of winning a big hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1 during the probability change state, if the big hit B (50% of the big hit winning) is set as the big hit type, the normal state is set after the big hit game is completed. When the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, the latent state (full power mode) is set after the jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, if a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the special figure 2 hold stored on hold at the time when the probability change state is set as the game state, regardless of the big hit type (big hit). 100% of the winnings), the probability change state is set again after the jackpot game is over.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the probability change state, the full power mode (latent state) is set with a 50% probability, the normal state is set with a 50% probability, and the special figure 2 lottery. If the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set with a 100% probability.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a gaming state other than the latent probability state is set, that is, the execution of the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is defined as an appropriate gaming method. Even if the special figure 2 game is executed during the current gaming state and the jackpot is won, the latent probability state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is not set.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 during the latent probability state, the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened even in the low probability state of the normal symbol (the ball is easy to open). It is configured so that the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640).

Therefore, even if a game (right-handed game) different from the proper game (left-handed game) is executed and the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, which is a low-probability state of the normal symbol, the player is asked. It is possible to prevent excessive benefits (privileges for setting an advantageous gaming state) from being given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed frequently in the normal state, so that the player in the normal state is given an excessive privilege (a privilege to set an advantageous gaming state). It can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a higher probability than in the state in which the normal state is set, and the ball is placed at the second entry port 640. By configuring it so that it is difficult to enter the ball, it is difficult to execute the special figure 2 lottery, but it is not limited to this, and when the probability change state is set, it is higher than the state where the normal state is set. , Set the jackpot probability of the special symbol to a high probability, and make it easier to execute the new special figure 2 lottery (so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the special figure 1 lottery). It may be configured to set the fluctuation time or the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Specifically, the state in which the probability variation state is set is more than the state in which the normal state is set. It may be configured so that the time set as the fluctuation time is shortened (for example, 3 minutes).

With this configuration, when the probabilistic state is set, a game in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn with the aim of shifting to the latent probable state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player. (Left-handed game) does not shift to the latent state, but by executing many special symbol lottery, the second special symbol (special symbol) aims to see various variable effects (big hit effects). The player can select the game (right-handed game) in which the lottery is performed in 2).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 15, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. The hit type counter C5, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 54). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to entry into the first ball entry port 64 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) and four holding areas (holding) A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a ball entering the second entry port 640 consisting of the first to fourth areas) is provided, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is provided. Stores the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. ..

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

In this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It may be configured.

Further, as in the present embodiment, the small hit is also made in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result. It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (first entry port 64, second entry opening 640) that triggers the special symbol lottery. It is configured to store all the counter values acquired by the above, and when the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery is performed using only the required value among the acquired counter values. By configuring to execute, the same configuration can be used for multiple gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small hits), so parts and techniques should be standardized. It is possible to reduce the cost.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the special symbol described above, the normal symbol hold corresponding to the entry (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 composed of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas). A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is set according to the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It has a configuration to hold and store the value, but is not limited to this, and does not provide a function (hold storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol while a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 54).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determined value) determined to be a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 17A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "7 to 9" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are defined as judgment values other than big hits (that is, small hits or misses).

Further, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, "0 to 3" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. A value other than is specified as a judgment value other than a big hit (that is, a small hit or a miss). That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 3/480 (1/160), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If it is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot will be won with a probability of 4/480 (1/120). Therefore, the high-probability state is easier to win the jackpot than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, but the probability is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of symbol. For example, the second special symbol may be configured to have a lower jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpot probabilities of the special symbol are prepared, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, but one type may be used, or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

Further, the value of the first random number counter C1 is also referred to when it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is the small hit random number table 202b. If it matches the value of the random number that is the small hit specified in, it is judged as a small hit of the special symbol.

Here, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number table 202b. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, the determination value determined to be a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low). A predetermined range of judgment values is defined regardless of the probability state and the high probability state). As shown in FIG. 17B, when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not specified, and the value of the first special symbol is small in the lottery. It is stipulated that you will not win a prize.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of "212 to 432". That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (not won), and the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 221/480 (about 1/2). It is stipulated to be 1).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the first random number counter C1 value that wins the big hit and the first random number counter C1 value that wins the small hit are different. It is configured so that in one process of executing a special symbol lottery (a process of determining whether or not there is a hit), a big hit hit / fail judgment and a small hit win / fail judgment are continuously (simultaneously) executed. are doing.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a lottery for a big hit or a small hit with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (latent state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that a specific game state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, a table referred to when executing the big hit lottery (first random number table 202a) and a table referred to when executing the small hit lottery (small hit random number table 202b) are displayed. Although it is configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery. In this case, for example, the random number table 202a per first may be configured to specify the range of the counter value for winning the small hit for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol, and the jackpot according to the determination value predetermined in advance according to the determined value. It is configured to execute the determination of winning or small hit winning, but is not limited to this, for example, depending on the number of big hit winnings or the number of small hit winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The first hit random number counter C1 value specified as a big hit winning or a small winning winning may be configured to be variable, or a big hit lottery or a small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. As the data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery, a data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit and the judgment value corresponding to the small hit are not specified may be provided.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are executed. There is a restriction (so that the jackpot game is not executed) so that the jackpot is not won at the same time (in parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol, and during the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win a big hit, the lottery of special symbols should be executed by referring to the dedicated data table that does not specify the judgment value corresponding to the big hit but only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It may be configured.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. At the same timing, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 18, in this jackpot type selection table 202d, the type of the special symbol won by the jackpot (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is associated with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Multiple jackpot types are specified.

Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". In the range of "50 to 99", "big hit B" is specified. Further, "big hit C" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 64". In the range of "65 to 99", "big hit D" is defined.

Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 and the variable winning device 65) executed during the jackpot game The operation content (timing, number of times) for the opening / closing door 65f1 and the switching member 650h) is stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an opening operation scenario in which the opening operation scenario is defined in time series.

Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is discriminated and the process based on the discriminant result is executed.

In this way, the operation contents of each movable member during the jackpot game for moving a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of V winning device 650, opening / closing door 65f1 of variable winning device 65, switching member 650h) are arranged in chronological order. By using the specified opening operation scenario, it is possible to centrally manage the operation control for a plurality of movable members. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the operation control is executed separately for each movable member, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and in the case where a defect occurs in one movable member, the other It is possible to smoothly execute the motion processing for the movable member.

"Big hit A" is a big hit game of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds and the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened for 10 rounds. Is the type of jackpot that is executed. This round game 1 is a round game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until the ball wins 10 balls or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds as one round game. be.

Furthermore, in the jackpot game executed in "big hit A", the waiting period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (1R) is 1 second, and between each round game. The waiting period (interval period) is set to 0.5 seconds, and the waiting period (ending period) from the end of the last round game (10th round) to the end of the jackpot game is set to 2 seconds. .. During these various waiting periods, the first attacker 650 is in a closed state. Here, the length of the interval period set between the round games will be described in detail.

As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 of the present embodiment is configured so that the period required for the ball to flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is 1 second. , The interval period set as a jackpot game is set to be 0.5 seconds. Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is arranged so that all the balls launched into the right side region by the right-handed game flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1. ..

That is, a ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 located in the closed state during the period (interval period) when the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is closed after the one round game is completed passes through the opening / closing door 650f1. It is configured so that the next round game is started before the next round game is started. With this configuration, it is possible to easily make all of the fired balls win the first attacker (V winning device) 650 when the right-handed game is continuously played during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the game operation during the jackpot game.

In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult for the ball launched during the jackpot game to flow down the downstream side of the first attacker (V winning device) 650, it is difficult for the ball to flow into the flow path unit 3660 during the jackpot game. (It is difficult to pass through the through gate 67). The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the larger the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol (the number of stores that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67), the shorter the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. 2 It is configured to facilitate the entry of a ball into the entry port 640 (see FIG. 22).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved memory number of the normal symbol from becoming excessively large during the jackpot game. Next, in the present embodiment, an ending period of 2 seconds is provided after the final round game of the jackpot game is completed. The length of this ending period will be explained. As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, when the V winning device 650 is in the closed state, one ball is configured to flow into the flow path unit 3660 for every two balls played in the right-handed game. are doing. Then, by operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be launched in one minute. That is, the spheres are configured to flow into the flow path unit 3660 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. Further, when a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the normal symbol fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 continues for a period from the start time of the jackpot game to the start of the game in the latent probability state. By performing the right-handed game, it is possible to surely execute the game in the latent state while maintaining the state in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is one or more.

On the other hand, during the jackpot game, when the game in which the right-handed game is fired only at the timing when the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened, the latent state is set. Since a situation in which the number of reserved symbols of a normal symbol is 0 is likely to occur, the gaming efficiency in the latent state is significantly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to continuously perform the right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

In addition, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit game is completed (the time saving flag 203f is set to off) regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning, and the big hit. An opening operation (V opening pattern) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 provided in the first attacker (V winning device) 650) is executed during the game.

As a result, when the jackpot game based on "Big Hit A" is executed, the right-handed game is continuously executed in order to make the first attacker (V winning device) 650 win the ball, and the ball is efficiently played. 1 Attacker (V winning device) 650 can be won to win a prize ball, and by passing the ball through a specific area, it is possible to set the latent state after the big hit game is over, and at the timing when the latent state is set. Since the number of reserved symbols of a normal symbol can be set to 1 or more, it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player.

"Big hit B" has 11 rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a big hit game, and only in the first round, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened and the remaining 10 rounds. During that time, a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is opened.

As the round game executed in the first round, the round game (round game 2) in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened until the opening period elapses 0.5 is executed. Then, in the remaining 10 rounds, the above-mentioned round game 1 is executed against the second attacker (variable winning device) 65.

That is, in the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit B", a game (first round game) in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened during the period when the ball is difficult to enter (0.5 seconds) is executed. Then, during a period (30 seconds) in which the ball is easy to enter, a game (round game from the second round to the eleventh round) in which the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is opened is configured to be executed. There is. Therefore, it is a big hit game in which a round game for 10 rounds is executed.

The opening operation scenario corresponding to the "big hit B" defines a V opening pattern, which is an operation pattern in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3) in the first attacker (V winning device) 650. Therefore, the high-probability state of the special symbol is not set (difficult to set) after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game is performed.

Therefore, when the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the left-handed game is executed so that the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 wins the ball, and the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 wins the prize. Only the game of letting the player win the prize ball is executed, and the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game is not set, so that the big hit game is disadvantageous to the player compared to "Big hit A". ..

In other words, if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance of winning a jackpot game (“big hit A”) that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state set at the time of the jackpot winning. However, it is configured to win a jackpot game (“big hit B”) that is disadvantageous to the player with a 50% probability.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot advantageous to the player is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened for 10 rounds is executed, and the player If you win a big hit that is disadvantageous to you, the big hit game that opens the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 for 10 rounds is executed, so the type of big hit that you won this time is advantageous. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not the game is a big hit, but the case is not limited to this, and there are cases where the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player and cases where the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. , The same winning device (for example, the first attacker (V winning device) 650) may be configured to perform a jackpot game to be opened.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous depending on the game content of the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game It is possible to predict what the game state is set after the end until just before the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game, each winning device (opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player). The contents of operation control of the opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 650f1, opening / closing door 65f1) are the same so that the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 65) are in the open or closed state, and the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is supported. In the opening operation scenario, the operation control content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area is specified as the operation control content for the switching member 650h, and in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the switching member 650h is specified. As the motion control content for the above, the motion control content may be configured to specify the motion control content that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific area.

Further, the operation control content of the switching member 650h is made the same in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and each winning device (first). The opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 650f1, opening / closing door 65f1) may be configured to have different timings for controlling the operation so that the attacker 650 and the second attacker 65) are in the open or closed state. By varying the length of the waiting period (opening period) from the execution to the execution of the first round game, the execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different. Therefore, the jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and the jackpot game in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area may be configured to be feasible.

Since the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed for "big hit C" and "big hit D", detailed explanation of the jackpot game content is omitted, but when "big hit C" is set, , The game state set after the end of the big hit game is configured to be different according to the game state at the time when the big hit is won.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot where "big hit C" is set is the normal state or the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (time reduction). If the flag 203f is set to on) and the latent state is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203f is set to off) and the "big hit D" is set after the jackpot game ends. If the player wins the game, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203f is set to ON) after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning.

That is, when the normal state or the probabilistic state is set as the game state, that is, when the game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol is an appropriate game, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed. If the jackpot is won, the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is not set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an inappropriate game.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, a ball is set in a jackpot game in which an opening operation scenario in which an opening operation (V opening pattern) in which a ball can pass through a specific area (V switch 650e3) is not set is set. When is passed through a specific area, it is determined as an abnormal game, and the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is completed. With this configuration, even if a malicious player illegally passes the ball to a specific area, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being given.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the big hit game is set is set according to the type of the special symbol won in the big hit and the game state at the time of the big hit winning. Therefore, it is possible not only to make the player expect to win the jackpot and play the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the game state at the time of winning. can.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number of jackpots is not limited to three, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of jackpot type selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type. It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0 to 0). It is configured to add 1 in order within 99), reach the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), and then return to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the first special of the RAM 203 is obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are set in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed. The type of small hit (small hit game content) is determined using the small hit type selection table (not shown).

In this embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit game that is executed when the small hit is won, the description of the small hit type selection table is omitted. When executing, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to specify different small hit types (small hit game contents) for the range of the values of the acquired small hit type counter C5.

In addition, it is configured to win a small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and different small hit types (small hit game) depending on the type of the special symbol won in the small hit. When the content) is set, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to specify different small hit types (small hit game contents) for each type of special symbol.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 19) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 19, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used in a state where a normal state is set as a game state, and a probability change table 202e2 used in a state where a probability change state is set. And the latency table 202e3 used in the state where the latency state is set are specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state is different, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202e1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is a second special symbol with respect to the variable time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery will be longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". Various normal reach per 20 seconds of fluctuation time are associated with the range of "51 to 100", and super reach A per 30 seconds of fluctuation time is associated with the range of "51 to 100". Super reach B per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range, and super reach C per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range of "151 to 198".

Further, when the lottery result is "missing" and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol when the lottery is executed is 0 or 1, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70". A long deviation of 12 seconds is specified in association with a long deviation of 12 seconds, a deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "71 to 150", and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in the range of "151 to 170". The out-of-order super reach A is associated with and defined, and the out-of-order super reach B with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of “171 to 198”.

Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol when the lottery is executed is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70" and the variation time is a short deviation of 8 seconds. Is specified in association with, and a long deviation of 12 seconds is specified in the range of "71 to 130", and a deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "131 to 170". The range of "171 to 185" is defined by the deviation super reach A having a variation time of 30 seconds, and the range of "186 to 198" is defined by the deviation super reach B having a variation time of 30 seconds. Has been done.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the longer the fluctuation time is set as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is smaller. are doing. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball enters the first entry port 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress the situation where the ball is thrown.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the variation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) is not related to the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Long hit fluctuation, long small hit fluctuation, long off fluctuation) are set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball can enter the second entrance 640. However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, a game in which the ball is put into the first ball entry port 64 during the normal state. That is, the game is configured to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (big hit B) other than that. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player. Therefore, the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even when the short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 21A. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 21A, the probability variation table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is " The range of "0 to 99" defines the normal fluctuation per 20 seconds of the fluctuation time, and the range of "100 to 198" defines the super fluctuation per 30 seconds of the fluctuation time. Further, in the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the deviation fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is defined in the entire range.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the fluctuation pattern (hit fluctuation, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. Small hit fluctuations, missed fluctuations) are stipulated.

As described above, in the probabilistic state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol than in the normal state. Further, it is configured so that the reserved memory of the second special symbol cannot be newly acquired (difficult) during the probabilistic state. Therefore, once the state changes to the probabilistic state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested in a short period of time.

Further, the fluctuation time (12 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol overlaps with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the probabilistic state by grasping the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Not limited to this, a variable time may be set so that the player can determine which gaming state is set.

Next, the contents of the latency table 202e3 provided in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 21B. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latency table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 21B, the latent probability table 202e3 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1. , If the fluctuation pattern (hit long fluctuation, missed long fluctuation) of 10 minutes is specified and the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the lottery result of the special symbol or the acquired variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second (hit short fluctuation, small hit short fluctuation, missed short fluctuation) is specified.

As a result, unlike other gaming states, the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol during the latent state. Therefore, the game state can be set so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to execute than the lottery of the first special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 15, the explanation will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for the low probability time of the normal symbol and the other for the high probability time where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time, and they are included in each. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (c). FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 230", and the normal symbol has a high probability. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 231".

That is, in the present embodiment, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (231/233) is stipulated to be high, and the normal symbol is specified. When the high probability state of is set, it is stipulated that the winning is performed with a higher probability (232/233) than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, that is, even when the latent probability state is set, it is easy to execute the winning game based on the winning of the normal symbol.

As a result, it is possible to easily allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the latent state, so that it is possible to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 32). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 54).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, using the acquired value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined with reference to the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the number of pending numbers is 0. It is stipulated that a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set in, and a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is set when the number of reserved pieces is 1 to 3. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the number of reserved symbols. It is stipulated to be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed based on the game state of the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is configured so that the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 differs depending on the set fluctuation time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol that makes it easy to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 54) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 52) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, game state storage area 203m, remaining ball timer Flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability change effective flag 203p, probability change effective timer 203r, discharge number counter 203s, time saving flag 203t, jackpot flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, small hit flag It has 203x, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3, and another memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry opening 640 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing various counter values.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 15) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), the counters C1 to C2 and C5 are used from the counter buffer. , CS1 values are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (starting prize), the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 are connected from the counter buffer as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value is acquired and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in the same manner.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a big hit lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above and corresponding to each start winning prize. The data corresponding to the start winning prize of is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 15) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) are stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start prize, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol winning lottery is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol hold is performed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is normally used. Shift to the symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first input detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball opening 64 or the second entry port 640. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 53). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

The MPU 201 is a value of each of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). When each is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing. (See S208 in FIG. 34) or in the second special symbol change start processing (S210 in FIG. 39), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). ), This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 53). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S2108 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see FIGS. 50 and S2005).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol. When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability state (probability change state or latent state) of the special symbol, and when it is off, it is in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. It shows that there is. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S2702 in FIG. 57). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S810 in FIG. 38 and S1510 in FIG. 45). In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high probability state (probability change state or latent state) of the special symbol after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the high probability state (probability change state or latent probability state) of the special symbol is set to the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Is determined by whether or not it has passed. Here, when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S2982 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, based on the probability variation flag 203g being set on (see S2702 in FIG. 57), it is set to off. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the ball has passed, the probability change is made. The setting flag 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the V switch 650e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the V switch 650e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round in the jackpot A). It is possible to determine whether all the balls that have won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 have been ejected from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the V switch 650e3 (see S2981 in FIG. 59). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of balls won in the V winning device 650 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S3011 in FIG. 60). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 and the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Is. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the V winning device 650, the ball is added and updated one by one (S2973 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the V winning device 650 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 650k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, as an opening operation scenario of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A, C, D, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to be on for 5 seconds 0.5 seconds after the first round game is started. The V-opening pattern to be used is specified.

By setting such an opening operation scenario, when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpots A, C, and D is executed, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 flows during the open state. The path solenoid 650k is set to ON, and the switching member 650h is switched so as to be in a communication state in which the ball can pass through the special discharge flow path 650e2. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball that has won the first attacker (V winning device) 650 to pass through the specific region (V switch 650e3).

On the other hand, in the jackpot B, an opening pattern (non-V opening pattern) in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to be on for 5 seconds 0.5 seconds after the start of the first round round game is defined. In the jackpot game corresponding to this jackpot B, as described above in FIG. 18, since the opening operation scenario for opening the first attacker (V winning device) 650 only in the first round is set, such an opening operation scenario is set. By doing so, when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is executed, the first attacker (V, which is the first round game) is in the closed state of the first attacker (V winning device) 650. The flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON after the opening operation period of the winning device) 650 has elapsed 0.5 seconds, and the switching member 650h is switched so as to be in a communication state in which the ball can pass through the special discharge flow path 650e2. .. Therefore, when the jackpot game of jackpot B is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3).

The game state storage area 203m is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state set after the jackpot game ends (probability change flag 203 g and time reduction flag 203t setting status). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to off and the time saving flag 203f is set to off, and the probability change state is set when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203f is set to on. It is stored, and the latent probability state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203f is set to off.

Further, in the state where the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, the hit game state (big hit state, small hit state) indicating that each hit game is being executed, and the executed big hit game. The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203m, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203m is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 53), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203m is set.

As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the current gaming state can be discriminated by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag for indicating that the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. Shows.

When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S3005 in FIG. 60). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and is the V winning device 650 or the variable winning device. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game ball in the device 65 to be ejected has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203o is the V winning device 650 or variable when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game ball winning in the winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed.

Here, if a specific description is made with reference to FIG. 6 using the configuration of the V winning device 650, the time required for the ball winning in the V winning device 650 to be ejected is 2 seconds. In the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the V winning device 650 and the number of ejections thereof match ( See S3007 in FIG. 60).

Then, if the number of winnings to the V winning device 650 and the number of dischargings do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given (see S3008 in FIG. 60). Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the ball is jammed in the V winning device 650. Further, it can be easily determined that an act of making a hole in the V winning device 650 and causing the ball to win a prize in the V winning device 650 using an illegal route (a route that is not measured as the number of winnings) is performed. Furthermore, by illegally leaving the ball in the V winning device 650 and giving an impact or the like at the start timing of one round so that the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, the jackpot game of jackpot B It is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of a game ball through the V switch 650e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on even if the ball passes through the V switch 650e3. It may be configured not to be set to. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special symbol from being illegally given a high-probability state.

The probabilistic valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 after the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off. When this probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON, the ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 6A) based on the flow path solenoid 650k being ON is the V switch 650e3. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3.

The probabilistic valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 650k is turned off by the probabilistic effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the V switch 650e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 650e2 to pass through the V switch 650e3 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probabilistic valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 after that, it is determined to be invalid and not to be determined to pass. There is.

As a result, when the switching member 650h is in a state where the special discharge flow path 650e2 is not communicated (a state in which the normal discharge flow path 650e1 is communicated), a ball is illegally inserted into the special discharge flow path 650e2 to the V switch 650e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as passing the ball, pushing the ball up from below the V switch 650e3 with a piano wire or the like to pass it, or causing the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of balls won in the V winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls are determined (FIG. 60S3011).

The time saving flag 203t is a flag for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and is set to ON when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. This time saving flag 203t is set to ON after the jackpot game is completed, corresponding to the winning jackpot type (S2704 in FIG. 57). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is set to off. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol continues at least until the next big hit is won. The configuration is not limited, and for example, when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit winning), or a predetermined lottery result. When the number of times (for example, a small hit) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), it may be configured to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, or the number of lottery of each symbol lottery may be When the predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned end conditions to be different depending on the winning jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning. As a result, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, how long will the high probability state of the normal symbol continue? Can be made difficult for the player to predict.

The jackpot flag 203u determines that the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot at the start of fluctuation based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. If this is the case, it is a flag that is set to on. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. It is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" sets the jackpot flag 203u on for the first special symbol, and "01" sets the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203u is set as off.

Here, the jackpot flag 203u is configured so that the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol can be discriminated separately. If either one of the second special symbols is set to ON first, even if the lottery result of the other is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203u corresponding to the jackpot of each special symbol is set to ON. ..

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are big hits. If you win, the jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display) is executed, and the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display). ), The other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can execute lottery of a plurality of special symbol types at the same time (in parallel) wins a big hit in the lottery of each special symbol, which is excessive for the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (big hit game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one of the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, by the time the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the other special symbol lottery will be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to win. In this case, it is advisable to use the variable time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed to execute a variable effect suggesting that the player has won a disadvantage. As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she has won the prize at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be enthusiastically executed during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set when the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won than when the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is won. As a result, while the one special symbol that has been won at the disadvantage is changed, the other special symbol lottery can be won at the advantage, and the winning result can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) before the winning result at the disadvantage. can.

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u that can separately store the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning) of the second special symbol is used, but the present invention is limited to this. No, a common jackpot flag is set for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203u is turned on when one of the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is won. It may be configured so that the jackpot is not won in the other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag 203u set to on.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variable display, and the first special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. It is set to on when the big hit of the symbol is executed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON in S802 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is set to off in the process of S902 of the second special symbol change start process (see S210 of FIG. 39).

This prevents the second special symbol that has been forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol from executing the lottery again when the jackpot symbol is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. be able to.

In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process related to the first special symbol is executed in one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), and then the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, the variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be executed without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot control process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. (S2404 in FIG. 55) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 33) is the variation processing for each special symbol (S204 to S204 in FIG. 33) when the current state is a big hit state or a small hit state (S201: Yes in FIG. 33). It is configured to skip S213).

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 33). In addition, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w. It is possible to prevent a new variation process for the second special symbol from being executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33).

The small hit flag 203x is a flag indicating that the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to be turned on when the small hit is won. This small hit flag 203x is set to on when the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1101 in FIG. 41), and when the special symbol fluctuation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1605 in FIG. 46).

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to be turned on when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit is stopped (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol change processing (FIG. 33) (see S202 in FIG. 33). When it is set to ON in the process of S202, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the same manner as during the change (FIG. 33). S203). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 203y of the special figure 1 is set to on. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) (S701: Yes in FIG. 37), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S509 in FIG. 36). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33). Is determined (see S206 in FIG. 33). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is 0 (S206: Yes in FIG. 33), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol being changed (S206: Yes in FIG. 33). (See S207 in FIG. 33) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 remains and is forcibly displayed. After the stop display is displayed, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 42). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 42). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S211 in FIG. 44) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33). Is determined (see S212 in FIG. 33). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is 0 (S212: Yes in FIG. 33), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212: Yes in FIG. 33) for stopping the second special symbol being changed ( (See S213 in FIG. 33) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S805 of FIG. 38). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 after the stop display is displayed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a. It drives a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to drive the front side as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650. A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k for driving the solenoid and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 52) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 24A, at least the variation pattern selection table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (b). As shown in FIG. 24B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, effect counter 223j, slave state setting area 223k, and other memory areas 223z. At least it is provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 63) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become like.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 11A) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on the reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, 1 is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 52).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 31, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 75) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of drawing an image is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 74).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In FIG. 26, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 26 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 26 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 26 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 26 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing “ FIG. 27B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 28 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 27, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 28 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 28A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 28B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 28 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 28 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 27 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the rear surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 28 (a), and the image data corresponding to the rear image between FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b) excluding FIG. 28 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 28A to 28B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 28 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 28 (b) to (c) and 28 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 28 (b) to (c) and 28 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 28 (b) to (c) and 28 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 25) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the corresponding data is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the error occurs from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is a production to notify the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 30). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 30).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, in the example of FIG. 30). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 74) (see S6005 in FIG. 74). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 86 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 76 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 76 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 76B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 76 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 77 to 82) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 83 to 85) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 86 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 31) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 76 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 85) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 31) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 31, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 76 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 83). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 75) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 87). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 87). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 88).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 76 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 82 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 87), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 87). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 82 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S7221 in FIG. 83), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 78 (a), S6705 in FIG. 79 (a), S6805 in FIG. 79 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 80). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 83) (S7214 in FIG. 83), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 787, S6705 in FIG. 79 (a), S6805 in FIG. 79 (b), FIG. See S6905 of 80). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 60. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (479, 99, 239, 232, 99 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the entry of the ball into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 49.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 33 and S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determinations are made by predetermined control. In the variable display mode, various commands for controlling the variable display to be possible on the first symbol display device 37 and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Control is executed to set or stop and display the determination result (hit / fail determination result) in the display mode. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 33, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 33, S104), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (big hit in progress) or the small hit game is in progress (small hit in progress) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203m, it is determined whether the current state of the game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit).

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the temporary stop flag 203y in FIG. 1 is set to ON (S202), and then ON. When it is determined that the setting is set to (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (the first special symbol (special figure 1 in the present embodiment)) is displayed. Update (S203), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is not set to ON (S202: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to be turned on when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, while the small hit game is being executed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed on the first symbol display device 83.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed with the start of the small hit game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted when the first special symbol change in the inside disappears. As a display mode for indicating that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal fluctuation display is in progress (for example, at 0.2 second intervals). It may be the same display mode as the blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated, or a display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is in progress (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals). A blinking display mode in which the above is repeated) may be used. Further, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be capable of displaying a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during the temporary stop is used. Is also good.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the current time is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is larger than 0, that is, the first. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S204). If it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203a2 of the special figure 1 is larger than 0) (S204: Yes), the process during execution of the variation of the first special symbol is executed (S204: Yes). S205).

In this first special symbol change execution processing (S205), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Processing is executed. Then, when the processing of S205 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first fluctuation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol fluctuation executing processing (S205) is 0 (S206), and S206 If it is determined in the process that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is 0 (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S207), and the process proceeds to the process of S209 described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. If it is determined in the processing of S206 that the fluctuation time counter 203a2 in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is not larger than 0 (0) in the processing of S204 (S204: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol change start processing is executed (S208). In this first special symbol change start processing (S208), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S208) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36.

After executing the first special symbol change start process (S208), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing (S206: No) in the process of S206, or after performing the first special symbol change stop process (S207). After the execution, next, the variation processing (S209 to S213) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is larger than 0 (S209). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), it means that the current is not in the special figure 2 change. In addition, a second special symbol change start process (S210) for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S210), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data are performed. The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S210), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current special figure 2 is changing (S209: Yes), then the second The processing during execution of the special symbol change is executed (S211). The content of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, but the process having the same content as the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is to be processed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution processing (S211) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is 0 (S212), and if it is determined to be 0 (S212). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S213), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S212 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is not 0 (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), it is defined in the second special symbol during the variation display. When the variation time has elapsed, the process of stopping the variation display is executed with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol change stop processing (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. The process is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 33, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S204 to S208) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S209 to S213) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed before (priority) the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In this embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed in preference to the variable process relating to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (destroying) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol variation start processing (S208), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 33, S104), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S208).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S208 in FIG. 34), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). ).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is executed in the execution area. The process of shifting to the side in order is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, it is a high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), S401 is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 17A). It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the above process matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), it is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 17A). , It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

After finishing the processing of S403 or S404, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203u is set to on (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the processing of S406, the information indicating the jackpot is set for the region corresponding to the first special symbol in the jackpot flag 203u.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 73 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S407). S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the out-of-design symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 73 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 35).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 18) and the acquired first hit type counter. The jackpot type is determined based on the value of C2 (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the current gaming state (normal state, latent state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203m is acquired. , Probability change state), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S506).

Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the selected variation pattern is set. The value indicating the fluctuation time of No. 1 is set to the value of the fluctuation time counter 203a2 in FIG. 1 (S509), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. Skip and move to the process of S503.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change execution processing (S205). In this first special symbol change execution process (S205), a process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution and a special interrupted due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

In the first special symbol change executing process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from the small hit winning to the small hit game). (Period until the end of the game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted again.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small hit game of one. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery is not discarded based on the fact that one special symbol lottery wins the small hit game, for example, by winning the small hit, the big hit is won. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery result (the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small hit winning) is discarded.

If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to off (S703), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated. ..

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation execution process (see S104 in FIG. 33) in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) executed every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to execute (see S205 in FIG. 33), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is not set to ON in the processing of S701 (S701: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Skips the processing of S702 and S703 and shifts to the processing of S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) determines that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). This is the process that is executed when it has elapsed.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207 in FIG. 38) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u is set to on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on (S802), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set (S803).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S804), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is set to 0 (S805). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) can be displayed.

After finishing the processing of S805, next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol is set to ON (S806), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S806: Yes), the above is described. In order to adapt the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol to the 2nd special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the processing of S804, the jackpot flag 203u for the 2nd special symbol was set to off (S807). ), The stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. On the other hand, in the process of S806, if it is determined that the big hit has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of S807 and 808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S809.

In the processing of S809, first, the jackpot scenario won in this special symbol change is set (see 809), and then the jackpot flag 202u, the probability change flag 203f, and the time saving flag 203t corresponding to the first special symbol are set to off. (S810), information indicating that the current gaming state is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203m (S811). The game state storage area 203m is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, probability change state, latent state) and the game state related to the winning game (big hit medium, small hit medium) can be stored separately. By executing the process of S811, the game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

When the processing of S811 is completed, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S812), and the first special symbol display device is set. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed in 37 is executed (S813), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S811 is skipped and the above-mentioned S812 Move to processing.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), the process (S809 to S813) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. If the lottery result this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S804). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, by configuring to execute the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating a big hit. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) ( In S405: Yes) of FIG. 35, the fluctuation of the other special symbol may be forcibly disengaged and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly disengaged and stopped to execute a special fluctuation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol of the other is forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won with the special symbol of one. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed, and prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Not limited to, for example, even if it is configured to suspend the other special symbol change until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, and to restart the interrupted special symbol change after the end of the jackpot game. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discarding of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. However, for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (out-of-order fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is out of order, the lottery may be performed. In the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for discarding the result and executing the forced stop processing for forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether the new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is restarted after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play games. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a second special symbol variation start process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S210).

When the second special symbol change start process (S210) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w is set to ON (S901). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33)). )) Determines whether or not the jackpot was won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S9011: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is skipped. The fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to off (S902), and this processing is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol change after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 33)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), if the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is subsequently executed. The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), and the jackpot game is completed by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 33) is not executed until this is done.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by a missed symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. In order to prevent new fluctuations (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set and the fluctuation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), do not win the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured, and for example, when the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203w may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change start process (see S210 in FIG. 39) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w set to ON, the change of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured to skip the process, that is, not to start a new fluctuation (keep the second special symbol stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on without limitation. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using the special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The content of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols is configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 side as appropriate. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 is configured to be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used on the third symbol display device 81, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S901: No in FIG. 39), The processes of S903 to S909 are executed, and this process is terminated. In the processes of S903 to S909, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol hold are performed for each of the above-mentioned first special symbol change start processes (S208 in FIG. 34) from S301 to S307. The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), and the second special symbol holding ball number. For the counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909). Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39), will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35). And some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408. When the target is changed from special figure 1 (first special symbol) to special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the process of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the process of, and the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. The difference is that the processing to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), if it is determined that the lottery this time is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. do.

This special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) is a processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a deviation. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but if the lottery result is out of order, the same process as the process of S409 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of FIG. 35) described above is executed. If the lottery result is a small hit, the process corresponding to the small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation processing (S1009).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009), first, is the lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S905 in FIG. 40)) a small hit? Is determined (S1101).

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that a small hit has been won (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1103). ), Next, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 2 deviation change process (S1009 in FIG. 41) executed as one process of the second special symbol change start process (see S210 in FIG. 39), that is, the change in the special symbol (lottery). By setting the small hit flag 203x to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting, the setting status of the small hit flag 203x at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39), will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39). The contents of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43) will be described.

When the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, the determination is executed based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S905 in FIG. 40).

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. However, for example, a plurality of types are not set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the small hit type can be set, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined for the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1302 and S1303 are provided. It may be configured to select a different small hit type depending on the processing of.

By configuring the processing of S1302 and S1303 to be used even though there is only one type of small hit as in the present embodiment, for example, the specifications of the game can be changed during the development period of the pachinko machine 10. Even if it is changed, it is possible to easily respond to the change.

After finishing the processing of S1303, the variation pattern selection table according to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 are used for small hits. The fluctuation pattern (small hit fluctuation pattern) of is selected (S1305). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1305 is set (S1306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result is not a small hit (out of order) (S1301: No), the process (S1307 to S1309) of the case where the lottery result is out of order is executed. In the process of S1307, first, the variation pattern selection table according to the gaming state is read (S1307), the variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and the special variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so as not to win a small hit, in the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S211) is performed. (See S205 in FIG. 37), is the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y) set when a small hit is won (execution of a small hit game) in the other special symbol set to ON? The difference is that the process of determining is omitted, and other than that, the process is the same except that the target of the process is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so the detailed description thereof is omitted. ..

If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it means that the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (the small hit game is executed). A flag for indicating (for example, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag) is provided, and in this second special symbol change executing process, the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol change executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37). Just run.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big hit is changed, and the process of setting the flag for stopping the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted.

That is, the point that the processing of S802 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) was deleted, and the point that the processing target of S801 and S803 to S813 was changed to the second special symbol (S1501 and S1503 to S1513). And, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off-off stop process (S1508) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation stop process (S1508) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). This special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508) corresponds to a case where the lottery result acquired in the second big hit determination process (see S905 in FIG. 40) is other than a big hit (small hit or miss). It executes stop processing.

When the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S1601: Yes). , The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to on (S1602), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to on is set (S1603). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been temporarily stopped is provided. A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the command is output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 46, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S1603, next, a small hit scenario (opening operation scenario for small hits) corresponding to the small hit game is set (S1604), the small hit flag 203x is set to off (S1605), and the game state is set. The hit information indicating that the small hit game is in progress (small hit) is stored in the storage area 203 m (S1606), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the small hit (small hit symbol). A special figure 2 confirmation command for indicating that is set (S1607), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped to fluctuate (confirmed display) with a small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 203x is set to off in the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), it is shown that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the deviation (disengaged symbol). The special figure 2 confirmation command of No. 2 is set (S1609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display) at the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and in parallel to be executed. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variable time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a ball has entered (starting winning) in either the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640, and if the starting winning is won, the start winning process is suspended. Up to the maximum number of balls (up to 4 in each of the first ball slot 64 and the second ball slot 640), the acquired counter values can be used in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process to store in each.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored. Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry opening 64 (starting winning), which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64. It is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first start port (the number of hold of the lottery right of the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls of 203a (S1706).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1707). The first look-ahead process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of discriminating a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without a hitch, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the hit / fail determination result and the determined fluctuation pattern for all the reserved storages stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, It may be configured to execute a process for determining the stop type and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, but the lottery right (winning information) of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. ) May be configured to be determined in advance.

Then, when the process of S1707 is executed, the process of S1708 is executed next. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit at present. When it is determined that the value is (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1708.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead process (S1707) based on the added information regarding the winning prize (winning information) is performed. It is configured to be executed, but is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1703). : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that it can be done. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. Further, since it is possible to add value when a ball is put into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play when a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the number of balls has reached the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1708 to S1714 is the same as the process performed for winning a ball to the first starting port (first ball entry port 64) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. The only difference is that the process of is executed for the second ball entry port 640, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1713.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 of FIG. 48), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area in the area where the winning order is the smallest (S1822).

Next, the hit / fail determination result is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the look-ahead hold storage area. Here, both the winning / failing determination in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol and the winning / failing determination in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol are determined. This is a jackpot judgment based on the timing when a new hold storage occurs (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since there is a time lag with the execution timing, it is possible to predict the game state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing when the jackpot judgment based on the newly reserved winning information is executed. Because it is difficult.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel). Moreover, since the variable time set corresponding to the lottery result of each special symbol is set to be variable depending on the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) at the time of lottery of the special symbol, each special symbol is set. This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of the game starts.

Then, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is a big hit (big hit only in the low probability state, big hit only in the high probability state, big hit in any of the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the big hit A first winning command indicating the winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and the jackpot type when winning is set (S1824), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of order in both the high probability state and the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the omission is set. (S1825), this process is terminated.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is used as common information in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result). Information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed to a different color from the usual one). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the look-ahead process is executed, the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol and the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each determination is determined. It is configured to set a winning command based on, but is not limited to this, for example, a judgment value that is determined to be a big hit regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The value of the random number counter C1 per first) may be specified, and a winning command indicating a big hit of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the pass / fail judgment. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a constant fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored in the hold.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110 (is not limited to this). Even if the information indicating the content (each counter value) of the hold storage) is set as the winning command and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the specific look-ahead process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress unnecessary control from being executed by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled is illegally acquired by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1714). The second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 47) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 46) in which a ball enters the first start port (first entry port 64) (starting prize). While the process is to determine (pre-read) the pending data (winning information) in advance and make various judgments, the second start is based on the winning information based on the start winning of the target to be judged at the first starting port. The only point is that the winning information is based on the start winning of the opening (second entry opening 640), and the same processing is performed for the others, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 of FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit. (S2001). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640 is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used. The value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information to be used for the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203t is on, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S2008), and it is determined that the time saving flag 203t is set to on. (S2008: Yes) acquires a hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (c)) for high probability, and proceeds to the process of S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203t is off (S2008: No), the hit / fail determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (c)) for the low probability time. Is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" is "○". The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern using the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S2014.

Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol (process of S2014) will be described using the contents specified in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f (normal symbol holding number), and the normal symbol holding number. It is configured to be variable based on. Then, the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 differs depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the ball passes through the through gate 67, flows down in the flow path unit 3660, and is configured so that the ball can enter the second entry port 640. The ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after 1.6 seconds, and whether the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the second entry port 640. Whether or not it is configured to be switchable according to the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22) defines a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. Then, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a winning game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.8 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds (usually). The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game per normal figure is completed by the time the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, so that the ball is It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640.

On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a different fluctuation time is set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol (value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f). When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified as 30 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified. A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is specified as the fluctuation time.

Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the time when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 (passes through the through gate 67). Since the normal symbol fluctuation (30-second fluctuation) is being executed (1.6 seconds after that), the ball is configured so that it cannot enter the second entry port 640. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the time when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 (through gate 67). Since the game is executed per normal figure (1.6 seconds after passing through), the ball is configured to be able to enter the second entrance 640.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the second entry port 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball to the second entry port can be changed. Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

Further, as described above, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640 regardless of whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, even in a gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, but the variation pattern of the normal symbol is not limited to this, for example, acquisition. It may be configured so that a different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display (S2002: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (S2015), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the processing of S2016, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol of child crying is not a hit (missing) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640 in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol (timing of processing S2008 to S2011). Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery process) relating to the normal symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process relating to the special symbol (lottery process). The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the normal symbol may be determined at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high-probability state of the electric accessory 640a is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open (opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. As a result, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the processing of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), then, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol. In addition, when it is determined whether the time saving flag 203f is on (S2018) and the time saving flag 203f is not on (off), that is, when it is determined that the present is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S2018: No), as an opening pattern for a low-probability state of a normal symbol, an opening pattern "0.7 seconds x 1 time" that executes opening for 0.7 seconds once is set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203f is set to ON (S2018: Yes), the opening for 0.8 seconds is executed once as the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol. The opening pattern "0.8 seconds x 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds x 1 time) is larger than the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds x 1 time). , The electric accessory 640a is configured to be open for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the winning game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is more advantageous to the player than the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (No. 1). 2 The period in which the ball entry port 640 is open is extended).

Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high-probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is set, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Except for the probabilistic state (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter.

Here, as described above, when a fluctuation time with a long fluctuation time (for example, 60,000 ms) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a does not operate during that time, so that the electric accessory 640a is hit right in the meantime. Approximately 50% of the game balls will win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, by selecting a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the probabilistic state, the number of winnings to the second entrance 640 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 16C, during the probabilistic state, the jackpot D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, and the jackpot which is more advantageous than the jackpot in the first special symbol is selected. Will be done. Therefore, during the definite game, the lottery with the second special symbol can be more advantageous to the player when the big hit is obtained than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the winning of the second ball opening 640 during the probability change state, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the through gate passage processing execution (S107) executed in the first embodiment is performed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see (b2) in FIG. 11), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and when the ball has passed. , The second is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined to be in the normal state (S2012), it means that the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103), and S2106 is set. Move to the processing of.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification process is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a firing abnormality. The first abnormality notification mode (see FIG. 11A) is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is probable. It is determined whether it is a state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and if it is determined to be a probabilistic state (S2104: Yes), a second notification command indicating a firing abnormality is issued. It is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not in the probable change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106 as it is.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 The second abnormality notification mode (see FIG. 12B) indicating the firing abnormality is displayed at.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, in order to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being performed. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the gaming area beyond the variable display device unit 80), the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed, FIG. 11 (a) or FIG. 12 (b). ), It is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, but the right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, it is detected that the sphere is in contact with the distribution member 700 (see FIG. 2) (displacement of the distribution member 700). A detection means or a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with a strength (operation amount) sufficient to launch a ball into the right-handed region may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 51, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S2103 to S2105, the processing of S2106 is executed next. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol). Has not reached the upper limit value) (S2107).

If it is determined in the process of S2107 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2108), a command for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (a command for indicating the value (M) of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal symbol 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set normally. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2201) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 53), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2302). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if it is not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2312 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S2312. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2312). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, interrupts are permitted (S2311). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 54), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 33) and the start winning process (see FIG. 47) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 54), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various items are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 55) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. The command for executing the jackpot effect is set, and the jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is executed (. S2404).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. In this jackpot control process (S2404), the specific winning openings 65a and V winning openings 650a are used for each round of the jackpot state. (Hereinafter referred to as a winning opening, etc.), the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) has elapsed, or the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) has passed. ) To determine if the specified number of balls have won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning openings and the like (specific winning openings 65a, V winning openings 650a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning openings and the like (specific winning openings 65a, V winning openings 650a) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the small hit control process related to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In this small hit control process (2405), for the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game, a predetermined scenario (small) is set as a period for opening the V winning opening 650a and a period for closing the V winning opening 650a. The process for setting based on the hit scenario) is executed. note that. The detailed contents of the small hit control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640 attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (S2406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 50), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39), the variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 39) is completed. , The variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38). ), The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S507. In the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (out of place symbol) indicating a miss. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 50), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 50), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 50). (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process is shifted to S2401 and each process after S2401 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2411, S2412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2411 (S2412). In the process of S2412, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random value counter CINI1 and the second initial value random value counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random value counter CINI1 and the second initial value random value counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variable type counter CS1 and the normal figure variable type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is possible to execute an illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the process of S2409, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 52 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S2413 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2413), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2415), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2409 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2301). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. This is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening or the like (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S809 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 of FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set. If so, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), the opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a jackpot in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is lengthened, and in the case of a jackpot in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the current is the jackpot of the special symbol (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information about the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203m is read out and the determination is performed.

As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 56, but the process corresponding to the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (variable winning device 65, V winning device 65, and switching member 650h). Operation processing) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one of the processes in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 55), will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. Read the operation scenario (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). After that, this process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is executed for the first attacker (V winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a second attacker (variable winning device 65). It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation, and the above-mentioned processing of S2642 is one round of the round games that open the first attacker (V winning device 650). It is specified only in the open motion scenario corresponding to the round game of the eyes. Therefore, when executing other round games, a scenario in which the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 650k is opened in the corresponding opening operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge flow path 650e2). Is not specified, so the process of S2642 is skipped.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes in FIG. 55), a round for showing that a new round game is executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured so that the progress status for the jackpot game being executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round of the round game is currently in progress.

In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command containing only information indicating that a new round game has been started. In this case, a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and what round is the round game executed this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side? Is calculated, and the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With such a configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. In the process of S2504, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k (S2506). When it is determined that the operation timing is set (S2506: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k is set to ON (S2508). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the final round in the jackpot game (10th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment) which is the ball ejection time. When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2511). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2512), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through a specific area (V switch 650e3) during the jackpot game, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set or won based on the determination result. A process of setting a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed based on the jackpot type.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S2701). If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2701: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S2702), and the process proceeds to S2703. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the fact that the probability variation flag 203g is set to on.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with electric support, that is, whether or not the jackpot type is set to turn on the time saving flag 203t after the jackpot ends (S2703). In the process of S2703, the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203m (information indicating that the jackpot is medium or small, and if the jackpot is in progress, the information indicating the set jackpot type and the jackpot). Based on the information indicating the game state at the time of winning), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203t is set to be on after the end of this big hit.

In the processing of S2703, if it is determined that the jackpot type is a type with electric support (a type for setting a high probability state of a normal symbol) (S2703: Yes), the time saving flag 203t is set to ON (S2703: Yes). S2704), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not a type with electric support (a type for setting a low probability state of a normal symbol) (S2703: No), the processing of S2704 is skipped and the present. End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S2701: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. That is, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 and set a high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, until the jackpot game is completed, the player can be expected to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the ball can be passed through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, whether or not the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game. You can play the game with interest in the crab.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game (when the probability variation setting flag 203h is not set to ON), it is special after the jackpot game is completed. Neither the high-probability state of the symbol nor the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set. That is, even if a V opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3) during the jackpot game) is set in the opening operation scenario of the jackpot game to be executed, the ball is set during the jackpot game. If the player does not pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3), the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player is set.

With this configuration, when the V opening pattern is set as the opening operation scenario, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to pass the ball to a specific region (V switch 650e3). In addition, by making it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the V opening pattern is set, the player is enthusiastically played even for a jackpot game in which the V opening pattern is not set as the opening operation scenario. be able to.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S2511: No), the winning process is executed (S2513). Here, the winning process (S2513) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S2513).

In the winning process (S2513 in FIG. 59), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S2971). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S2971: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S2971: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has passed. When it is determined that the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has passed (S2972: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S2973). After that, the process of S2974 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball detection switch 650c1 has not passed (S2972: No), the process of S2973 is skipped and the process of S2974 is executed.

In the process of S2974, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2974). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2974: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set (S2976). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S2977), and the process of S2978 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown during the ball ejection time after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2974, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S2974: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S2975). .. If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2975: Yes), the process of S2976 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2975: No), the process of S2978 is executed.

In the process of S2978, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S2978). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S2978: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S2979). It is determined whether the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S2980). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S2980: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S2981), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2982).

After that, the process of S2983 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2980, if it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the V switch 650e3 (S2980: No), the process of S2983 is executed. In the process of S2983, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2983). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off (S2984), the probability change valid flag 203p is set to on (S2985), and then this process is terminated. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, even after the switching member 650h is switched, if the ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V switch 650e3, a special symbol is displayed. It can be controlled so that the high probability state of is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2978, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2978: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S2896). If it is determined that the probabilistic valid flag 203p is off (S2986: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2896 that the probability change valid flag 203p is on (S2896: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change valid timer 203r to update (S2987).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203r after the update has reached the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S2988). When it is determined that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S2988: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to off (S2989), and the probabilistic valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value 0 (S2990). .. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2988 that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S2988: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2980.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 until the probability variation effective timer 203r reaches the upper limit value, so that the probability of the special symbol is high in consideration of the ball brushing time. You can set the state. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for which the ball is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the V switch 650e3 from illegally passing the ball and giving a high probability state of the special symbol.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. When the winning process (S2513 in FIG. 59) is completed, the abnormal process is then executed (S2514), and the present process is terminated. Here, the exception handling (S2514) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S2514). This abnormality processing (S2514) is a processing for monitoring whether or not the V switch 650e3 is illegally passed.

In the abnormality handling (S2514), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S3001). If it is outside the round validity period (S3001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S3001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S3003). After that, the process of S3004 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002: No), the process of S3004 is executed.

In the process of S3004, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S3004). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S3004: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S3004: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S3005) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S3006). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S3006: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the upper limit value (S3006: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharged pieces counter 203s) and the number of winning numbers (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S3007).

If it is determined that they match (S3007: Yes), the process of S3009 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S3007: No), an error command is set (S3008). After that, the process of S3009 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the V winning device 650 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the V switch 650e3.

In the process of S3009, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S3009), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S3010). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S3011), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 73, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 61, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 62). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 62), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, the command determination processing (S4111) that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. 1 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), has the reserved ball number command been received from the main control device 110? Determine (S4207). Here, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) of the received reserved ball number command is analyzed, and the voice is input. The value of the corresponding counter provided in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113 is updated (S4208). Specifically, when the reserved ball number command of the first special symbol is received, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the first special). The number of reserved balls in the symbol variation display) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

When the reserved ball number command of the second special symbol is received, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol). The number of reserved balls) is extracted, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value. Further, when the reserved ball number command of the normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol). Is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, in the hold ball number command, the ball enters various entry ports (first entry port 64, second entry opening 640, through gate 67) (starting prize), and the value of various hold ball number counters. Is added, or when the value of the various reserved ball count counters is subtracted when executing various fluctuation start processes, it is transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the start prize or the fluctuation display is displayed. At each setting time, by the processing of S4208, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the main control device. It can be adjusted to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of 110.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the various reserved ball count counters 223c, 223d, and 223m possessed by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the various reserved ball count counters 203d, 203e, 203f of the main control device 110. Even if this happens, if the start winning prize, the variable display setting, that is, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the change of the hold ball number change, the various hold ball number counters 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, The values of 223d and 223m can be modified to match the values of various reserved ball count counters 203d, 203e and 203f of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S4207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4210), and this processing is terminated. This winning command processing (S4210) analyzes the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and the storage area corresponding to the analysis result. The process of storing (storing) in (the winning information storage area 223b in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113) and the processing for executing the effect (look-ahead effect) based on the received winning information are performed. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

If it is determined in the process of S4209 that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4211: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4212), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent state) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the winning game state (high hit, small hit) in the secondary state setting area 223k is executed.

Next, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the notification-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213), and the notification-related command is determined. (S4213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is determined (S4214), and the display command corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S4215). This process ends.

As the notification-related command determined in the process of S4213, for example, there is a command (notification command, second notification command, error command) for indicating an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 output from the main control device 110. In this way, for example, by independently providing an abnormality notification process (a process for setting a notification mode for indicating an abnormal state to the outside) to be executed when a command for indicating an abnormal state is received, for example. A low abnormal state in which a normal game can be executed while performing an abnormality notification process (for example, a state in which a right-handed game is performed in a normal state), or a high abnormality in which an abnormality notification process is performed and it becomes difficult to continue the game. When a state (for example, a state in which the number of balls won in the winning device and the number of balls discharged during the jackpot game are different) occurs, processing based on the rank of the generated abnormal state (corresponding to the possibility of continuing the game) It is possible to execute the abnormality notification process as soon as possible without performing the display process).

Next, when it is determined that the notification-related command has not been received in the process of S4213, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop-related command has been received (S4216). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has been received in the processing of S4216 (S4216), the fluctuation stop processing is executed (S4217), and this processing is terminated. A detailed description of this variable stop processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG. 70, but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110. And the process for setting the display mode of the variation effect using the fourth symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when the special symbol variation is executed as the period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even while the special symbol change is being executed based on the above, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation stop processing (S4217) on the voice lamp control device 113 side to stop the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in accordance with the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation status of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect status displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S4216, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the hit-related command has been received (S4218), and it is determined that the hit-related command has been received. In the case (S4218: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4219), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, but as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the production corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

If it is determined in the process of S4218 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4220), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 63) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received is performed by either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The discriminant order may be specified so as to be executed before the process of discriminating whether or not the command has been received.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). In this case, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36) is executed, the special diagram 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state is changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the latent probability state is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set a variation effect corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in a state where it is determined that the command has been performed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 side executes the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination and the fluctuation pattern setting, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 On the side, the process of determining the current gaming state is executed first, and then the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing process (S4202) will be described.

Special figure 1 When the fluctuation start processing is set, first. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to on (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223m (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304). If it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4304: No), the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable state, which is a special feature. FIG. 1 A display command indicating a main fluctuation pattern is set (S4305), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304: Yes), the game state is mainly the variation display of the second special symbol (of the first special symbol). (Because the variation display is a slave game state), a display command indicating the slave variation pattern in Special Figure 1 is set (S4306), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing process (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) is set, first. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223m (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4354). If it is determined in the processing of S4354 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4354: No), then the hit / fail determination information included in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received this time is included. Is information indicating a hit (whether or not the fluctuation in Special Figure 2 this time is a hit) (S4355), and if it is determined to be a hit (S4355: Yes), a command indicating an interrupt V effect. Is set (S4356), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S4355 that the change of the special figure 2 this time is not a hit (out of place) (S4355: No), the change display of the second special symbol is a subordinate gaming state. FIG. 2 A display command indicating a slave variation pattern is set (S4357), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (variation display of the first special symbol). (Because is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 2 is set (S4358), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are executed. While simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (variation display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the third symbol display device 81, each special symbol (first symbol) is set according to the game state to be set. By configuring the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence / absence of display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol to be variably set, the fluctuation status (lottery result and the number of fluctuations) can be changed at present. The player can easily understand the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallel) change (lottery), it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a state where one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) is displayed in the main variation, the other special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) that is displayed in the subordinate variation is drawn by lottery. When the result is a hit (big hit, small hit), an interrupt V effect that displays the lottery result on the subordinate variation display side in preference to the variation display effect executed as the main variation display (see FIG. 11B). ) Is executed.

With this configuration, when the lottery result on the dependent variation display side becomes a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, the lottery result can be reliably notified to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, as the interrupt V effect, the interrupt V effect is executed on the front side (the side that the player can see) of the variable display effect while the variable display effect corresponding to the main variable display is executed. Therefore, when the interrupt V effect is executed, it is not necessary to process the display data for executing the variation display effect corresponding to the main variation display.

Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed independently, so that the execution timing of each variable display becomes undefined. In the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, the interrupt V effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variation display effect corresponding to the main variation display.

It should be noted that a configuration that can notify the player of the lottery result on the dependent variation display side may be used, and a configuration different from this embodiment may be used. For example, the stop timing of the main variation display and the slave variation display (the fixed display timing of each special symbol) is determined, and as a result of the determination, the stop timing of the main variation display and the stop timing of the slave variation display are set for a predetermined period (for example). When it is determined that the time is within 1 second), the process of switching the stop display mode of the main variation display to the stop display mode indicating the lottery result of the sub-variation display may be executed.

With this configuration, the variable display effect (suggestion effect) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main variable display, and the stop display mode set based on the lottery result of the dependent variable display. , Will be displayed, and it is possible to perform an effect that is unexpected to the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned interrupt V effect, when the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main variation display is a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit win), or when an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed, or when an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. It may be configured not to be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is longer than a predetermined period. In this case, an effect showing the lottery result (big hit winning) of the special symbol corresponding to the dependent variation display is displayed. It is preferable to configure the jackpot game to start suddenly without executing it. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that the jackpot game is suddenly started during the execution of the variable effect display.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit D, small hit, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this process is terminated.

The stop type extracted in S4306 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the winning command process (S4210) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4210). This winning command process (S4210) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the type of the received winning command (first special symbol). , 2nd special symbol, normal symbol), the current game state, and the process for setting the effect (so-called look-ahead effect) to be executed when the winning command is received are executed.

When the winning command processing (S4210) is executed, first, it is analyzed which symbol type corresponds to based on the information included in the received winning command, and it is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4501). Then, whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state is determined based on the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k (S4502), and when it is determined to be the normal state (S4502: Yes), then. , It is determined whether the winning information indicating the jackpot (winning information indicating the special figure 2 jackpot) is stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the winning information storage area 223b. (S4503).

If it is determined in the processing of S4503 that there is winning information indicating a big hit (S4503: Yes), the notification lottery processing (S4504) is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4505. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a big hit (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4505.

The notification lottery process (S4504) executed in the process of S4504 is a second special symbol (special figure) which is a secondary variation display in the gaming state (normal state) in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main variation display. 2) This is a process for notifying the player whether or not there is a lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player in the hold memory (hold symbol), and the detailed explanation thereof is referred to FIG. 68. And will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S4502: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4505.

In the process of S4505, various processes executed in the winning command process are executed. Specifically, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the main variation display displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning / failing determination result included in the winning information (so-called). , Look-ahead effect) is executed, and the effect for showing the winning / failing judgment result included in the winning information of the specific reserved symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the main variation display is stored before the specific reserved symbol. Various processes are executed for executing an effect (so-called look-ahead continuous effect) to be executed even during the special symbol change period corresponding to the reserved symbol.

Next, the notification lottery process (S4504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this notification lottery process (S4504). This notification lottery process (S4504) is executed in the winning command processing (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is held storage (winning information) on the dependent variation display side. ) Is used to set the effect using the discrimination result (preliminary discrimination result).

When the notification lottery process (S4504) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S4551), and it is determined whether the acquired value of the effect counter 223j is a specific determination value (for example, 0 to 14). (S4552). When it is determined in the process of S4552 that it is a specific determination value (S4552: Yes), a display mode command for setting the special figure 2 holding area (small area Dm5) into a suggestion mode (see FIG. 11A) is used. Set (S4553) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4552 that the determination value is not a specific value (S4552: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

By displaying the special figure 2 holding area (small area Dm5) suggestion mode (see FIG. 11A) by this notification lottery process (S4504), the player is given a special symbol lottery on the side of the variable display. It makes you think that you will win a big hit, and you can be interested in the special symbol change on the side of the dependent change display side.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation time set for the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuation in the normal state is set to a long time (10 minutes), the special figure 2 which is a dependent fluctuation display. The player may stop the game without seeing the result of the fluctuation (lottery). In such a case, the jackpot is won by displaying the area (special figure 2 holding area (small area Dm5)) indicating the number of reserved balls on the dependent variation display side in the suggested mode (see FIG. 11A). It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the game is stopped while leaving the reserved memory.

In the present embodiment, in the winning command processing (see S4210 in FIG. 67), when the winning information of the special symbol (special drawing 2) on the dependent variation display side includes information indicating a big hit, a notification lottery is performed. It is configured to execute the process (see S4504 in FIG. 68), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning information of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the dependent variation display side includes information indicating a big hit. Even if it is not (in the case of deviation), it is a specific value (301 to 310) within the range indicating the deviation in the predetermined execution condition (for example, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is out of range). When the condition) is satisfied, the notification lottery process (see S4504 in FIG. 68) may be executed.

With this configuration, even if the reserved memory on the dependent variable display side does not include the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won, the area indicating the number of reserved balls on the dependent variable display side (special). FIG. 2 It is possible to change the display mode of the reserved area (small area Dm5)) to the suggested mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the region showing the number of reserved balls on the slave fluctuation display side (special figure 2 holding region (small area Dm5)) is changed to the suggested mode, until the number of reserved balls on the slave fluctuation display side becomes 0. It is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received, the content of the winning information included in the received winning command is determined, and various effects (look-ahead effects) are executed based on the determination result. However, a means for discriminating information regarding the fluctuation timing of each special symbol may be added to this configuration so that the look-ahead effect is executed only for the winning information that satisfies the condition that the look-ahead effect is possible.

That is, the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the change of the first special symbol (lottery) and the change of the second special symbol (lottery) at the same time (in parallel), and further, one of the special symbols. When a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit) is obtained due to the change (lottery) of, the change (lottery) of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped by the lottery result indicating a loss. ing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, even if the winning information included in the received winning command includes information indicating a big hit, the winning information including the information indicating the big hit includes the information indicating the big hit. By the time the corresponding special symbol change was executed, there was a case where the jackpot was won by the other special symbol change. Further, when the other special symbol change is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the jackpot (big hit symbol) during the execution of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information including the information indicating the jackpot. In some cases, the lottery result of the special symbol change (big hit change that wins the big hit) during execution may be changed out of the way.

Therefore, if the look-ahead effect is configured to be configurable for all received winning commands, the content of the executed look-ahead effect and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol will be different, and the player will be asked. There was a problem that the reliability of the production was lowered and the interest of the game was lowered.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol is analyzed based on the prize information included in the prize command, and each special symbol corresponding to the reserved prize information is analyzed. The timing at which the fluctuation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display timing) is calculated, and based on the calculation result, other special symbols (special symbols corresponding to the winning commands to be received in the future) are displayed by the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. ) Should be configured to execute the look-ahead effect for the winning command that is determined not to be stopped and displayed.

In this case, specifically, the remaining period of each special symbol change during execution and the length of the fluctuation time set for each special symbol in hold storage are extracted, and the stop display timing of the special symbol is time-series. When it is determined that the change of the other special symbol that has already been held and stored is executed at the specific stop display timing of one special symbol, the look-ahead effect execution condition is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be determined that it has been established. As a result, when the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead effect is received, the game can be executed without causing discomfort to the player.

Next, the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S422). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the first according to the set gaming state. 3 The process for setting different display modes displayed on the symbol display device 81 is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4212) will be described.

When the state command process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state. Set the setting command (S4603), set the display command indicating the normal mode (S4604), store (set) the information indicated by the status command received this time in the subordinate status setting area 223k (S4610), and perform this process. finish.

Here, the command set in the process of S4603 and the process of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only, based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discrimination means for determining the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discrimination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data already set is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In this embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is If it is determined whether the game is in the latent state (S4605) and the gaming state is in the latent state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the latent state) (S4605: Yes), the latent state is determined. The main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), and the display command indicating the full power mode is set (S4607). The process proceeds to the processing of S4610.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the game state after the change is not the latent state (the state command received this time is not the command indicating the latent state), that is, when the state command indicating the probable change state is received. (S4605: No) sets the main display area setting command corresponding to the probability change state (S4608), sets the display command indicating the ascending mode (S4609), and proceeds to the process of S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a fluctuation stop process (S4217), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing (S4217). This variable stop processing (S4217) sets a display mode when a variable stop related command (a command set when the stop is displayed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main control device 110. The process for doing this is executed.

When the fluctuation stop processing (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S213 in FIG. 45) of the main controller 110. (See S1503 in FIG. 45).

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the full power mode is being executed). Then (S4702), if it is determined that the state is latent (S4702: Yes), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command for stopping the follow-up fluctuation is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 13A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the state is not latent (S4702: No), a display command for stopping fluctuation corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command is set in the process of S4704, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the back of the interrupt V effect (see FIG. 11 (b)). Further, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4705.

Next, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the variable stop-related command received this time is the special figure 2 variable stop command (S4705). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed by a big hit in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 of FIG. 38) of the main controller 110. (See S803 in FIG. 38).

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the full power mode is being executed). If it is determined that the state is latent (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709. When the display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set in the process of S4707, the second special symbol is displayed as the lottery result display mode 813 (FIG. 13 (b)) in which the treasure box 812 displayed in the full power mode is opened and displayed. It is forcibly removed, and a display mode (for example, the character of "happening occurrence") indicating that the first special symbol has been won as a big hit is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that the state is not latent (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4708), and the process proceeds to the process of S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 11A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment. If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4709.

In the process of S4709, it is determined whether the variable stop-related command received this time is the special figure 1 temporary stop command (S4709). This special figure 1 temporary stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed by a small hit in the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see S1514 of FIG. 46) of the main controller 110. (See S1603 in FIG. 46).

If it is determined in the process of S4709 that the temporary stop command of the special figure 1 has been received (S4709: Yes), a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special figure 1 is set (S4710), and the process proceeds to the process of S4711. If it is determined that the temporary stop command has not been received (S4709: No), the process of S4710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4711.

When a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special figure 1 is set in the process of S4710, the small display area Dm1 is set to the small display area Dm1 in accordance with the timing when the small hit symbol (for example, "341") is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2. The temporary stop is displayed in a display mode (for example, "331") indicating that the temporary stop is in progress. Here, the temporary stop display is a display control that swings to the extent that the player thinks that the fourth symbol is stopped, unlike the definite display that completely stops the display mode.

Next, in the process of S4711, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop-related command received this time is the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S4711). This special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set when the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is restarted in the first special symbol change execution processing (see S205 of FIG. 37) of the main control device 110. This is a command (see S702 in FIG. 37).

If it is determined in the process of S4711 that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S4711: Yes), a display command indicating the change restart of the special figure 1 is set (S4712), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has not been received (S4711: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a hit-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4219). In this hit-related process (S4219), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. The process of setting the prize ball number command for display based on the result is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 63) is a jackpot-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72 (a), a jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 72 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4802). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4802), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4801 in FIG. 71) is the jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4903). When the round number command is received (S4903: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4904), and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4903, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4903: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4905). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4905: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4905: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4906), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. In the process of S4801, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4803: Yes), the small hit related process (S4804) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72 (b), a small hit-related process (S4804), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. .. FIG. 72 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4804). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4951), and if it is determined to be the latent state (S4951: Yes), the out-of-period small hit is determined. The display command to be shown is set (S4956), and then it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 71) is the small hit start command (S4952).

If it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the process of S4952 (S4952: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4953), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4952, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4952: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4954). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4954: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4954: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4955), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4951 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4951: No), a display command indicating an out-of-period small hit is set (S4956), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball count counter (not shown) (S4806). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is set (S4807), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period until the normal state or the probable change state is set in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) (advantageous continuation period). It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received in the prize ball number counter. Then, the number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the prize ball counter is displayed during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) or in the latent state.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the cumulative number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from the time when the latent state is set until the normal state (probable change state) is set again. It can be notified.

In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game and the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game may be displayed separately during the advantageous continuation period. In this case, the winning game state (medium big hit, medium small hit) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223k, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to provide means. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (the period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means in the history.

Further, as described above, when the configuration of cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit, small hit) which is advantageous to the player. , Or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and the game is enthusiastically played. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the latent probability state is set, the latent probability state is configured to continue, and the small hit game is performed during the latent probability state. It is configured to be easy to break (easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery). Therefore, in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period is set again during the advantageous continuation period, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the state of not winning the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. Will do.

In such a case, the player can grasp how the actual game content (special figure 2 lottery result) is based on the jackpot winning probability preset in the pachinko machine 10 and the small hit winning probability. It is preferable to configure it so as to display various display modes. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are awarded. And because the actual small hit winning probability is higher than the preset small hit winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are won. The case where it is possible and the case where it can be analyzed can be analyzed so that the player can distinguish it. Therefore, by having the player analyze the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and facilitate the continuous game.

Further, when the game content (lottery result of a special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for executing the condition achievement notification to indicate that fact may be provided. For example, a big hit is won. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lottery (so-called number of times of hamari) executed up to that time has exceeded the predetermined number of times (100 times) may be executed, or it may be executed during the small hit winning. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of times of lottery of special figure 2) exceeds a predetermined number of times (10 times) may be executed. Further, the condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of prize balls acquired in one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000) may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 73) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 73) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5001: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the process of S5005 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5001: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5002).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 64) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 63), the variation extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Based on the variation pattern related to the effect, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set (S5003), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S5004), and the first 2 The process shifts to the process of S5005 for setting the variable display regarding the special symbol (special figure 2).

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5003 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 62) executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) of the voice lamp control device 113. To. The display control device 114 displays a display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state (see FIGS. 64 and 69). Create display data to be displayed in.

Next, the processing of S5005 to S5008 of FIG. 73 will be described. The processes of S5005 to S5008 differ from the processes of S5001 to S5004 of FIG. 73 described above in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and other than that. Are the same. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

When the processing of S5005 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5005), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5005: No), the processing of S5009 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005 that it is set to on (S5005: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5006), and the second variation pattern command is extracted. A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set (S5007), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S5008), and the process proceeds to 5009.

In the processing of S5009, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on (S5009), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is not set to on (S5009). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to on (S5009: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S5010), and the extracted stop type is set. Is set as it is (S5011), a special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for display is set (S5012), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a small hit winning or a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player).

Then, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, latent state) is set, the second special symbol is set. Is configured so that the lottery can be easily executed, and if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the first game state, the first game state can be easily set again. ..

Further, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol is also set. However, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set in order to suppress the frequent execution of the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. It is configured to be done.

However, the gaming machine configured in this way can execute the lottery of the second special symbol, although it is inefficient, in the normal state, and if the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes difficult to be executed in the specific second game state. Since it is configured to shift to the (probability change state), the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state can be reduced.

Further, the first game state described above is not set by the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the state where the second game state is set, and the second game state is a game state disadvantageous to the player. I am trying to be. Therefore, the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state can be further reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol in which the lottery advantageous to the player is executed. The lottery of the second special symbol is not executed unless the electric accessory 640a is changed to the open state by winning the lottery of the symbol.

In the pachinko machine configured in this way, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, even if the normal symbol is in the low probability state, There is a possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed during the normal state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the low probability state of the normal symbol is variably set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes larger than the predetermined number (2 pieces), it is configured so that the fluctuation time in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state can be easily selected at the timing when the balls can be easily entered into the second entry port. are doing.

With this configuration, even if a small amount of right-handed game is performed while performing a left-handed game, which is an appropriate game, during the normal state, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol cannot be increased. 2 It is possible to make it difficult for a ball to easily enter the ball entry port 640. Further, even if the operation handle 51 is erroneously operated and several balls are fired in the right area when the left-handed game is executed in the normal state, the ball is the second entry port. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the 640.

Furthermore, in the latent state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right-handed game is continuously executed, so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol must be maintained at a predetermined number (2) or more. And many special figure 2 lottery can be executed in a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute the game in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the interval (1.2 seconds) through which the ball passes through the through gate 67 is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the latent state and the game time of the game per normal symbol executed per the normal symbol. It is configured to be shorter than. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is a predetermined number (2) or more in the latent state.

In the first embodiment, as a configuration of the right side region of the game board 13, a V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side of the through gate 67, and a ball launched in a right-handed game during a jackpot game passes through the through gate 67. It is configured to be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol from becoming a predetermined number (2) or more during the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is executed, so that the game that is advantageous to the player is excessively provided. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

The configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is not limited to this, and a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the winning device that is opened during the jackpot game, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is the winning device. It may be configured to win a prize.

In the first embodiment described above, during the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the winning device, and the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot game is completed. The high probability state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability state of the special symbol may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, three gaming states (normal state, latent state, and probabilistic state) can be set as gaming states, but four game states (normal state, latent state) that can be set can be set. , Probability change state, time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) may be set, or two or less may be set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, and the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easy to win a small hit, is a specific gaming state. It is configured to be easy to execute in the (latent state), but other configurations may be used. For example, a first ball entry port 64 is provided in the left side region, and an electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side region. It is the most advantageous game for the player to provide the attached first entrance and the second entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is not attached and to perform the right-handed game when the probability change state is set. It may be configured in.

In the case of such a configuration, in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set to be shorter than that of the special figure 2 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time is set so as to be easy to be set. Is set so that a shorter fluctuation time is more easily set in the special figure 2 fluctuation than in the special figure 1 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the electric accessory 640a is released in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state. It is good to set it so that it is easy.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the left-handed game, and during the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed more efficiently than in the normal state by the right-handed game. In the probabilistic state, the right-handed game is used to draw the first special symbol more efficiently and with a higher probability than in the normal state, and the game is aimed at the big hit. During the state, a right-handed game can be used to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit by a lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 88, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 74) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 75, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 74. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 86 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 86 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 76 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 76 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a). FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 76B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 77, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 77. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S6414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control unit 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the variable stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, big hit), the other special symbol that is changing is terminated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to stop and display with a symbol indicating the forcible disconnection.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , A display command (forced) for variable display of the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed). It is configured to set the stop command).

In the present embodiment, even when the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute the stop display based on the forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display variable stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4217 in FIG. 70), and the display command indicating this temporary stop is also included. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped is slightly fluctuated is determined as the variable stop display data is determined.

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is notified. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the display notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and it also receives related commands such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and accessory drive commands other than display commands, and processes the display control device 114. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device in a state where the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in is added.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 78 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 78 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 78 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 83, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 83. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 83 to continue the explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 86A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b). FIG. 86B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 76 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 76 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 77 to 82) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 83 to 85) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) (see S7501: No in FIG. 86 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 76 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 115. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control. Is different from the configuration of the device 113.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the left-handed game is a game that executes the lottery of the first special symbol, and the right-handed game is a game that executes the lottery of the second special symbol. Was. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the ball entrance (right first) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol also in the right area of the game board 13 (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). 1 entry port 64b) (see FIG. 89) is provided. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed during the right-handed game than in the first embodiment.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is variably set according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set. The larger the number, the easier it is to set a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

With this configuration, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved balls) of the second special symbol is small (including 0), for example, normal. When the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the state is set (the state where the left-handed game is executed) and the jackpot game in which the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type is completed, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since the latent state is set when the number of balls is small, a short fluctuation time is set as the first special symbol fluctuation during the latent state, so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is easily executed. ..

On the other hand, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is large, for example, a state in which a latent probability state is set (a state in which a right-handed game is executed), the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, and as a jackpot type. In the state where the jackpot game in which the jackpot C is set is completed, the latent probability state is set in the state where the number of reserved balls is large in Special Figure 2, so that a long fluctuation time is set as the first special symbol fluctuation during the latent probability state. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the first special symbol change during the latent state.

Therefore, even when the same game state is set, the playability can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) as the lottery of the special symbol in the latent state. It is configured so that the lottery result can be easily obtained. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player by repeatedly setting (looping) the latent state than when the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the latent state. .. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player in which the latent state is set becomes a more advantageous game state.

Further, let's execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the game state (for example, the normal state) in which the left-handed game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is an appropriate game. When a right-handed game is intentionally performed and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is composed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery by periodically performing the right-handed game while performing the left-handed game in the normal state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won in a state where the latent probability state is set, the normal state is not directly set after the jackpot game is completed. , It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is configured to set the normal state after passing through the time saving state for a predetermined period.

In the first embodiment described above, when the latent state is changed to the normal state, the normal state is set in a state where the reserved memory (special figure 2 hold) of the second special symbol acquired during the latent state remains. Therefore, there is a problem that the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed in the normal state. In such a pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that a player who is trying to end a game when the state shifts to a normal state cannot smoothly end the game by noticing a change in Special Figure 2 during execution. ..

In addition, if the player stops the game ignoring the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 executed in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in which no one is playing suddenly becomes a big hit. There is a risk that the player may be confused, or it may be difficult for a new player to play the game because the long fluctuation shown in Special Figure 2 is executed, and the operation of the game may be reduced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won during the normal state, it is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won. (It is configured so that the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is not set). That is, in the first embodiment, the unfavorable lottery is executed in the normal state based on the hold memory of the special figure 2 acquired in order to execute the advantageous lottery in the latent state, so that the latent state is in the latent state. In addition, there is a problem that the motivation for the game to always acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 up to the upper limit is reduced, and the operation of the game is lowered.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, after the latent state is completed, the time saving state is set for a predetermined period, and the reserved memory of FIG. 2 is digested during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 after the transition to the normal state, and it is possible to solve the above-mentioned various problems.

Further, in the second embodiment, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won during the time saving state, the player is likely to win the jackpot of the second special symbol after the jackpot game is completed, as compared with the case of winning the jackpot of the second special symbol during the normal state. It is configured so that an advantageous gaming state (latent state) is set. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the reserved memory of the special figure 2 that remains when the gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player ends. Can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640 during the time saving state, and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 is surely reduced during the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to prevent (difficultly) a situation in which the number of reserved storages in the special figure 2 increases from the time when the time saving state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations during the time saving state, the fluctuation time set for the special figure 2 fluctuation is set rather than the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 fluctuation. Is configured to be shorter. Specifically, the total time of the fluctuation times of the four special figure 2 fluctuations set during the time reduction state is longer than the fluctuation time set for the first special figure 1 fluctuation during the time reduction state. It is configured to be short. As a result, since the variation of the special figure 2 can be efficiently executed during the time saving state, it becomes easy to reduce the number of reserved storages of the special figure 2.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of end conditions for the time saving state are provided, and the time saving state is configured to end when any of the end conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of tension.

In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state, the end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches the predetermined number of times (4 times) and the number of changes in the special figure 1 have reached the predetermined number of times (2 times). It is configured to have at least an end condition that is satisfied in the case. Thereby, for example, even if the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 is 0 at the time when the latent probability state ends, the time saving state can be ended by the fluctuation of the special figure 1.

<Regarding the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 650 arranged at different positions from the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. A point, a point provided with a first ball entry port (right first ball entry port 64b) that triggers a lottery for the first special symbol in the right side area, and a ball launched into the right side area by a right-handed game flow down. It differs in that the flow path configuration is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 by executing the left-handed game, and the right The first ball opening 64 is arranged in the left area so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second ball opening 640 by executing the hitting game. A configuration was used in which the second ball entry port 640 was arranged in the right side region.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, there is a big difference in that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed by executing the right-handed game. There is. In this way, in the right-handed game executed in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, so that the game state is advantageous to the player. Both the first special symbol lottery (lottery that is disadvantageous to the player) and the second special symbol lottery (lottery that is advantageous to the player) can be easily executed during a certain latent state. It is possible to make the player happy and uneasy about the game result in the latent state.

As shown in FIG. 89, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is not provided with the variable winning device 65 in the lower center of the gaming area, and a plurality of winning devices (variable winning devices) that are openly operated in the jackpot game. 65, V winning device 650) are both arranged in the right side region. Therefore, if a big hit is won, the right-handed game is executed regardless of the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the V winning device 650 is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path (ball flow path) of the ball that can win the variable winning device 65, and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f of the V winning device 650 is provided. The ball that has flowed down is configured to reach the variable winning device 65. In this way, by disposing the winning devices at the upstream position and the downstream position of one ball flow path, the ball flow path to each winning device can be shared, so that the configuration of the game board 13 can be saved. Space can be achieved.

Further, since the V winning device 650 having a specific area (V switch 650e3) inside is provided on the upstream side of each winning device, the ball that wins the V winning device 650 is the winning device on the downstream side (variable winning device). It is not affected by the opening operation of the device 65). Therefore, the ball can be smoothly won in the V winning device 650, and it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

That is, when the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upstream side of the V winning device 650, the jackpot game in which the V opening pattern is not set is executed, and the ball passes through the specific area (V switch 650e3) during the jackpot game. If not, the player is told that the ball did not pass through the specific area because the timing of winning the ball to the V winning device 650 was shifted due to the opening operation of the variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the V winning device 650. Although there is a problem of giving erroneous recognition, in the second embodiment, since the V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side, the above-mentioned problem can be less likely to occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is an enlarged view of the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right side region. First, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side region, and a ball launched by a right-handed game is formed on the first flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member 700 and on the right side of the distribution member 700. It is alternately distributed to the right side flow path 702.

As shown in FIG. 89, the distribution member 700 is formed with two accommodating portions capable of receiving spheres, and the sphere received by the accommodating portion on the left side (the left side when the front view of FIG. 89 is viewed) is formed. It is configured to be rotatable around the rotation axis so that the sphere guided to the first flow path 701 and received by the accommodating portion on the right side (right side when viewed from the front of FIG. 89) is guided to the second flow path 702. Has been done. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 89, since the left accommodating portion receives the sphere, the distribution member 700 is subsequently rotated to the left by the weight of the sphere, and the sphere in the left accommodating portion is the second. It flows down to 1 flow path 701.

A restricting member that regulates the rotational movement is provided below the distribution member 700, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is distributed in a state of being rotated to a position that can be accepted by the right accommodating portion. It is configured to stop the rotational movement of the member 700. After that, similarly, when the right accommodating portion receives the ball, the distribution member 700 rotates to the right, the ball in the right accommodating portion flows down to the second flow path 702, and the ball is launched by the right-handed game. The rotational movement of the distribution member 700 is stopped in a state where the left accommodating portion is rotated to an acceptable position.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured to be capable of firing a maximum of 100 balls per minute, and when a right-handed game is played, the balls are at intervals of 1.2 seconds at the shortest. Each flow path (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) flows down.

A movable lid 1500 forming the lower surface of the flow surface is provided on the upstream side of the left side flow path 701, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a constant opening / closing operation is executed by a movable control means (not shown). It is configured as such, and is located in an open state in which a ball can enter the first ball entry port 64b on the right side arranged below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which it is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball. The opening / closing operation is executed as follows.

Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110, and the movable lid opening / closing process results in an opening period of 0.1 seconds. An opening / closing operation is performed that repeats a closing period of 0.8 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right-side first ball entry port 64b, which is controlled to open and close in this way, is configured so that it is more difficult for a ball to enter the ball than the first ball entry port 64 (64a). When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64b, one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

Then, the ball flowing down the left side flow path 701 and flowing down on the movable lid 1500 flows down the bent portion of the left side flow path 701 and flows out to the upper side of the V winning device 650 provided in the lower region of the right side region. .. That is, the left flow path 701 allows the ball launched by the right-handed game to enter the right first entry slot 64b, and the ball that has not entered the right first entry opening 64b is a winning device. It is a flow path for flowing out to a position where a ball can enter (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650). The left flow path 701 is configured so that the time required for the sphere to pass is longer than that of the second flow path 702, which will be described later, and the time from the inflow to the first flow path 701 to the outflow. Is configured to be 1.6 seconds.

On the other hand, the sphere distributed to the right side flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 passes through the through gate 67 provided on the upstream side of the second flow path 702, and passes through the back side of the left side flow path 701 (from the viewpoint of FIG. 89). It flows into the inflow port 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the back side), passes through the second entry port 640 provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 702, and flows out to the lower region of the right side region. Will be done.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entry port 640 provided in the second flow path 702, and when the electric accessory 640a is located at the closed position (the second entry port 640 is closed). In the case of the state), the ball flows out from the second flow path 702 without entering the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the open position (when the second entry port 640 is in the open state), all the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 enter the second entry port 640. It is configured to do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90, the second entry port 640 is configured as an entry port having an opening width equal to or larger than the flow path width (15 mm) on the downstream side of the second flow path 702. When the electric accessory 640a is located in the open position, the movable piece of the electric accessory 640a flows from the back side of the second flow path 702 (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 90) to the flow path in the second flow path 702. It is configured so that the protruding movable piece receives all the balls flowing down the second flow path 702. Then, the ball received by the movable piece is configured to flow down the entry path for entering the second entry port 640 and enter the second entry port 640.

Then, the ball flowing out from the second flow path 702 flows out above the V winning device 650 provided in the lower region of the right side region. That is, the second flow path 702 is a flow path for allowing the ball launched by the right-handed game to pass through the through gate 67 and flow out to a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640. In the second flow path 702, the time required for the ball to pass (the time from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 to when it reaches the second entry port 640) is from the first flow path 701 described above. Is also configured to be short, and the time from inflow to the second flow path 702 to outflow is 1 second.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that is opened during the jackpot game is arranged in the lower region of the right side region. It is configured so that a ball flowing down a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) can enter. Further, the ball flow time (1.6 seconds) of the first flow path 701 is configured to be longer than the ball flow time (1 second) of the second flow path 702. Specifically, the length of the ball flow time is configured to be different by the amount corresponding to the ball firing interval (0.6 seconds).

With this configuration, when a ball is launched by a right-handed game and the ball continuously reaching the distribution member 700 is distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, the first The ball flowing down the flow path 701 and the ball flowing down the second flow path 702 are connected to the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) arranged in the lower region of the right side region at the same timing. Can be reached.

Therefore, since it is possible to make a plurality of balls win the winning device at the same time during the jackpot game, the player should be interested in the number of balls winning the winning device during one round game. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the spheres flowing out from the first flow path 701 are each winning device (variable winning device 65) arranged in the lower region of the right side region than the spheres flowing out from the second flow path 702. , V winning device 650) is configured to flow out to the upstream side of the ball flow path that can win a prize, and the height position of the ball outflow portion of the first flow path 701 is the ball of the second flow path 702. It is configured to be higher than the height position of the outflow part.

Further, the length (distance in the height direction) of the vertical flow path formed in the direction perpendicular to the ball outflow portion of the first flow path 701 and the direction perpendicular to the ball outflow portion of the second flow path 702. It is configured so as to be different from the length (distance in the height direction) of the vertical flow path formed in the direction.

By making the height position of the ball discharge portion of each flow path and the length of the vertical flow path of each flow path different in this way, each winning device (variable winning device) arranged in the lower region of the right side region. Since the momentum of the ball flowing down on the ball flow path that can be won in 65, V winning device 650) can be made different, the behavior of the ball immediately before winning each winning device can be irregular. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while entertaining at what timing the ball wins the winning device during the jackpot game.

Here, the operation of the movable lid 1500 will be described in detail. The movable lid 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at predetermined timings based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. .. Specifically, in the movable lid opening / closing process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of opening the movable lid 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the movable lid 1500 is arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the sphere flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the movable lid 1500 (or falls on the movable lid 1500) and the timing when the movable lid 1500 is opened, the sphere is released. After passing through the movable lid 1500 in the open state, the ball enters the left first entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the movable lid 1500 (or falling onto the movable lid 1500) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of opening the movable lid 1500 is 0.1 in 0.8 seconds. Since it is a second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the left first ball entry port 64b.

That is, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a latent state, the ball enters the left first entrance slot 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game It is possible to prevent the state in which there is no hold of the special figure 1 from occurring when the operation is completed and the time is shortened. Further, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period in which the movable lid 1500 is opened at one time, the first ball entry port 64 is set in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at (64a).

Specifically, when the game is in the normal state, when a left-handed game is performed, about 15 of the 250 shots fired are designed to enter the first entry port 64. If a ball enters, four prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 shots can enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the first entrance 64, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. Become.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, it is designed so that about 9 out of the 250 fired balls enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, one prize ball will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the prize balls to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be put into the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed game is more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be arranged based on the design concept to the extent that the player is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game in a time-saving state or a big hit state.

Similarly, under the normal state, based on the design concept that the right-handed game is not more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game, the setting of the opening period and the closing period of the movable lid, and the setting of the right first entrance 64b The number of prize balls may be changed.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13 in the second embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are different from the configurations of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, a through gate 67 and a second entry port 640 are provided in the second flow path 702 arranged in the right side region of the game board 13, and the through gate is provided. The ball flow path is formed so that the period (ball passing time) until the ball passing through 67 reaches the second entry port 640 is 1 second.

Then, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is configured to be variably set according to the set gaming state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 15 seconds in the normal state, 0.9 seconds in the latent state, and 0.1 seconds in the probable change state and the time saving state.

In this way, by variably setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol according to the game state, the rate at which the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640 is configured to be different. ..

A detailed explanation will be given later, but when the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (15 seconds) than the time (1 second) for the sphere to pass through the second flow path 702. Even if the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 wins the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage, the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the game per game. Therefore, in the normal state, the right-handed game is performed, and the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 unless a plurality of balls are continuously fired.

Further, when the latent state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be slightly shorter (0.9 seconds) than the time (1 second) for the sphere to pass through the second flow path 702, so that it is through. It is possible to make it easier for the ball that has passed through the gate 67 to enter the second entrance 640 in the game per game that is executed when the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage is a hit. .. Therefore, during the latent state, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 by the right-handed game enters the second entry port 640 as it is (the game state in which the ball is most likely to enter the second entry port 640). ).

When the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely shorter (0.1 second) than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass through the second entrance 702. Therefore, by the time the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a normal symbol lottery executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 has been won. Even so, the game is finished so that the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640.

Further, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, when one ball passes through the through gate 67 and the normal symbol lottery is executed and the normal symbol is won, another ball enters the second entrance 640. It is configured so that it will not be obtained. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 89, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side region, and the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 have a minimum interval of 1.2 seconds. The period required for the ball to pass through the second flow path 702 (ball passing time) is set to 1 second. That is, since the ball passing time of the second flow path 702 is configured to be shorter than the interval at which the balls flow into the second flow path 702, a plurality of balls exist in the second flow path 702. There is no such thing. Therefore, when one ball passes through the through gate 67 and the normal symbol lottery is executed and the normal symbol is won, the other balls do not enter the second entrance 640.

With this configuration, the right to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640, that is, to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, while the probability change state and the time saving state are set. It is possible to prevent (suppress) new acquisition.

In this embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are arranged on one of the plurality of flow paths (first flow path 701 and second flow path 702) formed in the right side region. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 may be used for different flow paths.

Further, in the second embodiment, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that is opened during the big hit game is arranged below the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) may be arranged above the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of balls entering each entry port (right first entry opening 64b, second entry opening 640) during the jackpot game. Further, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) may be provided between the distribution member 700 and the inflow portion of the second flow path 702. It can be configured so as not to suppress the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b while suppressing the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game.

In the second embodiment, the taxiway (right first taxiway 64b) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are triggered in the right area of the game board 13. A taxiway (second taxiway 640) is provided so that a ball launched by a right-handed game can win a prize in any of the taxiways. , A first taxiway leading the ball to the first entry port 64 (64a) and a second taxiway leading to the second entry port 640 are provided in the right side region of the game board 13, and each guide path is provided with a second taxiway. A distribution means for distributing balls alternately may be provided.

With this configuration, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol can be alternately satisfied, which is excessive for the player. (That is, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a biased manner during the time saving state), and the game state that is excessively disadvantageous to the player is provided (that is, the game state that is advantageous to the player is provided). That is, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a biased manner during the time saving state)).

Further, although the present embodiment uses a configuration in which the ball launched by the right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths, the right to execute the lottery of the first special symbol during the right-handed game (first ball opening 64). It is sufficient if the configuration is such that the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640) can be obtained, and the distribution member 700 is used. It may not be configured, or the sphere may be distributed to three or more flow paths.

<Regarding the content of the production performed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, the characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game (during a right-handed game), and FIG. 91 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 92A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the game, and FIG. 92A is a display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot game. FIG. 92B is a schematic diagram schematically showing another example of the contents, and FIG. 92B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state. Yes, 93 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when the second special symbol change (lottery) is not executed in the latent state, and FIG. 93 (a) is shown in FIG. b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the time saving state, and FIG. 94 (a) shows an example of the display contents displayed when a big hit is won during the time saving state. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the time saving state ends.

In the second embodiment, the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game is configured to be able to acquire the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set based on the reserved storage number of the second special symbol at that time, and the second special symbol is configured. It is configured so that a longer fluctuation time is set as the number of pending storages of the symbol increases.

Further, when the latent state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, an effect for enthusiastically performing the game in order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the jackpot game is executed, and FIG. The display contents shown in are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 91, on the display screen during the jackpot game, a guidance display mode for guiding the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Further, below the small area Dm3, a game detail display area Dm11 for visually notifying a portion where the ball should pass is formed, and an enlarged view schematically showing a part of the game board 13 is displayed. .. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in order to notify the player of the playability during the jackpot game (the playability other than the playability of inserting the ball into the winning device), "Aim at the GET and store the meter". The comment is displayed.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display mode including the portion where the ball should pass is displayed in the game detail display area Dm11, and the portion where the ball should pass is highlighted in the display. In addition, when the ball passes through the highlighted portion (according to the example of this figure, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67), the display mode displayed in the game details display area Dm11. Is configured to be variable to a display mode indicating that the ball has passed to a specific location.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the game content during the jackpot game just by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. Can be done.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the first target (prize ball information mode) 815 for indicating the number of prize balls during the jackpot game and the second target (usually) indicating that the character 811 has acquired the reserved memory of the normal symbol. Figure acquisition mode) The effect for acquiring 816 is executed, and the character 811 acquires the first target 815 based on the fact that the ball wins the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650), and the ball The effect that the character 811 acquires the second target 816 is executed based on the fact that the character 811 has passed through the through gate 67.

Then, on the right side of the main display area Dm, small display areas Dm1 and 2 are formed as in the configuration of the main display area Dm of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 11A), and further, each special symbol is formed. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed in place of the small display areas Dm4 and Dm4 and 5 for displaying the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls). In the small display areas Dm1a and 2a, information indicating the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of each special symbol is displayed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a small display area (normal diagram variation display area) Dm9 is formed as an area in which a decorative symbol (fourth symbol) that executes variable display corresponding to a normal symbol is displayed, and the small display area (normal symbol variation display area) Dm9 is formed. Adjacent to the display area Dm9, a small display area (normal figure hold number display area) Dm9a in which information indicating the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is displayed is formed. As a result, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol can be easily grasped during the jackpot game. Further, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, a normal figure pseudo-holding area Dm10a for informing the player of the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol in an easy-to-understand manner is formed.

The pseudo-holding area Dm10a of the normal figure is formed so as to have the first holding area Dm10b of the normal figure, the second holding area Dm10c of the normal figure, and the third holding area Dm10d of the normal figure. When the number of reserved balls in the figure) is 0, the pseudo-reserved area Dm10a in the normal figure is lit, and when the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is 1, the first reserved area Dm10b in the normal figure is lit and the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is lit. When there are two, the first holding area Dm10b of the normal figure and the second holding area Dm10c of the normal figure are lit, and when the number of reserved balls of the normal figure is three or more, the first holding area Dm10b of the normal figure and the first holding area of the normal figure are lit. 2 The holding area Dm10c and the third holding area Dm10d in the normal drawing are configured to light up.

Then, the character "Danger" is displayed in the Pseudo-holding area Dm10a, which suggests that if the jackpot game ends as it is, a game that is disadvantageous to the player will be executed. The character "MAX" is displayed in the 3 reserved area Dm10d, which suggests that the game advantageous to the player is executed when the jackpot game is completed while maintaining the current state.

Further, information corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed in the acquisition information display area Dm12a, and the number of round games being executed is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b. This makes it possible to easily determine the progress of the jackpot game. In addition, the above-mentioned acquisition information display area Dm12a is configured to be continuously displayed during the period (during the advantageous continuation period) during which the game state (during the jackpot game, during the latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed continues. However, even if it is configured to show the accumulated information not only the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game but also the number of prize balls acquired during the latent state, that is, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game. good.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined value (three or more) at the time when the jackpot game is completed and the latent probability state is set, the game is played. Since it is configured so that a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in which the lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the second special symbol is set at the end of the jackpot game. The game can be played with the expectation that the number of reserved balls will be 3 or more.

Then, in this embodiment, in order to suggest how many rights (the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol) for executing the ordinary symbol lottery, which is an opportunity to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, have been acquired. It is configured so that the normal figure hold suggestion effect (effect using the pseudo hold area Dm10a) is executed.

With this configuration, a special figure lottery game (a game in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes long and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed a lot) that is advantageous in the latent state set after the big hit is completed. Whether or not it is executed can be grasped by the effect executed during the jackpot game, and the interest of the game during the jackpot game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the special figure lottery game (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes long, and the second special) is advantageous in the latent state set after the end of the big hit by executing the normal figure hold suggestion effect. It is configured to indirectly suggest the possibility that a game that can execute a lot of lottery of symbols) will be executed, but it is not limited to this, and as a production during the jackpot game, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute the effect (special figure 2 hold effect) that suggests. This makes it possible to directly notify the player whether or not an advantageous special figure lottery game is executed in the latent state set after the end of the big hit.

Further, as a specific effect mode of the normal figure hold suggestion effect of the present embodiment (for example, a mode in which the pseudo hold area Dm10a is lit to the entire area of the normal figure third hold area Dm10d is displayed in a different color from the usual), the second. It may be possible to set an effect mode for notifying that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is a predetermined value (3 or more). With this configuration, it is notified that the special figure lottery game that is advantageous to the player will be executed after the big hit game is completed in the normal figure hold suggestion effect that indirectly suggests the game situation after the big hit game is finished. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the normal figure hold suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game.

In the display example shown with reference to FIG. 91 (a), the small display areas Dm1 (a), Dm2 (a), and Dm9 (a) are displayed in a size that can be visually recognized by the player. Not limited to this, during the jackpot game, the size of each small display area may be changed to a size or position that is difficult for the player to see, or a part or all of each small display area may be erased. good. As a result, the player pays close attention to the effect being executed in the main display area Dm in order to grasp the current situation (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2). Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Next, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined value (3) or more at the end of the jackpot game, the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b), that is, the center of the main display area Dm. The character 811 is displayed in a display mode congratulating the unit, and the characters "Full power mode entry" indicating that the special figure lottery game advantageous to the player is executed are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b), four or more balls enter the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is four. It is displayed in the hold simple display area Dm2a, and it is displayed in the normal figure hold number display area Dm9a that the number of hold balls of the normal symbol is three. Further, in the normal map variation display area Dm9, a variation display mode for indicating that the normal symbol is changing is displayed.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), since the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 3, the pseudo-reserved area Dm10a to the third reserved area Dm10d are lit and displayed, and the acquired information display area Dm12a is displayed this time. The value of "1000" indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is displayed, and "END" indicating that the current jackpot game is completed is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the predetermined value (3) at the end of the jackpot game, the display screen shown in FIG. 92 (a), that is, the main display area Dm continues. Then, an effect of causing the through gate 67 to execute a game of passing the ball (an effect of the character 811 acquiring the second target 816) is displayed.

Here, in the present embodiment, 2 seconds is set as the ending period (waiting period in which the winning device is closed) set at the end of the jackpot game, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is also set during this ending period. It is configured to execute the effect shown in FIG. 92 (a) so that a continuous right-handed game is performed with the aim of achieving a predetermined number (3 pieces) or more.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, "aim firmly at GET" in order to acquire a larger number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by the time the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is executed. The characters are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to continuously perform the right-handed game even during the ending period.

Next, the screen shown in FIG. 92 (b) is displayed in the state where the latent state is set (during the full power mode). That is, similarly to the effect display (see FIG. 13A) executed in the latent state by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the mode display mode showing the current gaming state in the main display area Dm. The "full power mode" is displayed as 810, and the effect of opening the treasure box 812 is executed while the character 811 runs from the left to the right. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the latent state, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than a predetermined value (3), the first It is configured so that a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the second target 816 and the pseudo holding area Dm10a are displayed on the display screen in the latent state as in the jackpot game, and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is displayed. An effect display is executed to call attention so that the value does not fall below a predetermined value (3 pieces).

On the other hand, when the latent state is set after the jackpot ends and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not started), the case of FIG. 93 (a) is shown. The indicated effect is executed. That is, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 is resting in the center of the main display area Dm, and the "rest zone" is displayed as the mode display 810. This break zone is continuously displayed until the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and in order to encourage the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed, the sub-display area Ds is set to "meter". "Save and wake up" is displayed.

Further, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the big hit game, it is possible that the player does not continue the right-handed game during the big hit game, so that the small display area Dm3 "Right-handed" is emphasized and displayed as a guidance display mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the latent state is set, the player will do his best during the period when the special symbol lottery game (second special symbol lottery game) that is advantageous to the player is not executed. Since it is configured to execute an effect other than the effect indicating the mode (break mode), the player can perform the effect (full power mode) to indicate the game state advantageous to the player. The special symbol lottery game (second special symbol lottery game) that is advantageous to the player is not executed, and only the special symbol lottery game (first special symbol lottery game) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

Next, the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 (b) to 94 (b). In the second embodiment, even if the right-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640. Therefore, when the time-saving state is set, "Left-handed" is highlighted as the guidance display mode.

Then, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the latent state is set with a higher probability than in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. Since it is configured to win, the "revival mode" is displayed as the mode display 810 indicating the game state in which the latent probability state is easily set again after the latent probability state advantageous to the player is completed, and the main display area is displayed. In Dm, the effect that the character 811 chases the character 819 that imitates an angel is executed.

In this effect in the resurrection mode, when the big hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the character 811 catches the character 819 and the character "Congratulations on the resurrection" is displayed (FIG. 94). (A)). On the other hand, if the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied without winning the jackpot during the time-saving state, the effect of escaping the character 819 is executed (see FIG. 94 (b)).

Further, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state and the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set is executed, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. The winning information stored on hold until the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set is preliminarily determined, and the effect mode in the resurrection mode is changed based on the predetermined result. It is composed. As a result, immediately after the effect in the resurrection mode is executed, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the jackpot is won in the current resurrection mode based on the display mode.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 95 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and probabilistic state (special). High-probability state of symbol, high-probability state of normal symbol), latent state (high-probability state of special symbol, low-probability state of normal symbol), time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbol, high-probability state of normal symbol) And, four game states are configured to be configurable.

Then, in the latent state, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot D is set (35% of the special figure 2 jackpot), the time saving state is set. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot A is set (50% of the special figure 1 jackpot), the state shifts to the latent state. When the jackpot B is set (50% of the special figure 1 jackpot), it is configured to shift to the normal state, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot C is set (special figure 1). (65% of the jackpot in FIG. 2) is configured to shift to the latent state, and when the jackpot D is set (35% of the jackpot in FIG. 2), it is configured to shift to the normal state.

Further, when the time saving end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, it is configured to shift to the normal state. That is, in the second embodiment, when a specific jackpot (a jackpot at which the latent state ends) is won in the latent state with respect to the first embodiment described above, the game does not shift to the normal state. , It differs in that it shifts to a time-saving state, and the time-saving state is defined as a gaming state in which it is easier to shift to a latent state than a normal state.

With this configuration, even if you win the jackpot (big hit D) where the latent state that is most advantageous to the player ends, it does not suddenly shift to the normal state. , Since it is possible to set a gaming state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, it is possible to make the player who has finished the latent state continue to play the game. ..

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 104, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment described above, a part of the ROM 202 configuration of the main control device 110, a part of the RAM 203 configuration, and a part of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. Is different. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, for the ROM 202 (see FIG. 16) in the first embodiment described above, the small hit random number table 202b is replaced with the small hit random number table 202b, and the jackpot type selection table 202d is replaced with the jackpot type. The difference is that the selection 2 table 202ad is replaced with the variation pattern selection table 202e by providing the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae and newly providing the time saving table 202af. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit random number 2 table 202ab is data in which the small hit determination value for winning a small hit is defined for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) as in the first embodiment described above. It's a table. Here, the contents of the small hit random number 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab. Unlike the first embodiment described above, the second embodiment is configured to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is configured to end when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, it is configured so that winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition).

By configuring in this way, the period in which the time saving state is set can be irregular, so that the player playing the game in the time saving state can play the game while giving a feeling of tension. Can be done.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab, when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the first corresponding to the small hit corresponds to the state (probability state) of the special symbol. When the value of the hit random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "212 to 221" and the symbol type is the second special symbol, the first hit corresponding to the small hit regardless of the state (probability state) of the special symbol. The value of the random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "212 to 432".

That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 11/480 (about 1/44), and the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 221/480 (about 1/44). It is specified to be about 1 / 2.1).

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad is a data table in which the jackpot type set when a jackpot is won is defined, similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 98.

FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 98, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad is executed in response to the jackpot type jackpot A with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above (big hit game). The contents) are different in that they are different, and the others are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad, a round game in which the first attacker (V winning device 650) is opened is executed for three rounds as the jackpot operation content (big hit game content) corresponding to the jackpot A. The jackpot game is stipulated.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In addition, the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased during the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment configured in this way, the jackpot game in which as many round games as possible are executed can easily increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot game, and thus the jackpot game. It is possible to give a privilege other than the privilege of getting a lot of prize balls (increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol).

Further, in the second embodiment, the jackpot game (big hit game (3R) corresponding to the jackpot A) executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed during the normal state , The jackpot game (big hit game (10R) corresponding to jackpot C) that is executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easy to execute the lottery while in the latent state, is the period of the jackpot game (round). The number) is configured to be long.

As a result, there are cases where the jackpot is won in the normal state and the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the jackpot is won in the latent state and the latent state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player in the latent state set after the jackpot game is completed can be different, and further, the case where the jackpot is won in the latent state can be advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the state in which the latent probability state is initially set (latent probability inrush state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the state in which the latent probability state is repeatedly set (latent probability continuous state). By configuring it so that (the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed), it is possible to give a superiority complex to the player in the state where the latent continuation state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the latent probability rush state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the latent probability continuation state is set (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state is set excessively repeatedly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is used as the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, but the degree of advantage of the gaming state (advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (continuation rate of advantageous state, acquisition prize). The number of balls, etc.) may be configured to be different between the advantageous rush state in which the advantageous gaming state is initially set and the advantageous continuation state in which the advantageous gaming state is repeatedly set, and the advantageous gaming state may be probabilistically changed. It may be in a short time state, or it may be in a normal state. Further, it may be configured to have a plurality of gaming states that are advantageous gaming states.

Further, in the second embodiment, the setting of the latent rush state is more disadvantageous to the player than the setting of the latent continuous state (the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed). In order to configure, the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A) is the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol (corresponding to the jackpot C). Although it is configured to execute a jackpot game with a smaller number of round games than the jackpot game to be played), it may be configured to execute a jackpot game of the same length.

That is, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, the reserved memory (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol cannot be secured until the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot is set in the normal state. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the start of the jackpot game is smaller than that of the winner of the jackpot with the latent probability state (right-handed game state) set.

Therefore, even if the jackpot game of the same length is executed by the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the start of the jackpot game is supported. Since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot game is variable, the latent rush state is more disadvantageous to the player than the latent continuous state (the second special symbol). It can be a latent state) that is executed with a small number of reserved balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the contents of the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, the contents of the normal table 202a1 referred to when the gaming state is the normal state are usually added to the variation pattern selection table 202e of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the contents of the latent probability table 202a3 are changed to the latent probability 2 table 202ae3, and the time saving table 202ae4 referred to during the time saving state is newly provided. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents specified in the normal 2 table 202ae1 will be described. FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal 2 table 202ae1. The normal 2 table 202ae1 is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when a normal state is set as in the normal table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above, and is usually used. The point that the table 202a1 has the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) as a condition element for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and each variation pattern It differs in that the range of the specified variation type counter CS1 is different. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the normal state is defined to be variable according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Then, as the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 increases (when it becomes 2 or more), a long variation (10 minutes) can be set as the variation time of the first special symbol.

Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 or 1, the first special symbol is used. Regardless of the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved balls), the hit normal reach (variation time 20 seconds) is defined in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 19", and the hit super reach (variation time 30). Seconds) is specified in the range of "20 to 198" for the value of the variable type counter CS1.

Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 to 4, the winning super reach (variation time 30 seconds) is a variable type counter regardless of the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1). The value of CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 19", and the value of the per-long fluctuation (variation time 10 minutes) is defined in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "20 to 198".

Further, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1). Regardless of the small hit super reach (variation time 30 seconds), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 198".

When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is 0 or 1, and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is 0 or 1. The long deviation (variation time 12 seconds) is specified in the range of "0 to 189" for the variable type counter CS1, and the deviation super reach (variable time 30 seconds) is defined as the value of the variable type counter CS1 "190 to 198". It is specified in the range. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 to 4, the value of the deviation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 109" for the deviation super reach (variation time 30 seconds), and the deviation long fluctuation (variation). The value of the variable type counter CS1 (time 600 seconds) is defined in the range of "110 to 198".

When the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 2 or 3 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 0 or 1, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 149" for short deviation (variation time 8 seconds). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "150 to 198" for the long deviation (variation time 12 seconds). Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 to 4, the value of the deviation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 58" for the deviation super reach (variation time 30 seconds), and the deviation long fluctuation (variation). The value of the variable type counter CS1 (time 600 seconds) is specified in the range of "59 to 198".

With this configuration, if a right-handed game that is not appropriate in the normal state is performed and a plurality of special figure 2 hold (hold memory of the second special symbol) is acquired, it is executed in the left-handed game that is a proper game. It becomes easy to select a long fluctuation time (up to 10 minutes) as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game executed in the normal state for the player.

Further, even if the operation handle 51 is mistakenly operated during the normal state and several balls are fired to the right side region, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long (30 seconds) during the normal state. Therefore, it is not possible to acquire a plurality of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. Therefore, a penalty can be imposed only on a player who intentionally performs a right-handed game during a normal state.

When using such a configuration, it is preferable to enable the following warning notification. That is, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state (it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the normal state), the lowest level (level 1) alert notification (for example). , Display the guidance display mode indicating "left-handed" in the small display area Dm3), and when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, the next level (level 2) strong warning alert (for example, the small display area Dm3) is executed. (Warning that the fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 will be longer if the special figure 2 hold is acquired any more in the sub-display area Ds and highlighting the display mode of It is advisable to configure it to execute the highest level (level 3) warning notification (for example, call a staff member) when both of them have long fluctuations.

As a result, it is possible to prevent both special map fluctuations from becoming long fluctuations for the player who unconsciously executed the right-handed game, and further, both special map fluctuations due to harassment. Even if there is a player who stops the game by making a long fluctuation, the staff can easily find the target pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents specified in the latent probability 2 table 202ae3 will be described. FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability 2 table 202ae3. The latent probability 2 table 202ae3 is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the latent probability state is set, and is referred to in the latent probability table a3 of the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, the point that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) is held as a condition element when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation in which each variation pattern is defined. It differs in that the range of the type counter CS1 is different. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted. Further, among the contents specified in the latent probability 2 table 202ae3, the parts specified with respect to the special figure 1 are the same as the above-mentioned normal 2 table 202ae1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. ..

With this configuration, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the latent probability state is determined by the case where the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1) and the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or more). The length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol set in can be made different. That is, the number of lottery of the disadvantaged side (lottery of the first special symbol) executed during the latent state is the lottery of the advantageous side (lottery of the second special symbol) acquired in the state where the latent state is set. Can be varied according to the number of rights to execute (number of reserved balls).

In this embodiment, two tables for setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is supported. It may be configured to provide five tables. In this case, it suffices to configure so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 increases, and in the table corresponding to the case where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is the maximum value (4). , It is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation time of 10 minutes is always set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the player can be made to actively play a game for increasing the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2.

In the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, and when the variation start processing of each special symbol is executed, the first special symbol is first executed. It is configured to execute the fluctuation start processing of. Therefore, when setting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the period in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes the maximum value (4).

Next, the contents specified in the time saving table 202ae4 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table 202ae4. The time saving table 202ae4 is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol when the time saving state is set, and the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the second special symbol. It is configured so that a longer fluctuation time than (Special Figure 2) is set.

Specifically, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" and a special fluctuation (15 seconds) is specified, and the hit / fail is specified. If the judgment result is a small hit, the small hit special fluctuation (15 seconds) is specified in the range where the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". The value of the type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198", and special fluctuation (15 seconds) is specified.

Further, when the symbol type is special figure 2 and the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the range of "0 to 198" and a short fluctuation (30 seconds) is defined, and the hit / fail judgment result is determined. In the case of a small hit, the small hit short variation (0.5 seconds) is specified in the range where the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", and if the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, the acquired variation type. The value of the counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198", and the short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is specified.

That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, the change of the second special symbol is the reserved storage upper limit number of the second special symbol while the first special symbol change is executed once. It is configured to be able to execute more than (4). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily reduce (to 0) the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol during the time saving state.

In the second embodiment, a constant fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving state regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol or the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different variation pattern may be selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. For example, the acquired variation type counter CS1 may be configured. As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 according to the value, the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 2 may be set.

With this configuration, the ease of fluctuation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the time-saving state can be made different depending on the fluctuation pattern set in the time-saving state. , It is possible to make it difficult to understand which special symbol changes and how much during the time saving state.

The time saving table 202af is a data table in which the end condition of the time saving state is specified, and is referred to when the time saving state is set, and the value specified for the corresponding counters is set. be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the contents specified in the time saving table 202af will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving table 202af. In this time saving table 202af, specific values (time saving end conditions) are specified for each of the time saving medium counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, and the small hit counter 203ad as the time saving end condition. Has been done.

Specifically, "100" is used for the time-saving / medium-time counter 203aa, "2" is used for the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, "4" is used for the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, and "1" is used for the small hit counter 03ad. Is specified, and it is preset so that the time saving state ends when the value of any of the counters becomes "0" in the state where the time saving state is set.

By defining a plurality of time reduction end conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time reduction end condition is satisfied to end the time reduction condition. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the element set as the time saving end condition, and it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the time saving state will continue during the time saving state, it is possible to play the game in a state of tension.

In the present embodiment, only one specific value (time saving end condition) is specified for each counter for which the time saving end condition can be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of values are specified. May be configured to specify. Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more times are not limited to this. It may be configured to end the time saving state when the time saving end condition is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, since there is only one jackpot type (big hit D) in which the time saving state is set, there is only one type of time saving end condition group specified in the time saving grant table 202af, but there are a plurality of jackpot types. When the time saving state is set in the above, a plurality of time saving end condition groups may be specified in the time saving grant table 202af so that different time saving end conditions can be set for each jackpot type.

Further, even if the same jackpot type is used, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, when the probability change state is set, the jackpot is won and the jackpot ends. You may set different time saving end conditions depending on whether the time saving state is set later or the normal state is set and the jackpot is won and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. In this case, for example, it is preferable to set a time saving end condition that is more difficult to be satisfied when shifting from the probability change state to the time saving state.

In this way, when the conditions for setting the time reduction state (time reduction establishment conditions) are different, by configuring to set the time reduction end conditions with different ease of establishment, which time reduction is established for the player. It is possible to make people interested in whether the time saving state is set by the conditions, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the player is suggested to the player the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving information) as an effect (see FIG. 93 (b)) executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state. By not executing the effect to be performed, the player is configured to play the game while giving a feeling of tension as to how long the time saving state will continue, but the game is not limited to this, for example. While the time saving state is set, it may be configured to execute an effect of suggesting (notifying) the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving information) to the player. In this case, for example, the current value of each counter for which the time reduction end condition is specified may be notified as the remaining time reduction information, or the time reduction end condition that is most likely to be satisfied may be determined and the determination result may be used. It may be configured to notify only the corresponding remaining time reduction information. Further, a means for calculating one numerical value (time reduction end risk) by fusing the update status of a plurality of time reduction end conditions may be provided, and the calculation result may be notified. In this way, by using the configuration that suggests (notifies) the remaining time reduction information to the player, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the timing at which the time reduction state ends.

Further, in the second embodiment, when shifting from the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), It is configured to set multiple time-saving end conditions (conditions for shifting the high-probability state of a normal symbol to a low-probability state), but in addition to this, it is configured to be a probabilistic state (high-probability state of a special symbol, normal). When shifting from the high-probability state of the symbol to the latent state (high-probability state of the special symbol, low-probability state of the normal symbol), a plurality of time-saving end conditions may be set.

In this case, for example, the probability change state is set for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (for example, the period until the special symbol change is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot), and the time saving end condition is set during the probability change state. When it is established, it is preferable to configure it so that the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set in the remaining period of the predetermined period described above. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 of the second embodiment has a time saving medium counter 203aa, a special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, and a small hit counter with respect to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that 203ad is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving middle counter 203aa is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state, and whether the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is satisfied. It is used to determine whether or not.

In this time saving medium counter 203aa, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time is a specific jackpot type (big hit D) by the jackpot end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), it is specified in the time saving table 202af. The value (100) is set.

Then, it is subtracted (see S273 in FIG. 106) in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, and whether the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after the subtraction. Whether or not it is determined (S277). Further, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S2855 in FIG. 108).

As described above, the time saving / medium counter 203aa subtracts the value regardless of whether the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol or the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. The first time-saving end condition set based on the value of the time-saving medium counter 203aa is the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving end conditions set.

In this embodiment, since the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203aa is not when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped but when the fluctuation starts. Is configured to update.

That is, in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the variation (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols is performed at the same time, for example, while the special symbol variation executed 100th time by one special symbol is executed, the other special symbol is executed. Depending on the situation, the 101st and 102nd special symbol changes may be executed.

Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the process of updating the value of the time saving / medium counter 203aa is executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol variation outside the predetermined range becomes the special symbol variation in the time saving state. In this embodiment, the update work related to the time saving end condition is performed at the start time of the special symbol change.

The special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is set. It is used to determine whether or not it holds.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time is a specific jackpot type (big hit) by the jackpot end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. When it is determined to be D) (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107) and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), the time saving grant table 202af is displayed. The specified value (2) is set.

Then, when it is determined in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) that the change (lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (S274: Yes in FIG. 106), the value is changed. 1 Subtraction (update) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after subtraction (S277). Further, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S2855 in FIG. 108).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the second change of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the second time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is configured in.

The special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the time saving end condition (third time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is set. It is used to determine whether or not it holds.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time is a specific jackpot type (big hit) by the jackpot end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. When it is determined to be D) (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107) and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), the time saving grant table 202af is displayed. The specified value (4) is set.

Then, when it is determined in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) that the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed (S274: No in FIG. 106), the value is changed. 1 Subtraction (update) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after subtraction (S277). Further, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S2855 in FIG. 108).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the fourth change of the second special symbol is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the third time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is configured in.

The small hit counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of times a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, and is a time saving end condition (fourth) for ending the time saving state. It is used to determine whether or not the time saving end condition) is satisfied.

The small hit counter 203ad has a specific big hit type (big hit D) corresponding to the big hit game executed this time by the big hit end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the big hit game. (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), it is specified in the time saving table 202af. The value (1) is set.

Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 2 (see S22455 in FIG. 108) that the small hit is won in the time reduction state (time reduction) in the lottery of the first special symbol (S2851: Yes in FIG. 108). , The value is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S2852 in FIG. 108), and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after the subtraction (S2853). Further, when any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S278 in FIG. 106).

That is, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that one small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the time saving state is set (when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit winning is completed). In addition, the fourth time saving end condition is satisfied, and the state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various counter values for which the first time reduction end condition to the third time reduction end condition are set are updated according to the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. It is configured to be done. That is, the above-mentioned first time reduction end condition to third time reduction end condition are end conditions related to the number of fluctuations in the special figure. In addition, various counter values for which the fourth time reduction end condition is set are updated according to the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned fourth time reduction end condition is a special figure lottery result-related end condition. In addition, regarding the time saving end condition used also in the above-mentioned first embodiment, that is, the configuration in which the time saving state ends based on the winning of the jackpot during the time saving state, the time saving state is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Since it is to be terminated, it is a condition for termination related to the special drawing lottery result.

In the present embodiment, the end condition related to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set based on the second time-saving end condition (4 times) set based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. The third time reduction end condition (2 times) and the 1st time reduction end condition (100 times) set based on the number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol are set. ..

Here, the number of times set as the first time saving end condition (100 times) is the number of times set as the second time saving end condition (4 times) and the number of times set as the third time saving end condition (2 times). It is configured to be larger than the total value (6 times). Therefore, when the processing related to the game is normally performed, the second time reduction end condition or the third time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied.

However, by setting the first time reduction end condition, for example, when a problem occurs in the update process of each counter value corresponding to the first time reduction end condition or the second time reduction end condition, the time reduction state can be set. The maximum period can be specified in advance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time saving state is set excessively for the player.

In the second embodiment, the value (6) obtained by adding the value (100) of the first time reduction end condition, the value of the second time reduction end condition (2), and the value of the third time reduction end condition (4). ), But not limited to this, the value of the second time reduction end condition (2) and the third time reduction as the value of the time reduction medium counter 203aa corresponding to the first time reduction end condition. It may be configured to set a value (for example, 5) smaller than the value (6) which is the sum of the values of the end condition (4). With such a configuration, the time saving end condition that can be satisfied during the time saving state can be set in a complicated manner, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth special symbol lottery result-related end condition is set as the fourth time-saving end condition according to the number of small hits of the first special symbol, but the second special symbol is not limited to this. The time saving end condition may be set according to the number of small hit winnings, or the time saving ending condition may be set according to the number of small hit winnings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set based on the processing result (change number of times, lottery result) of the change-related processing of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state may be set so as to be possible based on the processing result (change number of times, lottery result) of the fluctuation-related processing of the ordinary symbol.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above in that the standby flag 223aa is added, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The standby flag 223aa is a flag for determining whether or not the small hit game can be frequently executed during the latent state, and when the small hit game cannot be frequently executed. It is set to on. This standby flag 223aa is set when the latent probability state is set after the big hit game ends, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end time of the big hit game (when the ending period has elapsed), that is, the latent probability. It is set to ON when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol cannot be executed immediately after the state is set (see S4942 in FIG. 114).

Then, in the variation display setting process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 115), it is determined whether the variation display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to ON (see S5051 in FIG. 115). When it is set to on (S5051: Yes in FIG. 115), it is set to off (S5052 in FIG. 115), and the effect indicating that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed during the latent state. Is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences.

The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment described above in that the time saving state can be set as a gaming state, and various types for determining the period in which the time saving state is set accordingly. It differs in that it is configured to execute processing (processing for updating various counter values for satisfying the time saving end condition, processing for determining whether or not the time saving ending condition is satisfied).

Here, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). This special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) is the first special symbol variation start processing (S208) or the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 33) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the time saving update process (S251) is executed after the variation start process (S210) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the time saving update process (S251) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 105) will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (S251). This time saving update process (S251) executes a process of updating the values of various counters for satisfying the time saving end condition in a state where the time saving state is set, and executes a special symbol variation start process. It updates the values of various counters corresponding to the time-saving end condition (end condition related to the number of fluctuations in the special figure) that can be satisfied based on the fact.

When the time saving update process (S251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving state based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203m (S271), and in the time saving state, If it is determined that there is no such thing (S271: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is shortened (S271: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special figure change is started (S272).

In the process of S272, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 of FIG. 34) or the second special symbol change start process executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 105) being executed this time. In (see S210 of FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the variation start of the corresponding special symbol is set.

When it is determined that the special figure change has not been started in the process of S272 (S272: No), it is the case where the new special figure change is not executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 105). Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure change has started in the process of S272 (S272: Yes), then the value of the time saving medium counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S273), and then the special figure change this time is the first. It is determined whether it is a special symbol (S274).

In this process of S274, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 of FIG. 34) or the second special symbol change start process executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 105) being executed this time. Among the processes (see S210 in FIG. 39), it is determined which special symbol variation start is set.

In the process of S274, when it is determined that the current variation is the special figure 1 (S274: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 variation counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (S275), and the process proceeds to the process of S277. If it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 1 (special figure 2) (S274: No), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is subtracted by 1 (S276), and the process proceeds to S277. ..

In the process of S277, it is determined whether the values of the time reduction / middle counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac after subtraction (after updating) are values that satisfy the time reduction end condition (that is, 0). If it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S277: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied (S277: Yes), the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203m (S278), and various time reduction related counters (time reduction assignment table 202af) are specified. The value of (various counters) is cleared to 0 (S279), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the process of S277, the information indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the type of the satisfied time saving end condition are shown. A time-saving end command containing information is set. This time saving end command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other commands by the external output process (see S2401 in FIG. 54) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. ..

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (S2562) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S2562). The jackpot end process 2 (S2562) adds a process to be executed when the jackpot type is jackpot D to the jackpot end process (S2512 in FIG. 57) of the first embodiment described above, and a process thereof. The differences are in that some of the configurations other than are changed, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot end process 2 (S2562) is executed, first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2701), and if it is set to ON (S2701: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g. Is set to on (S2702), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off (S2751), and then the same processing of S2703 and S2704 as the jackpot end processing of the first embodiment described above (see S2512 in FIG. 57) is performed. Execute and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701 when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is not on (S2701: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot executed this time is the jackpot D (S2752), and the jackpot D is used. If it is determined to be present (S2752: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot was the latent state (S2753).

In the process of S2753, when it is determined that the state is latent (S2753: Yes), the value specified in the time saving table 202af (see FIG. 102 (b)) is set to various counters (time saving medium counter 203aa, special). FIG. 1 Fluctuation counter 203ab, Special FIG. 2 Fluctuation counter 203ac, Small hit counter 203ad) are set, and the process proceeds to S2704.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2752 that the current jackpot is not the jackpot D (S2752: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S2753 that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not the latent state (S2753: No). ) Ends this process as it is. The processing of S2752 and the processing of S2753 are executed based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203m.

Next, the contents of the small hit control process 2 (S2455) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 2 (S2455). The small hit control process 2 (S2455) differs from the small hit control process of the first embodiment described above (see S2405 in FIG. 58) in that the content of the process executed at the small hit end timing is changed. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit control process 2 (S2455) is executed, the same processes of S2801 to S2807 as the small hit control process of the first embodiment described above (see S2405 in FIG. 58) are executed, and then the small hit of this time is executed. It is determined whether the game is based on the small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state (S2851), and it is determined that the game is the small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state. (S2851: Yes), the value of the small hit counter 203ad is subtracted by 1 (S2852).

Next, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (whether the value of the small hit counter 203ad is 0) (S2853), and if it is determined that it is satisfied, a normal state is set in the game state storage area 203m (S2854). ), The value of various time reduction related counters (various counters specified in the time reduction assignment table 202af) is cleared to 0 (S2855), and this processing is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the process of S2853, the information indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the type of the satisfied time saving end condition are shown. A time-saving end command containing information is set. This time saving end command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other commands by the external output process (see S2401 in FIG. 54) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S2851 when it is determined that the winning is not a small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state (S2851: No), or in the processing of S2853, the time saving end condition is not satisfied ( If it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ad is 1 or more), this process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 115, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. The control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is a command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 63) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. The command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) is replaced with the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 64), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (S4252 in FIG. 110) is replaced with the special figure 1. 2 The variation start process 2 (see S4254 in FIG. 111) is replaced with the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) instead of the variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 64). 113 S4262) is replaced with the jackpot-related process (see S4802 in FIG. 72), the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851 in FIG. 114) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73), and the variable display setting process 2 is performed. (S4162 in FIG. 115) is executed, and the reserved ball number processing (see S4258 in FIG. 112) is executed when the reserved ball number command is received. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the above-mentioned effect is executed with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. Specifically, the effect mode of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the time-saving medium effect executed during the time-saving state, and the effect of the latent effect during the latent state. There are some differences from the aspect.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4151) will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4151). This command determination process 2 (S4151) replaces the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 64) with respect to the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 63) of the first embodiment described above. The variation start process 2 (S4252 in FIG. 110) is executed, and the special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254 in FIG. 111) is executed in place of the special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 64), and the status command is received. When the status command reception process 2 (S4262 in FIG. 113) is executed instead of the process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) and it is determined that the hold ball count command has been received (S4207: Yes), the hold ball count process is performed. It differs in that (S4258) is executed, and is the same except for the execution. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) is executed. The contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4252) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4252). The special figure 1 variation start process 2 (S4252) is added to the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 64) in that a process to be executed when the gaming state is a time saving state is added. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 1 variation start process 2 (S4252) is executed, first, the same processes of S4301 to S4303 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 64) are executed, and then the current game. When it is determined whether the state is the time saving state (S4371) and it is determined that the state is not the time saving state (S4371: No), it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 64) S4304 to S4306. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4371 that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4371: Yes), a display command indicating a special variation pattern is set (S4372), and this process is terminated. When a display command is set in the process of S4372, the display command is output to the display control device 114, and the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to any special symbol change. A special variation pattern is executed, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the effect is being executed (see FIG. 93 (b)).

Specifically, the display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the effect display using the third symbol is not performed in the main display area Dm and the fourth symbol showing the variable display of each special symbol is displayed. Is reduced and formed, and an effect is executed in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the fourth symbol as compared with other gaming states.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which special symbol lottery (variation) has been executed how many times during the time saving state, and the effect executed in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 93 (b)) can be watched.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is not displayed and the fourth symbol is difficult to see as a special variation pattern in which it is difficult for the player to grasp which special symbol variation the variation effect corresponds to. However, as another configuration, for example, the fourth symbol may be configured to be notified outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the pseudo-decorative symbol that does not correspond to the lottery status of the special symbol may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner.

In this case, for example, the pseudo-decorative symbol is subjected to a time-saving variation effect that changes the period from the setting of the time-saving state to the end of the time-saving state, and as the time-saving variation effect, a special symbol executed during the time-saving state is executed. It is advisable to perform an effect in which the number of lottery times and the number of lottery of special symbols by symbol type are not suggested to the player. With this configuration, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested without discomfort during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) is executed. The contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254). The special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254) is added to the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 65) in that a process to be executed when the gaming state is a time saving state is added. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the content of the process added in the special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254) (the process of S4391 and S4392) is added in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process 2 (S4252). Since the only difference is that the target of the processing (S4371, S4372) is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is configured so that the special variation pattern is executed regardless of the type of the special symbol. Therefore, which type of special symbol is executed during the time saving state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the game has been executed.

Next, it is executed in the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) with reference to FIG. 112. The contents of the reserved ball number processing (S4258) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S4258). In this reserved ball number processing (S4258), a process for setting an effect mode of the jackpot game in-game effect (see FIG. 91 (a)) is executed based on the reserved ball number command received during the jackpot game.

When the reserved ball number processing (S4258) is executed, first, the symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) are extracted (S5101). The value of the reserved ball number counter (1st special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S5102), S5103. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S5103, based on the information set (stored) in the subordinate state setting area 223k, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game currently corresponding to the jackpots A and C is in progress (S5103), and the jackpots A and C are set. When it is determined that the corresponding jackpot game is not in progress, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot for which the latent probability state is not set after the jackpot game is completed (S5103), the process proceeds to S4505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpots A and C is in progress (S5103), then the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol (the number of reserved balls in the normal figure) is executed by the current reserved ball number command. When it is determined whether or not has been added (S5104), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the normal figure has been added, that is, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m has been added by 1 (S5104: Yes). ), A display command indicating an effect gauge corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the normal figure after addition is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S4505.

When the display command is set in the process of S5105, it is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the other display commands, and the pseudo hold area Dm10a to the normal figure 3 hold area Dm10d of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode (effect gauge) is variably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the normal figure.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5104 that the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is not added, that is, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is not added (S5104: Yes). Then, when it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2) has been added (S5106), and it is determined that the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 has been added, that is, the second When it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d has been added by 1 (S5106: Yes), then it is determined whether the added special figure 2 reserved ball number is 3 or more (S5107), 3 When it is determined that the above is the case (S5107: Yes), the latent state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player is a long time (10 minutes). A display command indicating a blessing effect for notifying that the latent state in which the variable time can be executed is set (S5108) is set (S5108), and the process proceeds to S4505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not added (S5106: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4505 and the present process is terminated. In the process of S4505, for example, a display command for changing the number of reserved balls (held symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the display mode according to each game state is set. Will be done.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the ball passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650) during the jackpot game, and is special after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that a high probability state of the symbol is set, and an opening operation (V opening pattern) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area can be executed during the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to execute the process of changing the effect mode of the effect during the jackpot game in the above-mentioned reserved ball number process (S4258) after the second round of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A and the jackpot C. Further, in the first round game, it may be configured to be executed when the ball passes through a specific area. With this configuration, the player is dissatisfied because the latent state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, even though the effect of encouraging the increase in the number of reserved balls is executed during the jackpot game. Can be suppressed.

Next, the contents of the state command reception process 2 (S4262) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the state command reception process 2 (S4262). This state command receiving process 2 (S4262) differs from the above-mentioned state command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) in that a control process is added when a time saving state is set, and other processes are added. The contents are the same. Therefore, elements having the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the state command reception process 2 (S4262) is executed, the same processes of S4601 to S4610 as the above-mentioned state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the gaming state has not changed to the latent state (S4605: No), then it is determined whether the gaming state has been changed to the probabilistic state (S4651), and the probable change is made. When it is determined that the state has been changed (S4651: Yes), the same processing of S4608 and S4609 as the above-mentioned state command reception processing (see S4212 in FIG. 69) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

In the process of S4651, when it is determined that the state has not been changed to the probabilistic state, that is, when it is determined that the state has been changed to the time saving state (S4651: Yes), the special figure 2 (No. 2) stored in the winning information storage area 223b. 2 The winning information of the special symbol) is read out (S4652), the effect mode based on the winning / failing judgment result (preliminary judgment result) of the read winning information is set (S4653), and the display command indicating the pullback mode is set (S4654). , S4610.

As described above, when the time saving state is set, the winning information of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) stored in the winning information storage area 223b at that time is determined in advance, and the determination result is obtained. It is configured to set the production mode of the time-saving and medium-time production based on. As the effect mode set here, for example, the type of the character 819 displayed in the effect shown in FIG. 93 (b) can be changed based on the pre-discrimination result, or the background color of the main display area Dm can be changed. There is an effect mode in which the character 811 is displayed, the movement speed is varied, and the determination result (presence or absence of a big hit) of the pre-determination can be suggested depending on the set effect mode.

Therefore, by grasping the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after setting the time reduction state, it is possible to predict the game result during the time reduction state. In addition, when a specific display mode (effect mode) is executed, the game can be played while expecting a big hit.

In the second embodiment, only the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is preliminarily discriminated, and the effect mode (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the time saving state is set based on the pre-discrimination result. However, other configurations may be used, for example, each symbol (first special symbol, second special) stored in the winning information storage area 223b at the time when the time saving state is set. The winning information of the symbol (design, ordinary symbol) may be determined in advance, and the effect mode of the time-saving and medium-time effect may be set based on the determination result.

In addition, as an effect mode of the time-saving medium-time effect, an effect mode suggesting whether or not to win a big hit while the time-saving state is set is provided, but an effect mode suggesting other contents may be provided. Well, for example, it may be configured to set an effect mode suggesting that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage (for example, winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), or among the big hit winnings. , The effect mode suggesting only the jackpot in which the latent state can be set after the jackpot game is completed may be set.

In this way, by variably setting various conditions for the effect mode of the time-saving and medium-time effect executed during the time-saving state, the player pays close attention to the time-saving and medium-time effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by paying the player attention to the effect being executed, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the content (special symbol type, number of changes) of the special symbol change actually executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the contents of the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) executed in the hit-related process (S4219) of the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process 2 (S4851). The jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) executes a process corresponding to various commands related to the received jackpot game, and is the jackpot-related process of the first embodiment described above (S4802 in FIG. 72 (a)). On the other hand, the difference is that the process executed when the jackpot start command is received, the process executed when the ending command is received, and the process executed when the jackpot end timing is reached are different. The other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) is executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4901: Yes), the second special symbol reserved ball count counter. Read the value of 223d (S4931). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter read in the process of S4931 is 2 or more (S4932). If it is determined in the process of S4932 that the value of the counter is 2 or more (S4932: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4933), and this process is terminated.

That is, when the value of the counter is 2 or more in the processing of S4932, it means that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2) after the end of the big hit game is 2 or more, so that it is latent. As a game in a certain state, the condition that a long-time (10 minutes) fluctuation time can be set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is already satisfied. Therefore, at the jackpot game start timing (during the opening period of the jackpot game), the normal jackpot start effect is executed without executing the jackpot middle securing effect (see FIG. 91 (a)).

As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 from reaching the upper limit value (4) even though the effect of securing the jackpot is executed, resulting in a meaningless effect. Can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot game is changed depending on the amount of the reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the start of the jackpot game.

Thereby, for example, it is possible to set the effect mode according to the actual game situation rather than the configuration in which the effect mode executed during the opening period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, even if the jackpot is won during the game state (latent state) in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 can be secured, if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 at the start of the jackpot game, the number is the same. Unless the reserved memory (reserved ball) of the second special symbol is newly secured during the jackpot game, the game advantageous to the player is not executed in the latent probability state set after the jackpot game ends, so that the latent probability state is in progress. If the jackpot is won, the player will be provided with a disadvantageous situation if the normal jackpot start effect is always executed. On the other hand, useful information is provided to the player by configuring the effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot game to be variable depending on the amount of the reserved balls in Special Figure 2 at the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to execute an effect that can be performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4932, when it is determined that the value of the counter (second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) is not 2 or more (S4932: No), the jackpot middle securing effect (see FIG. 91 (a)) is performed. The jackpot start command for display including is set (S4934), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the command received this time is not the jackpot start command (S4901: No), then the jackpot-related processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4802 in FIG. 72 (a)) is performed. When the same processing of S4903 to S4905 is executed and it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S4905 (S4905: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is read out (S4935), and the counter. It is determined whether the value of is 2 or more (S4936).

In the process of S4936, when it is determined that the value of the counter is 2 or more, that is, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 or more at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game (S4936: Yes), that Since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) after the end of the jackpot game is two or more, it is a long time as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol as a game in the latent state (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2). Since the condition that the fluctuation time of 10 minutes) can be set is satisfied, a display ending command for showing a normal ending effect (see FIG. 91 (b)) is set (S4937), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4936 that the value of the counter is not 2 or more (S4936: No), a display for executing the hold securing effect (see FIG. 92 (a)) during the ending period of the jackpot game. Set the ending command for (S4938), and end this process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game is configured so that the effect mode during the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the amount of the reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the jackpot game (at the start of the ending period). It is possible to perform an effect that can provide useful information to a person, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the process of S4905, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4905: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicating the end timing (ending period elapsed timing) of the jackpot game has been received (S4939). If it is determined that the command has been received (S4939: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the counter indicating the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) is 1 or more (S4940). If it is determined that the value is 1 or more (S4940: Yes), the display RUSH command is set (S4941), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the display RUSH command is set, the display mode (see FIG. 92 (b)) indicating the full power mode after the jackpot game is completed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4940 that the value is not 1 or more (0), the standby flag 223aa is set to ON (S4942), and the display standby command is set (S4943). This process ends.

Here, if it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (0) in the processing of S4940, the break zone is set because the change of the second special symbol cannot be started after the jackpot game is completed. The display mode shown (see FIG. 93 (a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S4162). In the variation display setting process 2 (S4162), the variation start flag (special figure 2 variation start flag 223f) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is turned on with respect to the variation display setting process (FIG. 73S4112) described above. The difference is that a new process is added to a part of the process executed when it is set, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S5001 to S5008 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process (FIG. 73S4112) are executed, and when the process of S5008 is completed, the standby flag 223aa is then set. If it is determined whether it is set to on (S5051) and it is determined that it is set to on, that is, if a break zone is set (S5051: Yes), the standby flag 223aa is set to off (S5051). S5052), the display RUSH command is set (S5053), and then the same processes of S5009 to S5012 as the above-mentioned variable display setting process (FIG. 73S4112) are executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the through gate 67 is arranged on the upstream side of the right side region of the game board 13, the second entry port 640 is arranged in the downstream direction thereof, and further. A winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) is arranged below the winning device. With this configuration, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the right-handed game executed during the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), the ball is passed through the gate 67 or the second ball. It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the mouth 640.

Further, in the second embodiment, the distribution member 700 is provided on the most upstream side of the right side region of the game board 13, and the balls launched by the right-handed game alternately have a plurality (two) flow paths (first). It is configured to be distributed to the flow path 701 and the second flow path 702). With this configuration, the number of balls passing through the through gate 67 can be limited. In addition, it is possible to have a certain interval (about 1 second) at the timing when the sphere flows into each flow path. Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery (variation) executed based on passing through the through gate 67 is variable according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol and the set gaming state. It is configured to be configurable.

As a result, for example, when one ball passes through the through gate 67, the one ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 (for example, in a low probability state of a normal symbol and a normal symbol). A state in which the number of reserved balls is 1 or more) and a state in which it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640 (for example, a high probability state of a normal symbol or a low probability state of a normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0). State) can be easily set.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned one ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, and the time when the one ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. Then, the first state in which the winning game has already ended, and the second state in which the normal symbol change has not ended when the one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. Is configured to be configurable.

With this configuration, it is difficult for one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to enter the second entry port 640, and further, other balls other than the one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can also enter. It is possible to subdivide and set a state in which it is difficult to ball and a state in which other balls other than one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter.

As a result, in a continuously executed game, three or more patterns can be set as the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 (the degree of entry), so that various playability can be achieved. Can be provided.

In the second embodiment described above, the ball flow when the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 has been described in detail, but the second entry port has been described. Even if various patterns are set for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed when the ball enters the 640 and the opening operation timing of each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65). good.

For example, in the second embodiment, the ball flow time of the first flow path 701 is 1.6 seconds, the ball flow time of the second flow path 702 is 1 second, and further, each flow. The ball is configured to flow into the road at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the game state and the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is 1 or more, that is, when the ball passing through the through gate 67 can easily enter the second entrance 640, one The ball passes through the through gate 67, and is won by a normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage, and the timing when one ball enters the second entrance 640 (passing through the through gate 67). (Approximately 1 second after), the other sphere that reached the distribution member 700 next to the one sphere (the sphere that reached the distribution member 700 0.6 seconds after the one sphere) is in the first flow path. It is the timing when 0.4 seconds have passed since the inflow into 701.

Therefore, each prize is won at the timing when the other balls described above flow down the first flow path 701 and reach each prize device (V prize device 650, variable prize device 65) provided below the right side region of the game board 13. When the device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) is configured to set the variation time (for example, 1 second) of the second special symbol so that the opening operation can be performed in the winning game (for example, the small winning game). good.

With this configuration, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to easily make each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) win a ball during the small hit game. , It is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously perform the right-handed game.

Further, as in the present embodiment, the ball flow time of the plurality of flow paths into which the balls launched by the right-handed game are distributed and flow in is different by the distribution interval (0.6 seconds) of the balls. Even when a configuration is used in which a plurality of balls arrive at each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) at the same timing by configuring the timing at which the balls are discharged from each flow path to be substantially the same. For example, the sphere that reaches the distribution member 700 next to the other sphere (the sphere that flows down the first flow path 701) (the sphere that flows down the second flow path 702 next to the one sphere) is also described above. Each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) will be reached at the same timing as the other balls.

Therefore, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to easily make each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) win a plurality of balls during the small hit game, so that the player can easily win a prize. It is possible to make it easier to continuously execute a right-handed game. Further, when a ball flowing down the second flow path 702 next to the first ball enters the second entry port 640, the ball is transferred to each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65). Since it is not possible to win a prize, it is possible to set a special state in which it is possible to provide a game situation that is advantageous to the player if the lottery of ordinary symbols is not continuously won.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 89, the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the ball flowing down the second flow path 702 are both winning devices (V winning device 650, It is configured to flow down a flow path that can win a prize to the variable winning device 65), but the ball that flows down one of the flow paths has a flow path that can win a prize in either the V winning device 650 or the variable winning device 65. The ball may be configured to flow down, and the ball flowing down the other flow path may flow down the flow path that can be won only by the winning device (variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side.

With this configuration, the ease of winning the ball varies depending on the flow timing of the ball in each flow path and the type of the winning device that is opened in the winning game (for example, the small hit game). Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the content of the winning game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, by configuring at least one of the plurality of channels so that each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) can win a prize, a sphere flows down the channel. At that time, it is possible to pay attention only to the opening operation timing without worrying about the type of the winning device that is opened in the hit game (for example, the small hit game). Therefore, since the game content to be watched by the player can be different depending on the flow condition of the ball in each flow path, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ball flow between the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the ball that has been launched to the right region after the ball has been described. For example, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and a ball that has passed through the through gate 67. By configuring the ball flow with the ball launched to the right side region before the ball as follows, the ball is excessively placed in the second entry port 640 and each winning device (V winning device 650, variable). It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the winning device 65).

That is, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 before that has already flowed down the second flow path 702. , The ball does not enter the second entry port 640.

In addition, one ball hits the right in front of the one ball rather than the period until the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) of the second special symbol to be executed elapses after the one ball enters the second entrance 640. By configuring the ball fired by the game to flow down on the variable winning device 65 provided on the downstream side of each winning device, the period until the ball flows down is shorter, so that one ball becomes the second entry port. During a hit game (small hit game) executed based on entering a ball in 640, a ball fired before one ball is suppressed from winning a prize device that is opened by the hit game. can do.

In addition, unlike the above-mentioned configuration, it is longer than the period until one ball enters the second entry port 640 and the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) of the second special symbol to be executed elapses. The ball launched by the right-handed game in front of the ball is configured so that the period until it flows down on the variable winning device 65 provided on the downstream side of each winning device is longer, and the right-handed game is performed. It may be configured to increase the number of balls that can be won during the winning game by continuously executing the game.

In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the period (time) in which the sphere flows down each flow path is defined as a specific period (time), but in reality, the sphere Since the coefficient of friction generated between the ball and the lower surface of the ball flow differs due to rotational movement, humidity, dust adhering to the ball, etc., the period during which the ball flows down each flow path is not always constant, and is about 0.1. An error of about a second occurs. The ball flow period specified in each of the above-described embodiments shows the average value.

Therefore, in reality, a ball may flow down each flow path in a flow time different from the period defined as the ball flow down period of each flow path in each embodiment. In this way, an error occurs in the time when the ball actually flows down, so that it is possible to give an unexpected privilege to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. It can improve the interest of the game. In this case, by setting the error range of the flow period in advance as the period (valid period) in which the benefit can be granted, fraudulent acts that intentionally operate the flow of the ball to acquire the benefit can be performed. If it is done outside the valid period, the fraudulent activity can be invalidated.

In the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won in a state where the latent probability state is set, the normal state is not set directly after the jackpot game ends, but for a predetermined period. It is configured to set the normal state after passing through the time saving state of, and if the jackpot is won during the time saving state, the latent state is set after the jackpot ends than if the jackpot is won during the normal state. It is configured to be easy to do.

Further, the pull-back effect in which the effect mode indicating that the time saving state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executed. In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state, a plurality of ending conditions can be set, and the time saving state is terminated when any of the ending conditions of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends, and by having the player predict the ending timing of the time saving state using the effect content of the pullback effect, the effect is produced. Was configured to increase.

In addition to such a configuration, the effect end condition for ending the pullback effect can be set, and the pullback effect is ended when the effect end condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the time saving state ends. May be. As a result, it is possible to make the setting status of the time saving state different from the execution status of the pullback effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the game state currently set, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this case, the effect end condition is set by using the same element as the element for setting the end condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2, the number of small hit executions, etc.). It is preferable to configure the time saving end condition (for example, the number of times) set for each element so as to be different from the above-mentioned time saving end condition. As a result, the effect end condition can be satisfied at the timing when the time reduction end condition can be actually satisfied, so that the player can be made to think that the time reduction end condition is satisfied at the timing when the pullback effect is completed. ..

In addition, a plurality of time reduction end conditions can be set, for example, the first time reduction end condition (special figure 1 fluctuation number 2 times, special figure 2 fluctuation number 4 times, small hit execution number (winning number) 1 time). One of the second time reduction end conditions (special figure 1 fluctuation number 50 times, special figure 2 fluctuation number 10 times, small hit execution number (winning number) 50 times), the type of special symbol at the time of big hit winning, and the game state It is preferable to configure it so that it can be set according to the above, and similarly, it is preferable to configure it so that a plurality of production end conditions can be set.

With this configuration, the pull-back effect is executed and the time-saving state is set according to the setting content of the time-saving end condition and the setting content of the effect end condition, even though the normal state is set. Since it is possible to easily set the state in which the pullback effect is not executed even though it is set, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set game state. can.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving state is provided in order to suppress the existence of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in the state where the normal state is set, as the above-mentioned effect ending condition, special It may be configured to set the effect end condition that is satisfied when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is 0. As a result, even though the time saving state is set and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 exists, the effect ending condition is satisfied and the pull-back effect indicating that the time saving state is set ends. It is possible to suppress that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that causes discomfort to the player.

Further, in the second embodiment, the second entry is performed in both the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). Since it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball opening 640, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the current gaming state according to the degree of entry of the ball into the second entry port 640. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set gaming state.

In the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the high probability state) is different from that of the normal symbol. In addition, the probability of winning a prize in a lottery of ordinary symbols is also different. Therefore, it is configured so that the current gaming state can be predicted by checking the opening operation status of the electric accessory 640a instead of the ball entering condition into the second entry port 640. Therefore, it is possible to provide an element for a skilled player who has played a game for a long period of time and has grasped the open state of the electric accessory 640a in each game state to grasp the current game state.

Further, at the end of the big hit, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is determined, and if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 at the end of the big hit, the pullback effect is not executed even if the time saving state is set. It may be configured. Further, in the present embodiment, it is easy to shift the time saving state to the gaming state for the purpose of reducing the number of holdings in the special figure 2 and the latent state which is more advantageous to the player when the big hit is won than the normal state. It is used to achieve the two purposes of the game state for the purpose of achieving this, but of course, it may be used to achieve either of the purposes, and within the period in which the time saving state is set, it may be used. It may be configured to be used to achieve one purpose during a predetermined period and to be used to achieve the other purpose during a period other than the predetermined period.

Further, when a configuration for setting an effect end condition different from the time reduction end condition is used, as the effect end condition, as described above, one from a plurality of values for each element for which the end condition is set as in the time reduction end condition. A pattern that sets the value of and ends the pull-back effect when any of the end conditions is satisfied, and a predetermined effect period (for example, when the number of changes of the special symbol is 30 times (when the time saving state is not completed). A pattern that continuously executes the pull-back effect during the period until the number of times (the number of times within the existing range) is reached, and notifies whether or not the current time is shortened at the timing when the effect period ends. A pattern for terminating the pullback effect based on the satisfaction of the time saving end condition may be made selectable, and the pullback effect may be executed based on the selected pattern.

In this case, each pattern may be configured so that the player can select each pattern based on the player's operation on the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the pull-back effect in a mode desired by each player.

Further, after the pull-back effect is completed, a suggestion effect (normal effect) for suggesting that the normal state is set may be executed, or the time saving state or the normal state may be executed. It may be configured to execute a special suggestion effect that suggests something incomprehensible to the player. In addition, when the pullback effect is completed, after the normal effect is executed for a predetermined period, the condition that the pullback effect can be executed again (for example, the condition that the time saving end condition is not satisfied) is satisfied. It may be configured to execute the pullback effect again based on the determination result, or as the effect data for executing the pullback effect, a predetermined period (for example, special symbol variation is performed 10 times). When a period, a period until the effect execution period elapses for 2 minutes, etc.) has elapsed, the effect data may be set so that the normal effect is once executed.

With this configuration, even after the pull-back effect is finished, the player can be expected to play the game even if the pull-back effect is executed again. Further, even if the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state has a pattern in which the time saving ending condition is likely to be satisfied and a pattern in which the time saving ending condition is difficult to be satisfied, the timing for ending the pullback effect is similarly set. Therefore, a pattern is set in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied, and even if the time saving state has already ended, it is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 121. In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the value (0 to 399) of the first random number counter C1 is acquired, and the acquired value is a determination value (random number per first) indicating a big hit. It was configured to determine whether or not it matches the determination value specified in the table 202a). Further, in recent years, in order to complicate the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery value used for the above-mentioned special symbol lottery (update range of the first random number counter C1 or the first random number table 202a is defined. There is a tendency to increase the range of judgment values).

Specifically, it is common to use a capacity (0 to 65535) for 2 bytes as lottery value data for indicating the lottery value, and the data capacity puts pressure on the configuration of the main control device 110. There was a problem of doing it. Further, in recent pachinko machines 10, in order to provide players with various game characteristics, a plurality of types of random number counters are provided, and various lottery other than the big hit lottery (for example, a normal symbol winning lottery, a small winning lottery, etc.) It is configured to execute a large hit type lottery and a small hit type lottery), and by defining multiple lottery results as the lottery results of each lottery, it is possible to provide a wider variety of games, and the player can play at an early stage. It is structured so that you will not get bored.

The pachinko machine 10 configured in this way can provide a variety of games to the player, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Since the update range (acquisition range) of the random number counter becomes large, there is a problem that the configuration of the main control device 110 is squeezed.

In addition, even if a configuration having a plurality of random number counters is used as described above, it is rare to execute a game using all the random number counters, and random number values not used for the game are constantly updated. Therefore, there is a problem that the control load of the main control device 110 increases.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the capacity of the lottery value data used for the big hit lottery is compressed (the data capacity is set to one byte), a predetermined operation is executed on the lottery value data, and the operation is performed. It is configured to execute the jackpot hit / fail judgment using the value calculated by. With such a configuration, the data capacity of the lottery value data can be reduced, so that the configuration of the main control device 110 can be suppressed from being oppressed.

In the third embodiment described below, the configuration of the lottery value data used when determining the jackpot of the special symbol and the calculation process for the lottery value data will be specifically described. Some data and each process used for making other determinations have the same configuration, but since they have the same configuration, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 116, the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is the first hit in place of the random number table 202a per first with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a random number table 202ca is provided and a new random number data fluctuation table is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 3 table 202ca is referred to when the jackpot determination of the special symbol is executed, and the determination value for determining the jackpot is defined. The first random number 3 table 202ca has one byte (8 bits) having a data capacity smaller than the range of "0 to 399", which is the update range of the first random number counter C1, that is, "0" in decimal. The determination value (determination value before conversion) is defined within the data capacity that can generate the value of "~ 255".

Here, the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), 10 types of determination tables (table reference values "0" to "9") are defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca, and each determination table has a definition. On the other hand, a 1-byte determination value (pre-conversion determination value) is defined as the jackpot winning value.

Then, when the jackpot determination (win / fail determination) is executed, the jackpot determination is made by referring to 10 types of determination tables (table reference values "0" to "9") according to a predetermined rule. Will be executed.

The first random number 3 table 202ca shown in FIG. 119 (b) also shows the calculation results according to the conversion rules stored in the random number data conversion table 202 cab, which will be described later, for convenience of explanation. Actually, only the pre-conversion determination value is specified.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca, "07H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value in the determination table of the table reference value "0". The determination table having the table reference value "0" is used for the first hit / fail determination regardless of the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the special symbol when the jackpot determination is executed. Next, in the determination table of the table reference value "1", "08H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table having the table reference value "1" is used for the second hit / fail determination regardless of the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the special symbol when the jackpot determination is executed.

In the determination table of the table reference value "2", "40H" is specified as the determination value before conversion. This table for determining the reference value "2" is used to determine the end of the jackpot determination process when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a low probability state, and has a high probability. When it is in the state, it is used to make the big hit judgment after the next table reference value without performing the big hit judgment. Next, in the determination table of the table reference value "3", "51H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table of the table reference value "3" is used for the third hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state.

In the determination table of the table reference value "4", "61H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. This table for determining the reference value "4" is used for the fourth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state, and is used for determining the table reference value "5". In the table, "91H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table with the table reference value "5" is used for the fifth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state.

Further, in the determination table of the table reference value "6", "ABH" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. This table for determining the reference value "6" is used for the sixth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state, and is used for determining the table reference value "7". In the table, "E2H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table with the table reference value "7" is used for the seventh hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state.

In the determination table of the table reference value "8", "EFH" is defined as the determination value before conversion. The determination table with the table reference value "8" is used for the eighth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state. Then, in the determination table of the table reference value "9", "00H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table having the table reference value "9" is used to determine the end of the jackpot determination process when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state.

The pre-conversion judgment value defined in each judgment table of the first random number 3 table 202ca is a 2-byte judgment value (post-conversion judgment) using the conversion rule stored in the random number data conversion table 202cc described later. Value) is converted to. The details of the conversion rule will be described later, but specifically, the pre-conversion determination value "07H" defined in the table reference value "0" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "7 (0007H)". The pre-conversion determination value "08H" specified in the table reference value "1" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "8 (0008H)", and the pre-conversion determination value "2" specified in the table reference value "2" is converted. "40H" is converted to the post-conversion judgment value "0 (0000H)", and the pre-conversion judgment value "51H" defined in the table reference value "3" is converted to the post-conversion judgment value "34 (0022H)". The pre-conversion determination value "61H" defined in the table reference value "4" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "66 (0042H)".

Next, the pre-conversion determination value "91H" defined in the table reference value "5" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "68 (0044H)", and the pre-conversion determination value defined in the table reference value "6" is determined. The value "ABH" is converted to the converted determination value "172 (00ACH)", and the pre-conversion determination value "E2H" defined in the table reference value "7" is the converted determination value "272 (0110H)". The pre-conversion determination value "EFH" converted to the table reference value "8" is converted to the post-conversion determination value "376 (0178H)" and the conversion specified in the table reference value "9". The pre-determination value “00H” is converted into the post-conversion determination value “0 (0000H)”.

Then, when it is determined that the value of the converted determination value obtained by converting each pre-conversion determination value defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca and the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined. It is judged that the jackpot was won. Further, the table reference value "2" and the table reference value "9" are "0 (0000H)" having the same converted determination value.

As described above, those having the same post-conversion determination value are specified before the conversion process using the conversion rule is executed, and are configured to be used for purposes other than the jackpot determination. As a result, the pre-conversion determination value set within the data capacity of 1 byte can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, by using only the post-conversion judgment value that does not overlap as the value (post-conversion judgment value) referred to when performing the jackpot judgment, the jackpot judgment can be executed with the probability according to the design value. ..

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 119 (b), in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, a plurality (10 pieces) defined in the random number 3 table 202ca per first. ), The big hit judgment is performed using two table reference values "0" and "1", and if the special symbol is in a high probability state, it is specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca. Of the plurality (10) of the determination tables, eight of the table reference values "0", "1", and "3" to "8" are used to perform the jackpot determination. In this way, the actual jackpot probability is configured to be variable by varying the number of determination tables to be referred to (the number of jackpot determinations to be executed) according to the probability state of the special symbol.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to use a lottery value with a large amount of data (for example, a 2-byte lottery value) in order to set a complicated probability (big hit probability) according to the probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The random number data conversion table 202cc stores the conversion rule referred to when the pre-conversion determination value (determination value of 1 byte) defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca is converted.

Here, the content of the conversion process executed for the pre-conversion determination value (determination value of 1 byte) executed in the third embodiment will be briefly described. In the third embodiment, the pre-conversion determination value (value in the range of "0 to 255" in decimal) set by the data capacity of 1 byte (256 data amounts) is the random number counter C1 per first. The conversion process is executed so that the jackpot determination value is within the update range (“0 to 399”) of.

When the conversion process is executed, first, the pre-conversion determination value (hexadecimal number) is indicated by an 8-bit binary number value, and each bit is divided into the specified (multiplier part, mantissa part). The multiplier value is calculated from the value indicated by the bit corresponding to the mantissa, and the multiplicand value is calculated from the value indicated by the bit corresponding to the mantissa. Then, the multiplier value and the multiplicand value are multiplied, and the calculated value is used as the converted determination value.

With this configuration, a judgment value is set for a range exceeding the 1-byte data capacity using a 1-byte data capacity that can indicate only the range of "0 to 255" in decimal notation. It becomes possible. Therefore, the data capacity of the value stored in advance as the determination value can be compressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119 (a), the conversion rules stored in the random number data conversion table 202cc will be specifically described. First, with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the role of each bit constituting the pre-conversion data (1 byte pre-conversion determination value) will be described. FIG. 118 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a region in which the bit configuration of the pre-conversion data included in the random number data conversion table 202cc is defined.

As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the pre-conversion data (1 byte pre-conversion determination value) is composed of 8-bit binary numbers, and the most significant bit of the 8-bit is defined by the bit type "7". The bit type is specified for each bit so that the least significant bit has the bit type "0". Of the 8-bit data, the upper 2 (n) bits correspond to the multiplier part, and the lower 6 (8-n) bits correspond to the mantissa part.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (b), the conversion rule for the value of the upper 2 (n) bits defined in the multiplier part will be described. FIG. 118 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a region in which the multiplier part conversion data of the random number data conversion table 202cc is defined. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), among the pre-conversion determination values, different multiplier values are specified for the values indicated by the upper 2 (n) bits defined as the multiplier part.

Specifically, the upper 2 (n) bits are defined as a multiplier value "1" for "00B", a multiplier value "2" for "01B", and a multiplier value for "10B". The numerical value "4" is specified, and the multiplier value "8" is specified for 11B ". By defining different multiplier values according to the value indicated by the upper 2 (n) bits in this way, the converted value can be made into various sizes.

Further, in the third embodiment, it is specified that the multiplier value is a multiplier of 2. As a result, it is possible to intentionally appear the case where the same value is obtained as a result of executing the conversion process for different pre-conversion determination values. Therefore, the weight of the value calculated as the determination value after conversion, that is, the value that is easy to calculate and the value that is difficult to calculate can be provided. By setting the value corresponding to the state (low probability state where it is difficult to win the jackpot) as the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot winning probability can be changed without changing the number of judgment values corresponding to the jackpot judgment value. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (c), the conversion rule for the value of the lower 6 (8-n) bits defined in the mantissa part will be described. FIG. 118 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a region defining the mantissa part conversion data possessed by the random number data conversion table 202cb. As shown in FIG. 118 (c), among the pre-conversion determination values, different weight values are specified for the values indicated by the lower 6 (8-n) bits defined as the mantissa.

Specifically, among the lower 6 (8-n) bits, a weight value "1" is defined for the bit type "0", and a weight value "2" is defined for the bit type "1". A weight value "4" is specified for the bit type "2", a weight value "8" is specified for the bit type "3", and a weight value "16" is specified for the bit type "4". , A weight value "32" is specified for the bit type "5".

Next, with reference to FIG. 119 (a), a specific example in which the value of the pre-conversion determination value is converted according to the conversion rule defined in the random number data conversion table 202cc will be described. FIG. 119 (a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of converting a pre-conversion determination value (determination value for 1 byte) into a post-conversion determination value (determination value for 2 bytes).

First, a conversion example in the case where the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) of the pre-conversion data is “239” in decimal (“EFH” in hexadecimal) will be described. The value that becomes "EFH" in hexadecimal is "11110111B" in 8-bit binary, the upper 2 bits "11B" is the multiplier part, and the lower 6 bits "101111B" is the mantissa part.

Then, with reference to the random number data conversion table 202cc, the multiplier value "8" corresponding to the multiplier part "11B" is read out (see FIG. 118 (b)), and the weight value "32 + 0 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1" corresponding to the mantissa part "101111B" is obtained. Read (see FIG. 118 (c)) and calculate the multiplicand value "47". After that, the multiplier value "8" and the multiplicand value "47" are multiplied to calculate "376 (decimal number)". As a result, the pre-conversion determination value "239" defined in the decimal number "0 to 255" can be converted to "376" exceeding the range by the conversion process.

Similarly, a conversion example in the case where the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) of the pre-conversion data is “0” in decimal (“00H” in hexadecimal) will be described. The value of "00H" in hexadecimal is "0000000000B" in 8-bit binary, the upper 2 bits "00B" is the multiplier part, and the lower 6 bits "000000B" is the mantissa.

Then, with reference to the random number data conversion table 202cc, the multiplier value "1" corresponding to the multiplier part "00B" is read out (see FIG. 118 (b)), and the weight value "0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0" corresponding to the mantissa part "000000B" is obtained. Read (see FIG. 118 (c)) and calculate the multiplied value "0". After that, the multiplier value "1" and the multiplicand value "0" are multiplied to calculate "0 (decimal number)".

Next, a conversion example will be described when the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) of the pre-conversion data is "64" in decimal ("40H" in hexadecimal). The value of "40H" in hexadecimal is "01000000B" in 8-bit binary, the upper 2 bits "01B" is the multiplier part, and the lower 6 bits "000000B" is the mantissa.

Then, with reference to the random number data conversion table 202cc, the multiplier value "2" corresponding to the multiplier part "01B" is read out (see FIG. 118 (b)), and the weight value "0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0" corresponding to the mantissa part "000000B" is obtained. Read (see FIG. 118 (c)) and calculate the multiplied value "0". After that, the multiplier value "2" and the multiplicand value "0" are multiplied to calculate "0 (decimal number)".

As described above, according to the conversion process of the present embodiment, even if the pre-conversion determination value (1-byte determination value) is different (“00H” and “40H”), the value after the conversion process is the same. It may be ("0"). That is, in the present embodiment, the operation rule of the conversion process is defined so that the value after the conversion process is the same for the value whose mantissa part is "000000B".

In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined that the pre-conversion determination value in which the value after the conversion process is the same (“0”) is acquired is configured to be used as a condition for skipping the conversion process and executing another process. are doing. In this way, by configuring the pre-conversion determination value in which the values after the conversion process are duplicated so as not to be used for the jackpot determination, it is possible to execute a fair jackpot determination for all the determination values.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the third embodiment, the jackpot determination process executed in the high probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot determination process executed in the low probability state of the special symbol are the first hits. The random number 3 table 202ca is configured to refer to different times, and the acquisition of the pre-conversion determination value in which the values after the above-mentioned conversion processing are the same (“0”) is acquired in the probability state (high probability) of the special symbol. It is configured to trigger the end of the jackpot judgment according to the state (state, low probability state).

As a result, the pre-conversion determination value in which the value after the conversion process (post-conversion determination value) is the same can be effectively utilized. In the third embodiment, the pre-conversion determination value in which the value after the conversion process (determination value after conversion) is the same is used as the end trigger of the jackpot determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the conversion process. The pre-conversion determination value in which the values overlap may be set so as to be determined as a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 5 times easier to win the jackpot probability than the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot winning It is possible to eliminate the need to increase the types of determination values to be determined five times. That is, the judgment value (judgment value after conversion) that is determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is a value that can be converted only from one pre-conversion judgment value, and the big hit is won in the high probability state of the special symbol. By setting the determination process (determination value after conversion) to be a value converted from the five determination values before conversion, the actual jackpot probability can be increased five times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the area for storing the value specified as the jackpot determination value.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a judgment value (pre-conversion judgment value (0 to 255)) that can be set within a specific range (data capacity of 1 byte) is set in advance, and the judgment value ( Judgment within a range larger than the above-mentioned specific range (update range (0 to 399) of random number counter C1 per first) by executing arithmetic processing based on a predetermined arithmetic rule for the pre-conversion determination value). It is configured so that it can be converted into a value (determined value after conversion (0 to 399)). As a result, the data capacity of the preset (stored) determination value can be compressed.

Further, as a predetermined calculation rule, a calculation rule in which the determination values after conversion can be duplicated is used, and it is configured so that a bias occurs with respect to the value to be the determination value after conversion. Then, the duplicated determination values among the converted determination values are configured to be used for a purpose other than the jackpot determination (for example, an opportunity to end the jackpot determination process). With this configuration, the determination values that can be set within a preset specific range can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (c), only one type of calculation rule is provided, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, the value of the multiplier part (upper 2). A plurality of multiplier conversion data in which a multiplier value for (bit value) is specified are provided, a predetermined selection lottery means is provided, and arithmetic processing is executed using the multiplication conversion data selected by the selection lottery means. May be.

With this configuration, a plurality of post-conversion judgment values can be calculated from one pre-conversion judgment value, so that the data capacity of the preset (stored) judgment value can be further compressed. .. Similarly, a plurality of mantissa conversion data may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is specified that the value associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) is a multiplier of 2. are doing. As a result, it is configured so that the same determination value can be easily displayed after executing a complicated arithmetic process (after conversion). On the other hand, for example, it is specified that all the values associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) are prime numbers. May be. With such a configuration, the possibility that the determined values after conversion are duplicated can be easily reduced.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that a converted data storage area 203ca is provided. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The converted data storage area 203ca is a storage area for temporarily storing the value (converted data) calculated by executing a predetermined operation on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1. The information stored in the converted data storage area 203ca is configured to be retained for a predetermined period even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, like the information stored in the other RAM 203. Therefore, even if the power is turned off due to a power failure before using the value (converted data) calculated by executing a predetermined operation on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, after the power failure is restored. , Processing using the converted data can be executed.

When the converted data was calculated by the conversion lottery determination process (see S451 in FIG. 121) described later, the calculated converted data was stored in the converted data storage area 203ca, and the converted data was used. The converted data stored after the hit / fail judgment result is set is deleted.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. In the third embodiment, the control process of the main control device 110 of the first embodiment described above is replaced with the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), and the first special symbol jackpot determination process is performed. The difference is that 3 (see S356 in FIG. 120) is executed. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356). As shown in FIG. 120, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356), first, the same process of S401 as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above is performed. Is executed, then the conversion lottery determination process (S451) is executed, and then the same processes of S405 to S409 as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35) are executed, and this process is terminated. ..

That is, the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above only in that the processing method for executing the jackpot determination of the special symbol is different. Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, the conversion lottery determination process (S451 in FIG. 120) is performed not only for the first special symbol but also for the process of executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. (See) is configured to be executed, but the description is omitted because they are the same except that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents of the conversion lottery determination process (S451) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356 in FIG. 120) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the conversion lottery determination process (S451).

In the conversion lottery determination process (S451), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S371), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S371: Yes), the determination end value is ". "00H" is set (S372), and the process proceeds to S374. That is, in the processing of S372, since the present is a high probability state of the special symbol, the pre-conversion determination value "9" corresponding to the table reference value "9" is set at the end time of the jackpot determination with reference to the first random number 3 table 202ca. By setting to "00H", eight judgments using the table reference value "0, 1, 3 to 8" of the first random number 3 table 202ca are executed as one big hit judgment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S371 that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S371: No), "40H" is set as the determination end value (S373), and the process proceeds to S374. That is, in the processing of S373, since the present is a low probability state of the special symbol, the end time point of the jackpot determination referring to the first random number 3 table 202ca is set to the pre-conversion determination value corresponding to the table reference value “2”. By setting to "40H", two judgments using the table reference value "0,1" of the first random number 3 table 202ca are executed as one big hit judgment.

In the process of S374, "0" is set as the table reference value (S374). As a result, when the jackpot determination (special symbol lottery) is executed, the determination can always be executed from the table reference value "0" of the first random number 3 table 202ca.

Next, the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) based on the current table reference value is acquired from the first random number 3 table 202ca (S375), and the acquired determination value (pre-conversion determination value) is the determination end value (pre-conversion determination value). It is determined whether the value is S372 or the value set in the process of S373 (S376). In the process of S376, if it is determined that it is the determination end value (S376: Yes), it means that the condition for ending the jackpot determination is satisfied, so the lottery result is set to be out of order (S382) and this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S376, when it is determined that the value is not the determination end value (S376: No), it is determined whether the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) acquired this time is "40H" (S377), and "40H". (S377: Yes), that is, in the state where "00H" is set as the judgment end value (high probability state of the special symbol), the judgment value (pre-conversion judgment value) acquired this time is "40H". If it is, the currently set table reference value is added by 1 (S378), and the process proceeds to S375. That is, the processing flow of S377 and S378 is executed when the table reference value "2" is set in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

If it is determined in the process of S377 that the determination value is not "40H" (S377: No), various conversion data (multiplier conversion data, mantissa conversion data) specified in the random number data conversion table 202cc). The judgment value (judgment value before conversion) is converted (calculated) based on (S379), and whether the converted value (judgment value after conversion) matches the lottery value (value of the acquired first random number counter C1). Determine (S380).

Here, if it is determined that the converted value (determined value after conversion) matches the lottery value (value of the acquired first random number counter C1) (S380: Yes), the current lottery result is set as a hit (S380: Yes). S381), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S380: No), the process proceeds to S378. After that, the lottery process is looped until the acquired determination value (determination value before conversion) reaches the determination end value.

By executing the conversion lottery determination process (S451) configured in this way, the 1/400 jackpot determination is executed twice in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the actual jackpot probability becomes 1/200. In the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot determination of 1/400 is executed eight times, so that the actual jackpot probability can be configured to be 1/50.

Further, the number of jackpot determinations corresponding to the probability state of the special symbol is defined by the pre-conversion determination value (“00H”, “40H”), which is the determination value in which the post-conversion determination values overlap. Since 202ca is configured, appropriate processing can be executed while reducing the data capacity of the main control device 110.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the post-conversion determination value is a pre-conversion determination value that is a duplicate determination value before the conversion process is performed, so that unnecessary processing is executed. It can be suppressed and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the determination value (pre-conversion determination value (0)) that can be set within a specific range (1 byte data capacity) as the process for executing the jackpot determination of the special symbol. ~ 255)) is set in advance, and by executing arithmetic processing based on a predetermined arithmetic rule for the determination value (determination value before conversion), a range larger than the above-mentioned specific range (first hit). It is configured so that it can be converted into a determination value (determination value after conversion (0 to 399)) within the update range (0 to 399) of the random number counter C1. As a result, the data capacity of the preset (stored) determination value can be compressed.

Further, as a predetermined calculation rule, a calculation rule in which the determination values after conversion can be duplicated is used, and it is configured so that a bias occurs with respect to the value to be the determination value after conversion. Then, the duplicated determination values among the converted determination values are configured to be used for a purpose other than the jackpot determination (for example, an opportunity to end the jackpot determination process). With this configuration, the determination values that can be set within a preset specific range can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (c), only one type of calculation rule is provided, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, the value of the multiplier part (upper 2). A plurality of multiplier conversion data in which a multiplier value for (bit value) is specified are provided, a predetermined selection lottery means is provided, and arithmetic processing is executed using the multiplication conversion data selected by the selection lottery means. May be.

With this configuration, a plurality of post-conversion judgment values can be calculated from one pre-conversion judgment value, so that the data capacity of the preset (stored) judgment value can be further compressed. .. Similarly, a plurality of mantissa conversion data may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is specified that the value associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) is a multiplier of 2. are doing. As a result, it is configured so that the same determination value can be easily displayed after executing a complicated arithmetic process (after conversion). On the other hand, for example, it is specified that all the values associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) are prime numbers. May be. With such a configuration, the possibility that the determined values after conversion are duplicated can be easily reduced.

In the third embodiment described above, in order to compress the data capacity of the specified value of the random number 3 table 202ca per first of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the pre-conversion determination value of the data capacity in one byte is stored, and the data capacity thereof is stored. The conversion process is executed according to the predetermined conversion rule for the pre-conversion judgment value, and the jackpot judgment is executed using the value that does not overlap the result of the conversion process. It may be configured to execute the small hit determination together with the big hit determination.

For example, for the pre-conversion judgment value specified in each judgment table, a conversion process based on a specific first conversion rule is executed to calculate a post-conversion judgment value for big hit judgment, and the first conversion rule is used. Is configured to execute a conversion process based on a different specific second conversion rule and calculate a post-conversion determination value for a small hit determination.

Further, each conversion rule is defined so that the same post-conversion determination value is not calculated by the conversion process based on the first conversion rule and the conversion process based on the second conversion rule, and further, the conversion based on the second conversion rule. It is preferable to configure so that a plurality of converted judgment values are calculated by the process.

With this configuration, it is possible to calculate a value for big hit determination (post-conversion determination value) and a value for small hit determination (post-conversion determination value) using one pre-conversion determination value. Further, by making the number of values for big hit determination and the number of values for small hit determination different, the actual hit probability can be easily made different.

Furthermore, if the jackpot probability of the special symbol is variable according to the probability state of the special symbol and the small hit probability is not variable, the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not executed. It is preferable to configure it so that the judgment value after conversion of is calculated. As a result, when the hit determination (big hit determination, small hit determination) is executed with reference to the determination table in the same range, the number of small hit determination determinations can be increased more than the number of big hit determination determinations.

In the third embodiment described above, the configuration for compressing the data capacity of the specified value of the random number 3 table 202ca per first of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been described, but it is specified in various tables of the pachinko machine 10. The same configuration may be used for the specified value, for example, the same configuration may be used for the process of executing the hit determination of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), or the voice lamp control device 113 may use the same configuration. The same configuration may be used for the processing when selecting the variation pattern effect to be executed.

<About another example using the technical idea of the third embodiment>
Next, in order to reduce the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the same technical idea as that of the third embodiment described above, the data capacity of the specified value stored in advance in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is compressed. When actually used, another example of using the technical idea of executing the conversion process on the compressed data will be described.

In the third embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which the data capacity of the main control device 110 is reduced by compressing the data of the determination value (determination value before conversion) defined in the random number 3 table 202ca per first. However, in this alternative example, in order to achieve the same purpose, the update range of the first random number counter C1 is compressed (updated within the range of 1-byte data capacity (range of 0 to 255)). By performing a predetermined operation on the acquired value (compressed value) of the random number counter C1 per first, a range larger than the compressed update range (range of 1-byte data capacity) is configured. (For example, it is configured to be converted into a value included in the range of the data capacity of 2 bytes (0 to 65535)).

In the first embodiment described above, the number of determination values determined to be a jackpot in a high-probability state of a special symbol (a state in which it is easy to win a jackpot) and a low-probability state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot than the high-probability state. It was configured to change the winning probability of the jackpot by making them different.

Further, in the first embodiment, the random number counter C1 per first is configured to update the random number value so that the numerical values in the update range (acquisition range) appear evenly.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the first random number table 202a referred to when the jackpot determination (hit / fail determination) of the special symbol is executed has an area for storing the jackpot determination value in the high probability state of the special symbol. , It is necessary to separately specify the area for storing the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol with a different size, which may lead to an increase in the data capacity.

Further, in order to set the jackpot probability of the special symbol low, it is necessary to set a large update range of the second random number counter C1 (for example, a range of a 2-byte data capacity (0 to 65535)), and the random number thereof. There was the problem of spending a lot of data capacity to build the counter.

On the other hand, in this modification, the numerical values within the updated range (for example, the range of 1-byte data capacity (0 to 255)) obtained by compressing the first random number counter C1 are evenly displayed. By configuring the random value to be updated and performing a predetermined operation on each random value that appears evenly, the acquired random value (pre-conversion random value) is set to a range larger than the compressed update range (for example). , 2 bytes of data capacity range (0 to 65535)) is configured to be variable to the converted random number value.

Further, in this alternative example, the converted values (converted random values) are configured to partially overlap. Then, during the high probability state of the special symbol, the overlapping value is defined as the jackpot judgment value, and during the low probability state of the special symbol, the value that cannot be duplicated is defined as the jackpot judgment value. It is configured to change the jackpot probability in the probability state of the special symbol.

As a result, only the jackpot probability can be changed without changing the number of random number counter values defined as the jackpot determination value. In addition, in this modification, when it is determined that the acquired value of the random number counter C1 per first is a predetermined value, the special control process is executed without executing the arithmetic process for that value. It is composed. With this configuration, the processing related to the special symbol lottery can be completed without executing the arithmetic processing, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the first to third embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. The other pachinko machines 10, that is, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and the winning prize is a trigger for each lottery. Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes lottery in the order in which information is acquired (the order of entry into the first entry port 64 and entry into the second entry opening 640), and the lottery of one of the special symbols. It may be configured to be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the type to be executed.

For example, in the state where the normal state is set as described in the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the configuration for setting the probability change state is described above. It may be used in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery (variation) of the symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, or may be used in the above-mentioned first embodiment or the second. The above-mentioned first special symbol has a configuration in which the degree of entry of a ball passing through the through gate 67 described in the embodiment into the second entry port 640 is changed according to the number of normal symbol reserved balls and the gaming state. It may be used in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery (variation) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time. Even if such a configuration is used, the effect is obtained in the same manner as in each of the above-described embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 have been described, but the effects have the same purpose and effect. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a notification effect that makes the player surely grasp the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly informs the content are used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the above-mentioned set value, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning a small hit is different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the selection ratio. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the above-mentioned set values can be set in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. When various configurations are used, various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol can be changed according to the set value. In the set value of, if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, the lottery of the other special symbol different from one special symbol is performed. Various parameters may be specified for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be limited to the time saving state 2. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the motivation of the player who could not shift to the probabilistic state even though he won the jackpot in the normal game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is continued until the next big hit, and 10 times of time reduction is given as the time reduction state regardless of the game state. The specification is to continue until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed every time the special figure fluctuates, and by winning the lottery, the probabilistic state changes to the normal game state. It may be configured to be migrated. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations among the plurality of time saving end conditions, that is, the variation. The time saving state is set to the normal state at different timings depending on whether the number of times ending condition is satisfied and the time saving ending condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, that is, when the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It was configured so that it could be migrated to.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined. In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Slight time reduction per special figure 2 in normal time)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first determination means capable of performing a first determination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A second discriminating means different from the above, a second discriminating means capable of performing a second discriminating different from the first discriminating based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the first discriminating means. The display means capable of displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means and the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means A privilege that can execute the first privilege game based on the specific first determination result and execute the second privilege game based on the determination result of the second determination means being the specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a gaming execution means, the first gaming state for restricting the entry of a gaming ball into the second entry means to play a game and the restriction in the first gaming state have been lifted. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of switching between the second game state and the game state, and the game state setting means executes the second determination in a state where the first game state is set. When the second privilege game is executed based on the second determination result being the specific second determination result, the first game state is set after the execution of the second privilege game. The gaming machine A1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery is executed among a plurality of special symbols. There is a gaming machine configured so that the lottery of special symbols is preferentially executed. In such a gaming machine, when a specific first gaming state is not set in order to prevent the lottery of advantageous special symbols from being frequently executed in a state where the specific first gaming state is not set. Is provided with measures to set a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) of the advantageous special symbol. However, with the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the lottery of advantageous special symbols, but since the expected degree of privilege grant to the player per advantageous special symbol lottery is not changed, it takes a long time (for example). , Approximately 12 hours from the opening of the game state to the closing of the store) The player who plays the game plays a game in which the other special symbol is drawn while the special symbol is drawn, which is advantageous in terms of added value. There is a problem that the player receives the privilege based on the lottery result of the symbol and gives the player an excessive privilege. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machines is to limit the benefits given to the players and to provide appropriate games. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Although it is described, the problems solved by the technical idea of this feature group are not limited to the simultaneous variable machines, and the game machines other than the simultaneous variable machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine A1, even if the second determination is executed in the state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is not set based on the second determination result, so that the second determination is performed. It is possible to prevent the determination from being excessively executed, and there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming state setting means executes the second determination in a state where the second gaming state is set, and the second determination result is the specific second determination result. When the second privilege game is executed based on the above, the first determination is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set, and the first determination result is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second gaming state than when the first privileged gaming is executed based on the above.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. By executing the second determination in the state where the second gaming state is set, the second gaming state can be easily set repeatedly. Therefore, it is possible to have the player perform a game aiming at the execution of the second discrimination and a game aiming at the execution of the first discrimination according to the set game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

As the probability that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means in the game machine A1 or A2, the first probability and the first privilege game or the first privilege game rather than the first probability thereof. 2 The game state setting means has a probability setting means capable of setting a second probability in which a privilege game is easily executed, and the game state setting means is set as a first game state when the first probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a specific first gaming state is set, and a special first gaming state is set as the first gaming state when the second probability is set.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, even if the first probability or the second probability is set by the probability setting means, the gaming ball is inserted into the second entry means. Since it is possible to set the first gaming state in which the ball is restricted from playing the game, it is possible to prevent the second discrimination from being excessively executed, and the player is provided with an appropriate game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine A3, the special first gaming state is characterized in that it is more difficult to allow the gaming ball to enter the second ball entering means and play a game than the specific first gaming state. Pachinko machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set in a state where the second probability that the privilege game is easily executed is set by the privilege game execution means, the game in which the second determination is executed can be strongly regulated. , It is possible to positively perform a game in which the first determination is executed with the second probability set. Therefore, it is possible to have the player perform a game aiming at the execution of the second discrimination and a game aiming at the execution of the first discrimination according to the set game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means for a predetermined first period, and a predetermined second identification information on the display means. It has a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for two periods, and the second dynamic display means performs the first identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. 2 The gaming machine A5 characterized in that the identification information can be dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of increasing efficiency.

In any of the game machines A3 to A5, the notification means capable of executing the game notification for prompting the execution of the first determination by the first determination means, and the notification means is set to the specific first game state. It is determined that the first game notification that can be executed in the case of the above and the second game notification that can be executed when the special first game state is set execute the game notification of different notification modes. A featured gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the notification means performs the game notification in different modes according to the set game state, so that the game notification is easy for the player to understand. Has the effect of being able to execute.

In the gaming machine A6, the notification mode of the second game notification executed by the notification means emphasizes the execution of the first determination by the first discrimination means rather than the notification mode of the first game notification. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it is a notification mode.

According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6. That is, the more difficult it is for the second discrimination means to execute the second discrimination, the more the notification mode for prompting the execution of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means is emphasized, so that the situation where the player executes a disadvantageous game is suppressed. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that an inappropriate game can be provided.

<Characteristic B group> (The degree of winning the electric chew of the ball passing through the through gate is different)
A specific area through which the game ball can pass, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area, and identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. The dynamic display means, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means In a gaming machine having a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state when it is a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is the specific area. The game ball that has flowed down is arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and in the game machine, the discrimination result determined based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area is the specific discrimination result. In this case, it is more difficult than the first setting and the first setting that make it easier for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area that triggered the determination from the specific determination result to enter the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine B1 having a setting means capable of setting a second setting.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery is executed among a plurality of special symbols. There is a gaming machine configured so that the lottery of special symbols is preferentially executed. In addition, in order to prevent the lottery of advantageous special symbols from being easily executed, the lottery of advantageous special symbols should be executed when the game ball enters the entrance with the electric accessory. There is a pachinko machine that has been configured. In such a gaming machine, generally, when a winning prize is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the electric accessory is opened and the gaming ball can enter the entrance. In such a gaming machine, the ease of opening the electric accessory is made different depending on the gaming state, so that when the first gaming state is set, the lottery of the advantageous special symbol is easily executed. It is required to make it difficult to release the electric accessory in order to make it easy to release the electric accessory and to make it difficult for the lottery of the advantageous special symbol to be executed when the game state other than that is set. However, it is difficult to set the opening operation of the electric accessory in a complicated manner according to the gaming state, and in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the same opening operation as in the first gaming state is executed. There was a problem. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide an appropriate game by executing a lottery of advantageous special symbols according to the gaming state. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Although it is described, the problems solved by the technical idea of this feature group are not limited to the simultaneous variable machines, and the game machines other than the simultaneous variable machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine B1, when the discrimination result determined based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific area is the specific discrimination result, the setting means triggers the discrimination as the specific discrimination result. It is possible to set a first setting that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means and a second setting that makes it more difficult than the first setting. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine B1, as a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. , A dynamic display period setting means for setting one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods having different periods, and the dynamic display period setting means is the first by the setting means. When the setting is set, it is easier to set the first dynamic display period during which the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area can enter the variable ball-entry means than when the second setting is set. When the second setting is set by the setting means, it is more difficult for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the variable ball entry means than when the first setting is set. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is easy to set a second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by changing the dynamic display period, it is possible to limit the entry of the gaming ball into the variable entry means, so that proper gaming is easy. It has the effect of being able to provide to.

In the gaming machine B2, the setting means can set a short second setting and a long second setting different from the short second setting as the second setting, and the dynamic display period setting. When the short second setting is set by the setting means, the means has a dynamic display period shorter than the passing period required for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball-entry means. The gaming machine B3, which is set as the second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, when the short second condition is satisfied, a dynamic display period shorter than the passing period required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball entry means is set, so that the game ball passes through the specific area. It is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means.

The gaming machine B3 has a limiting means for limiting the gaming balls that can pass through the specific area, and the limiting means is a passing period required for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball entering means. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the gaming balls are allowed to flow down toward the specific region at longer intervals.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the interval at which the game ball passes through the specific area can be set to be longer than the passage period until the game ball that has passed through the specific area reaches the variable ball entry means, the short second condition is satisfied. In the state, when the variable entry means is changed to the first state based on the fact that one game ball has passed through a specific area, the other game balls are suppressed from entering the variable entry means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means can be reliably restricted and an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the dynamic display period setting means waits until the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area reaches the variable ball entering means when the second length setting is set by the setting means. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that a dynamic display period longer than the passing period required for the above is set as the second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are played. That is, when the second long condition is satisfied, a dynamic display period shorter than the passing period required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball entry means is set, so that the game ball passes through the specific area. It is possible to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided. Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine B4 is used, the dynamic display period set when the second long condition is satisfied is made longer than the interval at which the limiting means causes the gaming ball to flow down toward the specific area. It is good to configure it to. This makes it possible for another game ball to enter the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state based on the fact that one game ball has passed through a specific area. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is easier to insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means when the long second condition is satisfied than when the short second condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, a first discrimination state in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is likely to be the specific discrimination result, and a second discrimination state in which the discrimination result is less likely to be the specific discrimination result than the first discrimination state. The gaming machine B6 is characterized by having a state setting means capable of setting the above, and the short second setting can be established when the first determination state is set by the state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first discriminant state is set, the short second condition can be satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent many game balls in the first discrimination state from entering the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In any of the game machines B3 to B6, the acquisition means capable of acquiring passage information based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area and the passage information acquired by the acquisition means are limited to a predetermined number. It has a storage means that can be stored, and the discrimination means executes discrimination based on the passage information stored in the storage means when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied. When the number of stored passage information stored in the means is not more than a predetermined number, the second length setting is more likely to be set than when the number of stored passage information is larger than the predetermined number. A game machine B7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of passage information stored in the storage means is not more than a predetermined number, the game ball that has passed through the specific area does not enter the variable entry means, so that the variable entry means is entered. There is an effect that the entry of the game ball can be restricted and an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine B7, when the number of stored passage information stored in the storage means is a specific number or more, which is larger than the predetermined number, the first setting is higher than when the number is less than the specific number. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being easy to set.

According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7. That is, when the number of passage information stored in the storage means is a specific number or more, the game ball that has passed through the specific area can enter the variable ball entry means, so that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Can be easily entered. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to store a large amount of passing information in the storage means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (Special figure 1 fluctuation time is set by the number of special figure 2 hold)
It was acquired by the first ball-entry means capable of entering the ball, the first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the ball entering the first ball-entry means, and the first acquisition means thereof. A first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination when the first discrimination condition is satisfied based on the first information, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a second ball entry thereof. A second acquisition means that acquires the second information based on the ball entering the means, and a second acquisition condition triggered by the establishment of the second determination condition based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means. It is possible to display a second discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and a second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. Display means, a first dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period, and a display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period. The second dynamic display means to be caused, the specific first identification information for showing that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, or the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is a specific second. 2 A gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game based on the fact that the specific second identification information for indicating that it is a determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the game. The machine is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A first storage means capable of storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means up to a predetermined number up to the first determination condition for at least the first information, and the first storage means. 2 A second storage means capable of storing the second information acquired by the acquisition means up to a second predetermined number until at least the second determination condition for the second information is satisfied, and the second storage. A first dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means based on the number of the second information stored in the means. The gaming machine D1 characterized by having and.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery is executed among a plurality of special symbols. There is a gaming machine configured so that the lottery of special symbols is preferentially executed. In such a gaming machine, when a specific first gaming state is not set in order to prevent the lottery of advantageous special symbols from being frequently executed in a state where the specific first gaming state is not set. Is provided with measures to set a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) of the advantageous special symbol. However, with the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the lottery of advantageous special symbols, but since the expected degree of privilege grant to the player per advantageous special symbol lottery is not changed, it takes a long time (for example). , Approximately 12 hours from the opening of the game state to the closing of the store) The player who plays the game plays a game in which the other special symbol is drawn while the special symbol is drawn, which is advantageous in terms of added value. There is a problem that the player receives the privilege based on the lottery result of the symbol and gives the player an excessive privilege. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machines is to limit the benefits given to the players and to provide appropriate games.

According to the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display period of the first identification information is set by the first dynamic display period setting means based on the number of the second information stored in the second storage means. The dynamic display of the first discriminating means can be changed by playing a game for executing the second discriminating by the second discriminating means while the first discriminating by the first discriminating means is being executed. Therefore, since the first determination and the second determination can be executed with a relationship, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine D1, the first dynamic display period setting means makes it easier to set a long dynamic display period as the number of the second information stored in the second storage means increases. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the larger the number of the second information stored in the second storage means, the longer the dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first determination and the second determination from being excessively executed, and there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine D2, a gaming state setting capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The first dynamic display period setting means has means, and the larger the number of the second information stored in the second storage means in the state where the first gaming state is set, the longer the period. The gaming machine D3, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of the dynamic display period of the machine.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the larger the number of second information stored in the second storage means, the easier it is for the first dynamic display period setting means to set a longer dynamic display period. Become. Therefore, when the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the first determination and the second determination can be efficiently executed, so that the player enthusiastically plays the game. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the gaming machine D3, in a state where the second identification information is dynamically displayed for a specific second period by the second dynamic display means, the first dynamic display period setting means causes the second identification information to be longer than the predetermined period. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying that a specific dynamic display state is set when the first long dynamic display period, which is a long dynamic display period, is set.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the first long dynamic display period is set as the dynamic display period of the first special symbol in a state where the second identification information is dynamically displayed for a specific second period, it is specified by the notification means. It is notified that it is a dynamic display status. As a result, the player can determine that the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination and the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination are not stopped and displayed for a long period of time. Can be reliably notified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from giving a false impression that the gaming machine is out of order.

In the gaming machine D4, a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means is set based on the number of the second information stored in the second storage means. The second dynamic display period setting means is provided, and the second dynamic display period setting means operates for a shorter period than the specific second period in the state where the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine D5, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of a target display period.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are played. That is, in the state where the second gaming state is set, a short dynamic display period can be easily set as the dynamic display period of the second identification information. As a result, while the second game state is set, the player can enthusiastically execute the second determination, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Eliminates the remaining hold of the special figure on the disadvantage side)
Based on the first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first information. The first discriminating means capable of executing the first discrimination, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. The second acquisition means to be acquired, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the second information, the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination. The first privilege game is executed based on the display means capable of displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the means and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means being the specific first discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game based on the determination result of the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the second discriminating means can be entered into the second ball entry means. A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state that regulates a game based on a ball entry and a second game state in which the restriction is released in the first game state, and the game state acquisition means acquired by the second acquisition means. A certain condition is satisfied as compared with the first gaming state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set by the storage means capable of storing the second information and the gaming state setting means. The game state setting means has a period setting means for setting a period until the second determination is easily executed, and the game state setting means has the first game after the period set by the period setting means has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the state can be set.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Was there. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming states can be set and the degree of advantage of each special symbol is changed according to the set gaming states. In such a gaming machine, for example, when one of the special symbol lottery is in a disadvantageous gaming state while the lottery right acquired during the gaming state in which one of the special symbol lottery is advantageous is held. However, there is a problem that one of the special symbol lottery is executed based on the lottery right held. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to prevent the special symbol lottery on the disadvantage side from being executed and to provide an appropriate game. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Although it is described, the problems solved by the technical idea of this feature group are not limited to the simultaneous variable machines, and the game machines other than the simultaneous variable machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine E1, the number of second information stored in the storage means can be reduced during the period set by the period setting means, so that the second determination is executed during the first gaming state. The situation can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having at least a limiting means for limiting the entry of the gaming ball into the second entering means during the period set by the period setting means. Gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the period set by the period setting means, the second determination is easy to be executed, and the entry of a new game ball into the second entry means is restricted, so that the second determination is stored in the storage means. The number of second information given can be reliably reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second determination is executed during the first game state, and it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine E2, when the privilege game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the game state setting means executes the privilege game in a state where the first game state is set. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second gaming state can be set more easily than in the case of the above.

According to the game machine E3, when the privilege game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the second game state is higher than the case where the privilege game is executed in the state where the first game state is set. Is easy to set, so that it is possible to add value to the game during the period set by the period setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, as the constant condition, an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions and an end determination for determining whether the end condition set by the end condition setting means is satisfied. The game state setting means has means, and when it is determined by the end determination means that the end condition is satisfied, the first game state is set, and the end condition setting means sets the means. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that at least a first end condition based on the number of executions of the first determination and a second end condition based on the number of executions of the second determination are set as the end condition. ..

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the condition for ending the specific game state, the first end condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the first determination and the second end condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the second determination are set. The timing at which the specific game state ends can be indefinite. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed while expecting that the number of stored first information stored in the first storage means becomes 0 at the end of the specific gaming state.

<Characteristic F group> (Compression of lottery data)
A conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range, and the discrimination value converted by the conversion means are specific discrimination values. It has a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the value is, and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege which is advantageous to the player when the discriminating means determines that the specific discriminant value is the above-mentioned reference. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a special processing executing means that executes a special processing different from the discrimination by the discriminating means based on the specific reference value when the value is determined to be a specific reference value. F1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Then, in order to complicate the lottery probability, there is a gaming machine in which a data capacity of 2 bytes (65536 ways) is set as a value used for the winning / failing lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-94331). In such a gaming machine, various games can be executed by complicating the lottery probability of the winning / failing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, in order to set the value used for the lottery. Since the data capacity increases, there is a problem that the data capacity of the gaming machine is squeezed and the data capacity used for other purposes is limited. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to improve the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine by reducing the data capacity of the values used for the lottery while enabling various games to be executed.

According to the gaming machine F1, a reference value preset as a value within a predetermined range is converted into a discriminant value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range by a conversion means, and a privilege is given based on the discriminant value. Is executed. Thereby, it is possible to execute the discrimination for granting the privilege by using the discrimination value set within the specific range larger than the setting range of the preset reference value. Therefore, since the range of the reference value set in advance can be made smaller than the range of the value for which the discrimination is actually performed, there is an effect that the data capacity used for the discrimination can be reduced. Further, in the case of a specific reference value, another process can be executed by using a part of the value used for the determination for granting the privilege, so that the data of the value used for the determination is effectively utilized. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity of the gaming machine can be reduced.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the determination means executes the determination until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special processing execution means is executed. Game machine F2 to play.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the discrimination means executes the discrimination until the special processing execution means is executed. Therefore, the privilege is given according to the execution condition of the special processing execution means. The ease of playing can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the first state in which the discriminant value is easily discriminated as a specific discriminant value by the discriminating means, and the second state in which the discriminant value is more difficult to discriminate as a specific discriminant value than the first state. The special processing executing means has a state setting means capable of setting a state and the state, and the case where the first state is set by the state setting means is more than the case where the second state is set. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it is difficult to execute the special processing.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the ease of executing the special processing execution means can be changed based on the setting contents of the state setting means, so that the ease of granting benefits can be improved. It has the effect of being easily variable.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the reference value setting means sets a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value, and the conversion means has the predetermined number of bits. Among them, the first conversion process of converting the first information indicated by the specific number of bits into the first conversion information corresponding to the first information, and the number of bits other than the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits. The discriminant value is calculated based on the second conversion process of converting the shown second information into the second conversion information corresponding to the second information, the first conversion information, and the first conversion information. The gaming machine F4, which executes the third conversion process, and is characterized in that the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is represented by a number of bits larger than the predetermined number of bits.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the conversion means executes a conversion process based on each bit information constituting the reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits, and determines. Since it is configured to calculate the value, there is an effect that the reference value and the discriminant value can be related to each other.

In the gaming machine F4, the conversion means can convert different reference values into the same discriminant value, and the reference value discriminating means converts the different reference values into the same discriminant value by the conversion means. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that the value is determined to be the specific reference value.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, different reference values that are converted into the same discrimination value by the conversion means are not used for the discrimination for granting the privilege. There is an effect that the discrimination by the discrimination means can be properly executed.

<Characteristic Fa group> (By compression of lottery data)
The generation means capable of updating and generating the reference value within a predetermined range, the acquisition means for acquiring the reference value generated by the generation means, and the reference value acquired by the acquisition means are described in the predetermined range. A conversion means for converting into a discriminant value within a specific range larger than a range, a discriminant means for discriminating whether the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is a specific discriminant value, and the discriminating means. The discriminant means has a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the determination of the discriminant value, and the discriminating means has a case where the reference value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific reference value. The gaming machine Fa1 is characterized in that the determination is performed using the specific reference value.

In the gaming machine Fa1, the conversion means is capable of converting different reference values into the same discriminant value.

In the gaming machine Fa2, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the discrimination result of the discriminating means is more likely to be discriminated as the specific discriminating result than the first gaming state. Fa3 is characterized in that the number of the specific discriminant values in the first gaming state and the number of the specific discriminant values in the second gaming state are the same.

<Characteristic G group> (Direction during pulling back)
A first discriminating means capable of entering a game ball, a first discriminating means capable of performing a first discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the first discriminating means. The display means capable of displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result and the specific first identification information for showing that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the specific first discrimination result are displayed on the display means. As a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when stopped and displayed, and a game state set after the privilege game is completed, the first game state and the first game state are more advantageous to the player. A gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting a game state set by the game state setting means. When the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the end of the privilege game executed in the state where the second game state is set, the first game state is set. Before setting, the special gaming state can be set until a predetermined first end condition is satisfied, and the suggestion effect executing means has a predetermined second end condition different from the predetermined first end condition. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a special suggestion effect for suggesting the special gaming state is executed until it is established.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Was there. Furthermore, it is possible to set a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state regarding the winning / failing lottery of the game, and the currently set game state can be set to the player. A gaming machine capable of executing a notification effect for notification has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231927). In such a gaming machine, the currently set gaming state can be easily understood by the player by the notification effect to be executed. For example, the first gaming state is set. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when the notification is not performed by the notification effect. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game without reducing the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine G1, the end condition of the period in which the special gaming state is set and the end condition of the period in which the special suggestion effect for suggesting that the special gaming state is set are executed are different. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period in which the special gaming state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game state set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the state in which the special gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state after the end of the privilege game, as compared with the case where the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being easy to play.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, when the special gaming state is set, the second gaming state is more likely to be set than the normal state, so that the special gaming state is set. That is what the player wants. Therefore, even if the special suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means is completed, there is an effect that the player can play the game with expectation.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, a plurality of first end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first end conditions for terminating the special gaming state and a plurality of the second end conditions for terminating the special suggestion effect. The second end condition setting means has a second end condition setting means that can be set, and the second end condition setting means has a second end for a specific type in which the first end condition is set by the first end condition setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that conditions are set at least.

According to the gaming machine G3, the first ending condition for ending the special gaming state and the second ending condition for ending the special suggestion effect are set for the same specific type, and therefore any of them. The end condition can also be satisfied when the information of a specific type is updated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player with respect to the end timing of the special suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine G3, the specific type is the number of times the first determination is executed or the number of times the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the termination condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first determination or the second determination. Each time the discrimination or the second discrimination is executed, it is possible to pay attention to which end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G4, the second end condition setting means can set a value different from the value set by the first end condition as a value to be set for the specific type. Gaming machine G5.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G4, different values can be set for the same specific type, so that the first end condition is first satisfied and the second is first. Since it is possible to realize the case where the end condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the currently set gaming state more difficult to understand, and by providing the player with the enjoyment of predicting the gaming state, the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

<Characteristic H group> (Variable launch direction suggestion mode)
The game area has a game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a launching means capable of launching the game ball toward the game area and having a variable firing intensity depending on the amount of power supplied. A game in which a game ball launched by launching with the first firing intensity by the launching means can flow down, and a game launched by the launching means with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. The game ball that can flow down and is launched at the first firing intensity has a second gaming area that is difficult to flow down, and is launched at the second firing intensity of the first gaming area. A first ball-entry means provided in an area where the ball is difficult to flow down and capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means provided in the second game area and capable of entering a game ball, and the above-mentioned When the first determination is executed based on the acquisition of the first acquisition information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The discriminant means for executing the second discriminant based on the acquisition of the second acquired information that can be acquired, the display means for displaying the discriminant information for showing the discriminant result by the discriminant means, and the display means are the first. When the identification information for showing the discrimination result is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the discrimination means make the first discrimination more than the second discrimination. The first game state setting means that can set the first game state that is easy to execute and the second game state that the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and the first game state setting means. When it is determined that the game ball is flowing down the second gaming area in the state where the gaming state is set, the notification executing means for executing the firing intensity variable notification for changing the firing intensity, and the notification executing means. The notification executing means includes a notification mode variable means that changes the notification mode of the firing intensity variable notification when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied while the firing intensity variable notification is being executed. A game machine H1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Was there. Further, there is a device in which a game aiming at a different game area is performed by changing the direction in which the game ball is launched according to the set game state. Then, when the set gaming state and the launching direction of the gaming ball do not match, the gaming machine that executes the launching direction notification for changing the launching direction of the gaming ball to the player. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-172523). In such a gaming machine, the launch direction notification to be executed allows the player to grasp the launch direction (game method) suitable for the currently set gaming state, but the launch direction is different. Since the same notification mode is set regardless of the magnitude of the demerit that the player suffers when playing the game, there is a problem that the player becomes accustomed to the launch direction notification and suffers a great demerit. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to play a game with peace of mind by solving the above-mentioned problems and suppressing the player from suffering a disadvantage.

According to the gaming machine H1, the notification mode of the variable firing intensity notification for changing the firing intensity can be changed based on whether or not a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. It can be suppressed, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the game machine H1, a specific area through which the game ball can pass in the second game area, a passage determination means that executes discrimination based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area, and the second ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state is provided, and the determination result of the passage determination means is specified. In the case of the determination result of the above, the variable control means for changing the variable means to the first state is provided, and the game state setting means allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. It is possible to set a specific first gaming state and a predetermined first gaming state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter into the second ball entry means than the specific first gaming state, and the notification mode variable means is The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that, when the predetermined first gaming state is set, the notification mode of the firing intensity variable notification is changed to the emphasized notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the notification mode variable means can be executed according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, so that information that is easy for the player to understand is provided. be able to.

In the game machine H2, the passage information acquisition means for acquiring the passage information when the game ball passes through the specific area and the passage information acquired by the passage information acquisition means can be stored up to a predetermined number of passages. It has an information storage means, and the passage determination means executes discrimination based on the passage information stored in the passage information storage means when a predetermined passage determination condition is satisfied. The notification mode variable means provides the notification mode of the firing intensity variable notification even when a specific number of passage information is stored by the passage information storage means in a state where the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that it is variable to the emphasized notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H3, when a plurality of balls pass through a specific area provided in the second gaming area in a state where the first gaming state is set, the emphasis notification mode can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to call attention to a player who is continuously playing an inappropriate game.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
S378 Special processing execution means S379 Conversion means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Then, in order to complicate the lottery probability, there is a gaming machine in which the capacity of the value used for the winning / losing lottery is increased.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-94331

In such a gaming machine, various games can be executed by complicating the lottery probability of the winning / failing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, in order to set the value used for the lottery. Since the data capacity increases, there is a problem that the data capacity of the gaming machine is squeezed and the data capacity used for other purposes is limited. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to improve the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine by reducing the data capacity of the values used for the lottery while enabling various games to be executed.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range. , It is advantageous to the player when the discriminant means for discriminating whether the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is a specific discriminant value and when the discriminating means determines that the discriminant value is the specific discriminant value. It has a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege, and when it is determined that the reference value is a specific reference value, a special process different from the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the specific reference value. It has a special processing execution means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range, and the conversion means thereof. It is possible to grant a discriminant means for discriminating whether the converted discriminant value is a specific discriminant value and a privilege advantageous to the player when the discriminant means determines that the discriminant value is the specific discriminant value. A special processing execution means that has a privilege granting means and, when the reference value is determined to be a specific reference value, executes a special process different from the determination by the determination means based on the specific reference value. It has.

Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which schematically shows the flow of the ball to the 2nd entrance. It is an exploded perspective view of the V winning apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb of the V winning device, (b) is a front sectional view of the V winning device as viewed from the front, and (c) is a top view of the V winning device. (A) is a rear view showing the ball flow of the special discharge flow path in the V winning device, and (b) is a rear view showing the ball flow of the normal discharge flow path in the V winning device. (A) is a schematic view of a state in which the opening / closing door of the V winning device is closed, and (b) is a plan view of the state in which the V winning opening of the V winning device is open. It is a schematic diagram seen. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the right-handed game is performed in the normal state in the first embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot in the normal state in the first embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content in the probabilistic state in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content in the case of performing the right-handed game during the probabilistic change in the first embodiment. It is a figure shown. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content in the latent state in the first embodiment. be. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of a normal table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latency table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table schematically. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ROM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in. It is a block diagram of the electric structure of the display control device in 1st Embodiment. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surfaces B to D. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol change start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol jackpot determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 deviation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 disengagement stop process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the notification lottery process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the jackpot in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the jackpot end screen 1 in the second embodiment. .. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the jackpot end screen 2 in the second embodiment, and (b) is the display content of the full power mode (in latency) display screen 1 in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the full power mode (during latent) display screen 2 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a revival mode (during time saving) display screen in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display content of 1. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the resurrection display screen in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the resurrection failure display screen in the second embodiment. Is. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the ROM of the main control unit in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the small hit random number 2 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the variation pattern selection 2 table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for normal use schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of 2 tables for latent accuracy schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving giving table. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the main control device in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 1 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the special figure 2 variation start process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the holding ball number processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the state command reception process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the structure of the ROM of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bit configuration of the pre-conversion data, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the multiplier part conversion data, and (c) is a schematic diagram. , Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the mantissa conversion data. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a 2-byte conversion example of 1-byte data, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a random number 3 table per first. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the conversion lottery determination process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 88, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view lower right region of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 to 7 are schematic views schematically showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entry ports 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) that launches a ball into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a in the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) that guides the vehicle to is installed. The contents of a large number of entrances provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general inserts. It is configured by assembling a ball opening 63, a first ball opening 64, a second ball opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general entry port 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered with the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game region) of the game board 13 made of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured so that the fired ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b depend on whether the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (winning) or the second entry opening 640 (winning). It is configured to be used properly. Specifically, when the ball enters (wins) the first entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the second entry opening 640. In the case of (winning), the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate. That is, the first symbol display device 37a is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special figure 1 lottery) executed when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, and is the first symbol display. The device 37b is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) executed when the ball enters the second entrance 640.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (probability change state, latent probability state, normal state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is, depending on the lighting state, or the first symbol fluctuates. Whether or not it is medium (during dynamic display to stop and display the combination of symbols to show the lottery result) is indicated by the lighting state, and the stopped symbol corresponds to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player or is disadvantageous. Whether the symbol corresponds to the jackpot or the symbol is off is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. In the present embodiment, various gaming states are notified by a combination of emission colors of the light emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration is sufficient as long as the player can identify various gaming states. For example, various gaming states may be notified by varying the length (blinking mode) of the period in which the light emitting means is lit and the period in which the light emitting means is turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is performed when a ball is entered (winning) in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, the winning / failing determination (big hit lottery) of whether or not it is a big hit is performed. Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, the jackpot game that is in a privileged gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed, the ball is opened to the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650, and the ball is placed in each winning opening. By winning a prize, a game in which many prize balls can be obtained in a short period of time is executed. During this jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and then the opening period (for example, 1 second) of the opening period (specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, or the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65) is executed. , A period in which a closed state is set in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), a round game period in which an open state is set, and after the end of one round game period, the following A predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until the round game is started, an interval period in which the closed state is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round game period. The ending period in which is set and the jackpot game period consisting of are set.

In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, so that the ball is set at the timing when each winning opening is opened during the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for firing in any direction, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. Further, since this opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the jackpot game this time, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the lottery of a new special symbol from being executed immediately after the end of the last round game, so that after the end of the jackpot game. Since it is possible to prepare for launching the ball in any direction toward the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

Furthermore, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but as the type of jackpot to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, the high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is completed, the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 11 rounds. A 10R normal jackpot is prepared in which a low probability state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot ends in (effectively 10 rounds).

In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the lottery result is not the above-mentioned jackpot, there are fewer benefits given to the player than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). Benefits to make) Small hits are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, the result is not only indicated. Designs according to the jackpot type are shown.

In the present embodiment, any one of "normal state", "latent probability state", and "probability change state" is set as the gaming state (see FIG. 14). In the normal state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a low probability (1/160), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (231/233) (hereinafter, special symbol: low probability state, Normal symbol: called low probability state), and in the latent state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to low probability (231/233). In the game state (hereinafter referred to as special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: low probability state), in the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to high probability (1/120), and the normal symbol hits. It is a gaming state in which the probability is set to a high probability (232/233) (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state and a normal symbol: a high probability state).

Although a detailed explanation will be described later, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set when the jackpot is won is set. It is configured so that the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the game. As a result, in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol, the player can be made to play the game while being aware of the set game state.

Here, the "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot game in which the maximum number of rounds is 10 rounds (a jackpot game in which the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is opened for 10 rounds), and then the game shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. It is a big hit that can be done, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit game, the probability change state is set as the game state after the big hit game, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit game. When set, the latent probability state is set as the game state after the big hit game. In addition, in the case of winning the "10R probability variation jackpot", the gaming state set after the jackpot game ends is variably set according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won, as described above.

"11R normal jackpot" means a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 11 rounds (actually 10 rounds) (variable winning device (second attacker) 65 is opened for 10 rounds, and V winning device (first attacker) 650 is 1 It is a big hit that shifts to the normal state of the special symbol after the big hit game that opens the short for the round.

Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot depends on whether or not the ball passes through the specific area (special discharge flow path) 650e2 (see FIG. 6) in the V winning device (first attacker) 650 during the jackpot game. It is configured to determine whether or not to set a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the game. Further, a switching member 650h (see FIG. 6) for switching the ball flow path through which the winning ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 or the normal discharge flow path e1 is provided in the V winning device (first attacker) 650. The switching member 650h is configured to be movable according to a predetermined rule.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the jackpot game corresponding to the "10R probability variation jackpot" is executed, the V winning device (first attacker) 650 wins a predetermined period (30 seconds have elapsed, or 10 balls are won). Since the open game (round game) is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the V winning device 650) is performed during the jackpot game. As a result, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game according to the "11R normal jackpot", the jackpot game in which the opening operation of the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is more restricted than the jackpot game corresponding to the above-mentioned "10R probability variation jackpot" is executed. .. Specifically, a game (round game) in which the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds) during one big hit game is executed only once. Will be done. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a ball to win a prize in the V winning device 650 during the jackpot game, and it is possible to make it difficult (impossible) for the winning ball to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not determine whether or not to set a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game based on the lottery result of the special symbol, but instead determines whether or not to set the high probability state of the special symbol. Based on this, a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2) in the V winning device 650 and a jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass during the jackpot game are selected ( When the ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, and the ball does not pass through the specific area. It is configured so that the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game is completed.

That is, even if the "10R probability variation jackpot" is won, if the ball does not pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. become. With this configuration, during the jackpot game, the player is allowed to win a ball in each attacker (first attacker 650, second attacker 65) to obtain a prize ball, and a ball is placed in a specific area. It is possible to play a game in which a special symbol is acquired by passing it through, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot in which the jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area is executed is defined as "probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot in which the jackpot game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific region is executed is defined as "normal jackpot". I will explain.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general entry openings 63a, in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter, are arranged. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is set to the first symbol display device 37a, 37b while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. A second symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for displaying variable symbols of three symbols and a second trigger triggered by the passage of a ball through a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that display the symbols in a variable manner is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), whereas the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device displays a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. It is a variable display that lights up alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be in the operating state (open state) for a period of time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set so that the game state is shorter in the high probability state (probability change state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. To. Then, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a shorter time than in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the ball passing through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67 is the electric accessory 640a. Since the hitting operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed by the time it reaches, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. In addition, although the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to be high, the normal symbol hit game ends by the time the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is configured so that the ball is more difficult to enter the second entry port 640 than in the low probability state of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, the passage information (passage information of the second symbol) acquired based on the reserved storage number of the second symbol, that is, the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67. Each counter value used for the lottery) is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different according to the number stored up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), and the number of reserved pieces is small (for example, 0 pieces). In this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be longer than the time required for the ball passing through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67 to reach the second entry port 640. When the number of reserved memories of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is large (for example, three), a fluctuation time is set so that the ball passing through the through gate 67 can enter the second entry port 640. It is configured as follows.

With this configuration, for example, when the operation means (frame button 22) is mistakenly operated during the normal state (during a game in which a left-handed game is performed) and the ball is fired toward the right side region. , It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entry port 640. Further, even if a malicious player plays a game in which the ball is fired to the right side region in a single shot during the normal state, it is difficult (impossible) to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an illegal game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, in order to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 is continuously right-handed until the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol reaches a predetermined number. You need to play a game. Therefore, as a process for determining that an illegal game (right-handed game during the normal state) is being performed and notifying an abnormality, the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is a predetermined number (2 or more) by the right-handed game. ), It is preferable to configure it to execute the abnormality notification when it is determined. Further, it is preferable to configure the abnormality notification to be executed when the ball enters the second entry port 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent a small amount (one shot) of balls fired due to a player's operation error from invading the right side region and executing abnormality notification.

In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (in the high probability state of the normal symbol), the normal symbol height is increased by using other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state during the normal figure high accuracy, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is a part of the balls launched on the game board that flows down to the right side of the game board. (Approximately 50%) is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You may. Further, the number of assembly of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37a.

In the right side area of the game board 13 (lower area of the flow path unit 3660) on the right side of the front view of the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640 in which the ball can enter and the right general entry port 640. The ball mouth 63b is arranged. When a ball enters the second entry port 640, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second entry port 640, it is paid out as one prize ball. .. Further, when a ball enters the right general entrance 63b, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, only the ball wins in the second entrance 640 or the right general entrance 63b in which one prize ball is set. Therefore, the number of balls does not increase.

Further, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, but in the present embodiment, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state. 2 The variation pattern (variation time) for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the variation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of the special symbol (special figure 2). Therefore, even if the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, it is possible to prevent the lottery for the special figure 2 from being efficiently executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the left-handed game (to execute the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery by letting the ball flow down to the left area of the game board 13). In addition, it is a game advantageous to the player to perform a game (a game for allowing the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are made different. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first entry slot 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second entry opening 640 are the same number, for example. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins a prize in the first entry port 64 may also be configured as one.

As shown in FIG. 2, an electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. This electric accessory 640a is configured in a single blade shape, and is in a closed state (see FIG. 2) that restricts the ball from entering the second entry port 640, and the ball enters the second entry port 640. It is variably controlled to an open state (see FIG. 3) that allows the ball to enter.

The electric accessory 640a is normally located in a closed state, and is configured to prevent the ball from entering the second entry port 640. Then, based on the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) by lottery, the ball is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period so that the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. It is what has been done.

Here, the configuration of the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 7. As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area formed by the game board 13, and the game area is on the left side (left side) of the variable display device unit 80. It is divided into a region) and a right side (right region), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to divide the destination of the launched ball into the left region or the right region. It is configured in. Hereinafter, the game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot the ball to the left side area of the game area is referred to as a left-handed game, and the game in which the ball is fired to the right side area is referred to as a right-handed game.

A V winning device 650 is arranged on the upstream side of the right side region of the game board 13, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is configured to flow down on the 100% V winning device 650.

Then, the ball that has flowed down on the V winning device 650 flows downward from the left end side of the V winning device 650, 50% of the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and then flows into the flow path unit 3660, and the other 50. The distribution member 700 is provided so that% flows down the region provided on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 and enters the right general entry port 63b.

The distribution member 700 is configured so that a plurality of (4) blades that can come into contact with the ball flowing down on the game board 13 can rotate (rotate in both directions), and the balls come into contact with the blades. It is configured to rotate in one direction each time it flows down. Then, the sphere is provided in the through gate 67 direction (direction of the flow path unit 3660) or on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 according to the position where the sphere abuts on the blade and the rotational moment of the distribution member 700. It is configured to distribute in the area direction at a ratio of 1: 1.

With this configuration, the spheres can be distributed at a ratio of 1: 1 without having the regularity of distributing the spheres alternately in the two directions. The configuration of the distribution member 700 that distributes the flow direction of the sphere is not limited to this, and for example, the sphere flow path is alternately switched by contacting the flowing sphere (the flow path of the sphere is changed to one flow path). And another flow path alternately) may be used. This makes it possible to have the regularity of distributing the spheres alternately.

The ball that has flowed into the flow path unit 3660 reaches the second entry port 640 having the electric accessory 640a after flowing down the flow path unit 3660, and the ball that has not entered the second entry port 640 , It flows down while being guided toward the variable winning device 65 by a plurality of nails planted in the game board 13, finally flows into the out port 66, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from an outlet (not shown). To.

Here, the detailed configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. The V-winning device 650 is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a specific jackpot (for example). , "Big hit A" (see FIG. 18)), or when the "big hit" or "small hit" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the opening operation is performed to the open state. (The opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates to change the opening state so that the ball can win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a).

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 is combined with the opening forming member 650b arranged so as to project toward the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c to light LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED substrate 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED substrate 650d with the base member 650c, and the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650d. A flow formed by an opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined on the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 650e and a flow path cover body 650g. A switching member 650h that protrudes from the road and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that is locked to the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, and the back surface thereof. A fixing cover body 650 m fixed to the back side of the cover body 650j to operate the link member 650i and a flow path solenoid 650k for covering the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws. It is composed of and.

Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5B is a front sectional view of the V winning device 650 in a front view (front view from the viewpoint of FIG. 2). 5 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Lb-Lb of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 5B, the V winning device 650 is formed with a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5 (b). An inclined bottom surface is formed in the lower left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5 (b).

As shown in FIG. 5B, the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the opening / closing door 650f1 having a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. It is variable to a state and a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, and the game ball is configured to be rollable on the upper part of the opening / closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a by being retracted to the inside of the base member 650c (inside of the game board 13).

With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 to the flow path unit 3660 side (see FIG. 2). ) Is configured to be guided. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the right-handed game during the big hit game (small hit game) and the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the time and effort for the player to change the game method. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, since the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, more game balls can be efficiently won in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. .. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Further, a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 7, but a delay member is provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 so that the ball stays on the opening / closing door 650f1 for a long time. .. As a result, the probability that the opening / closing door 650f1 will be opened while the ball is present on the opening / closing door 650f1 can be increased. Therefore, even if the opening period of the V winning device 650 is set to be short, the ball can be opened. It can be made easier to win a prize.

Further, since the period required for the ball to flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is longer than the period during which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed during the jackpot game, the right-handed game is performed during the jackpot game. The ball can be reliably won in the V winning device 650.

5 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 5 (b). As shown in FIG. 5A, in the magnetic sensor (sphere detection switch) 650c1 (see FIG. 4) having the detection port 650a1, the detection port 650a1 is tilted toward the distribution flow path side of the back cover body 650e (see FIG. 4). Is fixed to the base member 650c (see FIG. 4). The ball detection switch 650c1 is attached to the base member 650c with a slight rattling (tolerance of about 0.2 mm) within a range in which the winning ball can flow down from the V winning opening 650a. As a result, even if a ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 650a vigorously collides with the ball detection switch 650c1, the impact can be released, so that damage to the ball detection switch 650c1 can be suppressed.

The configuration for suppressing damage to the ball detection switch 650c1 is not limited to this, and for example, the width of the upstream flow path of the ball detection switch 650c1 is narrower than the width of the detection port 650a1 of the ball detection switch 650c1. It may be configured in. As a result, when a ball flowing down the upstream flow path of the ball detection switch 650c1 passes through the ball detection switch 650c1, the ball can be made less likely to collide with the ball detection switch 650c1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game ball guided to the distribution flow path of the back cover body 650e is distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game ball is distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 650 g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650 h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650 h is rotated into the flow path distributed from the back surface side of the flow path cover body 650 g. It is configured so that it can be placed as possible.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the ball provided in the special discharge port 650e2, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit game by the game ball passing through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during the big hit game. .. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting a high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the switching member 650h communicates the ball passage so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 does not pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult) during the small hit game (normal discharge flow path 650e1). During the jackpot game, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 can pass through the V switch 650e3 (easy) through the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2), or the flow path that cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). It is configured to communicate with any of the normal discharge flow paths 650e1).

The switching member 650h switches the flow path so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON (see FIG. 6A). It is configured so that the flow path is switched so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to off (see FIG. 6B). Has been done. With this configuration, among the ball flow paths that are switched and formed in the V winning device 650, the ball flow path state that allows the ball to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2 that has a short communication state is electrically generated. Since it is formed by using a target drive source, the power consumption can be suppressed. Further, even if a malicious player illegally wins a ball in the V winning device 650, the ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 unless the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON, which is malicious. It is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent games.

In the present embodiment, the ball presses the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 according to the game content of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot of the special symbol is won (the winning device for opening operation, the opening operation period, etc.). The jackpot game that is easy to pass and the jackpot game that is difficult to pass are configured to be feasible. Specifically, it is easy to win a prize in the V prize device 650 by differentiating the timing and period in which the game (round game) in which the V prize device 650 is opened is executed according to the jackpot game to be executed. It is configured so that the speed is variable and the timing at which the ball wins in the V winning device 650 is different.

In this way, by changing the game content of the jackpot game (operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1), the timing at which the ball wins in the V winning device 650 is changed, so that the operation content of the switching member 650h is always constant. Even if it is set to, it is possible to set a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 and a jackpot game in which it is difficult (impossible) to pass through. Therefore, a plurality of operation patterns (for different timings for setting the flow path solenoid 650k to be turned on) for different operation contents of the switching member 650h become unnecessary, and the control load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. ..

Further, the time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (V winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is composed of. With this configuration, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened even though the jackpot is not won due to an illegal game, and the switching member 650h is operated (destroyed) so that the ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. ) Even if the ball is detected by the ball detection switch 650c1 in the V winning device 650, it is determined that the illegal game has been executed, and then the ball is allowed to flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is possible to reliably notify that the ball has flowed down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in an abnormal state.

Further, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. As a result, it can be determined from the total of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the probability change switch 650e3 whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged. In addition, at the end timing of the jackpot game (the timing when the jackpot ending period executed after the end condition of the jackpot game (when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 is completed) is satisfied), the player enters the V winning device 650. If all the balled game balls are not ejected, it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, notify the outside of the abnormality, or stop the game so that the game does not start. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a secondary abnormality from occurring due to the progress of the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the ball winning in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (the present embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. Then, 15 prize balls are paid out for each prize, and the detected balls are used to determine whether or not the ball passes through the V switch 650e3, and the jackpot is won. It is possible to make the player pay close attention to the game content during the jackpot game to be executed later, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off (the electric drive source for operating the flow path solenoid 650k is not driven), and the switching member 650h is set to the initial position (flow path solenoid 650k) so that the normal discharge flow path 650e1 communicates with the normal discharge flow path 650e1. Is positioned in the off position) so that the ball winning the V winning device 650 does not pass through the V switch 650e3. Therefore, in the small hit game executed at the time of winning the small hit, V The winning device 650 can be used. Therefore, since it is not necessary to separately provide the pachinko machine 10 with a winning device dedicated to the small hit game, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed, and the space of the game area formed in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. It can be used effectively.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is easily executed (the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short). Therefore, the game method that is advantageous for the player is the right-handed game. The lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is configured to run frequently. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, by arranging the V winning device 650 in the right side region, the player can be a player simply by continuously executing the right-handed game during the period in which the latent probability state is set. It is possible to play an advantageous game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that makes it easy to execute the lottery during the latent probability state, the V winning device 650 is always opened. The probability that the game is executed and the latent probability state is set again after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be higher than when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1). Therefore, even if the latent state is set again via the jackpot game during the latent state, the player only needs to continuously execute the right-handed game, so that the player can operate the game. It is possible to eliminate the need to operate the handle 51 in a complicated manner.

In addition, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the big hit game in which the opening operation of the V winning device 650 (the operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1) is the same as the small hit game may be executed. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether the winning game being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game. In addition, in this case, it may be configured so that it is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the ball winning the V winning device 650 has passed through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during the jackpot game. That is, it is preferable to configure so that it is not possible to determine whether the hit game this time is a big hit game or a small hit game by identifying whether or not the ball has passed the V switch 650e3.

Further, in the big hit game in which the opening operation of the V winning device 650 (the operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1) is the same as the small hit game, even if the ball winning the V winning device 650 is configured not to pass through the V switch 650e3. good. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in which the latent state ends (shifts to another game state) after the hit game similar to the small hit game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of tension during the latent state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic view of the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 in a plan view in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ball that has reached the upper surface of the V winning device 650 has an opening / closing door 650f1 from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). It is configured to flow down the left upper surface 650y2 through the upper surface of the above surface and flow out toward the flow path unit 3660.

A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the sphere, and the sphere is on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1. It is configured so that the flow-down period is 1 second. This flow period (1 second) is the interval (closed period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by the jackpot game, that is, the round game. It is configured to be longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) set in between.

With this configuration, all the balls fired in the right-handed game during the jackpot game can be awarded to the V winning device 650. Therefore, the ball launched by the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol, or enters the second entrance 640 to enter the second special. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of reserved symbols.

When the jackpot game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7A and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state (retracted state), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a schematic view showing a state in which the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves so as to retract into the inside of the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the upper right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning can be made. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is also configured to win a prize in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the retracted position.

That is, the opening / closing door 650f1 has a wall (a wall having a height of about 4 mm) projecting from the front end (lower side from the viewpoint of FIG. 7A) so that the ball can get over it. When the opening / closing door 650f1 changes to the retracted position, the ball staying on the opening / closing door 650f1 gets over the wall in a state of being in contact with the game board 13 and flows into the V winning opening 650a. When the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed (see FIG. 7A), the ball meandering down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is on the front side of the game board (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 2). It is a regulating wall for suppressing contact with the glass unit 16 provided in the above.

Further, the V winning device 650 has a first regulating member for smoothing the ball flow regardless of the position where the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. , The second regulating member is provided, and the balls that have won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first regulating member and the second regulating member. , It is configured to flow down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the width of the passage for one ball. By providing the first regulating member and the second regulating member in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first regulating member, the ball winning vigorously from the opening / closing door 650f1 directly collides with the detection port 650a1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from failing. In addition, it is possible to secure a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first regulating member and the second regulating member) for aligning the spheres before passing through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width equivalent to one sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball is clogged in the V winning device 650 and interferes with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a configuration in the vicinity of the flow path unit 3660 in the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is an enlarged schematic view of the vicinity of the flow path unit 3660. As shown in FIG. 3, the flow path unit 3660 is arranged so that all the balls that have passed through the through gate 67 among the balls that are launched by the right-handed game and flow down the right side region flow in. The inflow port 3660a of the unit 3660 is formed at a position below the through gate 67. The inflow port 3660a is formed with a width (about 20 mm) wider than the ball passing width (about 13 mm) of the through gate 67, and is configured so that the ball passing through the through gate 67 smoothly flows in. There is.

The sphere that has flowed into the flow path unit 3660 first falls on the first projecting member 3661. The upper surface of the first projecting member 3661 is provided so as to incline downward in the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and a ball dropped on the first projecting member 3661 is inclined in the downward inclining direction. It flows down and flows out toward the second projecting member 3662. The tip of the first projecting member 3661 projects to a position facing the second projecting member 3662, and the ball flowing out of the first projecting member 3661 surely falls on the second projecting member 3662.

The second projecting member 3662 is provided below the first projecting member 3661, and the upper surface of the second projecting member 3662 is provided so as to be inclined downward in the lower left direction (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The ball that has fallen on the second projecting member 3662 flows down in the downward tilting direction of the second projecting member 3662 and flows out toward the third projecting member 3663.

The third protruding member 3663 is provided so that the upper surface thereof has a downward inclination in the same direction as the first protruding member 3661 described above, and the outlet 3660b of the flow path unit 3660 is formed at the tip thereof. The ball flowing out from the second protruding member 3662 falls on the upper surface of the third protruding member 3663, flows down in the downward inclined direction of the upper surface thereof, and flows out from the outflow port 3660b to the outside of the flow path unit 3660.

The ball flowing out of the flow path unit 3660 is guided toward the second entry port 640 by a nail planted in the game board 13, and if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (see FIG. 3), the flow path. All the balls flowing out of the unit 3660 enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, if the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 2), the ball does not enter the second entry port 640 and flows down toward the lower side of the game board 13.

That is, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (see FIG. 3), the electric accessory 640a moves to a position where the flow path of the ball flowing out from the flow path unit 3660 is blocked. A plurality of nails are arranged above the second entrance 640 so that the ball flowing down the game area formed on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 does not enter the second entrance 640. It is configured in.

Next, the relationship between the time until the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 and the fluctuation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of projecting members 3661 to 3663 are provided in the flow path unit 3660 so that the sphere meanders and flows down. The ball flow path R1 from the inflow port 3660a to the outflow port 3660b of the flow path unit 3660 is configured so that the period required for the ball to pass is 1.5 seconds, and the outflow port of the flow path unit 3660. The time until the ball flowing down from 3660b flows into the electric accessory 640a in the open state (time to reach the position where the ball enters the second entry port 640) is set to 0.1 seconds. are doing. That is, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after about 1.6 seconds.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed according to the game state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol and the reserved storage number of the normal symbol. When the normal symbol is in the high probability state (when the gaming state is the probabilistic state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.5 seconds. Then, if the player wins the game during the high probability state of the normal symbol, after the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is moved to the open state is executed for 0.8 seconds.

Therefore, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, even if the normal symbol lottery is executed based on passing through the through gate 67 and the winning is won, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 will be at the second entrance 640. By the time it arrives, the winning game has already ended, and it is configured so that the second entrance 640 cannot be entered. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the balls flowing out from the V winning device 650 are distributed 1: 1 by the distribution member 700, so that the interval at which the balls flow into the flow path unit 3660 is about 1 second (1.2 seconds). It is configured to be an interval.

As a result, at the timing when the hit game of the normal symbol is started, that is, 0.5 seconds after the one ball passes through the through gate 67, the inside of the flow path unit 3660 is in front of the one ball. Since the other spheres (the spheres that flowed into the flow path unit 3660 about 1 second before the one sphere) have reached the position where they flowed out from the flow path unit 3660, one sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to prevent another ball from entering the second entry port 640 during the hit game executed based on the above. Therefore, even if the right-handed game is continuously performed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball does not enter the second entrance 640, so that the high probability of the normal symbol is high. During the state (probability change state), it is advantageous for the player to perform a left-handed game in which the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64.

Next, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is configured to set a different fluctuation time according to the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol (the number of reserved symbols) (see FIG. 22). , When the number of holdings of the normal figure is 0, a time (30 seconds) longer than the time (1.5 seconds) for the ball to pass through the ball flow path R1 is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the number of holdings of the normal figure is set. When is 1 or more (1 to 3), the fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is set.

With this configuration, the operation handle 51 is being executed during the left-handed game in a state in which the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the game state. Even if one ball is fired toward the right side region by mistake in the operation of, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entry port 640. In addition, a right-handed game was intentionally performed during the normal state, and a game was performed in which a ball was inserted into the second entrance 640 to execute a lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2). Even if one ball is fired and passed through the through gate 67 in a right-handed game, the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640 is longer than that. Since the normal symbol change is executed, it is possible to prohibit the ball from entering the second entrance 640 by the act of firing one ball in the right-handed game (single-shot).

On the other hand, the fluctuation time (1.4 seconds) of the normal symbol set when the number of reserved symbols is 1 or more is the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entry port 640. It is configured to be slightly shorter than (time for the ball to flow down the ball flow path R1 (1.5 seconds)). That is, if the lottery result of the normal symbol executed based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is a hit, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the second entrance 640 during the hit game. It is configured so that the variable time during which the ball can enter is set.

Specifically, when the lottery of the normal symbol is won, the winning game is executed after the fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds elapses, and after the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the electric accessory 640a is 0.7 seconds. Be released. Since the flow path of the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after 1.6 seconds, the electric accessory 640a is opened in the hit game. The ball arrives during this period, and the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640.

Further, in the present embodiment, the balls launched by the right-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67 at a ratio of 1 in 2 balls, and the interval (1.2) in which the balls pass through the through gate 67. The second) is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation time (1.4 seconds) set when the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is 1 or more in the low probability state of the normal symbol.

With this configuration, during the latent state, it is possible to maintain the state in which the reserved storage number of the normal symbol is 1 or more simply by continuously executing the right-handed game, and the second special symbol is efficiently performed. Lottery can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the game in the latent state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, can be smoothly executed, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different depending on the game state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), but the game is not limited to this, and the game of the special symbol is not limited to this. The fluctuation time may be different depending on the gaming state including the state (high probability state, low probability state). For example, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state, the fluctuation time for a long time (30 seconds) is set regardless of the number of reserved normal symbols. , When the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the fluctuation time of the appropriate time (1.4 seconds) is set regardless of the number of reserved normal symbols. It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640 when the right-handed game is played in the normal state, and efficiently when the right-handed game is played in the latent state. A ball can be entered into the second entry port 640.

As shown in FIG. 8, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes various drive motors for operating the driving accessory for the effect provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a character driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive the accessory for the effect (not shown), and the operation content for the frame button 22 is supported. Set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or set a lamp output command to make the lamp display device 227 emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the operation content to the frame button 22. It may be configured in.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. 10 (a) and 10 (b) are schematic views schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows (upper, middle, and lower) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 10A). The third symbol (decorative symbol that changes according to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbol is formed by using different types of characters (animals and the like) for each identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the character corresponding to each identification information, it is possible to visually notify the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play an easy-to-understand game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777"), and the variable display is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed, which are upper, middle, and lower, respectively. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are periodically scrolled in the left-right direction to perform variable display.

Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are configured so that the symbol rows are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. The lower symbol sequence L3 is configured such that the symbol sequence is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and the numbers are scrolled from right to left and displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) that does not show the lottery result of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction. With each symbol row L1 to L3 stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped together on the effective line with a combination of jackpot symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of main symbols). For example, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10A, in the first embodiment, since each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, the third symbol Until all of the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol can be obscured. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm until the last symbol row (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbol that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character and a number may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed may be varied. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the size smaller or moving the variable display area to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, the corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changed. You may try to do it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then changed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to identify). However, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be different so as to correspond to the type of special symbol that is changing.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 10 (b). As shown in FIG. 10B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed in the upper right of the front view in the main display area Dm. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for showing the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is displayed. The fourth symbol (special figure 2 fourth symbol) for indicating the above is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery status of the special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variablely displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (Refer to FIG. 11A), the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating is shown, and the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 11B), and the special symbol lottery is performed. It is configured to show the result, but is not limited to this, for example, a display mode that imitates a figure as a fourth symbol, a display mode that deforms a figure by using a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, and a display mode. It may be configured to show the lottery result of the special symbol by showing that the special symbol is changed by the display mode which changes a color, and stopping and displaying the display mode which shows a specific symbol or a color.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (changing) and the lottery result), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the lottery (changing). Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is mainly displayed. An example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. You may make it different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress that the area in which the variation effect is executed is limited by the fourth symbol display area and the effect of the effect is reduced. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed by using the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the variable display device unit 80. It is good to configure it to execute.

A small display area Dm3 is formed in the upper left of the front view in the main display area Dm. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is launched (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11A).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the gaming board the ball should be fired by simply visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a "right-handed" display mode for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game and a left-handed game to be performed by the player are performed. The display mode of "left-handed" for guiding that is displayed, and the display mode of "right-handed" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, It is displayed during the latent state and during a specific jackpot game (during a jackpot game in which the V winning device 650 is opened), and the display mode of "left-handed" is a predetermined period (for example, after the right-handed game is completed). It is configured to be displayed (for 10 seconds). Further, even when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the game state in which the left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, the normal state or the probabilistic state, the predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) ". It is configured so that the display mode of "left-handed" is displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 10 (b). Below the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2), small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 are formed. The small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 are areas in which the reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm4 is the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (reserved). The special figure 1 hold information for showing the number of stored balls) is displayed, and the special figure 2 hold information for showing the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm5.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11A, but in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, the reserved winning information is stored in advance. It is configured to display a display mode in which the discriminated result (look-ahead result) can be suggested and notified to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold).

Further, a sub-display region Ds is formed below the main display region Dm. As shown in FIG. 11A, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment for the content of the game being executed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It may be configured.

In this case, for example, the sub-display area Ds may be configured to display a hold display mode (for example, a hold symbol display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol. Then, it is preferable to configure the player so that the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol can be grasped by the number of displayed holding display modes. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold, and to change the corresponding hold display mode based on the determination result.

With this configuration, the game is played with the expectation that a big hit will be won in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the reserved symbols that may exist in a plurality. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display the reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved storage numbers, the display mode for showing the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable reserved symbol display.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are shown. An effect explanation mode for explaining, a frame button-related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and a hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the jackpot game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the content to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the disconnection and the reserved ball exists, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stopped display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player fires the ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) because the player has quit the game, and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entry is made. The variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

Next, the contents of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 1) or the second on the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by the ball. The variable display of the special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special diagram 1 or the special diagram 2.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be variablely displayed at the same time, and it is easy to draw (change) each special symbol according to the set gaming state. Is configured to be different. Then, the lottery (variation) is executed in the game state in which the third symbol, which is the target of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, is set among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is configured to be a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol that is easily created. With such a configuration, regardless of which game state is set, it is possible to make it easier to always execute the variable effect using the third symbol, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

FIG. 11A shows an example of the display content displayed when a right-handed game is performed in a state in which a normal state (low probability state of a special symbol, low probability state of a normal symbol) is set. It is a schematic diagram. In the present embodiment, it is configured to be advantageous to the player to have the ball enter the first entrance 64 by the left-handed game during the normal state and execute the lottery of the first special symbol. When it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed in this normal state (when the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right side area of the game board 13), the small display area Dm3 is "left-handed". In addition to displaying the guidance display mode of, the comment "Please return to left-handed" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to encourage the left-handed game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being frequently executed while the normal state is set, the variation time of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the normal state is long ( 10 minutes), and as shown in FIG. 11 (a), a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, and one reserved ball number of the second special symbol is acquired (small display area Dm5). In the state where "1" is displayed), the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol held and stored is started after the end of the currently executing special figure 2 variation, that is, the current execution. It will be 10 minutes after the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the inside.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning information of the special symbol stored on hold is discriminated in advance, and the suggestion display for suggesting that the discriminant result is a big hit is displayed in the small display area Dm5. (Corresponding to the star mark in FIG. 11 (a)). As a result, the player who has acquired the lottery right for the special symbol (the player who has entered the ball into the second entrance 640, which is the trigger for the lottery for the second special symbol) executes the game based on the lottery right acquired by himself / herself. When the lottery of the special symbol to be performed is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the big hit from being abandoned. Further, when the display mode of the small display area Dm5 is a display mode suggesting a big hit winning, it is possible to facilitate the continuous game until the lottery result of the target second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. It can improve the operation of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, the winning information of winning a big hit in the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is executed in the normal state. Is configured to execute a suggestion display suggesting to the player when is present, but it is advisable to add the following condition as an execution condition of this suggestion display.

That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed independently (in parallel), so that the special figure 2 It is possible to execute the special figure 1 lottery a plurality of times before the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning information of winning the jackpot existing in the reserved memory of is executed.

Therefore, whether or not to execute the special figure 1 lottery by the time the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning information for winning the jackpot existing in the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed depends on the game executed by the player. Can be selectable. As a result, for example, if you want to win the big hit in the special figure 1 lottery before you win the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery, you can play a game to actively execute the special figure 1 lottery, and in the special figure 2 lottery. If you do not want to win the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery before you win the jackpot, the act of not firing the ball will be performed so that the special figure 1 lottery will not be executed, which is an excessively advantageous game for the player. There was a risk of providing.

In order to solve such a problem, as a condition for executing the suggestion display, the remaining period until the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning information for winning the jackpot existing in the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is executed (for example,). If the special figure 2 lottery to be executed next is a big hit, a means for calculating the remaining period of the special figure 2 fluctuation being executed) and a plurality of special figures stored in the reserved storage of the special figure 1. The target special figure 2 lottery is provided by providing a means for calculating the fluctuation time of the 1 lottery and determining the number of special figure 1 lottery executed during the remaining period until the target special figure 2 lottery is started. It is advisable to set as an execution condition of the suggestion display that the number of times of special drawing 1 lottery to be executed during the remaining period until the start of is fixed.

As a result, even if the suggestion effect is executed and the player is informed that the special figure 2 hold memory contains the winning information for winning the jackpot, the special figure 2 lottery for winning the jackpot is executed. Since the player cannot control the number of times of the special drawing 1 lottery up to this point, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

When a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 11A and the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special figure 2 is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the screen shown in FIG. 11B is displayed. .. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the special figure 2 jackpot is won in the normal state. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to set the third symbol to be the target of the variable effect according to the set gaming state, and the period in which the normal state is set. Inside, a variable effect based on the third symbol for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol (special 1) is executed.

In that state, when the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the jackpot, it is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 11 (b). "V" to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, giving priority to the variable effect (on the display layer provided above the display layer on which the display mode of the variable effect is displayed). The interrupt display 805 imitating "is displayed, and the comment of" interrupt V generation "for notifying the player that the jackpot of the second special symbol has been won is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Then, in the small display area Dm2, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode "444" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of simultaneously executing lottery of a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but not to win a big hit at the same time. Specifically, if the lottery (variation) of the other special symbol is being executed at the time when one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the lottery result indicating a big hit, the other special symbol being executed is executed. It is configured to forcibly stop the lottery (variation) so that it will be out of the lottery.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11B, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode "444" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, and at the same time, the small symbol is displayed. In the display area Dm1, the fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, and the variation effect (variation display of each symbol sequence L1 to L3) indicates the deviation. It is stopped and displayed in the display mode.

In this way, as the third symbol to be the target of the variation effect, the third symbol is set to target the special symbol to which the lottery (variation) is easily executed in the set gaming state. 3 It is possible to facilitate the execution of the variation effect executed by the symbol display device 81. Then, when a big hit is won in a lottery of a special symbol whose lottery (variation) is difficult to be executed in the set game state, the interrupt display 805 is displayed instead of changing the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an unexpected effect.

According to the example shown with reference to FIG. 11B, the fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1 in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of alignment. The fluctuation effect (variation display of each symbol sequence L1 to L3) being executed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the timing, but the main display area Dm is not limited to this. The variable effect during execution may be different from the stop timing of the fourth symbol. In this case, for example, a plurality of stoptable timings are set in advance during the effect period of the variable effect being executed, and the variable effect is forcibly stopped at the stoptable timing that arrives after the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. It is good to configure it to.

By configuring in this way, for example, by setting in advance an effect mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player even if the player is forcibly stopped at a stoptable timing as an effect mode of the variable effect, the player feels a sense of discomfort. It is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation effect without giving.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol to be the target of the third symbol is configured to be set according to the game state regardless of the lottery result of each special symbol. The type of the special symbol to be the target of the third symbol may be variably set according to the lottery result of each special symbol, for example. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the results of a plurality of special symbol lottery that can be executed at the same time only by paying attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a variable effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit can be executed, so that one of them can be executed. It is possible to make it easier to execute the variable effect indicating that the jackpot has been won, rather than executing the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding only to the special symbol.

Further, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol may be determined, and the type of the special symbol to be the target of the third symbol may be variably set based on the determination result. In this case, for example, the type of the special symbol on the side where the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined upper limit is set as the target of the third symbol, or the difference in the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is calculated, and the calculation result is When it becomes a predetermined value (for example, 2) or more, it is preferable to set the type of the special symbol on the side with a large number of reserved balls as the target of the third symbol. This makes it possible to increase the number of times the variable effect executed as the third symbol is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that a large number of special symbol lottery is being performed, and it is possible to enthusiastically play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12A, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. Will be explained. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the probability variation state is set.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, but in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the state where the normal state is set, the game state is a probable change state. Is configured to be set. Then, when the probabilistic state is set as the game state, the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entrance 640. There is.

Therefore, in the state where the probability change state is set, as shown in FIG. 12A, the main display area Dm is used as a mode display 810 for showing the current gaming state, and is a big hit of a special symbol than the normal state. The "ascending mode" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the gaming state has a high probability.

Then, the display mode of "left-handed" that guides the game method that is advantageous to the player during the probability change state is displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the sub-display area Ds is currently in the normal state (special symbol). The comment "Expectation is rising" is displayed to show that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than that of the low probability state of the normal symbol (low probability state of the normal symbol).

As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the probability change state, and the normal state is set. The right-handed game in the case where the probability variation state is set is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than the right-handed game in the case of.

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability change state is set, the game guidance notification is emphasized more than the display mode (see FIG. 11A) when the right-handed game is performed in the normal state. Is configured to be executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12B, a game guidance notification displayed when a right-handed game is performed during the probability change state will be described. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the right-handed game is performed during the probability change state. As shown in FIG. 12B, when it is detected that a right-handed game has been performed during the probability change state (when the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right area of the game board 13), a small display is displayed. The aspect of the area Dm3 becomes the emphasis aspect (double line frame line), and the display aspect of "left-handed" is displayed inside the emphasized aspect. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "left-handed, left-handed, left-handed" is displayed, which emphasizes that the proper game is a left-handed game.

In this way, by varying the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to an appropriate game method according to the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continuously execute the disadvantageous game. It is possible to suppress that.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the probabilistic state is set when the big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, so that the probable change state is set. At that point, it is conceivable that the game method was not changed by the normal game guidance display (see FIG. 11A). In such a situation, when a right-handed game is played during the probability change state, even if the normal game guidance display shown in FIG. 11A is displayed again, the player is made to perform an appropriate game. That is difficult.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), an appropriate game is executed for the player by executing a display that emphasizes the game guide rather than the normal game guide display (see FIG. 11 (a)). It can be made easier.

On the other hand, in the state where the normal state is set, a specific jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and after the jackpot game is completed, the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low of the normal symbol). When the probability state) is set, the display content shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the latent probability state is set.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, but the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the latent probability state is the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. Briefly, during the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) that wins a small hit with a high probability becomes easy to be executed, and while winning the prize ball by the small hit game, the next It is configured to be in a game state aiming for a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 13A, when the latent state is set, the display mode of the "full power mode" is displayed as the mode display 810 for showing the player that the current state is the latent state. Then, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm, and by opening the treasure box 812 found by the character 811, a variable effect of notifying the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. In the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Open the treasure box" are displayed as comments for indicating the game content (effect content) in the latent state (full power mode).

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment, the treasure box 812 is opened at the timing indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 is displayed by the player according to the contents of the treasure box 812. It is configured to notify to. That is, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the variable effect is executed for the third symbol indicating the lottery status of the second special symbol. Therefore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the latent state, the variable effect does not change based on the lottery.

Then, if a hit (small hit, big hit) is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, the display screen shown in FIG. 13 (b) is displayed. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents showing that a hit (small hit, big hit) was won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 13B, the timing at which the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 is the lottery result (small hit). ) Is stopped and displayed in the display mode (“341”), and the lottery result display mode 813 (display mode imitating “V”) showing “hit” as the lottery result of the second special symbol is the contents of the treasure box 812. Is displayed as.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed to congratulate the winner of the lottery result of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the player can easily obtain the lottery result of the special symbol being executed simply by grasping the effect result of the variable effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand game.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, as the contents of the treasure box 812, a second special symbol is used in addition to the lottery result display mode (display mode imitating “V”) shown in FIG. 13 (b). As a lottery result display mode that is displayed when the lottery result is out of order, a display mode that imitates "x" or "?", Or a lottery result display mode that is displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. It is configured to display a display mode imitating "VV". In addition, the display mode imitating "?" Is configured to be displayed with a low probability (about 3%) even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit". ing. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the lottery results of all the second special symbols only by the lottery result display mode displayed as the contents of the treasure box 812. Therefore, it is possible to be interested in the game content to be executed after the effect result of the variable effect is displayed.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 14 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 14, in the first embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and probabilistic state (high probability state of special symbol, high normal symbol). There are three game states that can be set: probabilistic state), latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), the type of jackpot won, and the game at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured so that a predetermined gaming state is set according to the state (see FIG. 18).

First, a case where a normal state is set as a game state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which it is determined that the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8) has been operated in the initial state (the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 53)) is executed. ), The normal state is set as the game state.

In this normal state, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if jackpot B (50% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot game is completed again. The normal state is set, the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, and when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game, the latent state (full power mode) is set after the jackpot game is completed. On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state, regardless of the jackpot type (100% of the jackpot winning), the probability change state (rise) after the jackpot game ends. Mode) is configured to be set.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state, you will enter the full power mode with a 50% probability, loop the normal state with a 50% probability, and win the big hit in the special figure 2 lottery. Is configured so that the probability change state is set with a probability of 100%.

As described above with reference to FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 provided in the V winning device 650) during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set. For example, when the jackpot A is won in the lottery of special figure 1 or when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special figure 2 during the normal state. When the ball passes through a specific area during the big hit game to be executed, as described above, a high probability state (probability change state, latent state) of the special symbol is set after the big hit game is completed, and the ball passes through the specific area. If not, the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the game content during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game executed during the jackpot game is improved. Can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to set a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot than when the ball is passed through the specific area during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game for the game to be executed during the jackpot game.

Next, the flow of transition of the gaming state in the state in which the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the latent state is set, the game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed game is performed. Then, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of Special Figure 2, if jackpot C (65% of the jackpot win) is set as the type of jackpot, the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot is set again. When D (35% of the jackpot winning) is set, the probability change state is set after the jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the game state, when the big hit is won in the lottery of Special Figure 1, if the big hit B (50% of the big hit winning) is set as the big hit type, the big hit. When the normal state is set after the game ends and the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, the latent state (full power mode) is set again after the jackpot game ends.

That is, if a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a 50% probability, the normal state is set with a 50% probability, and the special figure 2 lottery is performed. If you win the jackpot in, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a probability of 65%, and the probability change state is set with a probability of 35%.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the state where the latent probability state is set, it is easier to loop the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, by executing the lottery shown in FIG. Therefore, the special figure 2 is a special symbol for executing a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

Finally, the flow of transition of the gaming state when the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set as the gaming state will be described. In the present embodiment, while the probability change state is set, it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to newly execute the lottery of the special figure 2 even if the right-handed game is performed. , The lottery of Special Figure 1 is configured to be executed. Then, in the case of winning a big hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1 during the probability change state, if the big hit B (50% of the big hit winning) is set as the big hit type, the normal state is set after the big hit game is completed. When the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, the latent state (full power mode) is set after the jackpot game is completed.

On the other hand, if a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the special figure 2 hold stored on hold at the time when the probability change state is set as the game state, regardless of the big hit type (big hit). 100% of the winnings), the probability change state is set again after the jackpot game is over.

In other words, if you win a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the probability change state, the full power mode (latent state) is set with a 50% probability, the normal state is set with a 50% probability, and the special figure 2 lottery. If the jackpot is won, the probability change state is set with a 100% probability.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a gaming state other than the latent probability state is set, that is, the execution of the lottery shown in FIG. 1 is defined as an appropriate gaming method. Even if the special figure 2 game is executed during the current gaming state and the jackpot is won, the latent probability state, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, is not set.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the entry of the ball into the second entry port 640 during the latent probability state, the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened even in the low probability state of the normal symbol (the ball is easy to open). It is configured so that the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640).

Therefore, even if a game (right-handed game) different from the proper game (left-handed game) is executed and the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, which is a low-probability state of the normal symbol, the player is asked. It is possible to prevent excessive benefits (privileges for setting an advantageous gaming state) from being given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed frequently in the normal state, so that the player in the normal state is given an excessive privilege (a privilege to set an advantageous gaming state). It can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a higher probability than in the state in which the normal state is set, and the ball is placed at the second entry port 640. By configuring it so that it is difficult to enter the ball, it is difficult to execute the special figure 2 lottery, but it is not limited to this, and when the probability change state is set, it is higher than the state where the normal state is set. , Set the jackpot probability of the special symbol to a high probability, and make it easier to execute the new special figure 2 lottery (so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than the special figure 1 lottery). It may be configured to set the fluctuation time or the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Specifically, the state in which the probability variation state is set is more than the state in which the normal state is set. It may be configured so that the time set as the fluctuation time is shortened (for example, 3 minutes).

With this configuration, when the probabilistic state is set, a game in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is drawn with the aim of shifting to the latent probable state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player. (Left-handed game) does not shift to the latent state, but by executing many special symbol lottery, the second special symbol (special symbol) aims to see various variable effects (big hit effects). The player can select the game (right-handed game) in which the lottery is performed in 2).

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 15, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like have a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. The hit type counter C5, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 and is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 54). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to entry into the first ball entry port 64 consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) and four holding areas (holding) A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to a ball entering the second entry port 640 consisting of the first to fourth areas) is provided, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is provided. Stores the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. ..

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , Special symbol variation based on various stored values is started.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol at the same time (in parallel), each special symbol is available. The holding ball storage area (first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area, respectively. As a result, when the start condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

In this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. However, for example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. It may be configured.

Further, as in the present embodiment, the small hit is also made in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result. It may be configured to store the value of the type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (first entry port 64, second entry opening 640) that triggers the special symbol lottery. It is configured to store all the counter values acquired by the above, and when the start condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery is performed using only the required value among the acquired counter values. By configuring to execute, the same configuration can be used for multiple gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (presence or absence of small hits), so parts and techniques should be standardized. It is possible to reduce the cost.

Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, as in the case of the special symbol described above, the normal symbol hold corresponding to the entry (passing of the ball) into the through gate 67 composed of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas). A ball storage area 203c is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, each value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal figure variation type counter CS2 is set according to the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the normal symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and various stored values are stored. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the entry into the second entry port 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter acquired based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. It has a configuration to hold and store the value, but is not limited to this, and does not provide a function (hold storage function) to store each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player are switched as a lottery of one special symbol type according to the set game state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol while a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 54).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determined value) determined to be a big hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is commonly defined for the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol Judgment values in a predetermined range are defined corresponding to the states (low probability state, high probability state). As shown in FIG. 17A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, "7 to 9" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Other values are defined as judgment values other than big hits (that is, small hits or misses).

Further, when the high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol is set, "0 to 3" among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. A value other than is specified as a judgment value other than a big hit (that is, a small hit or a miss). That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot is won with a probability of 3/480 (1/160), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. If it is set, it is stipulated that the jackpot will be won with a probability of 4/480 (1/120). Therefore, the high-probability state is easier to win the jackpot than the low-probability state of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is configured to be the same in the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, but the probability is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of symbol. For example, the second special symbol may be configured to have a lower jackpot probability than the first special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, two types of jackpot probabilities of the special symbol are prepared, that is, a high probability state and a low probability state, but one type may be used, or three or more types may be used. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be different for each of a maximum of four types of gaming states set by combining the state of the special symbol and the state of the normal symbol. You may simply make it possible to set three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and set different jackpot probabilities for each state.

Further, the value of the first random number counter C1 is also referred to when it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is won in the small hit. The value of the random number that becomes the small hit of the special symbol is set by the small hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is the small hit random number table 202b. If it matches the value of the random number that is the small hit specified in, it is judged as a small hit of the special symbol.

Here, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit random number table 202b. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a small hit is defined in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, the determination value determined to be a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low). A predetermined range of judgment values is defined regardless of the probability state and the high probability state). As shown in FIG. 17B, when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not specified, and the value of the first special symbol is small in the lottery. It is stipulated that you will not win a prize.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of "212 to 432". That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 0 (not won), and the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 221/480 (about 1/2). It is stipulated to be 1).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the first random number counter C1 value that wins the big hit and the first random number counter C1 value that wins the small hit are different. It is configured so that in one process of executing a special symbol lottery (a process of determining whether or not there is a hit), a big hit hit / fail judgment and a small hit win / fail judgment are continuously (simultaneously) executed. are doing.

With this configuration, it is possible to execute a lottery for a big hit or a small hit with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. With this configuration, the privilege given to the player can be different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, the player can be enthusiastically played in order to execute more lottery of special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in the present embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (latent state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed, so that the player On the other hand, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that a specific game state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, a table referred to when executing the big hit lottery (first random number table 202a) and a table referred to when executing the small hit lottery (small hit random number table 202b) are displayed. Although it is configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute a big hit lottery and a small hit lottery. In this case, for example, the random number table 202a per first may be configured to specify the range of the counter value for winning the small hit for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, the state of the special symbol, and the jackpot according to the determination value predetermined in advance according to the determined value. It is configured to execute the determination of winning or small hit winning, but is not limited to this, for example, depending on the number of big hit winnings or the number of small hit winnings within a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The first hit random number counter C1 value specified as a big hit winning or a small winning winning may be configured to be variable, or a big hit lottery or a small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. As the data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery, a data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit and the judgment value corresponding to the small hit are not specified may be provided.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are executed. There is a restriction (so that the jackpot game is not executed) so that the jackpot is not won at the same time (in parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol, and during the period until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win a big hit, the lottery of special symbols should be executed by referring to the dedicated data table that does not specify the judgment value corresponding to the big hit but only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. It may be configured.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. At the same timing, the RAM 203 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection table 202d to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 18, in this jackpot type selection table 202d, the type of the special symbol won by the jackpot (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is associated with the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. Multiple jackpot types are specified.

Specifically, "big hit A" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". In the range of "50 to 99", "big hit B" is specified. Further, "big hit C" is defined in the range where the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 64". In the range of "65 to 99", "big hit D" is defined.

Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 and the variable winning device 65) executed during the jackpot game The operation content (timing, number of times) for the opening / closing door 65f1 and the switching member 650h) is stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an opening operation scenario in which the opening operation scenario is defined in time series.

Then, the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the open operation scenario is stored in the executing scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario content is updated every time the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing the control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is discriminated and the process based on the discriminant result is executed.

In this way, the operation contents of each movable member during the jackpot game for moving a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of V winning device 650, opening / closing door 65f1 of variable winning device 65, switching member 650h) are arranged in chronological order. By using the specified opening operation scenario, it is possible to centrally manage the operation control for a plurality of movable members. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the operation control is executed separately for each movable member, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and in the case where a defect occurs in one movable member, the other It is possible to smoothly execute the motion processing for the movable member.

"Big hit A" is a big hit game of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds and the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened for 10 rounds. Is the type of jackpot that is executed. This round game 1 is a round game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until the ball wins 10 balls or the opening period elapses for 30 seconds as one round game. be.

Furthermore, in the jackpot game executed in "big hit A", the waiting period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (1R) is 1 second, and between each round game. The waiting period (interval period) is set to 0.5 seconds, and the waiting period (ending period) from the end of the last round game (10th round) to the end of the jackpot game is set to 2 seconds. .. During these various waiting periods, the first attacker 650 is in a closed state. Here, the length of the interval period set between the round games will be described in detail.

As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 of the present embodiment is configured so that the period required for the ball to flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is 1 second. , The interval period set as a jackpot game is set to be 0.5 seconds. Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is arranged so that all the balls launched into the right side region by the right-handed game flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1. ..

That is, a ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 located in the closed state during the period (interval period) when the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is closed after the one round game is completed passes through the opening / closing door 650f1. It is configured so that the next round game is started before the next round game is started. With this configuration, it is possible to easily make all of the fired balls win the first attacker (V winning device) 650 when the right-handed game is continuously played during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the game operation during the jackpot game.

In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult for the ball launched during the jackpot game to flow down the downstream side of the first attacker (V winning device) 650, it is difficult for the ball to flow into the flow path unit 3660 during the jackpot game. (It is difficult to pass through the through gate 67). The details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the larger the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol (the number of stores that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67), the shorter the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. 2 It is configured to facilitate the entry of a ball into the entry port 640 (see FIG. 22).

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reserved memory number of the normal symbol from becoming excessively large during the jackpot game. Next, in the present embodiment, an ending period of 2 seconds is provided after the final round game of the jackpot game is completed. The length of this ending period will be explained. As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, when the V winning device 650 is in the closed state, one ball is configured to flow into the flow path unit 3660 for every two balls played in the right-handed game. are doing. Then, by operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be launched in one minute. That is, the spheres are configured to flow into the flow path unit 3660 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. Further, when a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the normal symbol fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 continues for a period from the start time of the jackpot game to the start of the game in the latent probability state. By performing the right-handed game, it is possible to surely execute the game in the latent state while maintaining the state in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is one or more.

On the other hand, during the jackpot game, when the game in which the right-handed game is fired only at the timing when the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened, the latent state is set. Since a situation in which the number of reserved symbols of a normal symbol is 0 is likely to occur, the gaming efficiency in the latent state is significantly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to continuously perform the right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

In addition, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit game is completed (the time saving flag 203f is set to off) regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning, and the big hit. An opening operation (V opening pattern) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 provided in the first attacker (V winning device) 650) is executed during the game.

As a result, when the jackpot game based on "Big Hit A" is executed, the right-handed game is continuously executed in order to make the first attacker (V winning device) 650 win the ball, and the ball is efficiently played. 1 Attacker (V winning device) 650 can be won to win a prize ball, and by passing the ball through a specific area, it is possible to set the latent state after the big hit game is over, and at the timing when the latent state is set. Since the number of reserved symbols of a normal symbol can be set to 1 or more, it is a big hit that is advantageous to the player.

"Big hit B" has 11 rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a big hit game, and only in the first round, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened and the remaining 10 rounds. During that time, a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is opened.

As the round game executed in the first round, the round game (round game 2) in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened until the opening period elapses 0.5 is executed. Then, in the remaining 10 rounds, the above-mentioned round game 1 is executed against the second attacker (variable winning device) 65.

That is, in the jackpot game corresponding to "big hit B", a game (first round game) in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened during the period when the ball is difficult to enter (0.5 seconds) is executed. Then, during a period (30 seconds) in which the ball is easy to enter, a game (round game from the second round to the eleventh round) in which the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is opened is configured to be executed. There is. Therefore, it is a big hit game in which a round game for 10 rounds is executed.

The opening operation scenario corresponding to the "big hit B" defines a V opening pattern, which is an operation pattern in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3) in the first attacker (V winning device) 650. Therefore, the high-probability state of the special symbol is not set (difficult to set) after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game is performed.

Therefore, when the jackpot game based on "big hit B" is executed, the left-handed game is executed so that the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 wins the ball, and the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 wins the prize. Only the game of letting the player win the prize ball is executed, and the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game is not set, so that the big hit game is disadvantageous to the player compared to "Big hit A". ..

In other words, if a jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance of winning a jackpot game (“big hit A”) that is advantageous to the player, regardless of the game state set at the time of the jackpot winning. However, it is configured to win a jackpot game (“big hit B”) that is disadvantageous to the player with a 50% probability.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot advantageous to the player is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened for 10 rounds is executed, and the player If you win a big hit that is disadvantageous to you, the big hit game that opens the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 for 10 rounds is executed, so the type of big hit that you won this time is advantageous. It is possible for the player to determine whether or not the game is a big hit, but the case is not limited to this, and there are cases where the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player and cases where the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. , The same winning device (for example, the first attacker (V winning device) 650) may be configured to perform a jackpot game to be opened.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of jackpot won this time is advantageous depending on the game content of the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game It is possible to predict what the game state is set after the end until just before the game state is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game, each winning device (opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening motion scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player). The contents of operation control of the opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 650f1, opening / closing door 65f1) are the same so that the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 65) are in the open or closed state, and the jackpot that is advantageous to the player is supported. In the opening operation scenario, the operation control content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area is specified as the operation control content for the switching member 650h, and in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the switching member 650h is specified. As the motion control content for the above, the motion control content may be configured to specify the motion control content that makes it difficult for the sphere to pass through the specific area.

Further, the operation control content of the switching member 650h is made the same in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and each winning device (first). The opening / closing doors (opening / closing door 650f1, opening / closing door 65f1) may be configured to have different timings for controlling the operation so that the attacker 650 and the second attacker 65) are in the open or closed state. By varying the length of the waiting period (opening period) from the execution to the execution of the first round game, the execution timing of the round game and the operation timing of the switching member 650h are made different. Therefore, the jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and the jackpot game in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area may be configured to be feasible.

Since the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "big hit A" is executed for "big hit C" and "big hit D", detailed explanation of the jackpot game content is omitted, but when "big hit C" is set, , The game state set after the end of the big hit game is configured to be different according to the game state at the time when the big hit is won.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot where "big hit C" is set is the normal state or the probabilistic state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (time reduction). If the flag 203f is set to on) and the latent state is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203f is set to off) and the "big hit D" is set after the jackpot game ends. If the player wins the game, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the time saving flag 203f is set to ON) after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning.

That is, when the normal state or the probabilistic state is set as the game state, that is, when the game for executing the lottery for the first special symbol is an appropriate game, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed. If the jackpot is won, the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is not set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an inappropriate game.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, a ball is set in a jackpot game in which an opening operation scenario in which an opening operation (V opening pattern) in which a ball can pass through a specific area (V switch 650e3) is not set is set. When is passed through a specific area, it is determined as an abnormal game, and the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game is completed. With this configuration, even if a malicious player illegally passes the ball to a specific area, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being given.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the big hit game is set is set according to the type of the special symbol won in the big hit and the game state at the time of the big hit winning. Therefore, it is possible not only to make the player expect to win the jackpot and play the game, but also to make the player interested in the type of the special symbol won in the jackpot and the game state at the time of winning. can.

In the present embodiment, the number of types of jackpots is four, but the number of jackpots is not limited to three, and may be three or less, or five or more. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected even if the values of the same first hit type counter C2 are used. By configuring in this way, for example, when a big hit with the second special symbol is made, by setting a big hit type in which a larger number of rounds is executed, the hit with the second special symbol becomes more a player. You can expect it. Therefore, it is possible to make the hit in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the taste of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, the player can be strongly reminded that he / she wants to shift to the high probability state, and the game can be played for a longer time.

In addition, the type of jackpot type selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type. It may be configured so that only the range is different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first type counter C2 by aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and determines a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0 to 0). It is configured to add 1 in order within 99), reach the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99), and then return to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the first special of the RAM 203 is obtained at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entry port 640.

The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are set in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed. The type of small hit (small hit game content) is determined using the small hit type selection table (not shown).

In this embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit game that is executed when the small hit is won, the description of the small hit type selection table is omitted. When executing, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to specify different small hit types (small hit game contents) for the range of the values of the acquired small hit type counter C5.

In addition, it is configured to win a small hit in both the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, and different small hit types (small hit game) depending on the type of the special symbol won in the small hit. When the content) is set, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to specify different small hit types (small hit game contents) for each type of special symbol.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time deviation, long-time deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. To. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 19) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 19, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used in a state where a normal state is set as a game state, and a probability change table 202e2 used in a state where a probability change state is set. And the latency table 202e3 used in the state where the latency state is set are specified. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, since the data table used for selecting the fluctuation pattern according to the gaming state is different, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected according to the gaming state is different. be able to.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202e1 in a schematic diagram. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is a second special symbol with respect to the variable time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that the fluctuation time set for the lottery will be longer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". Various normal reach per 20 seconds of fluctuation time are associated with the range of "51 to 100", and super reach A per 30 seconds of fluctuation time is associated with the range of "51 to 100". Super reach B per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range, and super reach C per 30 seconds of variation time is associated with the range of "151 to 198".

Further, when the lottery result is "missing" and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol when the lottery is executed is 0 or 1, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70". A long deviation of 12 seconds is specified in association with a long deviation of 12 seconds, a deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "71 to 150", and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified in the range of "151 to 170". The out-of-order super reach A is associated with and defined, and the out-of-order super reach B with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of “171 to 198”.

Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol when the lottery is executed is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 70" and the variation time is a short deviation of 8 seconds. Is specified in association with, and a long deviation of 12 seconds is specified in the range of "71 to 130", and a deviation of 20 seconds is specified in the range of "131 to 170". The range of "171 to 185" is defined by the deviation super reach A having a variation time of 30 seconds, and the range of "186 to 198" is defined by the deviation super reach B having a variation time of 30 seconds. Has been done.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the longer the fluctuation time is set as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is smaller. are doing. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. Further, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball enters the first entry port 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress the situation where the ball is thrown.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the variation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) is not related to the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Long hit fluctuation, long small hit fluctuation, long off fluctuation) are set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the right-handed game is executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the ball can enter the second entrance 640. However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, a game in which the ball is put into the first ball entry port 64 during the normal state. That is, the game is configured to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

In this embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern table is used regardless of the winning jackpot type, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A). A different variation pattern table may be used depending on whether the jackpot type is a jackpot type or the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (big hit B) other than that. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing other jackpots is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the advantageous jackpot (big hit A) is won. It is preferable to configure it so that the time fluctuation pattern can be easily selected. As a result, the longer the fluctuation time set in the execution fluctuation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to the player. Therefore, the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the normal jackpot is won is easier to select the fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won. This can be configured to provide the player with surprising gaming results when the jackpot is won with a short variation time, even when the short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202e2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 21A. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variation table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 21A, the probability variation table 202e2 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variable type counter CS1 is " The range of "0 to 99" defines the normal fluctuation per 20 seconds of the fluctuation time, and the range of "100 to 198" defines the super fluctuation per 30 seconds of the fluctuation time. Further, in the case of "off", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the deviation fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is defined in the entire range.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the fluctuation pattern (hit fluctuation, the fluctuation time is 60 seconds) regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. Small hit fluctuations, missed fluctuations) are stipulated.

As described above, in the probabilistic state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol than in the normal state. Further, it is configured so that the reserved memory of the second special symbol cannot be newly acquired (difficult) during the probabilistic state. Therefore, once the state changes to the probabilistic state, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested in a short period of time.

Further, the fluctuation time (12 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol overlaps with the fluctuation time that can be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the probabilistic state by grasping the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. Not limited to this, a variable time may be set so that the player can determine which gaming state is set.

Next, the contents of the latency table 202e3 provided in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 21B. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the latency table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 21B, the latent probability table 202e3 defines the symbol type, the lottery result, the value range of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special diagram 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol or the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1. , If the fluctuation pattern (hit long fluctuation, missed long fluctuation) of 10 minutes is specified and the symbol type is the second special symbol (special diagram 2), the lottery result of the special symbol or the acquired variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second (hit short fluctuation, small hit short fluctuation, missed short fluctuation) is specified.

As a result, unlike other gaming states, the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol during the latent state. Therefore, the game state can be set so that the lottery of the second special symbol is easier to execute than the lottery of the first special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 15, the explanation will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 232, the maximum value (that is, 232) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is the second hit random number table 202c. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol (second symbol). Further, the second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for the low probability time of the normal symbol and the other for the high probability time where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability time, and they are included in each. The number of random numbers that are big hits is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be hit different, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability time of the normal symbol and the high probability time of the normal symbol.

The contents specified in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (c). FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 17 (c), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 230", and the normal symbol has a high probability. In the case of the state, the acquired second random number counter C4 is defined in the range of "0 to 231".

That is, in the present embodiment, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (231/233) is stipulated to be high, and the normal symbol is specified. When the high probability state of is set, it is stipulated that the winning is performed with a higher probability (232/233) than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, that is, even when the latent probability state is set, it is easy to execute the winning game based on the winning of the normal symbol.

As a result, it is possible to easily allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the latent state, so that it is possible to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 32). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 54).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal map variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, using the acquired value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined with reference to the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the acquired normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the number of pending numbers is 0. It is stipulated that a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set in, and a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is set when the number of reserved pieces is 1 to 3. Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the value of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 198", the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the number of reserved symbols. It is stipulated to be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is changed based on the game state of the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, and the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. It is configured so that the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 differs depending on the set fluctuation time. As a result, in each game state, it is possible to limit the lottery action of the second special symbol that makes it easy to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 15, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 54) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 53) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 52) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d. 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passing counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, game state storage area 203m, remaining ball timer Flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, probability change effective flag 203p, probability change effective timer 203r, discharge number counter 203s, time saving flag 203t, jackpot flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, small hit flag It has 203x, a special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y, a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2, a special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3, and another memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entry opening 640 (starting prize) up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). It is a storage area for storing various counter values.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, the first special symbol is stopped. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the storage area. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, refer to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). (Not shown).

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) are started. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 15) with the detection of winning is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), the counters C1 to C2 and C5 are used from the counter buffer. , CS1 values are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entry port 640 (starting prize), the counters C1 to C2, C5 and CS1 are connected from the counter buffer as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value is acquired and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in the same manner.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a big hit lottery and a display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. One of the data (counters C1 to C2, C5, CS1) stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above and corresponding to each start winning prize. The data corresponding to the start winning prize of is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c. The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is each of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 15) when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (starting prize) is detected. A storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (starting prize) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer. , The value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that the data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting prize) are stored in order from the holding area in which the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. ..

In addition, when it is detected that the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is the execution start timing of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol based on the start prize, each counter value is stored and the normal symbol winning lottery is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol hold is performed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery and a display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the ball storage area 203c (value of the random number counter C4 per second, value of the normal figure variation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to one start winning prize is normally used. Shift to the symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). The shift in the present embodiment means that the data stored in one area is moved to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are the first input detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display effect (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball opening 64 or the second entry port 640. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times each. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 53). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation display effect is executed.

Further, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. Is.

Further, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball based on the ball entering the second entry port 640 (starting prize). When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. Is.

The MPU 201 is a value of each of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). When each is stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is stored in the first special symbol change start processing. (See S208 in FIG. 34) or in the second special symbol change start processing (S210 in FIG. 39), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f allows the ball to pass through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "starting prize"). ), This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 53). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S2108 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed (see FIGS. 50 and S2005).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state or latent probability state) of the special symbol. When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is in a high probability state (probability change state or latent state) of the special symbol, and when it is off, it is in the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. It shows that there is. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to on at the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (see S2702 in FIG. 57). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game is started (see S810 in FIG. 38 and S1510 in FIG. 45). In the initialized state, it is set to off, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high probability state (probability change state or latent state) of the special symbol after the big hit game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the high probability state (probability change state or latent probability state) of the special symbol is set to the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Is determined by whether or not it has passed. Here, when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S2982 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, based on the probability variation flag 203g being set on (see S2702 in FIG. 57), it is set to off. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). In addition, it is set to off in the initialized state.

When the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 before the power is turned off, and if it can be determined that the ball has passed, the probability change is made. The setting flag 203h may be officially set to on and configured to return. In this case, it can be determined whether or not the V switch 650e3 has passed before the power is turned off by checking whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value larger than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement shop side by rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203h to be turned on and determining the fraud that the power is turned on again when the power is turned off. can.

The probability variation passing counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the V switch 650e3 in one round during the jackpot game (in the present embodiment, one round in the jackpot A). It is possible to determine whether all the balls that have won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 have been ejected from the sum of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the ejection number counter 203s described later. The probability variation pass counter 203i is incremented and updated by 1 when passing through the V switch 650e3 (see S2981 in FIG. 59). Further, after executing the process of checking whether the number of balls won in the V winning device 650 and the number of ejected balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S3011 in FIG. 60). The probability variation pass counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 and the number of balls that have won the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. Is. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the V winning device 650, the ball is added and updated one by one (S2973 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes won in the V winning device 650 (value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number discharged (total value of the discharge number counter 203s and the probability variation passing counter 203i) are one. After it is determined whether or not it is done, it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 650k is set to be on (excitation). In this pachinko machine 10, as an opening operation scenario of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A, C, D, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to be on for 5 seconds 0.5 seconds after the first round game is started. The V-opening pattern to be used is specified.

By setting such an opening operation scenario, when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpots A, C, and D is executed, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 flows during the open state. The path solenoid 650k is set to ON, and the switching member 650h is switched so as to be in a communication state in which the ball can pass through the special discharge flow path 650e2. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball that has won the first attacker (V winning device) 650 to pass through the specific region (V switch 650e3).

On the other hand, in the jackpot B, an opening pattern (non-V opening pattern) in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to be on for 5 seconds 0.5 seconds after the start of the first round round game is defined. In the jackpot game corresponding to this jackpot B, as described above in FIG. 18, since the opening operation scenario for opening the first attacker (V winning device) 650 only in the first round is set, such an opening operation scenario is set. By doing so, when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is executed, the first attacker (V, which is the first round game) is in the closed state of the first attacker (V winning device) 650. The flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON after the opening operation period of the winning device) 650 has elapsed 0.5 seconds, and the switching member 650h is switched so as to be in a communication state in which the ball can pass through the special discharge flow path 650e2. .. Therefore, when the jackpot game of jackpot B is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3).

The game state storage area 203m is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is a game state set after the jackpot game ends (probability change flag 203 g and time reduction flag 203t setting status). The game state corresponding to is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to off and the time saving flag 203f is set to off, and the probability change state is set when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203f is set to on. It is stored, and the latent probability state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to on and the time saving flag 203f is set to off.

Further, in the state where the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, the hit game state (big hit state, small hit state) indicating that each hit game is being executed, and the executed big hit game. The type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to is also stored.

Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203m, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and temporarily stores it in the slave state setting area 223k.

The information stored in the game state storage area 203m is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 53), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203m is set.

As a result, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the current gaming state can be discriminated by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag for indicating that the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is set from the open state to the closed state in one round. Shows.

When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o, which will be described later, is incremented and updated by 1 (see S3005 in FIG. 60). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time after the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed, and is the V winning device 650 or the variable winning device. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game ball in the device 65 to be ejected has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203o is the V winning device 650 or variable when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. It is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for the game ball winning in the winning device 65 to be ejected has elapsed.

Here, if a specific description is made with reference to FIG. 6 using the configuration of the V winning device 650, the time required for the ball winning in the V winning device 650 to be ejected is 2 seconds. In the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the V winning device 650 and the number of ejections thereof match ( See S3007 in FIG. 60).

Then, if the number of winnings to the V winning device 650 and the number of dischargings do not match, an error command is set and a notification to that effect is given (see S3008 in FIG. 60). Therefore, it is possible to notify at an early stage that the ball is jammed in the V winning device 650. Further, it can be easily determined that an act of making a hole in the V winning device 650 and causing the ball to win a prize in the V winning device 650 using an illegal route (a route that is not measured as the number of winnings) is performed. Furthermore, by illegally leaving the ball in the V winning device 650 and giving an impact or the like at the start timing of one round so that the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one, the jackpot game of jackpot B It is possible to suppress fraudulent passage of a game ball through the V switch 650e3.

If the number of winnings and the number of ejects do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203h is turned on even if the ball passes through the V switch 650e3. It may be configured not to be set to. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the special symbol from being illegally given a high-probability state.

The probabilistic valid flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 after the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off. When this probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON, the ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 6A) based on the flow path solenoid 650k being ON is the V switch 650e3. It shows that it is less than the time required to pass through. That is, it indicates that it is a normal period for the ball to pass through the V switch 650e3.

The probabilistic valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 650k is turned off by the probabilistic effective timer 203r, it is possible to determine the period required for normally passing through the V switch 650e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 650e2 to pass through the V switch 650e3 is 1 second. The upper limit of the probabilistic valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 after that, it is determined to be invalid and not to be determined to pass. There is.

As a result, when the switching member 650h is in a state where the special discharge flow path 650e2 is not communicated (a state in which the normal discharge flow path 650e1 is communicated), a ball is illegally inserted into the special discharge flow path 650e2 to the V switch 650e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud such as passing the ball, pushing the ball up from below the V switch 650e3 with a piano wire or the like to pass it, or causing the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect it as passing by radio waves or the like.

The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The discharge number counter 203s is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after the number of balls won in the V winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls are determined (FIG. 60S3011).

The time saving flag 203t is a flag for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, and is set to ON when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. This time saving flag 203t is set to ON after the jackpot game is completed, corresponding to the winning jackpot type (S2704 in FIG. 57). Then, when the jackpot game is won, it is set to off. As a result, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol continues at least until the next big hit is won. The configuration is not limited, and for example, when the end condition that can be satisfied by the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small hit winning), or a predetermined lottery result. When the number of times (for example, a small hit) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), it may be configured to end the high probability state of the normal symbol, or the number of lottery of each symbol lottery may be When the predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be terminated.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned end conditions to be different depending on the winning jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning. As a result, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, how long will the high probability state of the normal symbol continue? Can be made difficult for the player to predict.

The jackpot flag 203u determines that the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot at the start of fluctuation based on the ball entering the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. If this is the case, it is a flag that is set to on. In addition, it is set to off when the jackpot game is completed. It is composed of a flag that can identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the jackpot. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and "10" sets the jackpot flag 203u on for the first special symbol, and "01" sets the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol. At "00", the jackpot flag 203u is set as off.

Here, the jackpot flag 203u is configured so that the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol can be discriminated separately. If either one of the second special symbols is set to ON first, even if the lottery result of the other is a jackpot, the jackpot flag 203u corresponding to the jackpot of each special symbol is set to ON. ..

Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and both special symbols are big hits. If you win, the jackpot game based on the lottery result of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display) is executed, and the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol confirmation display). ), The other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 that can execute lottery of a plurality of special symbol types at the same time (in parallel) wins a big hit in the lottery of each special symbol, which is excessive for the player at the same time. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a privilege (big hit game) is granted.

Furthermore, even if one of the special symbol lottery wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, by the time the winning result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the other special symbol lottery will be a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to win. In this case, it is advisable to use the variable time until the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed to execute a variable effect suggesting that the player has won a disadvantage. As a result, the player can be made to think that he / she has won the prize at a disadvantage, so that the other special symbol lottery can be enthusiastically executed during the fluctuation time.

In addition, it may be configured so that a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set when the jackpot which is advantageous to the player is won than when the jackpot which is disadvantageous to the player is won. As a result, while the one special symbol that has been won at the disadvantage is changed, the other special symbol lottery can be won at the advantage, and the winning result can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) before the winning result at the disadvantage. can.

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u that can separately store the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning) of the second special symbol is used, but the present invention is limited to this. No, a common jackpot flag is set for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203u is turned on when one of the lottery of the 1st special symbol and the lottery of the 2nd special symbol is won. It may be configured so that the jackpot is not won in the other special symbol lottery executed with the jackpot flag 203u set to on.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is variable display, and the first special symbol is displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. It is set to on when the big hit of the symbol is executed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON in S802 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is set to off in the process of S902 of the second special symbol change start process (see S210 of FIG. 39).

This prevents the second special symbol that has been forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol from executing the lottery again when the jackpot symbol is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. be able to.

In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the process related to the first special symbol is executed in one special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), and then the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring to execute, the variation processing for each special symbol is configured to be executed without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot, the jackpot control process is performed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. (S2404 in FIG. 55) is configured to be executed. In addition, the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 33) is the variation processing for each special symbol (S204 to S204 in FIG. 33) when the current state is a big hit state or a small hit state (S201: Yes in FIG. 33). It is configured to skip S213).

That is, in the present embodiment, while the big hit game or the small hit game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed. When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for showing that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation processing for the first special symbol executed earlier in the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 33). In addition, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33).

In the present embodiment configured as described above, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w. It is possible to prevent a new variation process for the second special symbol from being executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33).

The small hit flag 203x is a flag indicating that the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and is set to be turned on when the small hit is won. This small hit flag 203x is set to on when the winning / failing determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit (see S1101 in FIG. 41), and when the special symbol fluctuation in which the winning result is a small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1605 in FIG. 46).

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped. When the state set to on is set to off, the update (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to be turned on when the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small hit is stopped (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol change processing (FIG. 33) (see S202 in FIG. 33). When it is set to ON in the process of S202, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the same manner as during the change (FIG. 33). S203). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the fluctuation display is continuously executed in the first symbol display device. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the temporary stop flag 203y of the special figure 1 is set to on. Then, when it is determined that it is set to on in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) (S701: Yes in FIG. 37), it is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be able to win the small hit, the special symbol whose variation display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special. Only symbols are available, but if the lottery for the first special symbol is configured so that a small hit can be won, even if the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variation display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, it is based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on the execution of the big hit game). ), The process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped by the combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is completed).

That is, it is configured so that the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes according to the lottery result of one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result (for example, big hit) for the player, and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to prevent the big hit from being erased by the small hit.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S509 in FIG. 36). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33). Is determined (see S206 in FIG. 33). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is 0 (S206: Yes in FIG. 33), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process for stopping the first special symbol being changed (S206: Yes in FIG. 33). (See S207 in FIG. 33) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the second special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 remains and is forcibly displayed. After the stop display is displayed, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3.

The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S906 in FIG. 42). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 42). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation executing process (see S211 in FIG. 44) is executed, and whether the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33). Is determined (see S212 in FIG. 33). Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is 0 (S212: Yes in FIG. 33), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S212: Yes in FIG. 33) for stopping the second special symbol being changed ( (See S213 in FIG. 33) is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit (see S805 of FIG. 38). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation when the jackpot stop display of the first special symbol is displayed, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 remains and is forcibly displayed. It is possible to prevent the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 after the stop display is displayed.

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like are set (stored).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a. It drives a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to drive the front side as a shaft, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650. A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k for driving the solenoid and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. Send.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 52) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 24A, at least the variation pattern selection table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (out of alignment, out of reach, various reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selection of variation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the hit / fail determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of fluctuation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the fluctuation time and the type of fluctuation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored at an early stage.

Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 24 (b). As shown in FIG. 24B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. , Special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, effect counter 223j, slave state setting area 223k, and other memory areas 223z. At least it is provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 63) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The prize information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and each of these areas has. Stores the winning information respectively. From the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation starts.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (and a third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. (Variation display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the reserved ball number. It has become like.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. , Stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c, and holds the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the ball number counter 223c, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, it holds the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm4 (see FIG. 11A) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is based on the reserved ball number command in which the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is output from the main control device 110 to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Since it is different only in that it is memorized, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command for notifying the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on when the first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on when the second stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. It should be noted that each time the main process is executed, 1 is added and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main control device 110 is set. The current gaming state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h. The state setting command is output from the main control device 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 52).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 31, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory generally has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (command code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 75) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entry port 64b1 or the lower first. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the ball entry port 64b2 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 74).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In FIG. 26, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 26 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the instruction command for starting the variation, is received, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 26 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 26 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 26 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2. If this is the case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (c) are drawn. Is instructed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so as to be alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is set to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing “ FIG. 27B shows the back side A corresponding to the "city stage", and the back sides B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", the "river stage", and the "sky stage", respectively. .. Further, FIG. 28 is shown with respect to the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As shown in FIG. 27, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A to D, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "empty stage", MPU231 will be First, the area between the position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the rear image on the back surface E has a third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 28 with the passage of time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, on the back surface E, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the rear image shown in FIG. 28A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28 (a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 28B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28 (b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 28 (c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28 (c), a black sky indicating the night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 28 (a), and the back images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are stored. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage "city stage" is displayed, so the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" is displayed. By making all of them resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" are a part of the back surface as shown in FIG. 27 (b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 28 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b) excluding FIG. 28 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but if this is done, the resident video RAM 235 will be resident. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image first displayed when the stage is changed is the range from the position a to the position a'(or the range of FIGS. 28A to 28B). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b)) is transferred to the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while making it. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While scrolling, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the image at the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 28 (a), so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 28 (b) to (c) and 28 (c) to (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 28 (b) to (c) and 28 (c) to (a) are normally used. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 28 (b) to (c) and 28 (c) to (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. be able to.

In the backs B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 25) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the images between the positions b'and b. Image data to be stored is duplicated. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. Will be. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed according to various productions, and the corresponding data is displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but is resident. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character symbol area 235e of the video RAM 235, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a definite display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening production is a production for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round production will start from now on. This is a production to notify the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special gaming state.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw sprites, such as values, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a light, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information is described that specifies whether to display one of them or to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to E, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 30). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 30).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, in the example of FIG. 30). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 74) (see S6005 in FIG. 74). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in order to display an image other than the image at the time of turning on the power. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 86 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 76 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 76 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 76B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 76 (b) see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 77 to 82) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 83 to 85) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 86 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later that describes drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (see FIG. 31) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 76 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 85) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 31) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 31, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 76 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 83). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 75) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 87). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 87). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 88).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see S6306 in FIG. 76 (b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that the change is not performed. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 82 (a)). Further, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 87), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 87). As a result, it is possible to display the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command and the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set rear image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on for the rear image discrimination flag 233x (FIG. 82 (a). ) S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With this back image discrimination flag 233x, the currently set back type can be easily specified.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demo is being produced. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demo is being produced, and if it is off, it means that the demo is not being produced. This demo display flag 233y is set to on when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S7221 in FIG. 83), and the demo display data table is set. It is set to off when other display data tables other than are set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 78 (a), S6705 in FIG. 79 (a), S6805 in FIG. 79 (b). , See S6905 in FIG. 80). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demo is currently being produced.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmation display effect is being executed. Here, the definite display effect indicates an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern. If the definite display flag 233z is on, it means that the definite display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the definite display effect is not in progress. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to on when the confirmation display data table is set to the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 83) (S7214 in FIG. 83), and is other than the confirmation display data table. Set off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 787, S6705 in FIG. 79 (a), S6805 in FIG. 79 (b), FIG. See S6905 of 80). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current confirmation display effect is in progress.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 60. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (479, 99, 239, 232, 99 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the entry of the ball into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) and the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 49.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is then executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). In the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 33 and S104), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various determinations (hit / fail determinations) and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determinations are made by predetermined control. In the variable display mode, various commands for controlling the variable display to be possible on the first symbol display device 37 and for executing the variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Control is executed to set or stop and display the determination result (hit / fail determination result) in the display mode. Hereinafter, the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 33, S104) will be described.

In the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 33, S104), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (big hit in progress) or the small hit game is in progress (small hit in progress) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203m, it is determined whether the current state of the game is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit).

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the temporary stop flag 203y in FIG. 1 is set to ON (S202), and then ON. When it is determined that the setting is set to (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (the first special symbol (special figure 1 in the present embodiment)) is displayed. Update (S203), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is not set to ON (S202: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to be turned on when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, while the small hit game is being executed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display (special symbol fluctuation display) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is not updated (subtracted). During that period, the temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed on the first symbol display device 83.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which was being executed with the start of the small hit game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted when the first special symbol change in the inside disappears. As a display mode for indicating that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that the normal fluctuation display is in progress (for example, at 0.2 second intervals). It may be the same display mode as the blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated, or a display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is in progress (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals). A blinking display mode in which the above is repeated) may be used. Further, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be capable of displaying a display mode of a plurality of colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only during the temporary stop is used. Is also good.

On the other hand, in the processing of S201, when it is determined that the current time is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is larger than 0, that is, the first. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S204). If it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is being displayed (the value of the variation time counter 203a2 of the special figure 1 is larger than 0) (S204: Yes), the process during execution of the variation of the first special symbol is executed (S204: Yes). S205).

In this first special symbol change execution processing (S205), in order to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period when the first special symbol is changing. Processing is executed. Then, when the processing of S205 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first fluctuation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol fluctuation executing processing (S205) is 0 (S206), and S206 If it is determined in the process that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is 0 (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S207), and the process proceeds to the process of S209 described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol during the fluctuation display has elapsed, the fluctuation display is stopped with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. Further, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. The details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. If it is determined in the processing of S206 that the fluctuation time counter 203a2 in FIG. 1 is not 0 (S206: No), the processing of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is not larger than 0 (0) in the processing of S204 (S204: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, the first special symbol change start processing is executed (S208). In this first special symbol change start processing (S208), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is in a state where a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. The first special symbol change start processing (S208) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36.

After executing the first special symbol change start process (S208), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing (S206: No) in the process of S206, or after performing the first special symbol change stop process (S207). After the execution, next, the variation processing (S209 to S213) relating to the second special symbol is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is larger than 0 (S209). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined in the processing of S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is not larger than 0 (0) (S209: No), it means that the current is not in the special figure 2 change. In addition, a second special symbol change start process (S210) for executing a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed (S210), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol change start processing (S210), if the hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball number storage area 203b, the jackpot determination and the change pattern selection based on the hold data are performed. The process is executed. Further, in the second special symbol change start processing (S210), when the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the current special figure 2 is changing (S209: Yes), then the second The processing during execution of the special symbol change is executed (S211). The content of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44, but the process having the same content as the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is to be processed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

Then, when the second special symbol change execution processing (S211) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is 0 (S212), and if it is determined to be 0 (S212). : Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process is executed (S213), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S212 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is not 0 (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but like the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), it is defined in the second special symbol during the variation display. When the variation time has elapsed, the process of stopping the variation display is executed with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, in the second special symbol change stop processing (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. The process is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won the jackpot, a process for erasing the information regarding the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or a miss. Is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 33, in the present embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel). In, the variation processing (S204 to S208) relating to the first special symbol and the variation processing (S209 to S213) relating to the second special symbol are executed in one special symbol variation processing. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be executed for each special symbol, the variation processing can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process related to the first special symbol is executed before (priority) the variation process related to the second special symbol. By clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol in this way, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority is given to the first. 1 The fluctuation stop processing of the special symbol will be executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation processing related to the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing related to the second special symbol, but the variation is not limited to this, and the variation related to the second special symbol is not limited to this. The process may be configured to be executed in preference to the variable process relating to the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation processing for the special symbol type in which the lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player may execute according to the set gaming state. If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type in which the lottery is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the variation processing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from disappearing (destroying) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol variation start processing (S208), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (FIGS. 33, S104), will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing (S208).

In the first special symbol change start processing (S208 in FIG. 34), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S303). ).

Then, a hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the hold area 1 to the hold area 4 of the first special symbol hold ball number storage area 203a is executed in the execution area. The process of shifting to the side in order is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as hold area 1 → execution area, hold area 2 → hold area 1, hold area 3 → hold area 2, hold area 4 → hold area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) will be described in detail later, but the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is used. Based on the set game state, the jackpot determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is executed.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the hit / fail determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol hold ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state) of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, it is a high probability state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), S401 is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 17A). It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the above process matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S403).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, it is a low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), it is based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 17A). , It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is acquired (S404).

After finishing the processing of S403 or S404, next, it is determined whether the lottery result of this time is a big hit (S405), and if it is determined to be a big hit (S405: Yes), the big hit of the first special symbol is won. As shown, the jackpot flag 203u is set to on (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the processing of S406, the information indicating the jackpot is set for the region corresponding to the first special symbol in the jackpot flag 203u.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S407), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 73 is set based on the acquired value of the hit type counter C2 (S407). S408), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the result of the lottery this time is not a big hit (S405: No), the out-of-design symbol of the first special symbol is set in the first symbol display device 73 (S409), and this process is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 34), will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35), whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, that is, It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The jackpot flag 203u is set to ON in the process of S406 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 35).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 18) and the acquired first hit type counter. The jackpot type is determined based on the value of C2 (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the current gaming state (normal state, latent state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203m is acquired. , Probability change state), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set (S506).

Next, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), the variation start of the first special symbol is set by the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the selected variation pattern is set. The value indicating the fluctuation time of No. 1 is set to the value of the fluctuation time counter 203a2 in FIG. 1 (S509), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is performed. Skip and move to the process of S503.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change execution processing (S205). In this first special symbol change execution process (S205), a process for updating the fluctuation time of the special symbol change during execution and a special interrupted due to winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. The process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

In the first special symbol change executing process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to be turned on when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from the small hit winning to the small hit game). (Period until the end of the game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period has elapsed (after the end of the small hit game), the other special symbol change is restarted again.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is difficult for the player to understand due to the end of the special symbol variation of the other during the small hit game of one. Furthermore, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery is not discarded based on the fact that one special symbol lottery wins the small hit game, for example, by winning the small hit, the big hit is won. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery result (the lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small hit winning) is discarded.

If it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON (S701: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to off (S703), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is subtracted by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is terminated. ..

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol variation execution process (see S104 in FIG. 33) in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33) executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) executed every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to execute (see S205 in FIG. 33), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2, and the value is 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is not set to ON in the processing of S701 (S701: No), that is, when it is determined that the small hit is not won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Skips the processing of S702 and S703 and shifts to the processing of S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) determines that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is "0" at present, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). This is the process that is executed when it has elapsed.

When the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207 in FIG. 38) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (special figure 1) (S801). When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u is set to on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on (S802), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set (S803).

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S804), and the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is set to 0 (S805). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the deviation (off symbol). (Confirmed display) can be displayed.

After finishing the processing of S805, next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203u for the second special symbol is set to ON (S806), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S806: Yes), the above is described. In order to adapt the lottery result of the 2nd special symbol to the 2nd special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed in the processing of S804, the jackpot flag 203u for the 2nd special symbol was set to off (S807). ), The stored information for the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S808), and the process proceeds to S809. On the other hand, in the process of S806, if it is determined that the big hit has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of S807 and 808 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S809.

In the processing of S809, first, the jackpot scenario won in this special symbol change is set (see 809), and then the jackpot flag 202u, the probability change flag 203f, and the time saving flag 203t corresponding to the first special symbol are set to off. (S810), information indicating that the current gaming state is in the jackpot (during the jackpot game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203m (S811). The game state storage area 203m is configured so that the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, probability change state, latent state) and the game state related to the winning game (big hit medium, small hit medium) can be stored separately. By executing the process of S811, the game state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the big hit is won and the game state indicating that the big hit is in progress are stored. ..

With this configuration, it is possible to determine the game state set at the timing when the jackpot is won at the end of the jackpot game.

When the processing of S811 is completed, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol is set (S812), and the first special symbol display device is set. The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is variablely displayed in 37 is executed (S813), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S801, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203u is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S811 is skipped and the above-mentioned S812 Move to processing.

As described above, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), the process (S809 to S813) of stopping the variation display with the symbol showing the result of the lottery (first lottery game) of the first special symbol is executed. If the lottery result this time is a big hit (S801: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is out of order (S804). In this way, in the process of stopping display (confirmed display) of one special symbol with the symbol indicating the jackpot, by configuring to execute the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, at the same time. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations to be executed.

That is, in a configuration in which the variation processing related to the first special symbol and the variation processing related to the second special symbol are executed in order like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the execution is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation processing (forced stop processing) of the second special symbol within the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at the timing when the variation processing related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and the processing can be smoothly executed.

In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol at the timing indicating that one special symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol indicating a big hit. Not limited to, for example, when it is determined that one of the special symbols has won the jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) ( In S405: Yes) of FIG. 35, the fluctuation of the other special symbol may be forcibly disengaged and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly disengaged and stopped to execute a special fluctuation that does not win the jackpot until the jackpot fluctuation of one special symbol ends. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation of the special symbol of the other is forcibly stopped when the jackpot is won with the special symbol of one. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed, and prevent the player from grasping whether or not the jackpot has been won.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Not limited to, for example, even if it is configured to suspend the other special symbol change until the jackpot game based on one special symbol ends, and to restart the interrupted special symbol change after the end of the jackpot game. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discarding of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is configured to be different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. However, for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is in a fluctuation (out-of-order fluctuation) to indicate that the lottery is out of order, the lottery may be performed. In the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for discarding the result and executing the forced stop processing for forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

In this case, while making the player interested in whether the new second special symbol change is executed or the suspended second special symbol change is restarted after the jackpot game of the first special symbol is completed. You can play games. Further, when such a configuration is used, it is configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the situation (whether or not it is interrupted) of the second special symbol during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. Then it is good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a second special symbol variation start process (S210), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start processing (S210).

When the second special symbol change start process (S210) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w is set to ON (S901). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35)) executed immediately before this process is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33)). )) Determines whether or not the jackpot was won.

In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S9011: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 is skipped. The fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to off (S902), and this processing is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second It is prohibited to execute a new second special symbol change after the special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the off symbol. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation processing related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing a problem.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) can be skipped only once.

This is a lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol) executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed (in the same special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 33)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), if the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is subsequently executed. The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (big hit scenario) set in the determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), and the jackpot game is completed by the process of S201 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 33) is not executed until this is done.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be simplified. The processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed by a missed symbol), and one special symbol is displayed. In order to prevent new fluctuations (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set and the fluctuation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is used, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), do not win the big hit in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the big hit game based on the big hit winning is completed. It may be configured, and for example, when the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing the jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203w may be configured to be set to off.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit the execution of a new second special symbol change (lottery).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol change start process (see S210 in FIG. 39) is executed with the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w set to ON, the change of the second special symbol is executed. It is configured to skip the process, that is, not to start a new fluctuation (keep the second special symbol stopped), but the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on without limitation. If it is set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol dedicated to it.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using the special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for the period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and the period until the specific timing during the jackpot game is reached. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be varied and displayed during the period until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

The content of the variation processing related to each of the above-mentioned special symbols is configured to be appropriately output to the voice lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and is configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 side as appropriate. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 is configured to be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect during the forced stop. Is also good.

In this way, the actual second special is used on the third symbol display device 81, which is easy for the player to visually recognize, by using each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. Even when the symbol is configured to execute the variation effect during the forced stop, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol (S901: No in FIG. 39), The processes of S903 to S909 are executed, and this process is terminated. In the processes of S903 to S909, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol hold are performed for each of the above-mentioned first special symbol change start processes (S208 in FIG. 34) from S301 to S307. The value of the ball counter (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), and the second special symbol holding ball number. For the counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909). Since they are the same except for the changed points, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39), will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol for the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35). And some other processing was added.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) in the following points. That is, in the process of S1001 corresponding to the process of S401, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408. When the target is changed from special figure 1 (first special symbol) to special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the process of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the process of, and the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order. The difference is that the processing to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), if it is determined that the lottery this time is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1009), and this process is terminated. do.

This special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) is a processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a deviation. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, but if the lottery result is out of order, the same process as the process of S409 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of FIG. 35) described above is executed. If the lottery result is a small hit, the process corresponding to the small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation processing (S1009).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S1009), first, is the lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the processing of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S905 in FIG. 40)) a small hit? Is determined (S1101).

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that a small hit has been won (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a small hit (S1103). ), Next, the small hit symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1104), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of order (S1101: No), the out-of-order symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1105), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the special figure 2 deviation change process (S1009 in FIG. 41) executed as one process of the second special symbol change start process (see S210 in FIG. 39), that is, the change in the special symbol (lottery). By setting the small hit flag 203x to ON when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing of starting, the setting status of the small hit flag 203x at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol. It is possible to easily execute the process corresponding to the small hit winning based on.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39), will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42) differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) in the following points. In the process of S901 corresponding to the process of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each process of S906 to S907 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39). The contents of the selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43) will be described.

When the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, the determination is executed based on the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S905 in FIG. 40).

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S1302), and the acquired small hit type counter C5 The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one type of small hit, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. However, for example, a plurality of types are not set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the small hit type can be set, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined for the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1302 and S1303 are provided. It may be configured to select a different small hit type depending on the processing of.

By configuring the processing of S1302 and S1303 to be used even though there is only one type of small hit as in the present embodiment, for example, the specifications of the game can be changed during the development period of the pachinko machine 10. Even if it is changed, it is possible to easily respond to the change.

After finishing the processing of S1303, the variation pattern selection table according to the current gaming state is read (S1304), and the read variation pattern selection table and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 are used for small hits. The fluctuation pattern (small hit fluctuation pattern) of is selected (S1305). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small hit variation pattern selected in the process of S1305 is set (S1306), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1301 that the lottery result is not a small hit (out of order) (S1301: No), the process (S1307 to S1309) of the case where the lottery result is out of order is executed. In the process of S1307, first, the variation pattern selection table according to the gaming state is read (S1307), the variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and the special variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 A fluctuation pattern command is set (S1309), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the present embodiment, since the lottery of the first special symbol is configured so as not to win a small hit, in the second special symbol variation executing process (S211), the above-mentioned first special symbol variation executing process (S211) is performed. (See S205 in FIG. 37), is the flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y) set when a small hit is won (execution of a small hit game) in the other special symbol set to ON? The difference is that the process of determining is omitted, and other than that, the process is the same except that the target of the process is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so the detailed description thereof is omitted. ..

If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it means that the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (the small hit game is executed). A flag for indicating (for example, a special figure 2 temporary stop flag) is provided, and in this second special symbol change executing process, the same process as the above-mentioned first special symbol change executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37). Just run.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213), which is one of the special symbol variation processing (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the big hit is changed, and the process of setting the flag for stopping the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted.

That is, the point that the processing of S802 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) was deleted, and the point that the processing target of S801 and S803 to S813 was changed to the second special symbol (S1501 and S1503 to S1513). And, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (S1501: No), the special figure 2 off-off stop process (S1508) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation stop process (S1508) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 disengagement stop process (S1508). This special figure 2 loss stop process (S1508) corresponds to a case where the lottery result acquired in the second big hit determination process (see S905 in FIG. 40) is other than a big hit (small hit or miss). It executes stop processing.

When the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (S1508) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S1601: Yes). , The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to on (S1602), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to on is set (S1603). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) has been temporarily stopped is provided. A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the command is output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 46, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S1603, next, a small hit scenario (opening operation scenario for small hits) corresponding to the small hit game is set (S1604), the small hit flag 203x is set to off (S1605), and the game state is set. The hit information indicating that the small hit game is in progress (small hit) is stored in the storage area 203 m (S1606), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the small hit (small hit symbol). A special figure 2 confirmation command for indicating that is set (S1607), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped to fluctuate (confirmed display) with a small hit symbol (S1608), and this process is terminated. ..

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 203x is set to off in the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), it is shown that the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the deviation (disengaged symbol). The special figure 2 confirmation command of No. 2 is set (S1609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the fluctuation is stopped (confirmed display) at the symbol (S1610), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variation display between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently and in parallel to be executed. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a lottery game with more special symbols within a predetermined time, and it is possible to increase the probability that the player will be given a big hit within the predetermined time. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, if the jackpot game occurs on one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game and play the game.

In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (big hit symbol) indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although it is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the temporary stop or the measurement of the variable time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display. You can know that you haven't done so, and you can play big hit games with confidence.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) determines whether or not a ball has entered (starting winning) in either the first entry opening 64 or the second entry opening 640, and if the starting winning is won, the start winning process is suspended. Up to the maximum number of balls (up to 4 in each of the first ball slot 64 and the second ball slot 640), the acquired counter values can be used in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b. It is a process to store in each.

Further, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored. Alternatively, a process (so-called look-ahead process) for predicting a hit / fail determination result, a selected fluctuation pattern, or the like is executed in advance based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. .. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) will be described.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry opening 64 (starting winning), which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the ball enters the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64. It is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (there was a start prize) (S1701: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added by 1 (1704), and the voice lamp control device 113 A hold ball number command for notifying the hold number of the first start port (the number of hold of the lottery right of the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 is used. Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of reserved balls of 203a (S1706).

Next, the first look-ahead process is executed (S1707). The first look-ahead process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48, but the hit / fail determination result and the fluctuation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , The process of determining the stop type, etc. is executed. In this embodiment, it is configured to execute a process of discriminating a hit / fail judgment result, a determined fluctuation pattern, a stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but the present embodiment is limited to this. Without a hitch, for example, when there is a new start winning prize, the hit / fail determination result and the determined fluctuation pattern for all the reserved storages stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, It may be configured to execute a process for determining the stop type and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, but the lottery right (winning information) of the second special symbol is not limited to this, and when the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired. ) May be configured to be determined in advance.

Then, when the process of S1707 is executed, the process of S1708 is executed next. Further, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64 (S1701: No), or in the process of S1703, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entry port 64 is the upper limit at present. When it is determined that the value is (S1703: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1708.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first look-ahead process (S1707) based on the added information regarding the winning prize (winning information) is performed. It is configured to be executed, but is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1703 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1703). : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. It may be configured so that it can be done. As a result, even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continuously play the game in order to execute the look-ahead process. In addition, since it is possible to add value when a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 while the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play when a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the number of balls has reached the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1708 to S1714 is the same as the process performed for winning a ball to the first starting port (first ball entry port 64) executed in each process from S1701 to S1707. The only difference is that the process of is executed for the second ball entry port 640, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the present embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1713.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the first look-ahead process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first look-ahead process (S1707).

In the first look-ahead process (S1707 of FIG. 48), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a. , Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the vacant storage area of the look-ahead hold storage area in the area where the winning order is the smallest (S1822).

Next, the hit / fail determination result is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the look-ahead hold storage area. Here, both the winning / failing determination in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol and the winning / failing determination in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol are determined. This is a jackpot judgment based on the timing when a new hold storage occurs (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since there is a time lag with the execution timing, it is possible to predict the game state (probability state of the special symbol) set at the timing when the jackpot judgment based on the newly reserved winning information is executed. Because it is difficult.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel). Moreover, since the variable time set corresponding to the lottery result of each special symbol is set to be variable depending on the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved symbols) at the time of lottery of the special symbol, each special symbol is set. This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of the game starts.

Then, when it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is a big hit (big hit only in the low probability state, big hit only in the high probability state, big hit in any of the low probability state and the high probability state) (S1823: Yes), the big hit A first winning command indicating the winning condition (game state set at the time of lottery) and the jackpot type when winning is set (S1824), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the discrimination result in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of order in both the high probability state and the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the omission is set. (S1825), this process is terminated.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 is used as common information in addition to the above-mentioned information for indicating the winning / failing determination result (information having a different meaning based on the winning / failing determination result). Information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S1821 is also set. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when the winning command is received, the display mode of the holding ball is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the holding ball is changed to a different color from the usual one). It is possible to execute an effect (pre-reading effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a notice symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the look-ahead process is executed, the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the high probability state of the special symbol and the hit / fail judgment result in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol are discriminated, and the result of each determination is determined. It is configured to set a winning command based on, but is not limited to this, for example, a judgment value that is determined to be a big hit regardless of whether the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state ( The value of the random number counter C1 per first) may be specified, and a winning command indicating a big hit of a special symbol may be set only when the determination value is read out.

With this configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so that the look-ahead effect is not executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of winning a big hit against fluctuations.

Further, the game state when the special symbol lottery is performed based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. It may be configured to execute the pass / fail judgment. In this case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a constant fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation. When the look-ahead is executed, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored in the hold.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a new reserved storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a look-ahead process based on the winning information is executed, and the look-ahead processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a in the look-ahead processing of the main control device 110 (is not limited to this). Even if the information indicating the content (each counter value) of the hold storage) is set as the winning command and the winning / failing judgment result is predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. good.

With such a configuration, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and determines that the look-ahead effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is input. It is preferable to configure it for analysis (prediction of success / failure judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the specific look-ahead process (prediction of the hit / miss determination result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress unnecessary control from being executed by the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the result of the pre-reading process executed untitled is illegally acquired by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a second look-ahead process (S1714), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this second look-ahead process (S1714). The second look-ahead process (S1714 in FIG. 47) is based on the above-mentioned first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 46) in which a ball enters the first start port (first entry port 64) (starting prize). While the process is to determine (pre-read) the pending data (winning information) in advance and make various judgments, the second start is based on the winning information based on the start winning of the target to be judged at the first starting port. The only point is that the winning information is based on the start winning of the opening (second entry opening 640), and the same processing is performed for the others, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106 of FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit. (S2001). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640 is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Includes up to the middle (until the winning game is over). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the ordinary symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, that is, it is determined that a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used. The value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 0 (S2004).

If it is determined in the process of S2004 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S2005). That is, if it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information to be used for the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is stored on hold. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, the data stored in the normal symbol hold 1 to the normal symbol hold 4 of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4 and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

Next, when it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203t is on, that is, whether or not the current state is a high probability state of the normal symbol (S2008), and it is determined that the time saving flag 203t is set to on. (S2008: Yes) acquires a hit / fail judgment result (lottery result) based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (c)) for high probability, and proceeds to the process of S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203t is off (S2008: No), the hit / fail determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 17 (c)) for the low probability time. Is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a hit (S2011), and if it is determined to be a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of "○" is "○". The display mode is set (S2012), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal map fluctuation pattern using the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (a miss) (S2011: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of the miss, is set. (S2013), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned process of S2014.

Here, the process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol (process of S2014) will be described using the contents specified in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set to the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state), the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f (normal symbol holding number), and the normal symbol holding number. It is configured to be variable based on. Then, the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 differs depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the ball passes through the through gate 67, flows down in the flow path unit 3660, and is configured so that the ball can enter the second entry port 640. The ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entry port 640 after 1.6 seconds, and whether the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the second entry port 640. Whether or not it is configured to be switchable according to the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22) defines a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. Then, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, a winning game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.8 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds (usually). The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game per normal figure is completed by the time the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, so that the ball is It is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640.

On the other hand, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, a different fluctuation time is set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol (value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f). When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified as 30 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is specified. A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is specified as the fluctuation time.

Then, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the winning game (usually) based on the opening pattern in which the opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after the closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The game per figure) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0, the time when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 (passes through the through gate 67). Since the normal symbol fluctuation (30-second fluctuation) is being executed (1.6 seconds after that), the ball is configured so that it cannot enter the second entry port 640. When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 1 to 3, the time when the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entry port 640 (through gate 67). Since the game is executed per normal figure (1.6 seconds after passing through), the ball is configured to be able to enter the second entrance 640.

In this way, by configuring the ball to enter the second entry port 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball to the second entry port can be changed. Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily changed according to the game state, various playability can be created.

Further, as described above, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640 regardless of whether the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the appropriate range or longer. Therefore, for example, even in a gaming state (for example, a probabilistic state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to the game state of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, but the variation pattern of the normal symbol is not limited to this, for example, acquisition. It may be configured so that a different fluctuation time is set based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, in the process of S2002, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not in the variable display (S2002: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (S2015), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol this time is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the “◯” symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up). On the other hand, when the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the process of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

When the stop display is set by the processing of S2016, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is the second in the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a hit (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the normal symbol of child crying is not a hit (missing) (S2017: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640 in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol (timing of processing S2008 to S2011). Probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (the timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in the present embodiment, the variation processing (lottery process) relating to the normal symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the variation process relating to the special symbol (lottery process). The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation processing (lottery processing) related to the special symbol executed in parallel during the period in which the variation processing (lottery processing) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the normal symbol may be determined at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not. At the timing when the high-probability state of the electric accessory 640a is set and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, the low-probability state of the normal symbol may be set.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening) of the electric accessory 640a is based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the hit / fail of the normal symbol. If the pattern) is set, the electric accessory 640a is long open (opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) while the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. ) There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. As a result, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the processing of S2017, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current ordinary symbol is a hit (S2017: Yes), then, in order to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol. In addition, when it is determined whether the time saving flag 203f is on (S2018) and the time saving flag 203f is not on (off), that is, when it is determined that the present is a low probability state of a normal symbol (S2018: No), as an opening pattern for a low-probability state of a normal symbol, an opening pattern "0.7 seconds x 1 time" that executes opening for 0.7 seconds once is set (S2019).

On the other hand, in the process of S2018, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203f is set to ON (S2018: Yes), the opening for 0.8 seconds is executed once as the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol. The opening pattern "0.8 seconds x 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern for the high probability state of the normal symbol (0.8 seconds x 1 time) is larger than the opening pattern for the low probability state of the normal symbol (0.7 seconds x 1 time). , The electric accessory 640a is configured to be open for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, the winning game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is more advantageous to the player than the case where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (No. 1). 2 The period in which the ball entry port 640 is open is extended).

Next, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020 (S2021), and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a that executes the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol and moves it in the hit game of the normal symbol. The opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the pass / fail judgment of the normal symbol is performed. The high-probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high-probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved by the hit game of the normal symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured to be opened for a long time only when the electric accessory 640a is set, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. It may be configured to be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal map is determined from the normal map fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22) based on the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is set according to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Except for the probabilistic state (probability change: with electric support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected normal map fluctuation type counter.

Here, as described above, when a fluctuation time with a long fluctuation time (for example, 60,000 ms) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a does not operate during that time, so that the electric accessory 640a is hit right in the meantime. Approximately 50% of the game balls will win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, by selecting a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the probabilistic state, the number of winnings to the second entrance 640 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 16C, during the probabilistic state, the jackpot D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, and the jackpot which is more advantageous than the jackpot in the first special symbol is selected. Will be done. Therefore, during the definite game, the lottery with the second special symbol can be more advantageous to the player when the big hit is obtained than the lottery with the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the winning of the second ball opening 640 during the probability change state, it is possible to give the player an advantageous period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the through gate passage processing execution (S107) executed in the first embodiment is performed. This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see (b2) in FIG. 11), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and when the ball has passed. , The second is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), then it is determined whether the currently set gaming state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined to be in the normal state (S2012), it means that the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the normal state is set, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103), and S2106 is set. Move to the processing of.

When the notification command set by the processing of S2103 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification process is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 displays a firing abnormality. The first abnormality notification mode (see FIG. 11A) is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2102 that the current gaming state is not the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) (S2102: No), then the current gaming state is probable. It is determined whether it is a state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) (S2104), and if it is determined to be a probabilistic state (S2104: Yes), a second notification command indicating a firing abnormality is issued. It is set (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the state is not in the probable change state (in the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2106 as it is.

Here, when the second notification command set by the processing of S2105 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, the abnormality notification processing is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the third symbol display device 81 The second abnormality notification mode (see FIG. 12B) indicating the firing abnormality is displayed at.

In this way, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, in order to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being performed. Since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the fired ball has reached the gaming area beyond the variable display device unit 80), the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, by setting different notification commands for indicating a firing abnormality according to the game state set at the time when the right-handed game is being performed, FIG. 11 (a) or FIG. 12 (b). ), It is possible to easily display different abnormality notification modes.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed, but the right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it has a configuration for detecting that, for example, it is detected that the sphere is in contact with the distribution member 700 (see FIG. 2) (displacement of the distribution member 700). A detection means or a detection means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with a strength (operation amount) sufficient to launch a ball into the right-handed region may be provided.

Returning to FIG. 51, the explanation will be continued. After finishing the processing of S2103 to S2105, the processing of S2106 is executed next. In S2106, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not larger than 4 (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol). Has not reached the upper limit value) (S2107).

If it is determined in the process of S2107 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (the upper limit value is 4) (S2107: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (3 or less) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2108), a command for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (a command for indicating the value (M) of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal symbol 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set normally. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S2110), and this process is terminated.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power disconnection occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S2201) as a setting of the power supply disconnection occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 53), first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S2302). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2304), and if it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process shifts to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if it is not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S2312 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S2312. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S2312). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S2310.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S2307: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, interrupts are permitted (S2311). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly classified.

In the main process (see FIG. 54), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub. The external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the prize corresponding to the number of acquired balls is given to the payout control device 111. Send a ball command. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 33) and the start winning process (see FIG. 47) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 54), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various items are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 55) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the voice lamp control device 113 is used. The command for executing the jackpot effect is set, and the jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is executed (. S2404).

The detailed contents of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. In this jackpot control process (S2404), the specific winning openings 65a and V winning openings 650a are used for each round of the jackpot state. (Hereinafter referred to as a winning opening, etc.), the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) has elapsed, or the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) has passed. ) To determine if the specified number of balls have won. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning openings and the like (specific winning openings 65a, V winning openings 650a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning openings and the like (specific winning openings 65a, V winning openings 650a) are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the small hit control process related to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In this small hit control process (2405), for the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game, a predetermined scenario (small) is set as a period for opening the V winning opening 650a and a period for closing the V winning opening 650a. The process for setting based on the hit scenario) is executed. note that. The detailed contents of the small hit control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640 attached to the second ball entry port 640 is executed (S2406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 50), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing is completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2407). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39), the variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern. The variable display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. Turns off and the red LED turns on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 39) is completed. , The variation display executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38). ), The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set in S507. In the second special symbol, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by the same processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit, the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode (out of place symbol) indicating a miss. It is configured, and the stop display for that is also executed.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2408). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 50), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 50), it is executed in the second symbol display device. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S2012 or the processing of S2013 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 50). (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process is shifted to S2401 and each process after S2401 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S2410: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2411, S2412).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S2411 (S2412). In the process of S2412, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random value counter CINI1 and the second initial value random value counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random value counter CINI1 and the second initial value random value counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated randomly, and similarly, the values of the variable type counter CS1 and the normal figure variable type counter CS2 are also updated at random. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol or the normal symbol, and it is possible to execute an illegal game aiming at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to the hit is acquired. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the process of S2409, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 52 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S2413 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2413), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S2414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S2415), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S2409 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S2301). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2401. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2404). This jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and information for executing various effects according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol. This is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning opening or the like (specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, V winning opening 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S809 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 of FIG. 38) or S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set. If so, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is the start timing (S2501: Yes), the opening command is set (S2502), and the present process is terminated.

The opening command may be configured to be delayed (variable) according to the game state and the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated regularly (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for the big hit A and 5000 for the big hit B). If this happens, the opening command should be sent. By doing so, for example, in the case of a jackpot in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is lengthened, and in the case of a jackpot in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the jackpot is increased. Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left-handed game, it is necessary to switch to a right-handed game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to switch to a right-handed game (big hit game). As a result, the operational burden on the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing of the special symbol (S2501: No), then it is determined whether the current is the jackpot of the special symbol (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information about the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203m is read out and the determination is performed.

As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (S2503: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot (S2503: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S2505). The details of this jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 56, but the process corresponding to the open operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (variable winning device 65, V winning device 65, and switching member 650h). Operation processing) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 56, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one of the processes in the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 55), will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. Read the operation scenario (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set by the data read in the process of S2641 (S2643). After that, this process ends.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is executed for the first attacker (V winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a second attacker (variable winning device 65). It is configured to be able to execute a jackpot game (round game) that executes an opening operation, and the above-mentioned processing of S2642 is one round of the round games that open the first attacker (V winning device 650). It is specified only in the open motion scenario corresponding to the round game of the eyes. Therefore, when executing other round games, a scenario in which the flow path solenoid (probability variation solenoid) 650k is opened in the corresponding opening operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge flow path 650e2). Is not specified, so the process of S2642 is skipped.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Problems can be suppressed. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes in FIG. 55), a round for showing that a new round game is executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and is configured so that the progress status for the jackpot game being executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round of the round game is currently in progress.

In the present embodiment, as the round command set by the main control device 110, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be configured to set a round command containing only information indicating that a new round game has been started. In this case, a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big hit game is provided on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and what round is the round game executed this time on the voice lamp control device 113 side? Is calculated, and the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With such a configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 side can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. In the process of S2504, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the open / close door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k (S2506). When it is determined that the operation timing is set (S2506: Yes), the open solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability changing solenoid) 650k is set to ON (S2508). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the final round in the jackpot game (10th round in the case of jackpot A) is completed, the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (in the present embodiment) which is the ball ejection time. When 3 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2511). The end timing of the jackpot is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S2512), and this process is performed. To finish.

Here, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end processing (S2512). In this jackpot end process (S2512), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through a specific area (V switch 650e3) during the jackpot game, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set or won based on the determination result. A process of setting a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed based on the jackpot type.

When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability change setting flag 203h is on (S2701). If it is determined in the process of S2701 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S2701: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S2702), and the process proceeds to S2703. Although not shown, the probability variation setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the fact that the probability variation flag 203g is set to on.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with electric support, that is, whether or not the jackpot type is set to turn on the time saving flag 203t after the jackpot ends (S2703). In the process of S2703, the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203m (information indicating that the jackpot is medium or small, and if the jackpot is in progress, the information indicating the set jackpot type and the jackpot). Based on the information indicating the game state at the time of winning), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203t is set to be on after the end of this big hit.

In the processing of S2703, if it is determined that the jackpot type is a type with electric support (a type for setting a high probability state of a normal symbol) (S2703: Yes), the time saving flag 203t is set to ON (S2703: Yes). S2704), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, if it is determined that the jackpot type is not a type with electric support (a type for setting a low probability state of a normal symbol) (S2703: No), the processing of S2704 is skipped and the present. End the process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S2701: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON. That is, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the game ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 and set a high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, until the jackpot game is completed, the player can be expected to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game is completed. Furthermore, if the ball can be passed through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, whether or not the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game. You can play the game with interest in the crab.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game (when the probability variation setting flag 203h is not set to ON), it is special after the jackpot game is completed. Neither the high-probability state of the symbol nor the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set. That is, even if a V opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3) during the jackpot game) is set in the opening operation scenario of the jackpot game to be executed, the ball is set during the jackpot game. If the player does not pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3), the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player is set.

With this configuration, when the V opening pattern is set as the opening operation scenario, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game in order to pass the ball to a specific region (V switch 650e3). In addition, by making it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the V opening pattern is set, the player is enthusiastically played even for a jackpot game in which the V opening pattern is not set as the opening operation scenario. be able to.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S2511: No), the winning process is executed (S2513). Here, the winning process (S2513) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S2513).

In the winning process (S2513 in FIG. 59), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S2971). The round valid period is a period in which the round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S2971: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S2971: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has passed. When it is determined that the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a has passed (S2972: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S2973). After that, the process of S2974 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball detection switch 650c1 has not passed (S2972: No), the process of S2973 is skipped and the process of S2974 is executed.

In the process of S2974, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2974). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2974: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set (S2976). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S2977), and the process of S2978 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being thrown during the ball ejection time after the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2974, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S2974: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S2975). .. If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2975: Yes), the process of S2976 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2975: No), the process of S2978 is executed.

In the process of S2978, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S2978). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is larger than 0 (S2978: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is decremented by -1 and updated (S2979). It is determined whether the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S2980). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 (S2980: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S2981), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2982).

After that, the process of S2983 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2980, if it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the V switch 650e3 (S2980: No), the process of S2983 is executed. In the process of S2983, it is determined whether the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2983). When it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off (S2984), the probability change valid flag 203p is set to on (S2985), and then this process is terminated. Here, by setting the probability change effective flag 203p to ON, even after the switching member 650h is switched, if the ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V switch 650e3, a special symbol is displayed. It can be controlled so that the high probability state of is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2978, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2978: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203p is on (S2896). If it is determined that the probabilistic valid flag 203p is off (S2986: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2896 that the probability change valid flag 203p is on (S2896: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability change valid timer 203r to update (S2987).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probabilistic valid timer 203r after the update has reached the upper limit value (1.2 s in this embodiment) (S2988). When it is determined that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is the upper limit value (S2988: Yes), the probabilistic valid flag 203p is set to off (S2989), and the probabilistic valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value 0 (S2990). .. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2988 that the probabilistic valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S2988: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2980.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 until the probability variation effective timer 203r reaches the upper limit value, so that the probability of the special symbol is high in consideration of the ball brushing time. You can set the state. Further, since there is an upper limit to the time for which the ball is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the V switch 650e3 from illegally passing the ball and giving a high probability state of the special symbol.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 55. When the winning process (S2513 in FIG. 59) is completed, the abnormal process is then executed (S2514), and the present process is terminated. Here, the exception handling (S2514) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S2514). This abnormality processing (S2514) is a processing for monitoring whether or not the V switch 650e3 is illegally passed.

In the abnormality handling (S2514), first, it is determined whether or not the round is valid (S3001). If it is outside the round validity period (S3001: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S3001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S3003). After that, the process of S3004 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002: No), the process of S3004 is executed.

In the process of S3004, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S3004). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S3004: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S3004: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203o is incremented by 1 and updated (S3005) because it is in the period of the ball brushing time. The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether or not the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S3006). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit (S3006: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the upper limit value (S3006: Yes), the number of discharged pieces (the total value of the probability variation passing counter 203i and the number of discharged pieces counter 203s) and the number of winning numbers (the value of the winning number counter 203j) match. (S3007).

If it is determined that they match (S3007: Yes), the process of S3009 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S3007: No), an error command is set (S3008). After that, the process of S3009 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character of a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally leave the game ball in the V winning device 650 and suppress the illegality of passing the game ball through the V switch 650e3.

In the process of S3009, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S3009), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to the initial value 0 (S3010). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203s, and the probability variation passing counter 203i are reset to the initial values (S3011), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 73, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 61, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S4116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 62). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 62), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S4116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S4116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S4116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the data is transferred to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S4117. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S4116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), after clearing the work area of the RAM in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009) and setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed via the processing of S4008. This is the case where the processing is reached, or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S4009 is that when the processing of S4008 is reached from S4004 via the processing of S4006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S4102 to S4110 determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variation display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on this, the settings related to the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command for transmitting various commands to the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114. The output process is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S4105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S4110). After that, the process proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, the command determination processing (S4111) that performs the processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4112. The details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. Executes the variable display setting process, which is the process set to send to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

When the processing of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to the process of S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Hereinafter, the details of the command determination process (S4111) will be described.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and a special figure is drawn from the main control device 110. 1 It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start process is executed (S4202), and this process ends. The details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 64.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process is terminated. The details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol). If you do).

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4206), and this process is terminated. The details of this stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received in the processing of S4205 (S4205: No), has the reserved ball number command been received from the main control device 110? Determine (S4207). Here, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) of the received reserved ball number command is analyzed, and the voice is input. The value of the corresponding counter provided in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113 is updated (S4208). Specifically, when the reserved ball number command of the first special symbol is received, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the first special). The number of reserved balls in the symbol variation display) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

When the reserved ball number command of the second special symbol is received, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol). The number of reserved balls) is extracted, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value. Further, when the reserved ball number command of the normal symbol is received, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the reserved ball number of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol). Is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

Here, in the hold ball number command, the ball enters various entry ports (first entry port 64, second entry opening 640, through gate 67) (starting prize), and the value of various hold ball number counters. Is added, or when the value of the various reserved ball count counters is subtracted when executing various fluctuation start processes, it is transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the start prize or the fluctuation display is displayed. At each setting time, by the processing of S4208, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m of the voice lamp control device 113 are set to the main control device. It can be adjusted to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of 110.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the various reserved ball count counters 223c, 223d, and 223m possessed by the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the various reserved ball count counters 203d, 203e, 203f of the main control device 110. Even if this happens, if the start winning prize, the variable display setting, that is, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the change of the hold ball number change, the various hold ball number counters 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, The values of 223d and 223m can be modified to match the values of various reserved ball count counters 203d, 203e and 203f of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S4207, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4210), and this processing is terminated. This winning command processing (S4210) analyzes the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and the storage area corresponding to the analysis result. The process of storing (storing) in (the winning information storage area 223b in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113) and the processing for executing the effect (look-ahead effect) based on the received winning information are performed. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

If it is determined in the process of S4209 that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4211: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4212), and this process is terminated. The details of this state command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but the gaming state (normal state, probability change state, latent state) of the pachinko machine 10 based on the state command output from the main control device 110. The process of setting the winning game state (high hit, small hit) in the secondary state setting area 223k is executed.

Next, in the process of S4211 when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the notification-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213), and the notification-related command is determined. (S4213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is determined (S4214), and the display command corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S4215). This process ends.

As the notification-related command determined in the process of S4213, for example, there is a command (notification command, second notification command, error command) for indicating an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 10 output from the main control device 110. In this way, for example, by independently providing an abnormality notification process (a process for setting a notification mode for indicating an abnormal state to the outside) to be executed when a command for indicating an abnormal state is received, for example. A low abnormal state in which a normal game can be executed while performing an abnormality notification process (for example, a state in which a right-handed game is performed in a normal state), or a high abnormality in which an abnormality notification process is performed and it becomes difficult to continue the game. When a state (for example, a state in which the number of balls won in the winning device and the number of balls discharged during the jackpot game are different) occurs, processing based on the rank of the generated abnormal state (corresponding to the possibility of continuing the game) It is possible to execute the abnormality notification process as soon as possible without performing the display process).

Next, when it is determined that the notification-related command has not been received in the process of S4213, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop-related command has been received (S4216). If it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has been received in the processing of S4216 (S4216), the fluctuation stop processing is executed (S4217), and this processing is terminated. A detailed description of this variable stop processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG. 70, but the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main control device 110. And the process for setting the display mode of the variation effect using the fourth symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when the special symbol variation is executed as the period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even while the special symbol change is being executed based on the above, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, it is possible to execute the fluctuation stop processing (S4217) on the voice lamp control device 113 side to stop the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol in accordance with the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation status of the special symbol with the fluctuation effect status displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S4216, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop-related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the hit-related command has been received (S4218), and it is determined that the hit-related command has been received. In the case (S4218: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S4219), and this process is terminated. The details of the hit-related process (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, but as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the production corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

If it is determined in the process of S4218 that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4220), and this process is terminated. In the processing of S4220, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 63) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is , An order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a state command has been received is performed by either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The discriminant order may be specified so as to be executed before the process of discriminating whether or not the command has been received.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). In this case, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36) is executed, the special diagram 1 variation pattern command is set, and then the state command indicating that the game state is changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, when the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is won with the probability variation state set and the latent probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the latent probability state is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set a variation effect corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in a state where it is determined that the command has been performed.

In addition, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the discrimination processing of the state command, the probability change is different from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation described above. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state is set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player to perform the right-handed game is delayed, which makes the player uncomfortable. The problem of giving is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 side executes the process of changing the game state after the jackpot hit / fail determination and the fluctuation pattern setting, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 On the side, the process of determining the current gaming state is executed first, and then the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, even though the latent state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed.

Further, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 side to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S4202). This special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing process (S4202) will be described.

Special figure 1 When the fluctuation start processing is set, first. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to on (S4301), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command (S4302), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223m (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304). If it is determined in the processing of S4304 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4304: No), the first special symbol is mainly displayed in a variable state, which is a special feature. FIG. 1 A display command indicating a main fluctuation pattern is set (S4305), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304: Yes), the game state is mainly the variation display of the second special symbol (of the first special symbol). (Because the variation display is a slave game state), a display command indicating the slave variation pattern in Special Figure 1 is set (S4306), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204). This special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to the game state set. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (main variation variation pattern, slave variation variation pattern) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Then, the display control device 114 has a third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 73) described later. The display mode to be displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing process (S4204) will be described.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S4204) is set, first. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (S4352), and the detailed display mode is selected using the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a. ).

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223m (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4354). If it is determined in the processing of S4354 that the current state is not the latent state (normal state, probable change state) (S4354: No), then the hit / fail determination information included in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received this time is included. Is information indicating a hit (whether or not the fluctuation in Special Figure 2 this time is a hit) (S4355), and if it is determined to be a hit (S4355: Yes), a command indicating an interrupt V effect. Is set (S4356), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S4355 that the change of the special figure 2 this time is not a hit (out of place) (S4355: No), the change display of the second special symbol is a subordinate gaming state. FIG. 2 A display command indicating a slave variation pattern is set (S4357), and this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined in the process of S4354 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4354: Yes), the variation display of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (variation display of the first special symbol). (Because is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern of Special Figure 2 is set (S4358), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol (lottery) and the variation of the second special symbol (lottery) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are executed. While simultaneously displaying the variation effect display (variation display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the variation display of the third symbol display device 81, each special symbol (first symbol) is set according to the game state to be set. By configuring the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence / absence of display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol to be variably set, the fluctuation status (lottery result and the number of fluctuations) can be changed at present. The player can easily understand the special symbol type to be watched.

Therefore, even if a game specification is used in which a plurality of special symbol types simultaneously (parallel) change (lottery), it is possible to suppress the provision of a game that is difficult for the player to understand.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a state where one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) is displayed in the main variation, the other special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) that is displayed in the subordinate variation is drawn by lottery. When the result is a hit (big hit, small hit), an interrupt V effect that displays the lottery result on the subordinate variation display side in preference to the variation display effect executed as the main variation display (see FIG. 11B). ) Is executed.

With this configuration, when the lottery result on the dependent variation display side becomes a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, the lottery result can be reliably notified to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, as the interrupt V effect, the interrupt V effect is executed on the front side (the side that the player can see) of the variable display effect while the variable display effect corresponding to the main variable display is executed. Therefore, when the interrupt V effect is executed, it is not necessary to process the display data for executing the variation display effect corresponding to the main variation display.

Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed independently, so that the execution timing of each variable display becomes undefined. In the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, the interrupt V effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variation display effect corresponding to the main variation display.

It should be noted that a configuration that can notify the player of the lottery result on the dependent variation display side may be used, and a configuration different from this embodiment may be used. For example, the stop timing of the main variation display and the slave variation display (the fixed display timing of each special symbol) is determined, and as a result of the determination, the stop timing of the main variation display and the stop timing of the slave variation display are set for a predetermined period (for example). When it is determined that the time is within 1 second), the process of switching the stop display mode of the main variation display to the stop display mode indicating the lottery result of the sub-variation display may be executed.

With this configuration, the variable display effect (suggestion effect) set based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main variable display, and the stop display mode set based on the lottery result of the dependent variable display. , Will be displayed, and it is possible to perform an effect that is unexpected to the player.

Further, in the above-mentioned interrupt V effect, when the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main variation display is a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit win), or when an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed, or when an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. It may be configured not to be executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is longer than a predetermined period. In this case, an effect showing the lottery result (big hit winning) of the special symbol corresponding to the dependent variation display is displayed. It is preferable to configure the jackpot game to start suddenly without executing it. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect that the jackpot game is suddenly started during the execution of the variable effect display.

Next, the stop type command reception process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4206). This stop type command reception process (S4206) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4206) will be described.

In the stop type command reception process (S4206), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received in response to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 is set. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit D, small hit, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this process is terminated.

The stop type extracted in S4306 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. It is identifiable that it is a stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop types respectively, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be done.

Next, the winning command process (S4210) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4210). This winning command process (S4210) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the type of the received winning command (first special symbol). , 2nd special symbol, normal symbol), the current game state, and the process for setting the effect (so-called look-ahead effect) to be executed when the winning command is received are executed.

When the winning command processing (S4210) is executed, first, it is analyzed which symbol type corresponds to based on the information included in the received winning command, and it is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4501). Then, whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state is determined based on the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k (S4502), and when it is determined to be the normal state (S4502: Yes), then. , It is determined whether the winning information indicating the jackpot (winning information indicating the special figure 2 jackpot) is stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the winning information storage area 223b. (S4503).

If it is determined in the processing of S4503 that there is winning information indicating a big hit (S4503: Yes), the notification lottery processing (S4504) is executed, and the process proceeds to the processing of S4505. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a big hit (S4503: No), the processing of S4504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4505.

The notification lottery process (S4504) executed in the process of S4504 is a second special symbol (special figure) which is a secondary variation display in the gaming state (normal state) in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main variation display. 2) This is a process for notifying the player whether or not there is a lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player in the hold memory (hold symbol), and the detailed explanation thereof is referred to FIG. 68. And will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S4502: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4505.

In the process of S4505, various processes executed in the winning command process are executed. Specifically, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the main variation display displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning / failing determination result included in the winning information (so-called). , Look-ahead effect) is executed, and the effect for showing the winning / failing judgment result included in the winning information of the specific reserved symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the main variation display is stored before the specific reserved symbol. Various processes are executed for executing an effect (so-called look-ahead continuous effect) to be executed even during the special symbol change period corresponding to the reserved symbol.

Next, the notification lottery process (S4504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this notification lottery process (S4504). This notification lottery process (S4504) is executed in the winning command processing (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is held storage (winning information) on the dependent variation display side. ) Is used to set the effect using the discrimination result (preliminary discrimination result).

When the notification lottery process (S4504) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is acquired (S4551), and it is determined whether the acquired value of the effect counter 223j is a specific determination value (for example, 0 to 14). (S4552). When it is determined in the process of S4552 that it is a specific determination value (S4552: Yes), a display mode command for setting the special figure 2 holding area (small area Dm5) into a suggestion mode (see FIG. 11A) is used. Set (S4553) and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4552 that the determination value is not a specific value (S4552: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

By displaying the special figure 2 holding area (small area Dm5) suggestion mode (see FIG. 11A) by this notification lottery process (S4504), the player is given a special symbol lottery on the side of the variable display. It makes you think that you will win a big hit, and you can be interested in the special symbol change on the side of the dependent change display side.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation time set for the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuation in the normal state is set to a long time (10 minutes), the special figure 2 which is a dependent fluctuation display. The player may stop the game without seeing the result of the fluctuation (lottery). In such a case, the jackpot is won by displaying the area (special figure 2 holding area (small area Dm5)) indicating the number of reserved balls on the dependent variation display side in the suggested mode (see FIG. 11A). It is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the game is stopped while leaving the reserved memory.

In the present embodiment, in the winning command processing (see S4210 in FIG. 67), when the winning information of the special symbol (special drawing 2) on the dependent variation display side includes information indicating a big hit, a notification lottery is performed. It is configured to execute the process (see S4504 in FIG. 68), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the winning information of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the dependent variation display side includes information indicating a big hit. Even if it is not (in the case of deviation), it is a specific value (301 to 310) within the range indicating the deviation in the predetermined execution condition (for example, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is out of range). When the condition) is satisfied, the notification lottery process (see S4504 in FIG. 68) may be executed.

With this configuration, even if the reserved memory on the dependent variable display side does not include the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won, the area indicating the number of reserved balls on the dependent variable display side (special). FIG. 2 It is possible to change the display mode of the reserved area (small area Dm5)) to the suggested mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the region showing the number of reserved balls on the slave fluctuation display side (special figure 2 holding region (small area Dm5)) is changed to the suggested mode, until the number of reserved balls on the slave fluctuation display side becomes 0. It is possible to make it easier for the player to continue the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received, the content of the winning information included in the received winning command is determined, and various effects (look-ahead effects) are executed based on the determination result. However, a means for discriminating information regarding the fluctuation timing of each special symbol may be added to this configuration so that the look-ahead effect is executed only for the winning information that satisfies the condition that the look-ahead effect is possible.

That is, the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the change of the first special symbol (lottery) and the change of the second special symbol (lottery) at the same time (in parallel), and further, one of the special symbols. When a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit) is obtained due to the change (lottery) of, the change (lottery) of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped by the lottery result indicating a loss. ing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, even if the winning information included in the received winning command includes information indicating a big hit, the winning information including the information indicating the big hit includes the information indicating the big hit. By the time the corresponding special symbol change was executed, there was a case where the jackpot was won by the other special symbol change. Further, when the other special symbol change is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the symbol indicating the jackpot (big hit symbol) during the execution of the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information including the information indicating the jackpot. In some cases, the lottery result of the special symbol change (big hit change that wins the big hit) during execution may be changed out of the way.

Therefore, if the look-ahead effect is configured to be configurable for all received winning commands, the content of the executed look-ahead effect and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol will be different, and the player will be asked. There was a problem that the reliability of the production was lowered and the interest of the game was lowered.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of each special symbol is analyzed based on the prize information included in the prize command, and each special symbol corresponding to the reserved prize information is analyzed. The timing at which the fluctuation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display timing) is calculated, and based on the calculation result, other special symbols (special symbols corresponding to the winning commands to be received in the future) are displayed by the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. ) Should be configured to execute the look-ahead effect for the winning command that is determined not to be stopped and displayed.

In this case, specifically, the remaining period of each special symbol change during execution and the length of the fluctuation time set for each special symbol in hold storage are extracted, and the stop display timing of the special symbol is time-series. When it is determined that the change of the other special symbol that has already been held and stored is executed at the specific stop display timing of one special symbol, the look-ahead effect execution condition is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be determined that it has been established. As a result, when the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead effect is received, the game can be executed without causing discomfort to the player.

Next, the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this state command processing (S422). This state command process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the first according to the set gaming state. 3 The process for setting different display modes displayed on the symbol display device 81 is executed. Hereinafter, the details of the state command processing (S4212) will be described.

When the state command process (S4212) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k and the gaming state indicated by the state command received this time are different. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that there is a change in the gaming state (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state. Set the setting command (S4603), set the display command indicating the normal mode (S4604), store (set) the information indicated by the status command received this time in the subordinate status setting area 223k (S4610), and perform this process. finish.

Here, the command set in the process of S4603 and the process of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variation effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the voice lamp control device 113, the types of various display modes displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110 ( The mode (mode, background) is set, and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only, based on the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

As described above, when the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, the display data is set. It is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the displayed data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the confirmation information received by the voice lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A discrimination means for determining the existence is provided, and when it is determined that the discrimination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data already set is set. It is good to configure it so that it can be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the execution of the variable effect display having a content different from the actual game result (lottery result of the special symbol). Further, as the simple display data described above, for example, display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any gaming state, or display data for executing variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller amount of data than the display data used in the normal variable effect display.

In this embodiment, the above-described configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display variation pattern command based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (when the state command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is If it is determined whether the game is in the latent state (S4605) and the gaming state is in the latent state (the state command received this time is a command indicating the latent state) (S4605: Yes), the latent state is determined. The main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, the command to be the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), and the display command indicating the full power mode is set (S4607). The process proceeds to the processing of S4610.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the game state after the change is not the latent state (the state command received this time is not the command indicating the latent state), that is, when the state command indicating the probable change state is received. (S4605: No) sets the main display area setting command corresponding to the probability change state (S4608), sets the display command indicating the ascending mode (S4609), and proceeds to the process of S4610 described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a fluctuation stop process (S4217), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing (S4217). This variable stop processing (S4217) sets a display mode when a variable stop related command (a command set when the stop is displayed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main control device 110. The process for doing this is executed.

When the fluctuation stop processing (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed as a big hit in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S213 in FIG. 45) of the main controller 110. (See S1503 in FIG. 45).

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the full power mode is being executed). Then (S4702), if it is determined that the state is latent (S4702: Yes), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4703), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command for stopping the follow-up fluctuation is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 13A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the state is not latent (S4702: No), a display command for stopping fluctuation corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705. When the display command is set in the process of S4704, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the back of the interrupt V effect (see FIG. 11 (b)). Further, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4705.

Next, in the process of S4705, it is determined whether the variable stop-related command received this time is the special figure 2 variable stop command (S4705). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed by a big hit in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 of FIG. 38) of the main controller 110. (See S803 in FIG. 38).

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (whether the full power mode is being executed). If it is determined that the state is latent (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709. When the display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set in the process of S4707, the second special symbol is displayed as the lottery result display mode 813 (FIG. 13 (b)) in which the treasure box 812 displayed in the full power mode is opened and displayed. It is forcibly removed, and a display mode (for example, the character of "happening occurrence") indicating that the first special symbol has been won as a big hit is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4706 that the state is not latent (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the slave fluctuation is set (S4708), and the process proceeds to the process of S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 11A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is out of alignment. If it is determined in the process of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4709.

In the process of S4709, it is determined whether the variable stop-related command received this time is the special figure 1 temporary stop command (S4709). This special figure 1 temporary stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed by a small hit in the special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see S1514 of FIG. 46) of the main controller 110. (See S1603 in FIG. 46).

If it is determined in the process of S4709 that the temporary stop command of the special figure 1 has been received (S4709: Yes), a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special figure 1 is set (S4710), and the process proceeds to the process of S4711. If it is determined that the temporary stop command has not been received (S4709: No), the process of S4710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4711.

When a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special figure 1 is set in the process of S4710, the small display area Dm1 is set to the small display area Dm1 in accordance with the timing when the small hit symbol (for example, "341") is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2. The temporary stop is displayed in a display mode (for example, "331") indicating that the temporary stop is in progress. Here, the temporary stop display is a display control that swings to the extent that the player thinks that the fourth symbol is stopped, unlike the definite display that completely stops the display mode.

Next, in the process of S4711, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop-related command received this time is the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S4711). This special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set when the change of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is restarted in the first special symbol change execution processing (see S205 of FIG. 37) of the main control device 110. This is a command (see S702 in FIG. 37).

If it is determined in the process of S4711 that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S4711: Yes), a display command indicating the change restart of the special figure 1 is set (S4712), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has not been received (S4711: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a hit-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related process (S4219). In this hit-related process (S4219), in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol. Processing is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. The process of setting the prize ball number command for display based on the result is executed.

In the hit-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 63) is a jackpot-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), the jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72 (a), a jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 72 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4802). In the jackpot-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main control device is used. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4802), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4801 in FIG. 71) is the jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902), and this process is terminated. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901 when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S4903). When the round number command is received (S4903: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4904), and this process is terminated. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control unit 110 as the number of rounds command, the number of rounds command for display is set based on the received number of rounds command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has started from the main control unit 110 as a round update command. When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the current round is performed on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. It may be configured to calculate the number and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4903, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4903: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4905). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4905: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4905: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4906), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. In the process of S4801, when it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command has received the small hit-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is a small hit related command (S4803: Yes), the small hit related process (S4804) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72 (b), a small hit-related process (S4804), which is one process in the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. .. FIG. 72 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4804). In the small hit-related processing, processing is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small hit-related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the latent state (S4951), and if it is determined to be the latent state (S4951: Yes), the out-of-period small hit is determined. The display command to be shown is set (S4956), and then it is determined whether the hit-related command received by the hit-related process (S4219 in FIG. 71) is the small hit start command (S4952).

If it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the process of S4952 (S4952: Yes), the small hit start command for display is set (S4953), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4952, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4952: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (S4954). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4954: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4954: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4955), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4951 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4951: No), a display command indicating an out-of-period small hit is set (S4956), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4803, when it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not the prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball count counter (not shown) (S4806). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after addition is set (S4807), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the period until the normal state or the probable change state is set in the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) (advantageous continuation period). It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received in the prize ball number counter. Then, the number of prize balls corresponding to the cumulative value of the prize ball counter is displayed during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) or in the latent state.

With this configuration, the player can easily understand the cumulative number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from the time when the latent state is set until the normal state (probable change state) is set again. It can be notified.

In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game and the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game may be displayed separately during the advantageous continuation period. In this case, the winning game state (medium big hit, medium small hit) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the subordinate state setting area 223k, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It is good to provide means. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (the period obtained by combining the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game is executed) within the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means in the history.

Further, as described above, when the configuration of cumulatively displaying the number of prize balls acquired within the advantageous continuation period is used, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result (big hit, small hit) which is advantageous to the player. , Or the lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and the game is enthusiastically played. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, unless the jackpot of the special symbol is won in the state where the latent probability state is set, the latent probability state is configured to continue, and the small hit game is performed during the latent probability state. It is configured to be easy to break (easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery). Therefore, in addition to winning the jackpot for which the advantageous continuation period is set again during the advantageous continuation period, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that the state of not winning the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. Will do.

In such a case, the player can grasp how the actual game content (special figure 2 lottery result) is based on the jackpot winning probability preset in the pachinko machine 10 and the small hit winning probability. It is preferable to configure it so as to display various display modes. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are awarded. And because the actual small hit winning probability is higher than the preset small hit winning probability, the number of small hit games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are won. The case where it is possible and the case where it can be analyzed can be analyzed so that the player can distinguish it. Therefore, by having the player analyze the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and facilitate the continuous game.

Further, when the game content (lottery result of a special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for executing the condition achievement notification to indicate that fact may be provided. For example, a big hit is won. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lottery (so-called number of times of hamari) executed up to that time has exceeded the predetermined number of times (100 times) may be executed, or it may be executed during the small hit winning. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of times of special symbol lottery (number of times of lottery of special figure 2) exceeds a predetermined number of times (10 times) may be executed. Further, the condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of prize balls acquired in one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000) may be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the variation display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 73) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 73) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and a process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S5001: No), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the process of S5005 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5001: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5002).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 64) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 63), the variation extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Based on the variation pattern related to the effect, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is set (S5003), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S5004), and the first 2 The process shifts to the process of S5005 for setting the variable display regarding the special symbol (special figure 2).

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5003 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 62) executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) of the voice lamp control device 113. To. The display control device 114 displays a display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state (see FIGS. 64 and 69). Create display data to be displayed in.

Next, the processing of S5005 to S5008 of FIG. 73 will be described. The processes of S5005 to S5008 differ from the processes of S5001 to S5004 of FIG. 73 described above in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and other than that. Are the same. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

When the processing of S5005 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S5005), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5005: No), the processing of S5009 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5005 that it is set to on (S5005: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S5006), and the second variation pattern command is extracted. A variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol is set (S5007), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is subtracted by 1 (S5008), and the process proceeds to 5009.

In the processing of S5009, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on (S5009), and if it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is not set to on (S5009). : No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is set to on (S5009: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223 g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S5010), and the extracted stop type is set. Is set as it is (S5011), a special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for display is set (S5012), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and more than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured so that it is easier to win a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a small hit winning or a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player).

Then, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed is variably configured according to the set gaming state, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, latent state) is set, the second special symbol is set. Is configured so that the lottery can be easily executed, and if a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the first game state, the first game state can be easily set again. ..

Further, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal state which is the low probability state of the normal symbol is also set. However, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set in order to suppress the frequent execution of the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. It is configured to be done.

However, the gaming machine configured in this way can execute the lottery of the second special symbol, although it is inefficient, in the normal state, and if the big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes difficult to be executed in the specific second game state. Since it is configured to shift to the (probability change state), the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state can be reduced.

Further, the first game state described above is not set by the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the state where the second game state is set, and the second game state is a game state disadvantageous to the player. I am trying to be. Therefore, the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state can be further reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol in which the lottery advantageous to the player is executed. The lottery of the second special symbol is not executed unless the electric accessory 640a is changed to the open state by winning the lottery of the symbol.

In the pachinko machine configured in this way, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, even if the normal symbol is in the low probability state, There is a possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol will be executed during the normal state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the low probability state of the normal symbol is variably set according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. When the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes larger than the predetermined number (2 pieces), it is configured so that the fluctuation time in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state can be easily selected at the timing when the balls can be easily entered into the second entry port. are doing.

With this configuration, even if a small amount of right-handed game is performed while performing a left-handed game, which is an appropriate game, during the normal state, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol cannot be increased. 2 It is possible to make it difficult for a ball to easily enter the ball entry port 640. Further, even if the operation handle 51 is erroneously operated and several balls are fired in the right area when the left-handed game is executed in the normal state, the ball is the second entry port. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the 640.

Furthermore, in the latent state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right-handed game is continuously executed, so that the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol must be maintained at a predetermined number (2) or more. And many special figure 2 lottery can be executed in a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute the game in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the interval (1.2 seconds) through which the ball passes through the through gate 67 is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the latent state and the game time of the game per normal symbol executed per the normal symbol. It is configured to be shorter than. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is a predetermined number (2) or more in the latent state.

In the first embodiment, as a configuration of the right side region of the game board 13, a V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side of the through gate 67, and a ball launched in a right-handed game during a jackpot game passes through the through gate 67. It is configured to be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol from becoming a predetermined number (2) or more during the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is executed, so that the game that is advantageous to the player is excessively provided. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

The configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is not limited to this, and a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the winning device that is opened during the jackpot game, and the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is the winning device. It may be configured to win a prize.

In the first embodiment described above, during the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the ball passes through a specific area provided in the winning device, and the special symbol is displayed after the jackpot game is completed. The high probability state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability state of the special symbol may be set based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, three gaming states (normal state, latent state, and probabilistic state) can be set as gaming states, but four game states (normal state, latent state) that can be set can be set. , Probability change state, time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) may be set, or two or less may be set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, and the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easy to win a small hit, is a specific gaming state. It is configured to be easy to execute in the (latent state), but other configurations may be used. For example, a first ball entry port 64 is provided in the left side region, and an electric accessory 640a is provided in the right side region. It is the most advantageous game for the player to provide the attached first entrance and the second entrance 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is not attached and to perform the right-handed game when the probability change state is set. It may be configured in.

In the case of such a configuration, in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is set to be shorter than that of the special figure 2 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the fluctuation time is set so as to be easy to be set. Is set so that a shorter fluctuation time is more easily set in the special figure 2 fluctuation than in the special figure 1 fluctuation as in the first embodiment described above, and the electric accessory 640a is released in the probabilistic change state and the time saving state. It is good to set it so that it is easy.

As a result, during the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the left-handed game, and during the time saving state, the lottery of the first special symbol is performed more efficiently than in the normal state by the right-handed game. In the probabilistic state, the right-handed game is used to draw the first special symbol more efficiently and with a higher probability than in the normal state, and the game is aimed at the big hit. During the state, a right-handed game can be used to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit by a lottery of the second special symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 88, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the V interrupt process can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

First, with reference to FIG. 74, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 74) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S6001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 75, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. And S6102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 74. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 86 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 86 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)), the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) (not shown) is simply drawn. The command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 76 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 76 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first entry slot 64 or the second entry slot 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation is performed. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, and it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (a). FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 76B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S6302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82.

In the display setting process (S6303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), which are determined by the task process (S6304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / rear out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 82, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 77, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command. For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). Then, if there is a variable pattern command for display (S6404: Yes), the variable pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S6502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to G, small hit A to C, reach off, and complete off) indicated by the display stop type command. (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set it on (S6603) and return to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S6602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display is performed. If there is an opening command for (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. Set to the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 77. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display is performed. If there is a variable stop command (S6414: Yes), the variable stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. The display stop command (display stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing (timing when the main control unit 110 sets the stop command) of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern. It shows various display commands set in the normal stop command) and the variable stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol independently (parallel). , When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, big hit), the other special symbol that is changing is terminated in a predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of, it is configured to stop and display with a symbol indicating the forcible disconnection.

Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command set when forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , A display command (forced) for variable display of the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol that is forcibly stopped and displayed). It is configured to set the stop command).

In the present embodiment, even when the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to execute the stop display based on the forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. As a result, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in the display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

In addition, the display variable stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the variable stop process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4217 in FIG. 70), and the display command indicating this temporary stop is also included. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped is slightly fluctuated is determined as the variable stop display data is determined.

In the variable stop command processing, first, the variable stop data table indicated by the variable stop command for display is determined, the determined variable stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the variable stop data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (. S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is notified. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the display notification command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command was output to the display control device 114 among the various notification commands set when the voice lamp control device 113 received a command for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is used. It is set to 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to off (S6955), the notification command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, it is not limited to this, and it also receives related commands such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and accessory drive commands other than display commands, and processes the display control device 114. It may be configured to output the related command to the corresponding control device in a state where the information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in is added.

Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (rear surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the rear image type of is set to off (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is changed from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display either the back surface A or B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S7102), and the error command is used. Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S7102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 77. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S6416 (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

In the processing of S6401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), The processing of S6402 to S6422 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 78 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 78 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 78 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 83, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 83. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7403: No). S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 83 to continue the explanation. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S7206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and each sprite is specified. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S7209: No), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S7210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S7215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the definite display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the timekeeping counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that a certain period of time has elapsed from the end of the final display effect. Later, a process for displaying the demo effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the image of the above is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the details of the transfer setting process (S6305) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 86A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off as a result of the processing of S7501 (S7501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b). FIG. 86B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Further, as a result of the processing of S7601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 76 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 76 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 77 to 82) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 83 to 85) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) (see S7501: No in FIG. 86 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), it is provided for each rear image type. Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (transfer destination). The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The discrimination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S7713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S7713 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S7802 (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process (see FIG. 76 (b)) is performed every time the drawing process is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variation display of 1 is executed, the other variation display may be configured to be infeasible. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the start winning prize may be changed in order from the oldest reserved ball. With this configuration, control can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) and the probabilistic state (high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol). Four gaming states are provided: a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol). There is. Then, the latent state is configured to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 115. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the types of gaming states set according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control. Is different from the configuration of the device 113.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the left-handed game is a game that executes the lottery of the first special symbol, and the right-handed game is a game that executes the lottery of the second special symbol. Was. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the ball entrance (right first) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol also in the right area of the game board 13 (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80). 1 entry port 64b) (see FIG. 89) is provided. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed during the right-handed game than in the first embodiment.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is variably set according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is set. The larger the number, the easier it is to set a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

With this configuration, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls (special figure 2 reserved balls) of the second special symbol is small (including 0), for example, normal. When the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the state is set (the state where the left-handed game is executed) and the jackpot game in which the jackpot A is set as the jackpot type is completed, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since the latent state is set when the number of balls is small, a short fluctuation time is set as the first special symbol fluctuation during the latent state, so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is easily executed. ..

On the other hand, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is large, for example, a state in which a latent probability state is set (a state in which a right-handed game is executed), the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, and as a jackpot type. In the state where the jackpot game in which the jackpot C is set is completed, the latent probability state is set in the state where the number of reserved balls is large in Special Figure 2, so that a long fluctuation time is set as the first special symbol fluctuation during the latent probability state. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the first special symbol change during the latent state.

Therefore, even when the same game state is set, the playability can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) as the lottery of the special symbol in the latent state. It is configured so that the lottery result can be easily obtained. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player by repeatedly setting (looping) the latent state than when the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the latent state. .. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game so that the player in which the latent state is set becomes a more advantageous game state.

Further, let's execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the game state (for example, the normal state) in which the left-handed game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is an appropriate game. When a right-handed game is intentionally performed and the hold memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is composed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the act of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery by periodically performing the right-handed game while performing the left-handed game in the normal state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won in a state where the latent probability state is set, the normal state is not directly set after the jackpot game is completed. , It is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment in that it is configured to set the normal state after passing through the time saving state for a predetermined period.

In the first embodiment described above, when the latent state is changed to the normal state, the normal state is set in a state where the reserved memory (special figure 2 hold) of the second special symbol acquired during the latent state remains. Therefore, there is a problem that the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed in the normal state. In such a pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that a player who is trying to end a game when the state shifts to a normal state cannot smoothly end the game by noticing a change in Special Figure 2 during execution. ..

In addition, if the player stops the game ignoring the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 executed in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 in which no one is playing suddenly becomes a big hit. There is a risk that the player may be confused, or it may be difficult for a new player to play the game because the long fluctuation shown in Special Figure 2 is executed, and the operation of the game may be reduced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won during the normal state, it is configured to be more disadvantageous to the player than when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won. (It is configured so that the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is not set). That is, in the first embodiment, the unfavorable lottery is executed in the normal state based on the hold memory of the special figure 2 acquired in order to execute the advantageous lottery in the latent state, so that the latent state is in the latent state. In addition, there is a problem that the motivation for the game to always acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 up to the upper limit is reduced, and the operation of the game is lowered.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, after the latent state is completed, the time saving state is set for a predetermined period, and the reserved memory of FIG. 2 is digested during the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 after the transition to the normal state, and it is possible to solve the above-mentioned various problems.

Further, in the second embodiment, if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won during the time saving state, the player is likely to win the jackpot of the second special symbol after the jackpot game is completed, as compared with the case of winning the jackpot of the second special symbol during the normal state. It is configured so that an advantageous gaming state (latent state) is set. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the reserved memory of the special figure 2 that remains when the gaming state (latent state) that is advantageous to the player ends. Can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball is configured to be difficult to enter the second entry port 640 during the time saving state, and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 is surely reduced during the time saving state. It is configured so that it can be done. As a result, when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state, it is possible to prevent (difficultly) a situation in which the number of reserved storages in the special figure 2 increases from the time when the time saving state is set.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations during the time saving state, the fluctuation time set for the special figure 2 fluctuation is set rather than the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 fluctuation. Is configured to be shorter. Specifically, the total time of the fluctuation times of the four special figure 2 fluctuations set during the time reduction state is longer than the fluctuation time set for the first special figure 1 fluctuation during the time reduction state. It is configured to be short. As a result, since the variation of the special figure 2 can be efficiently executed during the time saving state, it becomes easy to reduce the number of reserved storages of the special figure 2.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of end conditions for the time saving state are provided, and the time saving state is configured to end when any of the end conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of tension.

In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state, the end condition that is satisfied when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches the predetermined number of times (4 times) and the number of changes in the special figure 1 have reached the predetermined number of times (2 times). It is configured to have at least an end condition that is satisfied in the case. Thereby, for example, even if the reserved storage number of the special figure 2 is 0 at the time when the latent probability state ends, the time saving state can be ended by the fluctuation of the special figure 1.

<Regarding the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 650 arranged at different positions from the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. A point, a point provided with a first ball entry port (right first ball entry port 64b) that triggers a lottery for the first special symbol in the right side area, and a ball launched into the right side area by a right-handed game flow down. It differs in that the flow path configuration is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 by executing the left-handed game, and the right The first ball opening 64 is arranged in the left area so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the second ball opening 640 by executing the hitting game. A configuration was used in which the second ball entry port 640 was arranged in the right side region.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, there is a big difference in that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed by executing the right-handed game. There is. In this way, in the right-handed game executed in the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, so that the game state is advantageous to the player. Both the first special symbol lottery (lottery that is disadvantageous to the player) and the second special symbol lottery (lottery that is advantageous to the player) can be easily executed during a certain latent state. It is possible to make the player happy and uneasy about the game result in the latent state.

As shown in FIG. 89, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is not provided with the variable winning device 65 in the lower center of the gaming area, and a plurality of winning devices (variable winning devices) that are openly operated in the jackpot game. 65, V winning device 650) are both arranged in the right side region. Therefore, if a big hit is won, the right-handed game is executed regardless of the big hit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the V winning device 650 is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path (ball flow path) of the ball that can win the variable winning device 65, and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f of the V winning device 650 is provided. The ball that has flowed down is configured to reach the variable winning device 65. In this way, by disposing the winning devices at the upstream position and the downstream position of one ball flow path, the ball flow path to each winning device can be shared, so that the configuration of the game board 13 can be saved. Space can be achieved.

Further, since the V winning device 650 having a specific area (V switch 650e3) inside is provided on the upstream side of each winning device, the ball that wins the V winning device 650 is the winning device on the downstream side (variable winning device). It is not affected by the opening operation of the device 65). Therefore, the ball can be smoothly won in the V winning device 650, and it is possible to suppress the player from being uncomfortable.

That is, when the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upstream side of the V winning device 650, the jackpot game in which the V opening pattern is not set is executed, and the ball passes through the specific area (V switch 650e3) during the jackpot game. If not, the player is told that the ball did not pass through the specific area because the timing of winning the ball to the V winning device 650 was shifted due to the opening operation of the variable winning device 65 provided on the upstream side of the V winning device 650. Although there is a problem of giving erroneous recognition, in the second embodiment, since the V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side, the above-mentioned problem can be less likely to occur.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is an enlarged view of the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in the configuration of the right side region. First, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side region, and a ball launched by a right-handed game is formed on the first flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member 700 and on the right side of the distribution member 700. It is alternately distributed to the right side flow path 702.

As shown in FIG. 89, the distribution member 700 is formed with two accommodating portions capable of receiving spheres, and the sphere received by the accommodating portion on the left side (the left side when the front view of FIG. 89 is viewed) is formed. It is configured to be rotatable around the rotation axis so that the sphere guided to the first flow path 701 and received by the accommodating portion on the right side (right side when viewed from the front of FIG. 89) is guided to the second flow path 702. Has been done. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 89, since the left accommodating portion receives the sphere, the distribution member 700 is subsequently rotated to the left by the weight of the sphere, and the sphere in the left accommodating portion is the second. It flows down to 1 flow path 701.

A restricting member that regulates the rotational movement is provided below the distribution member 700, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is distributed in a state of being rotated to a position that can be accepted by the right accommodating portion. It is configured to stop the rotational movement of the member 700. After that, similarly, when the right accommodating portion receives the ball, the distribution member 700 rotates to the right, the ball in the right accommodating portion flows down to the second flow path 702, and the ball is launched by the right-handed game. The rotational movement of the distribution member 700 is stopped in a state where the left accommodating portion is rotated to an acceptable position.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured to be capable of firing a maximum of 100 balls per minute, and when a right-handed game is played, the balls are at intervals of 1.2 seconds at the shortest. Each flow path (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) flows down.

A movable lid 1500 forming the lower surface of the flow surface is provided on the upstream side of the left side flow path 701, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a constant opening / closing operation is executed by a movable control means (not shown). It is configured as such, and is located in an open state in which a ball can enter the first ball entry port 64b on the right side arranged below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which it is difficult (impossible) to enter the ball. The opening / closing operation is executed as follows.

Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110, and the movable lid opening / closing process results in an opening period of 0.1 seconds. An opening / closing operation is performed that repeats a closing period of 0.8 seconds according to a predetermined scenario. The right-side first ball entry port 64b, which is controlled to open and close in this way, is configured so that it is more difficult for a ball to enter the ball than the first ball entry port 64 (64a). When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64b, one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

Then, the ball flowing down the left side flow path 701 and flowing down on the movable lid 1500 flows down the bent portion of the left side flow path 701 and flows out to the upper side of the V winning device 650 provided in the lower region of the right side region. .. That is, the left flow path 701 allows the ball launched by the right-handed game to enter the right first entry slot 64b, and the ball that has not entered the right first entry opening 64b is a winning device. It is a flow path for flowing out to a position where a ball can enter (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650). The left flow path 701 is configured so that the time required for the sphere to pass is longer than that of the second flow path 702, which will be described later, and the time from the inflow to the first flow path 701 to the outflow. Is configured to be 1.6 seconds.

On the other hand, the sphere distributed to the right side flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 passes through the through gate 67 provided on the upstream side of the second flow path 702, and passes through the back side of the left side flow path 701 (from the viewpoint of FIG. 89). It flows into the inflow port 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the back side), passes through the second entry port 640 provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 702, and flows out to the lower region of the right side region. Will be done.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entry port 640 provided in the second flow path 702, and when the electric accessory 640a is located at the closed position (the second entry port 640 is closed). In the case of the state), the ball flows out from the second flow path 702 without entering the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the open position (when the second entry port 640 is in the open state), all the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 enter the second entry port 640. It is configured to do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90, the second entry port 640 is configured as an entry port having an opening width equal to or larger than the flow path width (15 mm) on the downstream side of the second flow path 702. When the electric accessory 640a is located in the open position, the movable piece of the electric accessory 640a flows from the back side of the second flow path 702 (the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 90) to the flow path in the second flow path 702. It is configured so that the protruding movable piece receives all the balls flowing down the second flow path 702. Then, the ball received by the movable piece is configured to flow down the entry path for entering the second entry port 640 and enter the second entry port 640.

Then, the ball flowing out from the second flow path 702 flows out above the V winning device 650 provided in the lower region of the right side region. That is, the second flow path 702 is a flow path for allowing the ball launched by the right-handed game to pass through the through gate 67 and flow out to a position where the ball can enter the second entry port 640. In the second flow path 702, the time required for the ball to pass (the time from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 to when it reaches the second entry port 640) is from the first flow path 701 described above. Is also configured to be short, and the time from inflow to the second flow path 702 to outflow is 1 second.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that is opened during the jackpot game is arranged in the lower region of the right side region. It is configured so that a ball flowing down a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) can enter. Further, the ball flow time (1.6 seconds) of the first flow path 701 is configured to be longer than the ball flow time (1 second) of the second flow path 702. Specifically, the length of the ball flow time is configured to be different by the amount corresponding to the ball firing interval (0.6 seconds).

With this configuration, when a ball is launched by a right-handed game and the ball continuously reaching the distribution member 700 is distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, the first The ball flowing down the flow path 701 and the ball flowing down the second flow path 702 are connected to the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) arranged in the lower region of the right side region at the same timing. Can be reached.

Therefore, since it is possible to make a plurality of balls win the winning device at the same time during the jackpot game, the player should be interested in the number of balls winning the winning device during one round game. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the spheres flowing out from the first flow path 701 are each winning device (variable winning device 65) arranged in the lower region of the right side region than the spheres flowing out from the second flow path 702. , V winning device 650) is configured to flow out to the upstream side of the ball flow path that can win a prize, and the height position of the ball outflow portion of the first flow path 701 is the ball of the second flow path 702. It is configured to be higher than the height position of the outflow part.

Further, the length (distance in the height direction) of the vertical flow path formed in the direction perpendicular to the ball outflow portion of the first flow path 701 and the direction perpendicular to the ball outflow portion of the second flow path 702. It is configured so as to be different from the length (distance in the height direction) of the vertical flow path formed in the direction.

By making the height position of the ball discharge portion of each flow path and the length of the vertical flow path of each flow path different in this way, each winning device (variable winning device) arranged in the lower region of the right side region. Since the momentum of the ball flowing down on the ball flow path that can be won in 65, V winning device 650) can be made different, the behavior of the ball immediately before winning each winning device can be irregular. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while entertaining at what timing the ball wins the winning device during the jackpot game.

Here, the operation of the movable lid 1500 will be described in detail. The movable lid 1500 is configured to be variable to an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at predetermined timings based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. .. Specifically, in the movable lid opening / closing process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110, operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. Has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of opening the movable lid 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds is repeatedly executed.

That is, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the movable lid 1500 is arranged. It flows down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. When the sphere flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the movable lid 1500 (or falls on the movable lid 1500) and the timing when the movable lid 1500 is opened, the sphere is released. After passing through the movable lid 1500 in the open state, the ball enters the left first entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the movable lid 1500 (or falling onto the movable lid 1500) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing of opening the movable lid 1500 is 0.1 in 0.8 seconds. Since it is a second, the timing at which the two match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the left first ball entry port 64b.

That is, in a game state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a latent state, the ball enters the left first entrance slot 64b on a regular basis, so that the jackpot game It is possible to prevent the state in which there is no hold of the special figure 1 from occurring when the operation is completed and the time is shortened. Further, since the period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to aim is set as the period in which the movable lid 1500 is opened at one time, the first ball entry port 64 is set in the normal state of the game. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game aimed at (64a).

Specifically, when the game is in the normal state, when a left-handed game is performed, about 15 of the 250 shots fired are designed to enter the first entry port 64. If a ball enters, four prize balls will be paid out. In addition, it is designed so that about 5 shots can enter the general entry port 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to put about 20 balls into the first entrance 64, considering that the prize balls to be paid out are fired again. Become.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and the right-handed game is performed, it is designed so that about 9 out of the 250 fired balls enter the right first entry port 64b. If you enter the ball, one prize ball will be paid out. Further, the general entry port 63 is not provided in the right side region. Therefore, in the right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the prize balls to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be put into the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game.

In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball launched by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal state of the game, the right-handed game is more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be arranged based on the design concept to the extent that the player is not more advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game in a time-saving state or a big hit state.

Similarly, under the normal state, based on the design concept that the right-handed game is not more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game, the setting of the opening period and the closing period of the movable lid, and the setting of the right first entrance 64b The number of prize balls may be changed.

Next, among the configurations arranged in the right side region of the game board 13 in the second embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 are different from the configurations of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, a through gate 67 and a second entry port 640 are provided in the second flow path 702 arranged in the right side region of the game board 13, and the through gate is provided. The ball flow path is formed so that the period (ball passing time) until the ball passing through 67 reaches the second entry port 640 is 1 second.

Then, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is configured to be variably set according to the set gaming state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 15 seconds in the normal state, 0.9 seconds in the latent state, and 0.1 seconds in the probable change state and the time saving state.

In this way, by variably setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol according to the game state, the rate at which the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640 is configured to be different. ..

A detailed explanation will be given later, but when the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (15 seconds) than the time (1 second) for the sphere to pass through the second flow path 702. Even if the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 wins the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage, the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the game per game. Therefore, in the normal state, the right-handed game is performed, and the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 unless a plurality of balls are continuously fired.

Further, when the latent state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be slightly shorter (0.9 seconds) than the time (1 second) for the sphere to pass through the second flow path 702, so that it is through. It is possible to make it easier for the ball that has passed through the gate 67 to enter the second entrance 640 in the game per game that is executed when the normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage is a hit. .. Therefore, during the latent state, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 by the right-handed game enters the second entry port 640 as it is (the game state in which the ball is most likely to enter the second entry port 640). ).

When the probabilistic state and the time saving state are set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely shorter (0.1 second) than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass through the second entrance 702. Therefore, by the time the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a normal symbol lottery executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 has been won. Even so, the game is finished so that the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640.

Further, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, when one ball passes through the through gate 67 and the normal symbol lottery is executed and the normal symbol is won, another ball enters the second entrance 640. It is configured so that it will not be obtained. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 89, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side region, and the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 have a minimum interval of 1.2 seconds. The period required for the ball to pass through the second flow path 702 (ball passing time) is set to 1 second. That is, since the ball passing time of the second flow path 702 is configured to be shorter than the interval at which the balls flow into the second flow path 702, a plurality of balls exist in the second flow path 702. There is no such thing. Therefore, when one ball passes through the through gate 67 and the normal symbol lottery is executed and the normal symbol is won, the other balls do not enter the second entrance 640.

With this configuration, the right to allow the ball to enter the second entry port 640, that is, to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, while the probability change state and the time saving state are set. It is possible to prevent (suppress) new acquisition.

In this embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are arranged on one of the plurality of flow paths (first flow path 701 and second flow path 702) formed in the right side region. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 may be used for different flow paths.

Further, in the second embodiment, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that is opened during the big hit game is arranged below the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) may be arranged above the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of balls entering each entry port (right first entry opening 64b, second entry opening 640) during the jackpot game. Further, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) may be provided between the distribution member 700 and the inflow portion of the second flow path 702. It can be configured so as not to suppress the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b while suppressing the ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game.

In the second embodiment, the taxiway (right first taxiway 64b) that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are triggered in the right area of the game board 13. A taxiway (second taxiway 640) is provided so that a ball launched by a right-handed game can win a prize in any of the taxiways. , A first taxiway leading the ball to the first entry port 64 (64a) and a second taxiway leading to the second entry port 640 are provided in the right side region of the game board 13, and each guide path is provided with a second taxiway. A distribution means for distributing balls alternately may be provided.

With this configuration, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery conditions for the second special symbol can be alternately satisfied, which is excessive for the player. (That is, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in a biased manner during the time saving state), and the game state that is excessively disadvantageous to the player is provided (that is, the game state that is advantageous to the player is provided). That is, only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a biased manner during the time saving state)).

Further, although the present embodiment uses a configuration in which the ball launched by the right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths, the right to execute the lottery of the first special symbol during the right-handed game (first ball opening 64). It is sufficient if the configuration is such that the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (the entry of the ball into the second entry opening 640) can be obtained, and the distribution member 700 is used. It may not be configured, or the sphere may be distributed to three or more flow paths.

<Regarding the content of the production performed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, the characteristic contents of various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game (during a right-handed game), and FIG. 91 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 92A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the game, and FIG. 92A is a display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot game. FIG. 92B is a schematic diagram schematically showing another example of the contents, and FIG. 92B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state. Yes, 93 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when the second special symbol change (lottery) is not executed in the latent state, and FIG. 93 (a) is shown in FIG. b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents in the time saving state, and FIG. 94 (a) shows an example of the display contents displayed when a big hit is won during the time saving state. It is a schematic diagram, and FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the time saving state ends.

In the second embodiment, the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game is configured to be able to acquire the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the reserved memory of the second special symbol. Then, when the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set based on the reserved storage number of the second special symbol at that time, and the second special symbol is configured. It is configured so that a longer fluctuation time is set as the number of pending storages of the symbol increases.

Further, when the latent state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured in this way, an effect for enthusiastically performing the game in order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol during the jackpot game is executed, and FIG. The display contents shown in are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 91, on the display screen during the jackpot game, a guidance display mode for guiding the right-handed game to the player is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Further, below the small area Dm3, a game detail display area Dm11 for visually notifying a portion where the ball should pass is formed, and an enlarged view schematically showing a part of the game board 13 is displayed. .. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in order to notify the player of the playability during the jackpot game (the playability other than the playability of inserting the ball into the winning device), "Aim at the GET and store the meter". The comment is displayed.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display mode including the portion where the ball should pass is displayed in the game detail display area Dm11, and the portion where the ball should pass is highlighted in the display. In addition, when the ball passes through the highlighted portion (according to the example of this figure, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67), the display mode displayed in the game details display area Dm11. Is configured to be variable to a display mode indicating that the ball has passed to a specific location.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the game content during the jackpot game just by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. Can be done.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the first target (prize ball information mode) 815 for indicating the number of prize balls during the jackpot game and the second target (usually) indicating that the character 811 has acquired the reserved memory of the normal symbol. Figure acquisition mode) The effect for acquiring 816 is executed, and the character 811 acquires the first target 815 based on the fact that the ball wins the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650), and the ball The effect that the character 811 acquires the second target 816 is executed based on the fact that the character 811 has passed through the through gate 67.

Then, on the right side of the main display area Dm, small display areas Dm1 and 2 are formed as in the configuration of the main display area Dm of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 11A), and further, each special symbol is formed. Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed in place of the small display areas Dm4 and Dm4 and 5 for displaying the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls). In the small display areas Dm1a and 2a, information indicating the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of each special symbol is displayed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a small display area (normal diagram variation display area) Dm9 is formed as an area in which a decorative symbol (fourth symbol) that executes variable display corresponding to a normal symbol is displayed, and the small display area (normal symbol variation display area) Dm9 is formed. Adjacent to the display area Dm9, a small display area (normal figure hold number display area) Dm9a in which information indicating the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is displayed is formed. As a result, the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol can be easily grasped during the jackpot game. Further, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, a normal figure pseudo-holding area Dm10a for informing the player of the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol in an easy-to-understand manner is formed.

The pseudo-holding area Dm10a of the normal figure is formed so as to have the first holding area Dm10b of the normal figure, the second holding area Dm10c of the normal figure, and the third holding area Dm10d of the normal figure. When the number of reserved balls in the figure) is 0, the pseudo-reserved area Dm10a in the normal figure is lit, and when the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is 1, the first reserved area Dm10b in the normal figure is lit and the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is lit. When there are two, the first holding area Dm10b of the normal figure and the second holding area Dm10c of the normal figure are lit, and when the number of reserved balls of the normal figure is three or more, the first holding area Dm10b of the normal figure and the first holding area of the normal figure are lit. 2 The holding area Dm10c and the third holding area Dm10d in the normal drawing are configured to light up.

Then, the character "Danger" is displayed in the Pseudo-holding area Dm10a, which suggests that if the jackpot game ends as it is, a game that is disadvantageous to the player will be executed. The character "MAX" is displayed in the 3 reserved area Dm10d, which suggests that the game advantageous to the player is executed when the jackpot game is completed while maintaining the current state.

Further, information corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed in the acquisition information display area Dm12a, and the number of round games being executed is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b. This makes it possible to easily determine the progress of the jackpot game. In addition, the above-mentioned acquisition information display area Dm12a is configured to be continuously displayed during the period (during the advantageous continuation period) during which the game state (during the jackpot game, during the latent probability state) in which the right-handed game is executed continues. However, even if it is configured to show the accumulated information not only the number of prize balls acquired during the big hit game but also the number of prize balls acquired during the latent state, that is, the number of prize balls acquired during the small hit game. good.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined value (three or more) at the time when the jackpot game is completed and the latent probability state is set, the game is played. Since it is configured so that a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in which the lottery that is disadvantageous to the player is executed, the second special symbol is set at the end of the jackpot game. The game can be played with the expectation that the number of reserved balls will be 3 or more.

Then, in this embodiment, in order to suggest how many rights (the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol) for executing the ordinary symbol lottery, which is an opportunity to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, have been acquired. It is configured so that the normal figure hold suggestion effect (effect using the pseudo hold area Dm10a) is executed.

With this configuration, a special figure lottery game (a game in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes long and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed a lot) that is advantageous in the latent state set after the big hit is completed. Whether or not it is executed can be grasped by the effect executed during the jackpot game, and the interest of the game during the jackpot game can be improved.

In this embodiment, the special figure lottery game (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes long, and the second special) is advantageous in the latent state set after the end of the big hit by executing the normal figure hold suggestion effect. It is configured to indirectly suggest the possibility that a game that can execute a lot of lottery of symbols) will be executed, but it is not limited to this, and as a production during the jackpot game, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute the effect (special figure 2 hold effect) that suggests. This makes it possible to directly notify the player whether or not an advantageous special figure lottery game is executed in the latent state set after the end of the big hit.

Further, as a specific effect mode of the normal figure hold suggestion effect of the present embodiment (for example, a mode in which the pseudo hold area Dm10a is lit to the entire area of the normal figure third hold area Dm10d is displayed in a different color from the usual), the second. It may be possible to set an effect mode for notifying that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is a predetermined value (3 or more). With this configuration, it is notified that the special figure lottery game that is advantageous to the player will be executed after the big hit game is completed in the normal figure hold suggestion effect that indirectly suggests the game situation after the big hit game is finished. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the normal figure hold suggestion effect executed during the jackpot game.

In the display example shown with reference to FIG. 91 (a), the small display areas Dm1 (a), Dm2 (a), and Dm9 (a) are displayed in a size that can be visually recognized by the player. Not limited to this, during the jackpot game, the size of each small display area may be changed to a size or position that is difficult for the player to see, or a part or all of each small display area may be erased. good. As a result, the player pays close attention to the effect being executed in the main display area Dm in order to grasp the current situation (the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2). Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Next, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined value (3) or more at the end of the jackpot game, the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b), that is, the center of the main display area Dm. The character 811 is displayed in a display mode congratulating the unit, and the characters "Full power mode entry" indicating that the special figure lottery game advantageous to the player is executed are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b), four or more balls enter the second entrance 640 during the jackpot game, and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is four. It is displayed in the hold simple display area Dm2a, and it is displayed in the normal figure hold number display area Dm9a that the number of hold balls of the normal symbol is three. Further, in the normal map variation display area Dm9, a variation display mode for indicating that the normal symbol is changing is displayed.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), since the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 3, the pseudo-reserved area Dm10a to the third reserved area Dm10d are lit and displayed, and the acquired information display area Dm12a is displayed this time. The value of "1000" indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is displayed, and "END" indicating that the current jackpot game is completed is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the predetermined value (3) at the end of the jackpot game, the display screen shown in FIG. 92 (a), that is, the main display area Dm continues. Then, an effect of causing the through gate 67 to execute a game of passing the ball (an effect of the character 811 acquiring the second target 816) is displayed.

Here, in the present embodiment, 2 seconds is set as the ending period (waiting period in which the winning device is closed) set at the end of the jackpot game, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is also set during this ending period. It is configured to execute the effect shown in FIG. 92 (a) so that a continuous right-handed game is performed with the aim of achieving a predetermined number (3 pieces) or more.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, "aim firmly at GET" in order to acquire a larger number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by the time the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game is executed. The characters are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to continuously perform the right-handed game even during the ending period.

Next, the screen shown in FIG. 92 (b) is displayed in the state where the latent state is set (during the full power mode). That is, similarly to the effect display (see FIG. 13A) executed in the latent state by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, the mode display mode showing the current gaming state in the main display area Dm. The "full power mode" is displayed as 810, and the effect of opening the treasure box 812 is executed while the character 811 runs from the left to the right. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the latent state, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than a predetermined value (3), the first It is configured so that a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the second target 816 and the pseudo holding area Dm10a are displayed on the display screen in the latent state as in the jackpot game, and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is displayed. An effect display is executed to call attention so that the value does not fall below a predetermined value (3 pieces).

On the other hand, when the latent state is set after the jackpot ends and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not started), the case of FIG. 93 (a) is shown. The indicated effect is executed. That is, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 is resting in the center of the main display area Dm, and the "rest zone" is displayed as the mode display 810. This break zone is continuously displayed until the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, and in order to encourage the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed, the sub-display area Ds is set to "meter". "Save and wake up" is displayed.

Further, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the big hit game, it is possible that the player does not continue the right-handed game during the big hit game, so that the small display area Dm3 "Right-handed" is emphasized and displayed as a guidance display mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the latent state is set, the player will do his best during the period when the special symbol lottery game (second special symbol lottery game) that is advantageous to the player is not executed. Since it is configured to execute an effect other than the effect indicating the mode (break mode), the player can perform the effect (full power mode) to indicate the game state advantageous to the player. The special symbol lottery game (second special symbol lottery game) that is advantageous to the player is not executed, and only the special symbol lottery game (first special symbol lottery game) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

Next, the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 (b) to 94 (b). In the second embodiment, even if the right-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entry port 640. Therefore, when the time-saving state is set, "Left-handed" is highlighted as the guidance display mode.

Then, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the latent state is set with a higher probability than in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state. Since it is configured to win, the "revival mode" is displayed as the mode display 810 indicating the game state in which the latent probability state is easily set again after the latent probability state advantageous to the player is completed, and the main display area is displayed. In Dm, the effect that the character 811 chases the character 819 that imitates an angel is executed.

In this effect in the resurrection mode, when the big hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the character 811 catches the character 819 and the character "Congratulations on the resurrection" is displayed (FIG. 94). (A)). On the other hand, if the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied without winning the jackpot during the time-saving state, the effect of escaping the character 819 is executed (see FIG. 94 (b)).

Further, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state and the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set is executed, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is completed. The winning information stored on hold until the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set is preliminarily determined, and the effect mode in the resurrection mode is changed based on the predetermined result. It is composed. As a result, immediately after the effect in the resurrection mode is executed, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether or not the jackpot is won in the current resurrection mode based on the display mode.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 95 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the gaming state set by the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and probabilistic state (special). High-probability state of symbol, high-probability state of normal symbol), latent state (high-probability state of special symbol, low-probability state of normal symbol), time-saving state (low-probability state of special symbol, high-probability state of normal symbol) And, four game states are configured to be configurable.

Then, in the latent state, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot D is set (35% of the special figure 2 jackpot), the time saving state is set. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot A is set (50% of the special figure 1 jackpot), the state shifts to the latent state. When the jackpot B is set (50% of the special figure 1 jackpot), it is configured to shift to the normal state, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the jackpot C is set (special figure 1). (65% of the jackpot in FIG. 2) is configured to shift to the latent state, and when the jackpot D is set (35% of the jackpot in FIG. 2), it is configured to shift to the normal state.

Further, when the time saving end condition is satisfied during the time saving state, it is configured to shift to the normal state. That is, in the second embodiment, when a specific jackpot (a jackpot at which the latent state ends) is won in the latent state with respect to the first embodiment described above, the game does not shift to the normal state. , It differs in that it shifts to a time-saving state, and the time-saving state is defined as a gaming state in which it is easier to shift to a latent state than a normal state.

With this configuration, even if you win the jackpot (big hit D) where the latent state that is most advantageous to the player ends, it does not suddenly shift to the normal state. , Since it is possible to set a gaming state (time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, it is possible to make the player who has finished the latent state continue to play the game. ..

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 96 to 104, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment described above, a part of the ROM 202 configuration of the main control device 110, a part of the RAM 203 configuration, and a part of the RAM configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. Is different. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, for the ROM 202 (see FIG. 16) in the first embodiment described above, the small hit random number table 202b is replaced with the small hit random number table 202b, and the jackpot type selection table 202d is replaced with the jackpot type. The difference is that the selection 2 table 202ad is replaced with the variation pattern selection table 202e by providing the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae and newly providing the time saving table 202af. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit random number 2 table 202ab is data in which the small hit determination value for winning a small hit is defined for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) as in the first embodiment described above. It's a table. Here, the contents of the small hit random number 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab. Unlike the first embodiment described above, the second embodiment is configured to win a small hit even in the lottery of the first special symbol. Then, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is configured to end when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, it is configured so that winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition).

By configuring in this way, the period in which the time saving state is set can be irregular, so that the player playing the game in the time saving state can play the game while giving a feeling of tension. Can be done.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab, when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the first corresponding to the small hit corresponds to the state (probability state) of the special symbol. When the value of the hit random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "212 to 221" and the symbol type is the second special symbol, the first hit corresponding to the small hit regardless of the state (probability state) of the special symbol. The value of the random number counter C1 is defined in the range of "212 to 432".

That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol is 11/480 (about 1/44), and the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol is 221/480 (about 1/44). It is specified to be about 1 / 2.1).

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad is a data table in which the jackpot type set when a jackpot is won is defined, similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG. 98.

FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 98, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad is executed in response to the jackpot type jackpot A with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above (big hit game). The contents) are different in that they are different, and the others are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad, a round game in which the first attacker (V winning device 650) is opened is executed for three rounds as the jackpot operation content (big hit game content) corresponding to the jackpot A. The jackpot game is stipulated.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In addition, the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased during the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment configured in this way, the jackpot game in which as many round games as possible are executed can easily increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot game, and thus the jackpot game. It is possible to give a privilege other than the privilege of getting a lot of prize balls (increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol).

Further, in the second embodiment, the jackpot game (big hit game (3R) corresponding to the jackpot A) executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed during the normal state , The jackpot game (big hit game (10R) corresponding to jackpot C) that is executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easy to execute the lottery while in the latent state, is the period of the jackpot game (round). The number) is configured to be long.

As a result, there are cases where the jackpot is won in the normal state and the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the jackpot is won in the latent state and the latent state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player in the latent state set after the jackpot game is completed can be different, and further, the case where the jackpot is won in the latent state can be advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, the state in which the latent probability state is initially set (latent probability inrush state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the state in which the latent probability state is repeatedly set (latent probability continuous state). By configuring it so that (the first special symbol lottery can be easily executed), it is possible to give a superiority complex to the player in the state where the latent continuation state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the latent probability rush state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the latent probability continuation state is set (the second special symbol lottery is easily executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state that is advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state is set excessively repeatedly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is used as the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, but the degree of advantage of the gaming state (advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (continuation rate of advantageous state, acquisition prize). The number of balls, etc.) may be configured to be different between the advantageous rush state in which the advantageous gaming state is initially set and the advantageous continuation state in which the advantageous gaming state is repeatedly set, and the advantageous gaming state may be probabilistically changed. It may be in a short time state, or it may be in a normal state. Further, it may be configured to have a plurality of gaming states that are advantageous gaming states.

Further, in the second embodiment, the setting of the latent rush state is more disadvantageous to the player than the setting of the latent continuous state (the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed). In order to configure, the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A) is the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol (corresponding to the jackpot C). Although it is configured to execute a jackpot game with a smaller number of round games than the jackpot game to be played), it may be configured to execute a jackpot game of the same length.

That is, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, the reserved memory (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol cannot be secured until the jackpot is won, so that the jackpot is set in the normal state. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the start of the jackpot game is smaller than that of the winner of the jackpot with the latent probability state (right-handed game state) set.

Therefore, even if the jackpot game of the same length is executed by the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the start of the jackpot game is supported. Since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot game is variable, the latent rush state is more disadvantageous to the player than the latent continuous state (the second special symbol). It can be a latent state) that is executed with a small number of reserved balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the contents of the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, the contents of the normal table 202a1 referred to when the gaming state is the normal state are usually added to the variation pattern selection table 202e of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the contents of the latent probability table 202a3 are changed to the latent probability 2 table 202ae3, and the time saving table 202ae4 referred to during the time saving state is newly provided. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents specified in the normal 2 table 202ae1 will be described. FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal 2 table 202ae1. The normal 2 table 202ae1 is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when a normal state is set as in the normal table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above, and is usually used. The point that the table 202a1 has the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) as a condition element for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and each variation pattern It differs in that the range of the specified variation type counter CS1 is different. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 100, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the normal state is defined to be variable according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2. Then, as the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 increases (when it becomes 2 or more), a long variation (10 minutes) can be set as the variation time of the first special symbol.

Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 or 1, the first special symbol is used. Regardless of the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved balls), the hit normal reach (variation time 20 seconds) is defined in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 19", and the hit super reach (variation time 30). Seconds) is specified in the range of "20 to 198" for the value of the variable type counter CS1.

Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 to 4, the winning super reach (variation time 30 seconds) is a variable type counter regardless of the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1). The value of CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 19", and the value of the per-long fluctuation (variation time 10 minutes) is defined in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "20 to 198".

Further, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1). Regardless of the small hit super reach (variation time 30 seconds), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 198".

When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the hit / fail judgment result is wrong, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is 0 or 1, and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is 0 or 1. The long deviation (variation time 12 seconds) is specified in the range of "0 to 189" for the variable type counter CS1, and the deviation super reach (variable time 30 seconds) is defined as the value of the variable type counter CS1 "190 to 198". It is specified in the range. Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 to 4, the value of the deviation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 109" for the deviation super reach (variation time 30 seconds), and the deviation long fluctuation (variation). The value of the variable type counter CS1 (time 600 seconds) is defined in the range of "110 to 198".

When the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is 2 or 3 and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 0 or 1, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 149" for short deviation (variation time 8 seconds). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "150 to 198" for the long deviation (variation time 12 seconds). Further, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 to 4, the value of the deviation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 58" for the deviation super reach (variation time 30 seconds), and the deviation long fluctuation (variation). The value of the variable type counter CS1 (time 600 seconds) is specified in the range of "59 to 198".

With this configuration, if a right-handed game that is not appropriate in the normal state is performed and a plurality of special figure 2 hold (hold memory of the second special symbol) is acquired, it is executed in the left-handed game that is a proper game. It becomes easy to select a long fluctuation time (up to 10 minutes) as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the right-handed game executed in the normal state for the player.

Further, even if the operation handle 51 is mistakenly operated during the normal state and several balls are fired to the right side region, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long (30 seconds) during the normal state. Therefore, it is not possible to acquire a plurality of reserved balls in Special Figure 2. Therefore, a penalty can be imposed only on a player who intentionally performs a right-handed game during a normal state.

When using such a configuration, it is preferable to enable the following warning notification. That is, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state (it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the normal state), the lowest level (level 1) alert notification (for example). , Display the guidance display mode indicating "left-handed" in the small display area Dm3), and when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, the next level (level 2) strong warning alert (for example, the small display area Dm3) is executed. (Warning that the fluctuation time of Special Figure 1 will be longer if the special figure 2 hold is acquired any more in the sub-display area Ds and highlighting the display mode of It is advisable to configure it to execute the highest level (level 3) warning notification (for example, call a staff member) when both of them have long fluctuations.

As a result, it is possible to prevent both special map fluctuations from becoming long fluctuations for the player who unconsciously executed the right-handed game, and further, both special map fluctuations due to harassment. Even if there is a player who stops the game by making a long fluctuation, the staff can easily find the target pachinko machine 10.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents specified in the latent probability 2 table 202ae3 will be described. FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability 2 table 202ae3. The latent probability 2 table 202ae3 is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the latent probability state is set, and is referred to in the latent probability table a3 of the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, the point that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) is held as a condition element when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation in which each variation pattern is defined. It differs in that the range of the type counter CS1 is different. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted. Further, among the contents specified in the latent probability 2 table 202ae3, the parts specified with respect to the special figure 1 are the same as the above-mentioned normal 2 table 202ae1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. ..

With this configuration, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the latent probability state is determined by the case where the number of reserved balls is small (0 or 1) and the case where the number of reserved balls is large (2 or more). The length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol set in can be made different. That is, the number of lottery of the disadvantaged side (lottery of the first special symbol) executed during the latent state is the lottery of the advantageous side (lottery of the second special symbol) acquired in the state where the latent state is set. Can be varied according to the number of rights to execute (number of reserved balls).

In this embodiment, two tables for setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is supported. It may be configured to provide five tables. In this case, it suffices to configure so that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 increases, and in the table corresponding to the case where the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is the maximum value (4). , It is preferable to configure so that the fluctuation time of 10 minutes is always set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the player can be made to actively play a game for increasing the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2.

In the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, and when the variation start processing of each special symbol is executed, the first special symbol is first executed. It is configured to execute the fluctuation start processing of. Therefore, when setting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the period in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes the maximum value (4).

Next, the contents specified in the time saving table 202ae4 will be described with reference to FIG. 102 (a). FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table 202ae4. The time saving table 202ae4 is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol when the time saving state is set, and the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the second special symbol. It is configured so that a longer fluctuation time than (Special Figure 2) is set.

Specifically, when the symbol type is special figure 1 and the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" and a special fluctuation (15 seconds) is specified, and the hit / fail is specified. If the judgment result is a small hit, the small hit special fluctuation (15 seconds) is specified in the range where the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198". The value of the type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198", and special fluctuation (15 seconds) is specified.

Further, when the symbol type is special figure 2 and the hit / fail judgment result is a hit, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the range of "0 to 198" and a short fluctuation (30 seconds) is defined, and the hit / fail judgment result is determined. In the case of a small hit, the small hit short variation (0.5 seconds) is specified in the range where the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", and if the hit / fail judgment result is incorrect, the acquired variation type. The value of the counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 198", and the short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is specified.

That is, in the second embodiment, in the state where the time saving state is set, the change of the second special symbol is the reserved storage upper limit number of the second special symbol while the first special symbol change is executed once. It is configured to be able to execute more than (4). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily reduce (to 0) the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol during the time saving state.

In the second embodiment, a constant fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving state regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol or the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different variation pattern may be selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. For example, the acquired variation type counter CS1 may be configured. As the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 according to the value, the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 2 may be set.

With this configuration, the ease of fluctuation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the time-saving state can be made different depending on the fluctuation pattern set in the time-saving state. , It is possible to make it difficult to understand which special symbol changes and how much during the time saving state.

The time saving table 202af is a data table in which the end condition of the time saving state is specified, and is referred to when the time saving state is set, and the value specified for the corresponding counters is set. be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the contents specified in the time saving table 202af will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving table 202af. In this time saving table 202af, specific values (time saving end conditions) are specified for each of the time saving medium counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, and the small hit counter 203ad as the time saving end condition. Has been done.

Specifically, "100" is used for the time-saving / medium-time counter 203aa, "2" is used for the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, "4" is used for the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, and "1" is used for the small hit counter 03ad. Is specified, and it is preset so that the time saving state ends when the value of any of the counters becomes "0" in the state where the time saving state is set.

By defining a plurality of time reduction end conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which time reduction end condition is satisfied to end the time reduction condition. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the element set as the time saving end condition, and it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. In addition, since it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the time saving state will continue during the time saving state, it is possible to play the game in a state of tension.

In the present embodiment, only one specific value (time saving end condition) is specified for each counter for which the time saving end condition can be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of values are specified. May be configured to specify. Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is terminated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more times are not limited to this. It may be configured to end the time saving state when the time saving end condition is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, since there is only one jackpot type (big hit D) in which the time saving state is set, there is only one type of time saving end condition group specified in the time saving grant table 202af, but there are a plurality of jackpot types. When the time saving state is set in the above, a plurality of time saving end condition groups may be specified in the time saving grant table 202af so that different time saving end conditions can be set for each jackpot type.

Further, even if the same jackpot type is used, different time saving end conditions may be set according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, when the probability change state is set, the jackpot is won and the jackpot ends. You may set different time saving end conditions depending on whether the time saving state is set later or the normal state is set and the jackpot is won and the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends. In this case, for example, it is preferable to set a time saving end condition that is more difficult to be satisfied when shifting from the probability change state to the time saving state.

In this way, when the conditions for setting the time reduction state (time reduction establishment conditions) are different, by configuring to set the time reduction end conditions with different ease of establishment, which time reduction is established for the player. It is possible to make people interested in whether the time saving state is set by the conditions, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the player is suggested to the player the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving information) as an effect (see FIG. 93 (b)) executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state. By not executing the effect to be performed, the player is configured to play the game while giving a feeling of tension as to how long the time saving state will continue, but the game is not limited to this, for example. While the time saving state is set, it may be configured to execute an effect of suggesting (notifying) the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving information) to the player. In this case, for example, the current value of each counter for which the time reduction end condition is specified may be notified as the remaining time reduction information, or the time reduction end condition that is most likely to be satisfied may be determined and the determination result may be used. It may be configured to notify only the corresponding remaining time reduction information. Further, a means for calculating one numerical value (time reduction end risk) by fusing the update status of a plurality of time reduction end conditions may be provided, and the calculation result may be notified. In this way, by using the configuration that suggests (notifies) the remaining time reduction information to the player, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the timing at which the time reduction state ends.

Further, in the second embodiment, when shifting from the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), It is configured to set multiple time-saving end conditions (conditions for shifting the high-probability state of a normal symbol to a low-probability state), but in addition to this, it is configured to be a probabilistic state (high-probability state of a special symbol, normal). When shifting from the high-probability state of the symbol to the latent state (high-probability state of the special symbol, low-probability state of the normal symbol), a plurality of time-saving end conditions may be set.

In this case, for example, the probability change state is set for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (for example, the period until the special symbol change is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot), and the time saving end condition is set during the probability change state. When it is established, it is preferable to configure it so that the latent state that is most advantageous to the player is set in the remaining period of the predetermined period described above. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 of the second embodiment has a time saving medium counter 203aa, a special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, and a small hit counter with respect to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that 203ad is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving middle counter 203aa is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state, and whether the time saving end condition (first time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is satisfied. It is used to determine whether or not.

In this time saving medium counter 203aa, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time is a specific jackpot type (big hit D) by the jackpot end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), it is specified in the time saving table 202af. The value (100) is set.

Then, it is subtracted (see S273 in FIG. 106) in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, and whether the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after the subtraction. Whether or not it is determined (S277). Further, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S2855 in FIG. 108).

As described above, the time saving / medium counter 203aa subtracts the value regardless of whether the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol or the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed. The first time-saving end condition set based on the value of the time-saving medium counter 203aa is the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving end conditions set.

In this embodiment, since the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203aa is not when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped but when the fluctuation starts. Is configured to update.

That is, in the configuration of the present embodiment in which the variation (lottery) of a plurality of special symbols is performed at the same time, for example, while the special symbol variation executed 100th time by one special symbol is executed, the other special symbol is executed. Depending on the situation, the 101st and 102nd special symbol changes may be executed.

Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the process of updating the value of the time saving / medium counter 203aa is executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol variation outside the predetermined range becomes the special symbol variation in the time saving state. In this embodiment, the update work related to the time saving end condition is performed at the start time of the special symbol change.

The special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is set. It is used to determine whether or not it holds.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time is a specific jackpot type (big hit) by the jackpot end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. When it is determined to be D) (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107) and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), the time saving grant table 202af is displayed. The specified value (2) is set.

Then, when it is determined in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) that the change (lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (S274: Yes in FIG. 106), the value is changed. 1 Subtraction (update) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after subtraction (S277). Further, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S2855 in FIG. 108).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the second change of the first special symbol is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the second time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is configured in.

The special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the time saving end condition (third time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state is set. It is used to determine whether or not it holds.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed this time is a specific jackpot type (big hit) by the jackpot end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. When it is determined to be D) (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107) and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), the time saving grant table 202af is displayed. The specified value (4) is set.

Then, when it is determined in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) that the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed (S274: No in FIG. 106), the value is changed. 1 Subtraction (update) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after subtraction (S277). Further, when any of the plurality of time reduction end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S2855 in FIG. 108).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the fourth change of the second special symbol is executed in the state where the time saving state is set, the third time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is configured in.

The small hit counter 203ad is a counter for measuring the number of times a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, and is a time saving end condition (fourth) for ending the time saving state. It is used to determine whether or not the time saving end condition) is satisfied.

The small hit counter 203ad has a specific big hit type (big hit D) corresponding to the big hit game executed this time by the big hit end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the big hit game. (S2752: Yes in FIG. 107), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (S2753: Yes in FIG. 107), it is specified in the time saving table 202af. The value (1) is set.

Then, when it is determined in the small hit control process 2 (see S22455 in FIG. 108) that the small hit is won in the time reduction state (time reduction) in the lottery of the first special symbol (S2851: Yes in FIG. 108). , The value is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S2852 in FIG. 108), and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after the subtraction (S2853). Further, when any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (see, for example, S278 in FIG. 106).

That is, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that one small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the time saving state is set (when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit winning is completed). In addition, the fourth time saving end condition is satisfied, and the state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, various counter values for which the first time reduction end condition to the third time reduction end condition are set are updated according to the number of fluctuations (lottery) of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. It is configured to be done. That is, the above-mentioned first time reduction end condition to third time reduction end condition are end conditions related to the number of fluctuations in the special figure. In addition, various counter values for which the fourth time reduction end condition is set are updated according to the lottery result of the special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned fourth time reduction end condition is a special figure lottery result-related end condition. In addition, regarding the time saving end condition used also in the above-mentioned first embodiment, that is, the configuration in which the time saving state ends based on the winning of the jackpot during the time saving state, the time saving state is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Since it is to be terminated, it is a condition for termination related to the special drawing lottery result.

In the present embodiment, the end condition related to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is set based on the second time-saving end condition (4 times) set based on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. The third time reduction end condition (2 times) and the 1st time reduction end condition (100 times) set based on the number of fluctuations of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol are set. ..

Here, the number of times set as the first time saving end condition (100 times) is the number of times set as the second time saving end condition (4 times) and the number of times set as the third time saving end condition (2 times). It is configured to be larger than the total value (6 times). Therefore, when the processing related to the game is normally performed, the second time reduction end condition or the third time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied.

However, by setting the first time reduction end condition, for example, when a problem occurs in the update process of each counter value corresponding to the first time reduction end condition or the second time reduction end condition, the time reduction state can be set. The maximum period can be specified in advance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the time saving state is set excessively for the player.

In the second embodiment, the value (6) obtained by adding the value (100) of the first time reduction end condition, the value of the second time reduction end condition (2), and the value of the third time reduction end condition (4). ), But not limited to this, the value of the second time reduction end condition (2) and the third time reduction as the value of the time reduction medium counter 203aa corresponding to the first time reduction end condition. It may be configured to set a value (for example, 5) smaller than the value (6) which is the sum of the values of the end condition (4). With such a configuration, the time saving end condition that can be satisfied during the time saving state can be set in a complicated manner, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth special symbol lottery result-related end condition is set as the fourth time-saving end condition according to the number of small hits of the first special symbol, but the second special symbol is not limited to this. The time saving end condition may be set according to the number of small hit winnings, or the time saving ending condition may be set according to the number of small hit winnings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state are set based on the processing result (change number of times, lottery result) of the change-related processing of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state may be set so as to be possible based on the processing result (change number of times, lottery result) of the fluctuation-related processing of the ordinary symbol.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above in that the standby flag 223aa is added, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The standby flag 223aa is a flag for determining whether or not the small hit game can be frequently executed during the latent state, and when the small hit game cannot be frequently executed. It is set to on. This standby flag 223aa is set when the latent probability state is set after the big hit game ends, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end time of the big hit game (when the ending period has elapsed), that is, the latent probability. It is set to ON when the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol cannot be executed immediately after the state is set (see S4942 in FIG. 114).

Then, in the variation display setting process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 115), it is determined whether the variation display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to ON (see S5051 in FIG. 115). When it is set to on (S5051: Yes in FIG. 115), it is set to off (S5052 in FIG. 115), and the effect indicating that the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed during the latent state. Is executed.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences.

The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment described above in that the time saving state can be set as a gaming state, and various types for determining the period in which the time saving state is set accordingly. It differs in that it is configured to execute processing (processing for updating various counter values for satisfying the time saving end condition, processing for determining whether or not the time saving ending condition is satisfied).

Here, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). This special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) is the first special symbol variation start processing (S208) or the second special symbol with respect to the special symbol variation processing (see S104 of FIG. 33) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the time saving update process (S251) is executed after the variation start process (S210) is executed, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the time saving update process (S251) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 105) will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (S251). This time saving update process (S251) executes a process of updating the values of various counters for satisfying the time saving end condition in a state where the time saving state is set, and executes a special symbol variation start process. It updates the values of various counters corresponding to the time-saving end condition (end condition related to the number of fluctuations in the special figure) that can be satisfied based on the fact.

When the time saving update process (S251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the time saving state based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203m (S271), and in the time saving state, If it is determined that there is no such thing (S271: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is shortened (S271: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special figure change is started (S272).

In the process of S272, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 of FIG. 34) or the second special symbol change start process executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 105) being executed this time. In (see S210 of FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the variation start of the corresponding special symbol is set.

When it is determined that the special figure change has not been started in the process of S272 (S272: No), it is the case where the new special figure change is not executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 105). Therefore, this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure change has started in the process of S272 (S272: Yes), then the value of the time saving medium counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S273), and then the special figure change this time is the first. It is determined whether it is a special symbol (S274).

In this process of S274, the first special symbol change start process (see S208 of FIG. 34) or the second special symbol change start process executed in the special symbol change process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 105) being executed this time. Among the processes (see S210 in FIG. 39), it is determined which special symbol variation start is set.

In the process of S274, when it is determined that the current variation is the special figure 1 (S274: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 variation counter 203ab is subtracted by 1 (S275), and the process proceeds to the process of S277. If it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 1 (special figure 2) (S274: No), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is subtracted by 1 (S276), and the process proceeds to S277. ..

In the process of S277, it is determined whether the values of the time reduction / middle counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac after subtraction (after updating) are values that satisfy the time reduction end condition (that is, 0). If it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S277: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied (S277: Yes), the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203m (S278), and various time reduction related counters (time reduction assignment table 202af) are specified. The value of (various counters) is cleared to 0 (S279), and this process is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the process of S277, the information indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the type of the satisfied time saving end condition are shown. A time-saving end command containing information is set. This time saving end command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other commands by the external output process (see S2401 in FIG. 54) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. ..

Next, the contents of the jackpot end processing 2 (S2562) will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S2562). The jackpot end process 2 (S2562) adds a process to be executed when the jackpot type is jackpot D to the jackpot end process (S2512 in FIG. 57) of the first embodiment described above, and a process thereof. The differences are in that some of the configurations other than are changed, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot end process 2 (S2562) is executed, first, it is determined whether the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2701), and if it is set to ON (S2701: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g. Is set to on (S2702), the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to off (S2751), and then the same processing of S2703 and S2704 as the jackpot end processing of the first embodiment described above (see S2512 in FIG. 57) is performed. Execute and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701 when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is not on (S2701: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot executed this time is the jackpot D (S2752), and the jackpot D is used. If it is determined to be present (S2752: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot was the latent state (S2753).

In the process of S2753, when it is determined that the state is latent (S2753: Yes), the value specified in the time saving table 202af (see FIG. 102 (b)) is set to various counters (time saving medium counter 203aa, special). FIG. 1 Fluctuation counter 203ab, Special FIG. 2 Fluctuation counter 203ac, Small hit counter 203ad) are set, and the process proceeds to S2704.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2752 that the current jackpot is not the jackpot D (S2752: No), or when it is determined in the processing of S2753 that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not the latent state (S2753: No). ) Ends this process as it is. The processing of S2752 and the processing of S2753 are executed based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203m.

Next, the contents of the small hit control process 2 (S2455) will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit control process 2 (S2455). The small hit control process 2 (S2455) differs from the small hit control process of the first embodiment described above (see S2405 in FIG. 58) in that the content of the process executed at the small hit end timing is changed. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the small hit control process 2 (S2455) is executed, the same processes of S2801 to S2807 as the small hit control process of the first embodiment described above (see S2405 in FIG. 58) are executed, and then the small hit of this time is executed. It is determined whether the game is based on the small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state (S2851), and it is determined that the game is the small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state. (S2851: Yes), the value of the small hit counter 203ad is subtracted by 1 (S2852).

Next, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (whether the value of the small hit counter 203ad is 0) (S2853), and if it is determined that it is satisfied, a normal state is set in the game state storage area 203m (S2854). ), The value of various time reduction related counters (various counters specified in the time reduction assignment table 202af) is cleared to 0 (S2855), and this processing is terminated.

Although detailed description is omitted, when it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied in the process of S2853, the information indicating that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the type of the satisfied time saving end condition are shown. A time-saving end command containing information is set. This time saving end command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other commands by the external output process (see S2401 in FIG. 54) executed in the main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S2851 when it is determined that the winning is not a small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state (S2851: No), or in the processing of S2853, the time saving end condition is not satisfied ( If it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ad is 1 or more), this process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 115, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the differences from the processing. The control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is a command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 63) with respect to the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above. The command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) is replaced with the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 64), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 2 (S4252 in FIG. 110) is replaced with the special figure 1. 2 The variation start process 2 (see S4254 in FIG. 111) is replaced with the state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) instead of the variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 64). 113 S4262) is replaced with the jackpot-related process (see S4802 in FIG. 72), the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851 in FIG. 114) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73), and the variable display setting process 2 is performed. (S4162 in FIG. 115) is executed, and the reserved ball number processing (see S4258 in FIG. 112) is executed when the reserved ball number command is received. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the above-mentioned effect is executed with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. Specifically, the effect mode of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, the effect mode of the time-saving medium effect executed during the time-saving state, and the effect of the latent effect during the latent state. There are some differences from the aspect.

Here, the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4151) will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4151). This command determination process 2 (S4151) replaces the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (see S4202 in FIG. 64) with respect to the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 63) of the first embodiment described above. The variation start process 2 (S4252 in FIG. 110) is executed, and the special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254 in FIG. 111) is executed in place of the special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 64), and the status command is received. When the status command reception process 2 (S4262 in FIG. 113) is executed instead of the process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) and it is determined that the hold ball count command has been received (S4207: Yes), the hold ball count process is performed. It differs in that (S4258) is executed, and is the same except for the execution. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) is executed. The contents of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4252) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4252). The special figure 1 variation start process 2 (S4252) is added to the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 64) in that a process to be executed when the gaming state is a time saving state is added. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 1 variation start process 2 (S4252) is executed, first, the same processes of S4301 to S4303 as the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process (see S4202 of FIG. 64) are executed, and then the current game. When it is determined whether the state is the time saving state (S4371) and it is determined that the state is not the time saving state (S4371: No), it is the same as the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 64) S4304 to S4306. Is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4371 that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4371: Yes), a display command indicating a special variation pattern is set (S4372), and this process is terminated. When a display command is set in the process of S4372, the display command is output to the display control device 114, and the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to any special symbol change. A special variation pattern is executed, which makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the effect is being executed (see FIG. 93 (b)).

Specifically, the display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the effect display using the third symbol is not performed in the main display area Dm and the fourth symbol showing the variable display of each special symbol is displayed. Is reduced and formed, and an effect is executed in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the fourth symbol as compared with other gaming states.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which special symbol lottery (variation) has been executed how many times during the time saving state, and the effect executed in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 93 (b)) can be watched.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is not displayed and the fourth symbol is difficult to see as a special variation pattern in which it is difficult for the player to grasp which special symbol variation the variation effect corresponds to. However, as another configuration, for example, the fourth symbol may be configured to be notified outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the pseudo-decorative symbol that does not correspond to the lottery status of the special symbol may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner.

In this case, for example, the pseudo-decorative symbol is subjected to a time-saving variation effect that changes the period from the setting of the time-saving state to the end of the time-saving state, and as the time-saving variation effect, a special symbol executed during the time-saving state is executed. It is advisable to perform an effect in which the number of lottery times and the number of lottery of special symbols by symbol type are not suggested to the player. With this configuration, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested without discomfort during the time saving state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) is executed. The contents of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254). The special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254) is added to the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 65) in that a process to be executed when the gaming state is a time saving state is added. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the content of the process added in the special figure 2 variation start process 2 (S4254) (the process of S4391 and S4392) is added in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process 2 (S4252). Since the only difference is that the target of the processing (S4371, S4372) is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state is configured so that the special variation pattern is executed regardless of the type of the special symbol. Therefore, which type of special symbol is executed during the time saving state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the game has been executed.

Next, it is executed in the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) with reference to FIG. 112. The contents of the reserved ball number processing (S4258) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S4258). In this reserved ball number processing (S4258), a process for setting an effect mode of the jackpot game in-game effect (see FIG. 91 (a)) is executed based on the reserved ball number command received during the jackpot game.

When the reserved ball number processing (S4258) is executed, first, the symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the received command (reserved ball number command) are extracted (S5101). The value of the reserved ball number counter (1st special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S5102), S5103. Move to the processing of.

In the process of S5103, based on the information set (stored) in the subordinate state setting area 223k, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game currently corresponding to the jackpots A and C is in progress (S5103), and the jackpots A and C are set. When it is determined that the corresponding jackpot game is not in progress, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot for which the latent probability state is not set after the jackpot game is completed (S5103), the process proceeds to S4505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpots A and C is in progress (S5103), then the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol (the number of reserved balls in the normal figure) is executed by the current reserved ball number command. When it is determined whether or not has been added (S5104), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the normal figure has been added, that is, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m has been added by 1 (S5104: Yes). ), A display command indicating an effect gauge corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the normal figure after addition is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S4505.

When the display command is set in the process of S5105, it is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the other display commands, and the pseudo hold area Dm10a to the normal figure 3 hold area Dm10d of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode (effect gauge) is variably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the normal figure.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5104 that the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is not added, that is, when it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is not added (S5104: Yes). Then, when it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2) has been added (S5106), and it is determined that the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 has been added, that is, the second When it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223d has been added by 1 (S5106: Yes), then it is determined whether the added special figure 2 reserved ball number is 3 or more (S5107), 3 When it is determined that the above is the case (S5107: Yes), the latent state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is completed, that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player is a long time (10 minutes). A display command indicating a blessing effect for notifying that the latent state in which the variable time can be executed is set (S5108) is set (S5108), and the process proceeds to S4505.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is not added (S5106: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4505 and the present process is terminated. In the process of S4505, for example, a display command for changing the number of reserved balls (held symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the display mode according to each game state is set. Will be done.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the ball passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650) during the jackpot game, and is special after the jackpot game is completed. It is configured so that a high probability state of the symbol is set, and an opening operation (V opening pattern) in which the ball easily passes through a specific area can be executed during the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to execute the process of changing the effect mode of the effect during the jackpot game in the above-mentioned reserved ball number process (S4258) after the second round of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A and the jackpot C. Further, in the first round game, it may be configured to be executed when the ball passes through a specific area. With this configuration, the player is dissatisfied because the latent state is not set after the jackpot game is completed, even though the effect of encouraging the increase in the number of reserved balls is executed during the jackpot game. Can be suppressed.

Next, the contents of the state command reception process 2 (S4262) will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the state command reception process 2 (S4262). This state command receiving process 2 (S4262) differs from the above-mentioned state command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) in that a control process is added when a time saving state is set, and other processes are added. The contents are the same. Therefore, elements having the same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the state command reception process 2 (S4262) is executed, the same processes of S4601 to S4610 as the above-mentioned state command reception process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the gaming state has not changed to the latent state (S4605: No), then it is determined whether the gaming state has been changed to the probabilistic state (S4651), and the probable change is made. When it is determined that the state has been changed (S4651: Yes), the same processing of S4608 and S4609 as the above-mentioned state command reception processing (see S4212 in FIG. 69) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

In the process of S4651, when it is determined that the state has not been changed to the probabilistic state, that is, when it is determined that the state has been changed to the time saving state (S4651: Yes), the special figure 2 (No. 2) stored in the winning information storage area 223b. 2 The winning information of the special symbol) is read out (S4652), the effect mode based on the winning / failing judgment result (preliminary judgment result) of the read winning information is set (S4653), and the display command indicating the pullback mode is set (S4654). , S4610.

As described above, when the time saving state is set, the winning information of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) stored in the winning information storage area 223b at that time is determined in advance, and the determination result is obtained. It is configured to set the production mode of the time-saving and medium-time production based on. As the effect mode set here, for example, the type of the character 819 displayed in the effect shown in FIG. 93 (b) can be changed based on the pre-discrimination result, or the background color of the main display area Dm can be changed. There is an effect mode in which the character 811 is displayed, the movement speed is varied, and the determination result (presence or absence of a big hit) of the pre-determination can be suggested depending on the set effect mode.

Therefore, by grasping the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after setting the time reduction state, it is possible to predict the game result during the time reduction state. In addition, when a specific display mode (effect mode) is executed, the game can be played while expecting a big hit.

In the second embodiment, only the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is preliminarily discriminated, and the effect mode (see FIG. 93 (b)) in the time saving state is set based on the pre-discrimination result. However, other configurations may be used, for example, each symbol (first special symbol, second special) stored in the winning information storage area 223b at the time when the time saving state is set. The winning information of the symbol (design, ordinary symbol) may be determined in advance, and the effect mode of the time-saving and medium-time effect may be set based on the determination result.

In addition, as an effect mode of the time-saving medium-time effect, an effect mode suggesting whether or not to win a big hit while the time-saving state is set is provided, but an effect mode suggesting other contents may be provided. Well, for example, it may be configured to set an effect mode suggesting that the time saving end condition is satisfied at an early stage (for example, winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol), or among the big hit winnings. , The effect mode suggesting only the jackpot in which the latent state can be set after the jackpot game is completed may be set.

In this way, by variably setting various conditions for the effect mode of the time-saving and medium-time effect executed during the time-saving state, the player pays close attention to the time-saving and medium-time effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by paying the player attention to the effect being executed, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the content (special symbol type, number of changes) of the special symbol change actually executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the contents of the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) executed in the hit-related process (S4219) of the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related process 2 (S4851). The jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) executes a process corresponding to various commands related to the received jackpot game, and is the jackpot-related process of the first embodiment described above (S4802 in FIG. 72 (a)). On the other hand, the difference is that the process executed when the jackpot start command is received, the process executed when the ending command is received, and the process executed when the jackpot end timing is reached are different. The other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) is executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4901: Yes), the second special symbol reserved ball count counter. Read the value of 223d (S4931). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter read in the process of S4931 is 2 or more (S4932). If it is determined in the process of S4932 that the value of the counter is 2 or more (S4932: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S4933), and this process is terminated.

That is, when the value of the counter is 2 or more in the processing of S4932, it means that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2) after the end of the big hit game is 2 or more, so that it is latent. As a game in a certain state, the condition that a long-time (10 minutes) fluctuation time can be set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is already satisfied. Therefore, at the jackpot game start timing (during the opening period of the jackpot game), the normal jackpot start effect is executed without executing the jackpot middle securing effect (see FIG. 91 (a)).

As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 from reaching the upper limit value (4) even though the effect of securing the jackpot is executed, resulting in a meaningless effect. Can be done. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot game is changed depending on the amount of the reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the start of the jackpot game.

Thereby, for example, it is possible to set the effect mode according to the actual game situation rather than the configuration in which the effect mode executed during the opening period of the jackpot game is changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, even if the jackpot is won during the game state (latent state) in which the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 can be secured, if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 at the start of the jackpot game, the number is the same. Unless the reserved memory (reserved ball) of the second special symbol is newly secured during the jackpot game, the game advantageous to the player is not executed in the latent probability state set after the jackpot game ends, so that the latent probability state is in progress. If the jackpot is won, the player will be provided with a disadvantageous situation if the normal jackpot start effect is always executed. On the other hand, useful information is provided to the player by configuring the effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot game to be variable depending on the amount of the reserved balls in Special Figure 2 at the start of the jackpot game. It is possible to execute an effect that can be performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4932, when it is determined that the value of the counter (second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) is not 2 or more (S4932: No), the jackpot middle securing effect (see FIG. 91 (a)) is performed. The jackpot start command for display including is set (S4934), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the command received this time is not the jackpot start command (S4901: No), then the jackpot-related processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4802 in FIG. 72 (a)) is performed. When the same processing of S4903 to S4905 is executed and it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S4905 (S4905: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is read out (S4935), and the counter. It is determined whether the value of is 2 or more (S4936).

In the process of S4936, when it is determined that the value of the counter is 2 or more, that is, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is 2 or more at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game (S4936: Yes), that Since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) after the end of the jackpot game is two or more, it is a long time as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol as a game in the latent state (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2). Since the condition that the fluctuation time of 10 minutes) can be set is satisfied, a display ending command for showing a normal ending effect (see FIG. 91 (b)) is set (S4937), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4936 that the value of the counter is not 2 or more (S4936: No), a display for executing the hold securing effect (see FIG. 92 (a)) during the ending period of the jackpot game. Set the ending command for (S4938), and end this process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game is configured so that the effect mode during the ending period of the jackpot game is changed according to the amount of the reserved balls in the special figure 2 at the end of the jackpot game (at the start of the ending period). It is possible to perform an effect that can provide useful information to a person, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the process of S4905, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4905: No), then it is determined whether or not the command indicating the end timing (ending period elapsed timing) of the jackpot game has been received (S4939). If it is determined that the command has been received (S4939: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the counter indicating the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) is 1 or more (S4940). If it is determined that the value is 1 or more (S4940: Yes), the display RUSH command is set (S4941), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the display RUSH command is set, the display mode (see FIG. 92 (b)) indicating the full power mode after the jackpot game is completed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4940 that the value is not 1 or more (0), the standby flag 223aa is set to ON (S4942), and the display standby command is set (S4943). This process ends.

Here, if it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (0) in the processing of S4940, the break zone is set because the change of the second special symbol cannot be started after the jackpot game is completed. The display mode shown (see FIG. 93 (a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process 2 (S4162). In the variation display setting process 2 (S4162), the variation start flag (special figure 2 variation start flag 223f) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is turned on with respect to the variation display setting process (FIG. 73S4112) described above. The difference is that a new process is added to a part of the process executed when it is set, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variation display setting process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S5001 to S5008 as the above-mentioned variation display setting process (FIG. 73S4112) are executed, and when the process of S5008 is completed, the standby flag 223aa is then set. If it is determined whether it is set to on (S5051) and it is determined that it is set to on, that is, if a break zone is set (S5051: Yes), the standby flag 223aa is set to off (S5051). S5052), the display RUSH command is set (S5053), and then the same processes of S5009 to S5012 as the above-mentioned variable display setting process (FIG. 73S4112) are executed, and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the through gate 67 is arranged on the upstream side of the right side region of the game board 13, the second entry port 640 is arranged in the downstream direction thereof, and further. A winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) is arranged below the winning device. With this configuration, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the right-handed game executed during the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), the ball is passed through the gate 67 or the second ball. It is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the mouth 640.

Further, in the second embodiment, the distribution member 700 is provided on the most upstream side of the right side region of the game board 13, and the balls launched by the right-handed game alternately have a plurality (two) flow paths (first). It is configured to be distributed to the flow path 701 and the second flow path 702). With this configuration, the number of balls passing through the through gate 67 can be limited. In addition, it is possible to have a certain interval (about 1 second) at the timing when the sphere flows into each flow path. Further, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol lottery (variation) executed based on passing through the through gate 67 is variable according to the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol and the set gaming state. It is configured to be configurable.

As a result, for example, when one ball passes through the through gate 67, the one ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 (for example, in a low probability state of a normal symbol and a normal symbol). A state in which the number of reserved balls is 1 or more) and a state in which it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640 (for example, a high probability state of a normal symbol or a low probability state of a normal symbol and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is 0). State) can be easily set.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned one ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, and the time when the one ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. Then, the first state in which the winning game has already ended, and the second state in which the normal symbol change has not ended when the one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. Is configured to be configurable.

With this configuration, it is difficult for one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to enter the second entry port 640, and further, other balls other than the one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can also enter. It is possible to subdivide and set a state in which it is difficult to ball and a state in which other balls other than one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter.

As a result, in a continuously executed game, three or more patterns can be set as the ease of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 (the degree of entry), so that various playability can be achieved. Can be provided.

In the second embodiment described above, the ball flow when the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the through gate 67 and the second entry port 640 has been described in detail, but the second entry port has been described. Even if various patterns are set for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation executed when the ball enters the 640 and the opening operation timing of each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65). good.

For example, in the second embodiment, the ball flow time of the first flow path 701 is 1.6 seconds, the ball flow time of the second flow path 702 is 1 second, and further, each flow. The ball is configured to flow into the road at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the game state and the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is 1 or more, that is, when the ball passing through the through gate 67 can easily enter the second entrance 640, one The ball passes through the through gate 67, and is won by a normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage, and the timing when one ball enters the second entrance 640 (passing through the through gate 67). (Approximately 1 second after), the other sphere that reached the distribution member 700 next to the one sphere (the sphere that reached the distribution member 700 0.6 seconds after the one sphere) is in the first flow path. It is the timing when 0.4 seconds have passed since the inflow into 701.

Therefore, each prize is won at the timing when the other balls described above flow down the first flow path 701 and reach each prize device (V prize device 650, variable prize device 65) provided below the right side region of the game board 13. When the device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) is configured to set the variation time (for example, 1 second) of the second special symbol so that the opening operation can be performed in the winning game (for example, the small winning game). good.

With this configuration, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to easily make each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) win a ball during the small hit game. , It is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously perform the right-handed game.

Further, as in the present embodiment, the ball flow time of the plurality of flow paths into which the balls launched by the right-handed game are distributed and flow in is different by the distribution interval (0.6 seconds) of the balls. Even when a configuration is used in which a plurality of balls arrive at each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) at the same timing by configuring the timing at which the balls are discharged from each flow path to be substantially the same. For example, the sphere that reaches the distribution member 700 next to the other sphere (the sphere that flows down the first flow path 701) (the sphere that flows down the second flow path 702 next to the one sphere) is also described above. Each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) will be reached at the same timing as the other balls.

Therefore, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to easily make each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) win a plurality of balls during the small hit game, so that the player can easily win a prize. It is possible to make it easier to continuously execute a right-handed game. Further, when a ball flowing down the second flow path 702 next to the first ball enters the second entry port 640, the ball is transferred to each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65). Since it is not possible to win a prize, it is possible to set a special state in which it is possible to provide a game situation that is advantageous to the player if the lottery of ordinary symbols is not continuously won.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 89, the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the ball flowing down the second flow path 702 are both winning devices (V winning device 650, It is configured to flow down a flow path that can win a prize to the variable winning device 65), but the ball that flows down one of the flow paths has a flow path that can win a prize in either the V winning device 650 or the variable winning device 65. The ball may be configured to flow down, and the ball flowing down the other flow path may flow down the flow path that can be won only by the winning device (variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side.

With this configuration, the ease of winning the ball varies depending on the flow timing of the ball in each flow path and the type of the winning device that is opened in the winning game (for example, the small hit game). Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the content of the winning game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, by configuring at least one of the plurality of channels so that each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) can win a prize, a sphere flows down the channel. At that time, it is possible to pay attention only to the opening operation timing without worrying about the type of the winning device that is opened in the hit game (for example, the small hit game). Therefore, since the game content to be watched by the player can be different depending on the flow condition of the ball in each flow path, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ball flow between the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the ball that has been launched to the right region after the ball has been described. For example, a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and a ball that has passed through the through gate 67. By configuring the ball flow with the ball launched to the right side region before the ball as follows, the ball is excessively placed in the second entry port 640 and each winning device (V winning device 650, variable). It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the winning device 65).

That is, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the state where the probability variation state is set as the gaming state, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 before that has already flowed down the second flow path 702. , The ball does not enter the second entry port 640.

In addition, one ball hits the right in front of the one ball rather than the period until the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) of the second special symbol to be executed elapses after the one ball enters the second entrance 640. By configuring the ball fired by the game to flow down on the variable winning device 65 provided on the downstream side of each winning device, the period until the ball flows down is shorter, so that one ball becomes the second entry port. During a hit game (small hit game) executed based on entering a ball in 640, a ball fired before one ball is suppressed from winning a prize device that is opened by the hit game. can do.

In addition, unlike the above-mentioned configuration, it is longer than the period until one ball enters the second entry port 640 and the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) of the second special symbol to be executed elapses. The ball launched by the right-handed game in front of the ball is configured so that the period until it flows down on the variable winning device 65 provided on the downstream side of each winning device is longer, and the right-handed game is performed. It may be configured to increase the number of balls that can be won during the winning game by continuously executing the game.

In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the period (time) in which the sphere flows down each flow path is defined as a specific period (time), but in reality, the sphere Since the coefficient of friction generated between the ball and the lower surface of the ball flow differs due to rotational movement, humidity, dust adhering to the ball, etc., the period during which the ball flows down each flow path is not always constant, and is about 0.1. An error of about a second occurs. The ball flow period specified in each of the above-described embodiments shows the average value.

Therefore, in reality, a ball may flow down each flow path in a flow time different from the period defined as the ball flow down period of each flow path in each embodiment. In this way, an error occurs in the time when the ball actually flows down, so that it is possible to give an unexpected privilege to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. It can improve the interest of the game. In this case, by setting the error range of the flow period in advance as the period (valid period) in which the benefit can be granted, fraudulent acts that intentionally operate the flow of the ball to acquire the benefit can be performed. If it is done outside the valid period, the fraudulent activity can be invalidated.

In the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won in a state where the latent probability state is set, the normal state is not set directly after the jackpot game ends, but for a predetermined period. It is configured to set the normal state after passing through the time saving state of, and if the jackpot is won during the time saving state, the latent state is set after the jackpot ends than if the jackpot is won during the normal state. It is configured to be easy to do.

Further, the pull-back effect in which the effect mode indicating that the time saving state is set is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be executed. In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state, a plurality of ending conditions can be set, and the time saving state is terminated when any of the ending conditions of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time-saving state ends, and by having the player predict the end timing of the time-saving state using the effect content of the pull-back effect. Was configured to increase.

In addition to such a configuration, the effect end condition for ending the pullback effect can be set, and the pullback effect is ended when the effect end condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the time saving state ends. May be. As a result, it is possible to make the setting status of the time saving state different from the execution status of the pullback effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the game state currently set, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this case, the effect end condition is set by using the same element as the element for setting the end condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1, the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2, the number of small hit executions, etc.). It is preferable to configure the time saving end condition (for example, the number of times) set for each element so as to be different from the above-mentioned time saving end condition. As a result, the effect end condition can be satisfied at the timing when the time reduction end condition can be actually satisfied, so that the player can be made to think that the time reduction end condition is satisfied at the timing when the pullback effect is completed. ..

In addition, a plurality of time reduction end conditions can be set, for example, the first time reduction end condition (special figure 1 fluctuation number 2 times, special figure 2 fluctuation number 4 times, small hit execution number (winning number) 1 time). One of the second time reduction end conditions (special figure 1 fluctuation number 50 times, special figure 2 fluctuation number 10 times, small hit execution number (winning number) 50 times), the type of special symbol at the time of big hit winning, and the game state It is preferable to configure it so that it can be set according to the above, and similarly, it is preferable to configure it so that a plurality of production end conditions can be set.

With this configuration, the pull-back effect is executed and the time-saving state is set according to the setting content of the time-saving end condition and the setting content of the effect end condition, even though the normal state is set. Since it is possible to easily set the state in which the pullback effect is not executed even though it is set, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set game state. can.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the time saving state is provided in order to suppress the existence of the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in the state where the normal state is set, as the above-mentioned effect ending condition, a special feature is provided. It may be configured to set the effect end condition that is satisfied when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is 0. As a result, even though the time saving state is set and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 exists, the effect ending condition is satisfied and the pull-back effect indicating that the time saving state is set ends. It is possible to suppress that. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that causes discomfort to the player.

Further, in the second embodiment, the second entry is performed in both the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol). Since it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball opening 640, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the current gaming state according to the degree of entry of the ball into the second entry port 640. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set gaming state.

In the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the high probability state) is different from that of the normal symbol. In addition, the probability of winning a prize in a lottery of ordinary symbols is also different. Therefore, it is configured so that the current gaming state can be predicted by checking the opening operation status of the electric accessory 640a instead of the ball entering condition into the second entry port 640. Therefore, it is possible to provide an element for a skilled player who has played a game for a long period of time and has grasped the open state of the electric accessory 640a in each game state to grasp the current game state.

Further, at the end of the big hit, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is determined, and if the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 at the end of the big hit, the pullback effect is not executed even if the time saving state is set. It may be configured. Further, in the present embodiment, it is easy to shift the time saving state to the gaming state for the purpose of reducing the number of holdings in the special figure 2 and the latent state which is more advantageous to the player when the big hit is won than the normal state. It is used to achieve the two purposes of the game state for the purpose of achieving this, but of course, it may be used to achieve either of the purposes, and within the period in which the time saving state is set, it may be used. It may be configured to be used to achieve one purpose during a predetermined period and to be used to achieve the other purpose during a period other than the predetermined period.

Further, when a configuration for setting an effect end condition different from the time reduction end condition is used, as the effect end condition, as described above, one from a plurality of values for each element for which the end condition is set as in the time reduction end condition. A pattern that sets the value of and ends the pull-back effect when any of the end conditions is satisfied, and a predetermined effect period (for example, when the number of changes of the special symbol is 30 times (when the time saving state is not completed). A pattern that continuously executes the pull-back effect during the period until the number of times (the number of times within the existing range) is reached, and notifies whether or not the current time is shortened at the timing when the effect period ends. A pattern for terminating the pullback effect based on the satisfaction of the time saving end condition may be made selectable, and the pullback effect may be executed based on the selected pattern.

In this case, each pattern may be configured so that the player can select each pattern based on the player's operation on the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the pull-back effect in a mode desired by each player.

Further, after the pull-back effect is completed, a suggestion effect (normal effect) for suggesting that the normal state is set may be executed, or the time saving state or the normal state may be executed. It may be configured to execute a special suggestion effect that suggests something incomprehensible to the player. In addition, when the pullback effect is completed, after the normal effect is executed for a predetermined period, the condition that the pullback effect can be executed again (for example, the condition that the time saving end condition is not satisfied) is satisfied. It may be configured to execute the pullback effect again based on the determination result, or as the effect data for executing the pullback effect, a predetermined period (for example, special symbol variation is performed 10 times). When a period, a period until the effect execution period elapses for 2 minutes, etc.) has elapsed, the effect data may be set so that the normal effect is once executed.

With this configuration, even after the pull-back effect is finished, the player can be expected to play the game even if the pull-back effect is executed again. Further, even if the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state has a pattern in which the time saving ending condition is likely to be satisfied and a pattern in which the time saving ending condition is difficult to be satisfied, the timing for ending the pullback effect is similarly set. Therefore, a pattern is set in which the time saving end condition is easily satisfied, and even if the time saving state has already ended, it is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 121. In the first embodiment described above, when the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the value (0 to 399) of the first random number counter C1 is acquired, and the acquired value is a determination value (random number per first) indicating a big hit. It was configured to determine whether or not it matches the determination value specified in the table 202a). Further, in recent years, in order to complicate the lottery result of the special symbol, the lottery value used for the above-mentioned special symbol lottery (update range of the first random number counter C1 or the first random number table 202a is defined. There is a tendency to increase the range of judgment values).

Specifically, it is common to use a capacity (0 to 65535) for 2 bytes as lottery value data for indicating the lottery value, and the data capacity puts pressure on the configuration of the main control device 110. There was a problem of doing it. Further, in recent pachinko machines 10, in order to provide players with various game characteristics, a plurality of types of random number counters are provided, and various lottery other than the big hit lottery (for example, a normal symbol winning lottery, a small winning lottery, etc.) It is configured to execute a large hit type lottery and a small hit type lottery), and by defining multiple lottery results as the lottery results of each lottery, it is possible to provide a wider variety of games, and the player can play at an early stage. It is structured so that you will not get bored.

The pachinko machine 10 configured in this way can provide a variety of games to the player, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Since the update range (acquisition range) of the random number counter becomes large, there is a problem that the configuration of the main control device 110 is squeezed.

In addition, even if a configuration having a plurality of random number counters is used as described above, it is rare to execute a game using all the random number counters, and random number values not used for the game are constantly updated. Therefore, there is a problem that the control load of the main control device 110 increases.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the capacity of the lottery value data used for the big hit lottery is compressed (the data capacity is set to one byte), a predetermined operation is executed on the lottery value data, and the operation is performed. It is configured to execute the jackpot hit / fail judgment using the value calculated by. With such a configuration, the data capacity of the lottery value data can be reduced, so that the configuration of the main control device 110 can be suppressed from being oppressed.

In the third embodiment described below, the configuration of the lottery value data used when determining the jackpot of the special symbol and the calculation process for the lottery value data will be specifically described. Some data and each process used for making other determinations have the same configuration, but since they have the same configuration, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 116, the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is the first hit in place of the random number table 202a per first with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a random number table 202ca is provided and a new random number data fluctuation table is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first random number 3 table 202ca is referred to when the jackpot determination of the special symbol is executed, and the determination value for determining the jackpot is defined. The first random number 3 table 202ca has one byte (8 bits) having a data capacity smaller than the range of "0 to 399", which is the update range of the first random number counter C1, that is, "0" in decimal. The determination value (determination value before conversion) is defined within the data capacity that can generate the value of "~ 255".

Here, the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), 10 types of determination tables (table reference values "0" to "9") are defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca, and each determination table has a definition. On the other hand, a 1-byte judgment value (pre-conversion judgment value) is defined as the jackpot winning value.

Then, when the jackpot determination (win / fail determination) is executed, the jackpot determination is made by referring to 10 types of determination tables (table reference values "0" to "9") according to a predetermined rule. Will be executed.

The first random number 3 table 202ca shown in FIG. 119 (b) also shows the calculation results according to the conversion rules stored in the random number data conversion table 202 cab, which will be described later, for convenience of explanation. Actually, only the pre-conversion determination value is specified.

To specifically explain the contents specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca, "07H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value in the determination table of the table reference value "0". The determination table having the table reference value "0" is used for the first hit / fail determination regardless of the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the special symbol when the jackpot determination is executed. Next, in the determination table of the table reference value "1", "08H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table having the table reference value "1" is used for the second hit / fail determination regardless of the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the special symbol when the jackpot determination is executed.

In the determination table of the table reference value "2", "40H" is specified as the determination value before conversion. This table for determining the reference value "2" is used to determine the end of the jackpot determination process when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a low probability state, and has a high probability. When it is in the state, it is used to make the big hit judgment after the next table reference value without performing the big hit judgment. Next, in the determination table of the table reference value "3", "51H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table of the table reference value "3" is used for the third hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state.

In the determination table of the table reference value "4", "61H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. This table for determining the reference value "4" is used for the fourth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state, and is used for determining the table reference value "5". In the table, "91H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table with the table reference value "5" is used for the fifth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state.

Further, in the determination table of the table reference value "6", "ABH" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. This table for determining the reference value "6" is used for the sixth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state, and is used for determining the table reference value "7". In the table, "E2H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table with the table reference value "7" is used for the seventh hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state.

In the determination table of the table reference value "8", "EFH" is defined as the determination value before conversion. The determination table with the table reference value "8" is used for the eighth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state. Then, in the determination table of the table reference value "9", "00H" is specified as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table having the table reference value "9" is used to determine the end of the jackpot determination process when the probability state of the special symbol when executing the jackpot determination is a high probability state.

The pre-conversion judgment value defined in each judgment table of the first random number 3 table 202ca is a 2-byte judgment value (post-conversion judgment) using the conversion rule stored in the random number data conversion table 202cc described later. Value) is converted to. The details of the conversion rule will be described later, but specifically, the pre-conversion determination value "07H" defined in the table reference value "0" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "7 (0007H)". The pre-conversion determination value "08H" specified in the table reference value "1" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "8 (0008H)", and the pre-conversion determination value "2" specified in the table reference value "2" is converted. "40H" is converted to the post-conversion judgment value "0 (0000H)", and the pre-conversion judgment value "51H" defined in the table reference value "3" is converted to the post-conversion judgment value "34 (0022H)". The pre-conversion determination value "61H" defined in the table reference value "4" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "66 (0042H)".

Next, the pre-conversion determination value "91H" defined in the table reference value "5" is converted into the post-conversion determination value "68 (0044H)", and the pre-conversion determination value defined in the table reference value "6" is determined. The value "ABH" is converted to the converted determination value "172 (00ACH)", and the pre-conversion determination value "E2H" defined in the table reference value "7" is the converted determination value "272 (0110H)". The pre-conversion determination value "EFH" converted to the table reference value "8" is converted to the post-conversion determination value "376 (0178H)" and the conversion specified in the table reference value "9". The pre-determination value “00H” is converted into the post-conversion determination value “0 (0000H)”.

Then, when it is determined that the value of the converted determination value obtained by converting each pre-conversion determination value defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca and the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined. It is judged that the jackpot was won. Further, the table reference value "2" and the table reference value "9" are "0 (0000H)" having the same converted determination value.

As described above, those having the same post-conversion determination value are specified before the conversion process using the conversion rule is executed, and are configured to be used for purposes other than the jackpot determination. As a result, the pre-conversion determination value set within the data capacity of 1 byte can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, by using only the post-conversion judgment value that does not overlap as the value (post-conversion judgment value) referred to when performing the jackpot judgment, the jackpot judgment can be executed with the probability according to the design value. ..

Further, as described with reference to FIG. 119 (b), in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, a plurality (10 pieces) defined in the random number 3 table 202ca per first. ), The big hit judgment is performed using two table reference values "0" and "1", and if the special symbol is in a high probability state, it is specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca. Of the plurality (10) of the determination tables, eight of the table reference values "0", "1", and "3" to "8" are used to perform the jackpot determination. In this way, the actual jackpot probability is configured to be variable by varying the number of determination tables to be referred to (the number of jackpot determinations to be executed) according to the probability state of the special symbol.

With this configuration, it is not necessary to use a lottery value with a large amount of data (for example, a 2-byte lottery value) in order to set a complicated probability (big hit probability) according to the probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

The random number data conversion table 202cc stores the conversion rule referred to when the pre-conversion determination value (determination value of 1 byte) defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca is converted.

Here, the content of the conversion process executed for the pre-conversion determination value (determination value of 1 byte) executed in the third embodiment will be briefly described. In the third embodiment, the pre-conversion determination value (value in the range of "0 to 255" in decimal) set by the data capacity of 1 byte (256 data amounts) is the random number counter C1 per first. The conversion process is executed so that the jackpot determination value is within the update range (“0 to 399”) of.

When the conversion process is executed, first, the pre-conversion determination value (hexadecimal number) is indicated by an 8-bit binary number value, and each bit is divided into the specified (multiplier part, mantissa part). The multiplier value is calculated from the value indicated by the bit corresponding to the mantissa, and the multiplicand value is calculated from the value indicated by the bit corresponding to the mantissa. Then, the multiplier value and the multiplicand value are multiplied, and the calculated value is used as the converted determination value.

With this configuration, a judgment value is set for a range exceeding the 1-byte data capacity using a 1-byte data capacity that can indicate only the range of "0 to 255" in decimal notation. It becomes possible. Therefore, the data capacity of the value stored in advance as the determination value can be compressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119 (a), the conversion rules stored in the random number data conversion table 202cc will be specifically described. First, with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the role of each bit constituting the pre-conversion data (1 byte pre-conversion determination value) will be described. FIG. 118 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a region in which the bit configuration of the pre-conversion data included in the random number data conversion table 202cc is defined.

As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the pre-conversion data (1 byte pre-conversion determination value) is composed of 8-bit binary numbers, and the most significant bit of the 8-bit is defined by the bit type "7". The bit type is specified for each bit so that the least significant bit has the bit type "0". Of the 8-bit data, the upper 2 (n) bits correspond to the multiplier part, and the lower 6 (8-n) bits correspond to the mantissa part.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (b), the conversion rule for the value of the upper 2 (n) bits defined in the multiplier part will be described. FIG. 118 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a region in which the multiplier part conversion data of the random number data conversion table 202cc is defined. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), among the pre-conversion determination values, different multiplier values are specified for the values indicated by the upper 2 (n) bits defined as the multiplier part.

Specifically, the upper 2 (n) bits are defined as a multiplier value "1" for "00B", a multiplier value "2" for "01B", and a multiplier value for "10B". The numerical value "4" is specified, and the multiplier value "8" is specified for 11B ". By defining different multiplier values according to the value indicated by the upper 2 (n) bits in this way, the converted value can be made into various sizes.

Further, in the third embodiment, it is specified that the multiplier value is a multiplier of 2. As a result, it is possible to intentionally appear the case where the same value is obtained as a result of executing the conversion process for different pre-conversion determination values. Therefore, the weight of the value calculated as the determination value after conversion, that is, the value that is easy to calculate and the value that is difficult to calculate can be provided. By setting the value corresponding to the state (low probability state where it is difficult to win the jackpot) as the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, the jackpot winning probability can be changed without changing the number of judgment values corresponding to the jackpot judgment value. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (c), the conversion rule for the value of the lower 6 (8-n) bits defined in the mantissa part will be described. FIG. 118 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a region defining the mantissa part conversion data possessed by the random number data conversion table 202cb. As shown in FIG. 118 (c), among the pre-conversion determination values, different weight values are specified for the values indicated by the lower 6 (8-n) bits defined as the mantissa.

Specifically, among the lower 6 (8-n) bits, a weight value "1" is defined for the bit type "0", and a weight value "2" is defined for the bit type "1". A weight value "4" is specified for the bit type "2", a weight value "8" is specified for the bit type "3", and a weight value "16" is specified for the bit type "4". , A weight value "32" is specified for the bit type "5".

Next, with reference to FIG. 119 (a), a specific example in which the value of the pre-conversion determination value is converted according to the conversion rule defined in the random number data conversion table 202cc will be described. FIG. 119 (a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of converting a pre-conversion determination value (determination value for 1 byte) into a post-conversion determination value (determination value for 2 bytes).

First, a conversion example in the case where the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) of the pre-conversion data is “239” in decimal (“EFH” in hexadecimal) will be described. The value that becomes "EFH" in hexadecimal is "11110111B" in 8-bit binary, the upper 2 bits "11B" is the multiplier part, and the lower 6 bits "101111B" is the mantissa part.

Then, with reference to the random number data conversion table 202cc, the multiplier value "8" corresponding to the multiplier part "11B" is read out (see FIG. 118 (b)), and the weight value "32 + 0 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1" corresponding to the mantissa part "101111B" is obtained. Read (see FIG. 118 (c)) and calculate the multiplicand value "47". After that, the multiplier value "8" and the multiplicand value "47" are multiplied to calculate "376 (decimal number)". As a result, the pre-conversion determination value "239" defined in the decimal number "0 to 255" can be converted to "376" exceeding the range by the conversion process.

Similarly, a conversion example in the case where the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) of the pre-conversion data is “0” in decimal (“00H” in hexadecimal) will be described. The value of "00H" in hexadecimal is "0000000000B" in 8-bit binary, the upper 2 bits "00B" is the multiplier part, and the lower 6 bits "000000B" is the mantissa.

Then, with reference to the random number data conversion table 202cc, the multiplier value "1" corresponding to the multiplier part "00B" is read out (see FIG. 118 (b)), and the weight value "0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0" corresponding to the mantissa part "000000B" is obtained. Read (see FIG. 118 (c)) and calculate the multiplied value "0". After that, the multiplier value "1" and the multiplicand value "0" are multiplied to calculate "0 (decimal number)".

Next, a conversion example will be described when the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) of the pre-conversion data is "64" in decimal ("40H" in hexadecimal). The value of "40H" in hexadecimal is "01000000B" in 8-bit binary, the upper 2 bits "01B" is the multiplier part, and the lower 6 bits "000000B" is the mantissa.

Then, with reference to the random number data conversion table 202cc, the multiplier value "2" corresponding to the multiplier part "01B" is read out (see FIG. 118 (b)), and the weight value "0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0" corresponding to the mantissa part "000000B" is obtained. Read (see FIG. 118 (c)) and calculate the multiplied value "0". After that, the multiplier value "2" and the multiplicand value "0" are multiplied to calculate "0 (decimal number)".

As described above, according to the conversion process of the present embodiment, even if the pre-conversion determination value (1-byte determination value) is different (“00H” and “40H”), the value after the conversion process is the same. It may be ("0"). That is, in the present embodiment, the operation rule of the conversion process is defined so that the value after the conversion process is the same for the value whose mantissa part is "000000B".

In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined that the pre-conversion determination value in which the value after the conversion process is the same (“0”) is acquired is configured to be used as a condition for skipping the conversion process and executing another process. are doing. In this way, by configuring the pre-conversion determination value in which the values after the conversion process are duplicated so as not to be used for the jackpot determination, it is possible to execute a fair jackpot determination for all the determination values.

Although detailed description will be described later, in the third embodiment, the jackpot determination process executed in the high probability state of the special symbol and the jackpot determination process executed in the low probability state of the special symbol are the first hits. The random number 3 table 202ca is configured to refer to different times, and the acquisition of the pre-conversion determination value in which the values after the above-mentioned conversion processing are the same (“0”) is acquired in the probability state (high probability) of the special symbol. It is configured to trigger the end of the jackpot judgment according to the state (state, low probability state).

As a result, the pre-conversion determination value in which the value after the conversion process (post-conversion determination value) is the same can be effectively utilized. In the third embodiment, the pre-conversion determination value in which the value after the conversion process (determination value after conversion) is the same is used as the end trigger of the jackpot determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after the conversion process. The pre-conversion determination value in which the values overlap may be set so as to be determined as a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 5 times easier to win the jackpot probability than the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot winning It is possible to eliminate the need to increase the types of determination values to be determined five times. That is, the judgment value (judgment value after conversion) that is determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is a value that can be converted only from one pre-conversion judgment value, and the big hit is won in the high probability state of the special symbol. By setting the determination process (determination value after conversion) to be a value converted from the five determination values before conversion, the actual jackpot probability can be increased five times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the area for storing the value specified as the jackpot determination value.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a judgment value (pre-conversion judgment value (0 to 255)) that can be set within a specific range (data capacity of 1 byte) is set in advance, and the judgment value ( Judgment within a range larger than the above-mentioned specific range (update range (0 to 399) of random number counter C1 per first) by executing arithmetic processing based on a predetermined arithmetic rule for the pre-conversion determination value). It is configured so that it can be converted into a value (determined value after conversion (0 to 399)). As a result, the data capacity of the preset (stored) determination value can be compressed.

Further, as a predetermined calculation rule, a calculation rule in which the determination values after conversion can be duplicated is used, and it is configured so that a bias occurs with respect to the value to be the determination value after conversion. Then, the duplicated determination values among the converted determination values are configured to be used for a purpose other than the jackpot determination (for example, an opportunity to end the jackpot determination process). With this configuration, the determination values that can be set within a preset specific range can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (c), only one type of calculation rule is provided, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, the value of the multiplier part (upper 2). A plurality of multiplier conversion data in which a multiplier value for (bit value) is specified are provided, a predetermined selection lottery means is provided, and arithmetic processing is executed using the multiplication conversion data selected by the selection lottery means. May be.

With this configuration, a plurality of post-conversion judgment values can be calculated from one pre-conversion judgment value, so that the data capacity of the preset (stored) judgment value can be further compressed. .. Similarly, a plurality of mantissa conversion data may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is specified that the value associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) is a multiplier of 2. are doing. As a result, it is configured so that the same determination value can be easily displayed after executing a complicated arithmetic process (after conversion). On the other hand, for example, it is specified that all the values associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) are prime numbers. May be. With such a configuration, the possibility that the determined values after conversion are duplicated can be easily reduced.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.

As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that a converted data storage area 203ca is provided. However, everything else is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The converted data storage area 203ca is a storage area for temporarily storing the value (converted data) calculated by executing a predetermined operation on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1. The information stored in the converted data storage area 203ca is configured to be retained for a predetermined period even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, like the information stored in the other RAM 203. Therefore, even if the power is turned off due to a power failure before using the value (converted data) calculated by executing a predetermined operation on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, after the power failure is restored. , Processing using the converted data can be executed.

When the converted data was calculated by the conversion lottery determination process (see S451 in FIG. 121) described later, the calculated converted data was stored in the converted data storage area 203ca, and the converted data was used. The converted data stored after the hit / fail judgment result is set is deleted.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. In the third embodiment, the control process of the main control device 110 of the first embodiment described above is replaced with the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), and the first special symbol jackpot determination process is performed. The difference is that 3 (see S356 in FIG. 120) is executed. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356). As shown in FIG. 120, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356), first, the same process of S401 as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above is performed. Is executed, then the conversion lottery determination process (S451) is executed, and then the same processes of S405 to S409 as in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35) are executed, and this process is terminated. ..

That is, the third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above only in that the processing method for executing the jackpot determination of the special symbol is different. Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, the conversion lottery determination process (S451 in FIG. 120) is performed not only for the first special symbol but also for the process of executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. (See) is configured to be executed, but the description is omitted because they are the same except that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents of the conversion lottery determination process (S451) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356 in FIG. 120) will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the conversion lottery determination process (S451).

In the conversion lottery determination process (S451), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S371), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S371: Yes), the determination end value is ". "00H" is set (S372), and the process proceeds to S374. That is, in the processing of S372, since the present is a high probability state of the special symbol, the pre-conversion determination value "9" corresponding to the table reference value "9" is set at the end time of the jackpot determination with reference to the first random number 3 table 202ca. By setting to "00H", eight judgments using the table reference value "0, 1, 3 to 8" of the first random number 3 table 202ca are executed as one big hit judgment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S371 that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S371: No), "40H" is set as the determination end value (S373), and the process proceeds to S374. That is, in the processing of S373, since the present is a low probability state of the special symbol, the end time point of the jackpot determination referring to the first random number 3 table 202ca is set to the pre-conversion determination value corresponding to the table reference value “2”. By setting to "40H", two judgments using the table reference value "0,1" of the first random number 3 table 202ca are executed as one big hit judgment.

In the process of S374, "0" is set as the table reference value (S374). As a result, when the jackpot determination (special symbol lottery) is executed, the determination can always be executed from the table reference value "0" of the first random number 3 table 202ca.

Next, the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) based on the current table reference value is acquired from the first random number 3 table 202ca (S375), and the acquired determination value (pre-conversion determination value) is the determination end value (pre-conversion determination value). It is determined whether the value is S372 or the value set in the process of S373 (S376). In the process of S376, if it is determined that it is the determination end value (S376: Yes), it means that the condition for ending the jackpot determination is satisfied, so the lottery result is set to be out of order (S382) and this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S376, when it is determined that the value is not the determination end value (S376: No), it is determined whether the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) acquired this time is "40H" (S377), and "40H". (S377: Yes), that is, in the state where "00H" is set as the judgment end value (high probability state of the special symbol), the judgment value (pre-conversion judgment value) acquired this time is "40H". If it is, the currently set table reference value is added by 1 (S378), and the process proceeds to S375. That is, the processing flow of S377 and S378 is executed when the table reference value "2" is set in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

If it is determined in the process of S377 that the determination value is not "40H" (S377: No), various conversion data (multiplier conversion data, mantissa conversion data) specified in the random number data conversion table 202cc). The judgment value (judgment value before conversion) is converted (calculated) based on (S379), and whether the converted value (judgment value after conversion) matches the lottery value (value of the acquired first random number counter C1). Determine (S380).

Here, if it is determined that the converted value (determined value after conversion) matches the lottery value (value of the acquired first random number counter C1) (S380: Yes), the current lottery result is set as a hit (S380: Yes). S381), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S380: No), the process proceeds to S378. After that, the lottery process is looped until the acquired determination value (determination value before conversion) reaches the determination end value.

By executing the conversion lottery determination process (S451) configured in this way, the 1/400 jackpot determination is executed twice in the low probability state of the special symbol, so that the actual jackpot probability becomes 1/200. In the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot determination of 1/400 is executed eight times, so that the actual jackpot probability can be configured to be 1/50.

Further, the number of jackpot determinations corresponding to the probability state of the special symbol is defined by the pre-conversion determination value (“00H”, “40H”), which is the determination value in which the post-conversion determination values overlap. Since 202ca is configured, appropriate processing can be executed while reducing the data capacity of the main control device 110.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the post-conversion determination value is a pre-conversion determination value that is a duplicate determination value before the conversion process is performed, so that unnecessary processing is executed. It can be suppressed and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the determination value (pre-conversion determination value (0)) that can be set within a specific range (1 byte data capacity) as the process for executing the jackpot determination of the special symbol. ~ 255)) is set in advance, and by executing arithmetic processing based on a predetermined arithmetic rule for the determination value (determination value before conversion), a range larger than the above-mentioned specific range (first hit). It is configured so that it can be converted into a determination value (determination value after conversion (0 to 399)) within the update range (0 to 399) of the random number counter C1. As a result, the data capacity of the preset (stored) determination value can be compressed.

Further, as a predetermined calculation rule, a calculation rule in which the determination values after conversion can be duplicated is used, and it is configured so that a bias occurs with respect to the value to be the determination value after conversion. Then, the duplicated determination values among the converted determination values are configured to be used for a purpose other than the jackpot determination (for example, an opportunity to end the jackpot determination process). With this configuration, the determination values that can be set within a preset specific range can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (c), only one type of calculation rule is provided, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, the value of the multiplier part (upper 2). A plurality of multiplier conversion data in which a multiplier value for (bit value) is specified are provided, a predetermined selection lottery means is provided, and arithmetic processing is executed using the multiplication conversion data selected by the selection lottery means. May be.

With this configuration, a plurality of post-conversion judgment values can be calculated from one pre-conversion judgment value, so that the data capacity of the preset (stored) judgment value can be further compressed. .. Similarly, a plurality of mantissa conversion data may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is specified that the value associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) is a multiplier of 2. are doing. As a result, it is configured so that the same determination value can be easily displayed after executing a complicated arithmetic process (after conversion). On the other hand, for example, it is specified that all the values associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) are prime numbers. May be. With such a configuration, the possibility that the determined values after conversion are duplicated can be easily reduced.

In the third embodiment described above, in order to compress the data capacity of the specified value of the random number 3 table 202ca per first of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the pre-conversion determination value of the data capacity in one byte is stored, and the data capacity thereof is stored. The conversion process is executed according to the predetermined conversion rule for the pre-conversion judgment value, and the jackpot judgment is executed using the value that does not overlap the result of the conversion process. It may be configured to execute the small hit determination together with the big hit determination.

For example, for the pre-conversion judgment value specified in each judgment table, a conversion process based on a specific first conversion rule is executed to calculate a post-conversion judgment value for big hit judgment, and the first conversion rule is used. Is configured to execute a conversion process based on a different specific second conversion rule and calculate a post-conversion determination value for a small hit determination.

Further, each conversion rule is defined so that the same post-conversion determination value is not calculated by the conversion process based on the first conversion rule and the conversion process based on the second conversion rule, and further, the conversion based on the second conversion rule. It is preferable to configure so that a plurality of converted judgment values are calculated by the process.

With this configuration, it is possible to calculate a value for big hit determination (post-conversion determination value) and a value for small hit determination (post-conversion determination value) using one pre-conversion determination value. Further, by making the number of values for big hit determination and the number of values for small hit determination different, the actual hit probability can be easily made different.

Furthermore, if the jackpot probability of the special symbol is variable according to the probability state of the special symbol and the small hit probability is not variable, the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not executed. It is preferable to configure it so that the judgment value after conversion of is calculated. As a result, when the hit determination (big hit determination, small hit determination) is executed with reference to the determination table in the same range, the number of small hit determination determinations can be increased more than the number of big hit determination determinations.

In the third embodiment described above, the configuration for compressing the data capacity of the specified value of the random number 3 table 202ca per first of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been described, but it is specified in various tables of the pachinko machine 10. The same configuration may be used for the specified value, for example, the same configuration may be used for the process of executing the hit determination of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), or the voice lamp control device 113 may use the same configuration. The same configuration may be used for the processing when selecting the variation pattern effect to be executed.

<About another example using the technical idea of the third embodiment>
Next, in order to reduce the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10, that is, the same technical idea as that of the third embodiment described above, the data capacity of the specified value stored in advance in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is compressed. When actually used, another example of using the technical idea of executing the conversion process on the compressed data will be described.

In the third embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which the data capacity of the main control device 110 is reduced by compressing the data of the determination value (determination value before conversion) defined in the random number 3 table 202ca per first. However, in this alternative example, in order to achieve the same purpose, the update range of the first random number counter C1 is compressed (updated within the range of 1-byte data capacity (range of 0 to 255)). By performing a predetermined operation on the acquired value (compressed value) of the random number counter C1 per first, a range larger than the compressed update range (range of 1-byte data capacity) is configured. (For example, it is configured to be converted into a value included in the range of the data capacity of 2 bytes (0 to 65535)).

In the first embodiment described above, the number of determination values determined to be a jackpot in a high-probability state of a special symbol (a state in which it is easy to win a jackpot) and a low-probability state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot than the high-probability state. It was configured to change the winning probability of the jackpot by making them different.

Further, in the first embodiment, the random number counter C1 per first is configured to update the random number value so that the numerical values in the update range (acquisition range) appear evenly.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the first random number table 202a referred to when the jackpot determination (hit / fail determination) of the special symbol is executed has an area for storing the jackpot determination value in the high probability state of the special symbol. , It is necessary to separately specify the area for storing the jackpot determination value in the low probability state of the special symbol with a different size, which may lead to an increase in the data capacity.

Further, in order to set the jackpot probability of the special symbol low, it is necessary to set a large update range of the second random number counter C1 (for example, a range of a 2-byte data capacity (0 to 65535)), and the random number thereof. There was the problem of spending a lot of data capacity to build the counter.

On the other hand, in this modification, the numerical values within the updated range (for example, the range of 1-byte data capacity (0 to 255)) obtained by compressing the first random number counter C1 are evenly displayed. By configuring the random value to be updated and performing a predetermined operation on each random value that appears evenly, the acquired random value (pre-conversion random value) is set to a range larger than the compressed update range (for example). , 2 bytes of data capacity range (0 to 65535)) is configured to be variable to the converted random number value.

Further, in this alternative example, the converted value (converted random value) is configured to partially overlap. Then, during the high probability state of the special symbol, the overlapping value is defined as the jackpot judgment value, and during the low probability state of the special symbol, the value that cannot be duplicated is defined as the jackpot judgment value. It is configured to change the jackpot probability in the probability state of the special symbol.

As a result, only the jackpot probability can be changed without changing the number of random number counter values defined as the jackpot determination value. In addition, in this modification, when it is determined that the acquired value of the random number counter C1 per first is a predetermined value, the special control process is executed without executing the arithmetic process for that value. It is composed. With this configuration, the processing related to the special symbol lottery can be completed without executing the arithmetic processing, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As described above, in the first to third embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol has been described. The other pachinko machines 10, that is, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and the winning prize is a trigger for each lottery. Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type that executes lottery in the order in which information is acquired (the order of entry into the first entry port 64 and entry into the second entry opening 640), and the lottery of one of the special symbols. It may be configured to be used for the pachinko machine 10 of the type to be executed.

For example, in the state where the normal state is set as described in the first embodiment described above, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the configuration for setting the probability change state is described above. It may be used in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery (variation) of the symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, or may be used in the above-mentioned first embodiment or the second. The above-mentioned first special symbol has a configuration in which the degree of entry of a ball passing through the through gate 67 described in the embodiment into the second entry port 640 is changed according to the number of normal symbol reserved balls and the gaming state. It may be used in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery (variation) and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time. Even if such a configuration is used, the effect is obtained in the same manner as in each of the above-described embodiments.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as an example of various effects to be executed, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 have been described, but the effects have the same purpose and effect. It is sufficient, and the player uses a display effect to be displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, a voice effect to notify the player by voice, and various light emitting means (LEDs) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emitting effect to notify to.

Further, as various effects executed in each of the above-described embodiments, a notification effect that makes the player surely grasp the content and a suggestion effect that the player implicitly informs the content are used. The suggestion effect may be executed instead, or the notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestion effect.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a pachinko machine 10 provided with two types of high and low probabilities (big hit probability) of winning a big hit in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbol and low probability state of special symbol) is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means is provided. The main controller 110 may be configured to perform control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, 6 levels of setting values 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. If this is the case, it is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of the special symbol may be different. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

Further, depending on the above-mentioned set value, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is different, the probability of winning a small hit is different, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the selection ratio. The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, whether or not a variation pattern or jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern, or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is executed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by paying attention to the player.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set setting value is set, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating the fluctuation time) may be executed. When it is received, the set value currently set may be discriminated from the content of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the discriminant result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Further, as in each of the above-described embodiments, the above-mentioned set values can be set in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. When various configurations are used, various parameters may be specified for each set value so that the ease of fluctuation (lottery) of each special symbol can be changed according to the set value. In the set value of, if the specific game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, the lottery of the other special symbol different from one special symbol is performed. Various parameters may be specified for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the lottery of the special symbol is advantageous to the player is a privilege given when the lottery of the special symbol is easily executed or when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (big hit game content). , The content of the small hit game, the game state set after the end of the big hit game) is a concept including the advantage to the player.

In addition, the game state transition destination and the transition distribution rate after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited to this. For example, the time saving state that shifts from the normal gaming state may be limited to the time saving state 2. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the motivation of the player who could not shift to the probabilistic state even though he won the jackpot in the normal game state.

In addition, regardless of the game state, the transition destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transition destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to provide more complicated game playability, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is continued until the next big hit, and 10 times of time reduction is given as the time reduction state regardless of the game state. The specification is to continue until it is executed a number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed every time the special figure fluctuates, and by winning the lottery, the probabilistic state changes to the normal game state. It may be configured to migrate. In this case, as a probabilistic state that is advantageous to the player and a probabilistic state that is unfavorable to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probabilistic state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probabilistic state to the normal gaming state is different. You may try to do it.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes a specific number of fluctuations among the plurality of time saving end conditions, that is, the variation. The time saving state is set to the normal state at different timings depending on whether the number of times ending condition is satisfied and the time saving ending condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by lottery of a special symbol, that is, when the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It was configured so that it could be migrated to.

Using this configuration, for example, when the condition for ending the number of fluctuations is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the condition for ending the number of winnings is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine in which the gaming state is controlled to shift from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hit game.

As a result, even if the time reduction state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol depending on the time reduction end condition that is satisfied, the range obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time during which the small hit game is executed. It is possible to change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time saving end condition that is satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to facilitate the ball to enter the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods during which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small hit type for which the winning count end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the benefits given to the person different. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied but also in the more detailed content of the time saving ending condition.

Further, in this case, even if the winning count end condition is satisfied, the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is started, and the time saving state may be ended at the timing when the small hit game is finished. It is good to configure so that This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit are determined. A configuration is used in which the determination process and the determination process are executed separately, but the time saving information that is updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is centrally managed, and the time saving end condition that is satisfied is not limited to this. A configuration may be used in which the timing for ending the time saving state is set based on the above.

In each of the above embodiments, the hold ball count command is issued each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter 203d is updated (that is, when it increases or decreases) in the main control device 110. Although the case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to reduce the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 sends the hold number command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. The control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided into four areas by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the player the lottery result of each symbol is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be emphasized and displayed to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the game state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left side area of the game board 13 is executed in the normal game state. It is configured so that the left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, and the normal state is in progress. May perform a right-handed game. Further, the game may be configured to be playable in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operation means that can be operated by the player, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used, but other than that. The configuration may be used, and an operating means configured in a lever shape capable of determining that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by contact or proximity. A touch sensor type operating means capable of discriminating, a wireless operating means capable of discriminating that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting a display mode in the effect executed by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is a voice lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, but is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The processing for this may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple hits (for example, two or three times) including it occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game in which a lottery (variation) is performed according to a predetermined rule for a plurality of special symbols and a game in which a lottery (variation) is individually performed independently are described. However, the playability described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined. In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Each of the above-described embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Slight time reduction per special figure 2 in normal time)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, a first determination means capable of performing a first determination based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means. A second discriminating means different from the above, a second discriminating means capable of performing a second discriminating different from the first discriminating based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the second ball entering means, and the first discriminating means. The display means capable of displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means and the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means A privilege that can execute the first privilege game based on the specific first determination result and execute the second privilege game based on the determination result of the second determination means being the specific second determination result. In a gaming machine having a gaming execution means, the first gaming state for restricting the entry of a gaming ball into the second entry means to play a game and the restriction in the first gaming state have been lifted. The game state setting means has a game state setting means capable of switching between the second game state and the game state, and the game state setting means executes the second determination in a state where the first game state is set. When the second privilege game is executed based on the second determination result being the specific second determination result, the first game state is set after the execution of the second privilege game. The gaming machine A1 characterized by being.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery is executed among a plurality of special symbols. There is a gaming machine configured so that the lottery of special symbols is preferentially executed. In such a gaming machine, when a specific first gaming state is not set in order to prevent the lottery of advantageous special symbols from being frequently executed in a state where the specific first gaming state is not set. Is provided with measures to set a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) of the advantageous special symbol. However, with the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the lottery of advantageous special symbols, but since the expected degree of privilege grant to the player per advantageous special symbol lottery is not changed, it takes a long time (for example). , Approximately 12 hours from the opening of the game state to the closing of the store) The player who plays the game plays a game in which the other special symbol is drawn while the special symbol is drawn, which is advantageous in terms of added value. There is a problem that the player receives the privilege based on the lottery result of the symbol and gives the player an excessive privilege. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machines is to limit the benefits given to the players and to provide appropriate games. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Although it is described, the problems solved by the technical idea of this feature group are not limited to the simultaneous variable machines, and the game machines other than the simultaneous variable machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine A1, even if the second determination is executed in the state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is not set based on the second determination result, so that the second determination is performed. It is possible to prevent the determination from being excessively executed, and there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming state setting means executes the second determination in a state where the second gaming state is set, and the second determination result is the specific second determination result. When the second privilege game is executed based on the above, the first determination is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set, and the first determination result is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is easier to set the second gaming state than when the first privileged gaming is executed based on the above.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. By executing the second determination in the state where the second gaming state is set, the second gaming state can be easily set repeatedly. Therefore, it is possible to have the player perform a game aiming at the execution of the second discrimination and a game aiming at the execution of the first discrimination according to the set game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

As the probability that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means in the game machine A1 or A2, the first probability and the first privilege game or the first privilege game rather than the first probability thereof. 2 The game state setting means has a probability setting means capable of setting a second probability in which a privilege game is easily executed, and the game state setting means is set as a first game state when the first probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a specific first gaming state is set, and a special first gaming state is set as the first gaming state when the second probability is set.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, even if the first probability or the second probability is set by the probability setting means, the gaming ball is inserted into the second entry means. Since it is possible to set the first gaming state in which the ball is restricted from playing the game, it is possible to prevent the second discrimination from being excessively executed, and the player is provided with an appropriate game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine A3, the special first gaming state is characterized in that it is more difficult to allow the gaming ball to enter the second ball entering means and play a game than the specific first gaming state. Pachinko machine A4.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first game state is set in a state where the second probability that the privilege game is easily executed is set by the privilege game execution means, the game in which the second determination is executed can be strongly regulated. , It is possible to positively perform a game in which the first determination is executed with the second probability set. Therefore, it is possible to have the player perform a game aiming at the execution of the second discrimination and a game aiming at the execution of the first discrimination according to the set game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means for a predetermined first period, and a predetermined second identification information on the display means. It has a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for two periods, and the second dynamic display means performs the first identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. 2 The gaming machine A5 characterized in that the identification information can be dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. It has the effect of increasing efficiency.

In any of the game machines A3 to A5, the notification means capable of executing the game notification for prompting the execution of the first determination by the first determination means, and the notification means is set to the specific first game state. It is determined that the first game notification that can be executed in the case of the above and the second game notification that can be executed when the special first game state is set execute the game notification of different notification modes. A featured gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the notification means performs the game notification in different modes according to the set game state, so that the game notification is easy for the player to understand. Has the effect of being able to execute.

In the gaming machine A6, the notification mode of the second game notification executed by the notification means emphasizes the execution of the first determination by the first discrimination means rather than the notification mode of the first game notification. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it is a notification mode.

According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6. That is, the more difficult it is for the second discrimination means to execute the second discrimination, the more the notification mode for prompting the execution of the first discrimination by the first discrimination means is emphasized, so that the situation where the player executes a disadvantageous game is suppressed. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that an inappropriate game can be provided.

<Characteristic B group> (The degree of winning the electric chew of the ball passing through the through gate is different)
A specific area through which the game ball can pass, a discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area, and identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. The dynamic display means, the variable ball entry means that can be changed between the first state in which the game ball can enter and the second state in which the ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means In a gaming machine having a variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state when it is a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is the specific area. The game ball that has flowed down is arranged at a position where the ball can enter, and in the game machine, the discrimination result determined based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area is the specific discrimination result. In this case, it is more difficult than the first setting and the first setting that make it easier for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area that triggered the determination from the specific determination result to enter the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine B1 having a setting means capable of setting a second setting.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery is executed among a plurality of special symbols. There is a gaming machine configured so that the lottery of special symbols is preferentially executed. In addition, in order to prevent the lottery of advantageous special symbols from being easily executed, the lottery of advantageous special symbols should be executed when the game ball enters the entrance with the electric accessory. There is a pachinko machine that has been configured. In such a gaming machine, generally, when a winning prize is won by a lottery of ordinary symbols, the electric accessory is opened and the gaming ball can enter the entrance. In such a gaming machine, the ease of opening the electric accessory is made different depending on the gaming state, so that when the first gaming state is set, the lottery of the advantageous special symbol is easily executed. It is required to make it difficult to release the electric accessory in order to make it easy to release the electric accessory and to make it difficult for the lottery of the advantageous special symbol to be executed when the game state other than that is set. However, it is difficult to set the opening operation of the electric accessory in a complicated manner according to the gaming state, and in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the same opening operation as in the first gaming state is executed. There was a problem. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide an appropriate game by executing a lottery of advantageous special symbols according to the gaming state. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Although it is described, the problems solved by the technical idea of this feature group are not limited to the simultaneous variable machines, and the game machines other than the simultaneous variable machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine B1, when the discrimination result determined based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific area is the specific discrimination result, the setting means triggers the discrimination as the specific discrimination result. It is possible to set a first setting that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entry means and a second setting that makes it more difficult than the first setting. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine B1, as a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. , A dynamic display period setting means for setting one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods having different periods, and the dynamic display period setting means is the first by the setting means. When the setting is set, it is easier to set the first dynamic display period during which the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area can enter the variable ball-entry means than when the second setting is set. When the second setting is set by the setting means, it is more difficult for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to enter the variable ball entry means than when the first setting is set. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it is easy to set a second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, by changing the dynamic display period, it is possible to limit the entry of the gaming ball into the variable entry means, so that proper gaming is easy. It has the effect of being able to provide to.

In the gaming machine B2, the setting means can set a short second setting and a long second setting different from the short second setting as the second setting, and the dynamic display period setting. When the short second setting is set by the setting means, the means has a dynamic display period shorter than the passing period required for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball-entry means. The gaming machine B3, which is set as the second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, when the short second condition is satisfied, a dynamic display period shorter than the passing period required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball entry means is set, so that the game ball passes through the specific area. It is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means.

The gaming machine B3 has a limiting means for limiting the gaming balls that can pass through the specific area, and the limiting means is a passing period required for the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball entering means. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the gaming balls are allowed to flow down toward the specific region at longer intervals.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the interval at which the game ball passes through the specific area can be set to be longer than the passage period until the game ball that has passed through the specific area reaches the variable ball entry means, the short second condition is satisfied. In the state, when the variable entry means is changed to the first state based on the fact that one game ball has passed through a specific area, the other game balls are suppressed from entering the variable entry means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means can be reliably restricted and an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the dynamic display period setting means waits until the gaming ball that has passed through the specific area reaches the variable ball entering means when the second length setting is set by the setting means. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that a dynamic display period longer than the passing period required for the above is set as the second dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second long condition is satisfied, a dynamic display period shorter than the passing period required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to reach the variable ball entry means is set, so that the game ball passes through the specific area. It is possible to limit the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means, and there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided. Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine B4 is used, the dynamic display period set when the second long condition is satisfied is made longer than the interval at which the limiting means causes the gaming ball to flow down toward the specific area. It is good to configure it to. This makes it possible for another game ball to enter the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state based on the fact that one game ball has passed through a specific area. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is easier to insert the game ball into the variable ball entry means when the long second condition is satisfied than when the short second condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, a first discrimination state in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is likely to be the specific discrimination result, and a second discrimination state in which the discrimination result is less likely to be the specific discrimination result than the first discrimination state. The gaming machine B6 is characterized by having a state setting means capable of setting the above, and the short second setting can be established when the first determination state is set by the state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first discriminant state is set, the short second condition can be satisfied, so that it is possible to prevent many game balls in the first discrimination state from entering the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In any of the game machines B3 to B6, the acquisition means capable of acquiring passage information based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area and the passage information acquired by the acquisition means are limited to a predetermined number. It has a storage means that can be stored, and the discrimination means executes discrimination based on the passage information stored in the storage means when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied. When the number of stored passage information stored in the means is not more than a predetermined number, the second length setting is more likely to be set than when the number of stored passage information is larger than the predetermined number. A game machine B7 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of passage information stored in the storage means is not more than a predetermined number, the game ball that has passed through the specific area does not enter the variable entry means, so that the variable entry means is entered. There is an effect that the entry of the game ball can be restricted and an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine B7, when the number of stored passage information stored in the storage means is a specific number or more, which is larger than the predetermined number, the first setting is higher than when the number is less than the specific number. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being easy to set.

According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7. That is, when the number of passage information stored in the storage means is a specific number or more, the game ball that has passed through the specific area can enter the variable ball entry means, so that the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Can be easily entered. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game in order to store a large amount of passing information in the storage means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (Special figure 1 fluctuation time is set by the number of special figure 2 hold)
It was acquired by the first ball-entry means capable of entering the ball, the first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the ball entering the first ball-entry means, and the first acquisition means thereof. A first discrimination means capable of executing the first discrimination when the first discrimination condition is satisfied based on the first information, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a second ball entry thereof. A second acquisition means that acquires the second information based on the ball entering the means, and a second acquisition condition triggered by the establishment of the second determination condition based on the second information acquired by the second acquisition means. It is possible to display a second discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and a second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. Display means, a first dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period, and a display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period. The second dynamic display means to be caused, the specific first identification information for showing that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, or the discrimination result of the second discrimination means is a specific second. 2 A gaming machine having a privileged game executing means capable of executing a privileged game based on the fact that the specific second identification information for indicating that it is a determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the game. The machine is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A first storage means capable of storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means up to a predetermined number up to the first determination condition for at least the first information, and the first storage means. 2 A second storage means capable of storing the second information acquired by the acquisition means up to a second predetermined number until at least the second determination condition for the second information is satisfied, and the second storage. A first dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means based on the number of the second information stored in the means. The gaming machine D1 characterized by having and.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery is executed among a plurality of special symbols. There is a gaming machine configured so that the lottery of special symbols is preferentially executed. In such a gaming machine, when a specific first gaming state is not set in order to prevent the lottery of advantageous special symbols from being frequently executed in a state where the specific first gaming state is not set. Is provided with measures to set a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) of the advantageous special symbol. However, with the above-mentioned measures, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the lottery of advantageous special symbols, but since the expected degree of privilege grant to the player per advantageous special symbol lottery is not changed, it takes a long time (for example). , Approximately 12 hours from the opening of the game state to the closing of the store) The player who plays the game plays a game in which the other special symbol is drawn while the special symbol is drawn, which is advantageous in terms of added value. There is a problem that the player receives the privilege based on the lottery result of the symbol and gives the player an excessive privilege. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machines is to limit the benefits given to the players and to provide appropriate games.

According to the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display period of the first identification information is set by the first dynamic display period setting means based on the number of the second information stored in the second storage means. The dynamic display of the first discriminating means can be changed by playing a game for executing the second discriminating by the second discriminating means while the first discriminating by the first discriminating means is being executed. Therefore, since the first determination and the second determination can be executed with a relationship, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine D1, the first dynamic display period setting means makes it easier to set a long dynamic display period as the number of the second information stored in the second storage means increases. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the larger the number of the second information stored in the second storage means, the longer the dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first determination and the second determination from being excessively executed, and there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

In the gaming machine D2, a gaming state setting capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The first dynamic display period setting means has means, and the larger the number of the second information stored in the second storage means in the state where the first gaming state is set, the longer the period. The gaming machine D3, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of the dynamic display period of the machine.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are played. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the larger the number of second information stored in the second storage means, the easier it is for the first dynamic display period setting means to set a longer dynamic display period. Become. Therefore, when the second gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the first determination and the second determination can be efficiently executed, so that the player enthusiastically plays the game. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the gaming machine D3, in a state where the second identification information is dynamically displayed for a specific second period by the second dynamic display means, the first dynamic display period setting means causes the second identification information to be longer than the predetermined period. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a notification means for notifying that a specific dynamic display state is set when the first long dynamic display period, which is a long dynamic display period, is set.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are played. That is, when the first long dynamic display period is set as the dynamic display period of the first special symbol in a state where the second identification information is dynamically displayed for a specific second period, it is specified by the notification means. It is notified that it is a dynamic display status. As a result, the player can determine that the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination and the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination are not stopped and displayed for a long period of time. Can be reliably notified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the gaming machine is out of order.

In the gaming machine D4, a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means is set based on the number of the second information stored in the second storage means. The second dynamic display period setting means is provided, and the second dynamic display period setting means operates for a shorter period than the specific second period in the state where the second gaming state is set. The gaming machine D5, which is characterized by facilitating the setting of a target display period.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are played. That is, in the state where the second gaming state is set, a short dynamic display period can be easily set as the dynamic display period of the second identification information. As a result, while the second game state is set, the player can enthusiastically execute the second determination, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic E group> (Eliminates the remaining hold of the special figure on the disadvantage side)
Based on the first ball entry means on which the game ball can enter, the first acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the first information. The first discriminating means capable of executing the first discrimination, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the second information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means. The second acquisition means to be acquired, the second discrimination means capable of executing the second discrimination based on the second information, the first identification information for showing the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, and the second discrimination. The first privilege game is executed based on the display means capable of displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the means and the discrimination result of the first discrimination means being the specific first discrimination result. In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a second privilege game based on the determination result of the second determination means being a specific second determination result, the second discriminating means can be entered into the second ball entry means. A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state that regulates a game based on a ball entry and a second game state in which the restriction is released in the first game state, and the game state acquisition means acquired by the second acquisition means. A certain condition is satisfied as compared with the first gaming state based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied when the second gaming state is set by the storage means capable of storing the second information and the gaming state setting means. The game state setting means has a period setting means for setting a period until the second determination is easily executed, and the game state setting means has the first game after the period set by the period setting means has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that the state can be set.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Was there. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, in a gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming states can be set and the degree of advantage of each special symbol is changed according to the set gaming states. In such a gaming machine, for example, when one of the special symbol lottery is in a disadvantageous gaming state while the lottery right acquired during the gaming state in which one of the special symbol lottery is advantageous is held. However, there is a problem that one of the special symbol lottery is executed based on the lottery right held. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to prevent the special symbol lottery on the disadvantage side from being executed and to provide an appropriate game. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variable machine) that simultaneously (parallel) executes a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. Although it is described, the problems solved by the technical idea of this feature group are not limited to the simultaneous variable machines, and the game machines other than the simultaneous variable machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order). Of course, it may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol).

According to the gaming machine E1, the number of second information stored in the storage means can be reduced during the period set by the period setting means, so that the second determination is executed during the first gaming state. The situation can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine E1 is characterized by having at least a limiting means for limiting the entry of the gaming ball into the second entering means during the period set by the period setting means. Gaming machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, during the period set by the period setting means, the second determination is easy to be executed, and the entry of a new game ball into the second entry means is restricted, so that the second determination is stored in the storage means. The number of second information given can be reliably reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second determination is executed during the first game state, and it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine E2, when the privilege game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the game state setting means executes the privilege game in a state where the first game state is set. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the second gaming state can be set more easily than in the case of the above.

According to the game machine E3, when the privilege game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the second game state is higher than the case where the privilege game is executed in the state where the first game state is set. Is easy to set, so that it is possible to add value to the game during the period set by the period setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, as the constant condition, an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions and an end determination for determining whether the end condition set by the end condition setting means is satisfied. The game state setting means has means, and when it is determined by the end determination means that the end condition is satisfied, the first game state is set, and the end condition setting means sets the means. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that at least a first end condition based on the number of executions of the first determination and a second end condition based on the number of executions of the second determination are set as the end condition. ..

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the condition for ending the specific game state, the first end condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the first determination and the second end condition that is satisfied based on the number of executions of the second determination are set. The timing at which the specific game state ends can be indefinite. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be performed while expecting that the number of stored first information stored in the first storage means becomes 0 at the end of the specific gaming state.

<Characteristic F group> (Compression of lottery data)
A conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range, and the discrimination value converted by the conversion means are specific discrimination values. It has a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the value is, and a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege which is advantageous to the player when the discriminating means determines that the specific discriminant value is the above-mentioned reference. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a special processing executing means that executes a special processing different from the discrimination by the discriminating means based on the specific reference value when the value is determined to be a specific reference value. F1.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being performed. Then, in order to complicate the lottery probability, there is a gaming machine in which a data capacity of 2 bytes (65536 ways) is set as a value used for the winning / failing lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-94331). In such a gaming machine, various games can be executed by complicating the lottery probability of the winning / failing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, in order to set the value used for the lottery. Since the data capacity increases, there is a problem that the data capacity of the gaming machine is squeezed and the data capacity used for other purposes is limited. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to improve the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine by reducing the data capacity of the values used for the lottery while enabling various games to be executed.

According to the gaming machine F1, a reference value preset as a value within a predetermined range is converted into a discriminant value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range by a conversion means, and a privilege is given based on the discriminant value. Is executed. Thereby, it is possible to execute the discrimination for granting the privilege by using the discrimination value set within the specific range larger than the setting range of the preset reference value. Therefore, since the range of the reference value set in advance can be made smaller than the range of the value for which the discrimination is actually performed, there is an effect that the data capacity used for the discrimination can be reduced. Further, in the case of a specific reference value, another process can be executed by using a part of the value used for the determination for granting the privilege, so that the data of the value used for the determination is effectively utilized. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity of the gaming machine can be reduced.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the determination means executes the determination until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special processing execution means is executed. Game machine F2 to play.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the discrimination means executes the discrimination until the special processing execution means is executed. Therefore, the privilege is given according to the execution condition of the special processing execution means. The ease of playing can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, the first state in which the discriminant value is easily discriminated as a specific discriminant value by the discriminating means, and the second state in which the discriminant value is more difficult to discriminate as a specific discriminant value than the first state. The special processing executing means has a state setting means capable of setting a state and the state, and the case where the first state is set by the state setting means is more than the case where the second state is set. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it is difficult to execute the special processing.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the ease of executing the special processing execution means can be changed based on the setting contents of the state setting means, so that the ease of granting benefits can be improved. It has the effect of being easily variable.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the reference value setting means sets a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value, and the conversion means has the predetermined number of bits. Among them, the first conversion process of converting the first information indicated by the specific number of bits into the first conversion information corresponding to the first information, and the number of bits other than the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits. The discriminant value is calculated based on the second conversion process of converting the shown second information into the second conversion information corresponding to the second information, the first conversion information, and the first conversion information. The gaming machine F4, which executes the third conversion process, and is characterized in that the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is represented by a number of bits larger than the predetermined number of bits.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the conversion means executes a conversion process based on each bit information constituting the reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits, and determines. Since it is configured to calculate the value, there is an effect that the reference value and the discriminant value can be related to each other.

In the gaming machine F4, the conversion means can convert different reference values into the same discriminant value, and the reference value discriminating means converts the different reference values into the same discriminant value by the conversion means. The gaming machine F5, characterized in that the value is determined to be the specific reference value.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, different reference values that are converted into the same discrimination value by the conversion means are not used for the discrimination for granting the privilege. There is an effect that the discrimination by the discrimination means can be properly executed.

<Characteristic Fa group> (By compression of lottery data)
The generation means capable of updating and generating the reference value within a predetermined range, the acquisition means for acquiring the reference value generated by the generation means, and the reference value acquired by the acquisition means are described in the predetermined range. A conversion means for converting into a discriminant value within a specific range larger than a range, a discriminant means for discriminating whether the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is a specific discriminant value, and the discriminating means. The discriminant means has a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the determination of the discriminant value, and the discriminating means has a case where the reference value acquired by the acquisition means is a specific reference value. The gaming machine Fa1 is characterized in that the determination is performed using the specific reference value.

In the gaming machine Fa1, the conversion means is capable of converting different reference values into the same discriminant value.

In the gaming machine Fa2, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the discrimination result of the discriminating means is more likely to be discriminated as the specific discriminating result than the first gaming state. Fa3 is characterized in that the number of the specific discriminant values in the first gaming state and the number of the specific discriminant values in the second gaming state are the same.

<Characteristic G group> (Direction during pulling back)
A first discriminating means capable of entering a game ball, a first discriminating means capable of performing a first discrimination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the first discriminating means. The display means capable of displaying the first identification information for showing the discrimination result and the specific first identification information for showing that the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the specific first discrimination result are displayed on the display means. As a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game when stopped and displayed, and a game state set after the privilege game is completed, the first game state and the first game state are more advantageous to the player. A gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state, and a suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting a game state set by the game state setting means. When the game state setting means sets the first game state based on the end of the privilege game executed in the state where the second game state is set, the first game state is set. Before setting, the special gaming state can be set until a predetermined first end condition is satisfied, and the suggestion effect executing means has a predetermined second end condition different from the predetermined first end condition. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a special suggestion effect for suggesting the special gaming state is executed until it is established.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Was there. Furthermore, it is possible to set a first game state that is advantageous to the player and a second game state that is more disadvantageous than the first game state regarding the winning / failing lottery of the game, and the currently set game state can be set to the player. A gaming machine capable of executing a notification effect for notification has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231927). In such a gaming machine, the currently set gaming state can be easily understood by the player by the notification effect to be executed. For example, the first gaming state is set. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when the notification is not performed by the notification effect. It is an object of the above-mentioned gaming machine to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game without reducing the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine G1, the end condition of the period in which the special gaming state is set and the end condition of the period in which the special suggestion effect for suggesting that the special gaming state is set are executed are different. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period in which the special gaming state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game state set, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the state in which the special gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state after the end of the privilege game, as compared with the case where the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being easy to play.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, when the special gaming state is set, the second gaming state is more likely to be set than the normal state, so that the special gaming state is set. That is what the player wants. Therefore, even if the special suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means is completed, there is an effect that the player can play the game with expectation.

In the gaming machines G1 or G2, a plurality of first end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first end conditions for terminating the special gaming state and a plurality of the second end conditions for terminating the special suggestion effect. The second end condition setting means has a second end condition setting means that can be set, and the second end condition setting means has a second end for a specific type in which the first end condition is set by the first end condition setting means. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that conditions are set at least.

According to the gaming machine G3, the first ending condition for ending the special gaming state and the second ending condition for ending the special suggestion effect are set for the same specific type, and therefore any of them. The end condition can also be satisfied when the information of a specific type is updated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player with respect to the end timing of the special suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine G3, the specific type is the number of times the first determination is executed or the number of times the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the termination condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first determination or the second determination. Each time the discrimination or the second discrimination is executed, it is possible to pay attention to which end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G4, the second end condition setting means can set a value different from the value set by the first end condition as a value to be set for the specific type. Gaming machine G5.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G4, different values can be set for the same specific type, so that the first end condition is first satisfied and the second is first. Since it is possible to realize the case where the end condition is satisfied, it is possible to make the currently set gaming state more difficult to understand, and by providing the player with the enjoyment of predicting the gaming state, the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It has the effect of being able to improve.

<Characteristic H group> (Variable launch direction suggestion mode)
The game area has a game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a launching means capable of launching the game ball toward the game area and having a variable firing intensity depending on the amount of power supplied. A game in which a game ball launched by launching with the first firing intensity by the launching means can flow down, and a game launched by the launching means with a second firing intensity different from the first firing intensity. The game ball that can flow down and is launched at the first firing intensity has a second gaming area that is difficult to flow down, and is launched at the second firing intensity of the first gaming area. A first ball-entry means provided in an area where the ball is difficult to flow down and capable of entering a game ball, a second ball-entry means provided in the second game area and capable of entering a game ball, and the above-mentioned When the first determination is executed based on the acquisition of the first acquisition information that can be acquired when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means. The discriminant means for executing the second discriminant based on the acquisition of the second acquired information that can be acquired, the display means for displaying the discriminant information for showing the discriminant result by the discriminant means, and the display means are the first. When the identification information for showing the discrimination result is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player and the discrimination means make the first discrimination more than the second discrimination. The first game state setting means that can set the first game state that is easy to execute and the second game state that the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and the first game state setting means. When it is determined that the game ball is flowing down the second gaming area in the state where the gaming state is set, the notification executing means for executing the firing intensity variable notification for changing the firing intensity, and the notification executing means. The notification executing means includes a notification mode variable means that changes the notification mode of the firing intensity variable notification when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied while the firing intensity variable notification is being executed. A game machine H1 characterized by this.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, a privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Was there. Further, there is a device in which a game aiming at a different game area is performed by changing the direction in which the game ball is launched according to the set game state. Then, when the set gaming state and the launching direction of the gaming ball do not match, the gaming machine that executes the launching direction notification for changing the launching direction of the gaming ball to the player. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-172523). In such a gaming machine, the launch direction notification to be executed allows the player to grasp the launch direction (game method) suitable for the currently set gaming state, but the launch direction is different. Since the same notification mode is set regardless of the magnitude of the demerit that the player suffers when playing the game, there is a problem that the player becomes accustomed to the launch direction notification and suffers a great demerit. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to play a game with peace of mind by solving the above-mentioned problems and suppressing the player from suffering a disadvantage.

According to the gaming machine H1, the notification mode of the variable firing intensity notification for changing the firing intensity can be changed based on whether or not a predetermined notification condition is satisfied, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. It can be suppressed, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the game machine H1, the specific area through which the game ball can pass in the second game area, the passage determination means for executing the determination based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area, and the second ball entry means. A variable means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state is provided, and the determination result of the passage determination means is specified. In the case of the determination result of the above, the variable control means for changing the variable means to the first state is provided, and the game state setting means allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. It is possible to set a specific first gaming state and a predetermined first gaming state in which the gaming ball is more difficult to enter into the second entering means than the specific first gaming state, and the notification mode variable means is The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that, when the predetermined first gaming state is set, the notification mode of the firing intensity variable notification is changed to the emphasized notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the notification mode variable means can be executed according to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, so that information that is easy for the player to understand is provided. be able to.

In the game machine H2, the passage information acquisition means for acquiring the passage information when the game ball passes through the specific area and the passage information acquired by the passage information acquisition means can be stored up to a predetermined number of passages. It has an information storage means, and the passage determination means executes discrimination based on the passage information stored in the passage information storage means when a predetermined passage determination condition is satisfied. The notification mode variable means provides the notification mode of the firing intensity variable notification even when a specific number of passage information is stored by the passage information storage means in a state where the first gaming state is set. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that it is variable to the emphasized notification mode.

According to the gaming machine H3, when a plurality of balls pass through a specific area provided in the second gaming area in a state where the first gaming state is set, the emphasis notification mode can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to call attention to a player who is continuously playing an inappropriate game.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special gaming state occurs. "
<Others>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on the surface of the game board, a lottery is made as to whether or not the game is successful, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Then, in order to complicate the lottery probability, there is a gaming machine in which the capacity of the value used for the winning / failing lottery is increased (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-94331).
In such a gaming machine, various games can be executed by complicating the lottery probability of the winning / failing lottery, and the interest of the game can be improved. However, in order to set the value used for the lottery. Since the data capacity increases, there is a problem that the data capacity of the gaming machine is squeezed and the data capacity used for other purposes is limited. The purpose of the above-mentioned gaming machine is to improve the degree of freedom in the design of the gaming machine by reducing the data capacity of the values used for the lottery while enabling various games to be executed.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discriminant value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range. , It is advantageous to the player when the discriminant means for discriminating whether the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is a specific discriminant value and when the discriminating means determines that the discriminant value is the specific discriminant value. It has a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege, and when it is determined that the reference value is a specific reference value, a special process different from the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed based on the specific reference value. It has a special processing execution means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in which the discriminating means executes the discrimination until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is determined by the special processing executing means. It holds when it is executed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is a first state in which the discrimination value is easily determined to be a specific discrimination value by the discrimination means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and the discrimination is made more than the first state. The special process executing means has a state setting means capable of setting a second state in which it is difficult to determine that the value is a specific discriminant value, and the special process executing means has the first state set by the state setting means. Is more difficult to execute the special process than when the second state is set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the reference value setting means sets a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value. The conversion means has the first conversion process of converting the first information indicated by the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits into the first conversion information corresponding to the first information, and the above-mentioned. The second conversion process for converting the second information indicated by the number of bits other than the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits into the second conversion information corresponding to the second information, and the first conversion information. The third conversion process of calculating the discriminant value based on the first conversion information is executed, and the discriminant value converted by the conversion means has a number of bits larger than the predetermined number of bits. It is indicated by.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a conversion means for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range, and a conversion means thereof. It is possible to grant a discriminant means for discriminating whether or not the discriminant value converted by the above is a specific discriminant value, and a privilege advantageous to the player when the discriminating means determines that the discriminant value is the specific discriminant value. Special processing execution means for executing a special process different from the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the specific reference value when the reference value is determined to be the specific reference value. It has.
Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the determination means executes the determination until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special processing execution means is executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2. That is, a first state in which the discriminant value is easily discriminated as a specific discriminant value by the discriminating means, and a second state in which the discriminant value is more difficult to discriminate as a specific discriminant value than the first state. The special process executing means has the state setting means capable of setting the above, and the special processing executing means is said to be special when the first state is set by the state setting means than when the second state is set. It is difficult to execute the process.
Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the reference value setting means sets a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value, and the conversion means is indicated by a specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits. The first conversion process for converting the first information into the first conversion information corresponding to the first information, and the second information indicated by the number of bits other than the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits are obtained. The second conversion process of converting to the second conversion information corresponding to the second information, and the third conversion process of calculating the discrimination value based on the first conversion information and the first conversion information are executed. The discriminant value converted by the conversion means is represented by a number of bits larger than the predetermined number of bits.
Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
S378 Special processing execution means S379 Conversion means

Claims (4)

A conversion means for converting a predetermined reference value as a value within a predetermined range into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range, and
A discriminant means for discriminating whether the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is a specific discriminant value, and
It has a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when it is determined by the discriminating means to have the specific discriminant value.
When it is determined that the reference value is a specific reference value, it is characterized by having a special processing executing means that executes a special process different from the discrimination by the discrimination means based on the specific reference value. Gaming machine. The discrimination means executes the discrimination until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special processing execution means is executed. A first state in which the discriminant value is easily discriminated as a specific discriminant value by the discriminating means and a second state in which the discriminant value is less likely to be discriminated as a specific discriminant value than the first state are set. Has a possible state setting means,
The special process executing means is characterized in that it is more difficult to execute the special process when the first state is set by the state setting means than when the second state is set. The gaming machine according to claim 2. The reference value setting means sets a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value.
The conversion means
The first conversion process of converting the first information indicated by the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits into the first conversion information corresponding to the first information.
The second conversion process of converting the second information indicated by the number of bits other than the specific number of bits among the predetermined number of bits into the second conversion information corresponding to the second information.
The third conversion process of calculating the discriminant value based on the first conversion information and the first conversion information is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the discriminant value converted by the conversion means is represented by a number of bits larger than the predetermined number of bits.

Images